DODNC0002_20180622_PA-SI Work Plan_FINAL

\ AECOM
3101 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 900
Arlington, VA 22201
www.aecom.com
703 682 4900 tel
703 682 4901 fax
June 25, 2018
Mr. Greg Wills NGB/A7OR
Shepperd Hall 3501 Fetchet Avenue
Joint Base Andrews, MD 20762
Subject: Final Work Plan for the Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
145th Airlift Wing, North Carolina Air National Guard Base
Charlotte Douglas International Airport
Charlotte, North Carolina
Dear Mr. Wills,
AECOM is pleased to submit an electronic copy of the Work Plan for the North Carolina Air National
Guard Base, located at the Charlotte Douglas International Airport. Please contact me at [phone]
or via e-mail ([e-mail]) if you have any questions or comments.
A copy will be sent to Ms. Michele Eberle to be uploaded to the administrative record.
Sincerely,
Megan Donahue Project Manager
Cc:
Mr. Greg Wills Air National Guard
Mr. Aaron Etnyre BB&E Engineer
Mr. Brett Schaefer AECOM Task Manager
Work Plan for the Eastern Region
Installation Restoration Program Preliminary
Assessment and Site Inspection
145th Airlift Wing
North Carolina Air National Guard
Charlotte Douglas International Airport
Charlotte, North Carolina
FINAL
June 2018
Contract No. W9133L-14-D-0001
Task Order No. 0009
AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina i
June 2018
Table of Contents
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................................................ V
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Scope and Objectives ............................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Work Plan Organization ............................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.3 Project Organization and Responsibilities ................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.4 Quality Assurance/Quality Control ............................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.5 Health and Safety Requirements ............................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.6 Public Affairs ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.7 Schedule ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.8 Data Management ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.9 SI Report ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
2 SITE HISTORY ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
3 AOC HISTORY ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-1
4 SITE DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Site Topography and Drainage .................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Site Geology/Hydrogeology ....................................................................................................................................... 4-1
5 PRELIMINARY PATHWAY EVALUATION ...................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Groundwater Pathway ............................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Surface Water Pathway ............................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.3 Soil Exposure and Migration Pathways ..................................................................................................................... 5-1
6 PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT ........................................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1 Regulatory Framework .............................................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 AOC-OW012 ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.1 Previous Investigation ........................................................................................................................................ 6-2 6.2.2 Recommendation ............................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 Summary ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
7 SI FIELD OPERATIONS ................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Site Preparation ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Personnel Qualifications ............................................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.3 Permits and Notifications ........................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.4 Sample Identification ................................................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.5 Analyses .................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.6 Subsurface Soil Sampling- Direct Push ..................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.7 Groundwater Sampling .............................................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.8 IDW Management ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.9 Documentation .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
8 REFERENCES .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-1
AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina ii
June 2018
Appendices
Appendix A Figures 1: Site Location Map 2: Organization Chart
3: Area of Concern & Proposed Sampling Locations Appendix B AOC Historical Information
Appendix C Tier II UFP-QAPP Appendix D Site Specific Health and Safety Plan Appendix E Field Standard Operating Procedures
Appendix F Laboratory Accreditation Certificate Appendix G Email Correspondence with NCDEQ
List of Tables
Table 1-1. Proposed Schedule - 145th ALW NCANGB .....................................................................................................................1-3 Table 6-1. Points of Contact ...............................................................................................................................................................6-1 Table 6-2. Summary of the Preliminary Assessment ........................................................................................................................6-2
Table 7-1: Sampling Program ............................................................................................................................................................7-1

AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina iii
June 2018
List of Acronyms and Abbreviations
145 ALW 145th Air Lift Wing 2L 15A NCAC 02L.0202 Groundwater Standards
AECOM AECOM Corporation ANG Air National Guard ANGB Air National Guard Base
AOC Area of Concern ATG Aeromedical Transport Group
BB&E BB&E Consulting Engineers and Professionals bgs Below Ground Surface
CERCLA Comprehensive Environmental Restoration, Compensation, and Liability Act COD Chemical Oxygen Demand COPC Contaminants of Potential Concern
CPR Cardiopulmonary resuscitation CRP Compliance Restoration Program CSM Conceptual Site Model DoD Department of Defense
DPT Direct Push Technology DQO Data Quality Objective
EB Equipment Blank EPA Environmental Protection Agency ERPIMS Environmental Resources Program Information Management System
FG Fighter Group ft. Feet
GCAL Gulf Coast Analytical Laboratories, LLC GIS Geographical Information Systems
HAZWOPER Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response
IDW Investigation Derived Waste IHSB Inactive Hazardous Sites Branch
MDL Method Detection Limit
mg/kg Milligrams per Kilograms MS/MSD Matrix Spike/Matrix Spike Duplicate MSCC Maximum Soil Contaminant Concentration
NCANGB North Carolina Air National Guard Base NCDEQ North Carolina Department of Environment Quality
NFA No Further Action NGB/A7OR National Guard Bureau, Operations Division, Restoration Branch
O&G Oil and Grease OWS Oil Water Separator
PA Preliminary Assessment PID Photoionization Detector PSRG Preliminary Soil Remediation Goals
PVC Poly-vinyl chloride RDW Remediation Derived Waste
QA Quality Assurance
QAPP Quality Assurance Project Plan
AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina iv
June 2018
QC Quality Control
SI Site Inspection SOP Standard Operating Procedure
SSHSP Site Specific Health and Safety Plan TB Trip Blank
TPH Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons TPH-DRO Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons as Diesel Range Organics TPH-GRO Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons as Gasoline Range Organics
UFP Uniform Federal Policy USCS Unified Soil Classification System USGS United States Geological Survey UST Underground Storage Tank
VOCs Volatile Organic Compounds

AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina v
June 2018
Executive Summary
Under contract to the Air National Guard, AECOM will conduct a Preliminary Assessment (PA) and Site Inspection (SI) at the 145th Airlift Wing (145 ALW) located at the North Carolina Air National Guard Base (NCANGB) which is adjacent to the Charlotte Douglas International Airport in Charlotte, Mecklenburg County, North Carolina (see Figure 1 in Appendix A). AECOM was
contracted by the National Guard Bureau, Operations Division, Restoration Branch (NGB/A7OR) to provide Remediation Services for conducting a Preliminary Assessments and Site Investigations (PA/SIs) at the AOC-OW012 Building 22 Oil Water Separator (OWS) listed in Table ES-1. NGB/A7OR’s ultimate goal for the PA/SI is to obtain either a No Further Action (NFA) decision with
regulatory concurrence, or determine the presence of contamination and identify the Data Quality Objectives (DQOs) required for conducting follow-on Remedial Investigations at the AOC that do not meet the criteria for NFA.
The NCANGB origins date back to March 15, 1948 with the establishment of the 156th Fighter Squadron, the oldest unit of the North Carolina Air National Guard. It was federally recognized and activated at Morris Field, near Charlotte and was equipped with F-47D Thunderbolts. Its mission was the air defense of the state. The NCANGB now flies C-130 H-3 "Hercules" aircraft,
performing federal and state missions to include aerial firefighting, with 145th Airlift Wing's C-130s equipped with the Modular Airborne Firefighting System and the 156th Aeromedical Evacuation Squadron, which responds to natural disasters.
In August 2010, BB&E Consulting Engineers and Professionals (BB&E) conducted site reconnaissance to identify potential sites results from a records review. The records review indicated a number of areas of potential concern. Based on findings from PA/SI Trip Report (One Clean Report) – Charlotte ANG; BB&E Consulting Engineers and Professionals (BB&E) (2 September 2010) recommended further investigation at the AOC-OW012 Building 22 OWS. AOC-OW012 was a 750 gallon OWS that collected waste oil from activities associated with a former hangar building adjacent to the OWS.
According to a 24-Hour Release and UST Leak Reporting Form, submitted by the ANG on February 17, 2012, a release was identified following removal of the oil water separator (See Figure 3 in Appendix A). Analytical results indicated that total petroleum hydrocarbons as diesel and gasoline (TPH-DRO and TPH-GRO) in a soil sample taken below the west end of the
former UST exceeded the NCDEQ action level of 10 mg/kg. The results of this sample indicated concentrations 151 milligrams per kilogram [mg/kg] and 395 mg/kg for TPH-DRO and TPH-GRO, respectively.
A NCDEQ Notice of Regulatory Requirements, dated February 23, 2012, outlined the necessary initial abatement and response
action requirements following identification of the release. The former UST has not been granted closure by NCDEQ and the incident number is still active.
During the PA, AECOM reviewed all the documentation and determined that additional soil and groundwater samples were
required to evaluate if a release requiring a limited site investigation was identified during the completion of OWS closure activities.
As indicated in the email correspondence between AECOM and NCDEQ (Appendix G) the approved scope of work for this investigation will consist of the following: four (4) soil borings will be installed around the perimeter of the former OWS to a depth of approximately 10 (ft) feet below ground surface (bgs). One (1) temporary well will be installed approximately 40 ft bgs at a
presumed downgradient location of the former OWS location. Soil and groundwater samples will be collected and analyzed for volatile organic compounds, semi-volatile organic compounds (SVOC), Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection (MADEP) volatile and extractable petroleum hydrocarbons (MADEP EPH and MADEP VPH). MADEP EPH and VPH analyses
(for soil and groundwater) are required by NCDEQ in order to be considered for NFA.

AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina vi
June 2018

This page intentionally left blank.
AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 1-1
June 2018
1 Introduction
Under contract with the ANG, AECOM Technical Services, Inc. (AECOM) will conduct a PA and a SI at AOC-OW012 Building 22 OWS, identified by the ANG. This work plan addresses the AOC located at the 145 ALW, which is adjacent to Charlotte Douglas International Airport in Charlotte, Mecklenburg County, North Carolina. (See Figure 1 in Appendix A).
The PA is an assessment of the AOC to determine if there is sufficient information that would indicate if a release at the site could impact human health and the environment. The PA, which consisted of a site visit and record research, was conducted in
September 2017 and the results are summarized in Section 5. Based on the results of the PAs, the AOC requires additional information through an SI to determine if it should be recommended for further investigation or NFA.
The SI, which is documented in this work plan will be completed in accordance with the regulations enforced by the North
Carolina Department of Environmental Quality (NCDEQ) Underground Storage Tank (UST) Section, and is not intended as a full-scale study of the nature and extent of contamination. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) identifies the SI as the on-site investigation to determine what hazardous substances are present and if they are being released to the environment. Its
purpose is to augment the data collected in the PA and to generate, if necessary, sampling and other field data to determine if further response action or remedial investigation is appropriate. The objective of performing the SI is to gather data necessary to make this determination.
1.1 Scope and Objectives
This SI Work Plan defines the overall project objectives, presents the results from the PA, outlines the site history and presents the investigation tasks that will be conducted to achieve the project objectives. This Work Plan identifies the equipment, methods, and staffing necessary to perform the following tasks:
• Gather site-specific information to evaluate the fate and transport mechanisms;
• Identify topography, vegetation, soil characteristics, climate, land use at the site and adjacent real estate, potential exposure pathways, and ground scars,
• Install four (4) soil borings around the perimeter of the former OWS,
• Install one (1) temporary monitoring well to 40 ft bgs at a presumed downgradient location of the former OWS and;
• Collect and evaluate soil, and groundwater samples to determine one of the following:
o The AOC exhibits concentrations of contaminants of potential concern (COPCs) at levels that require the ANG to further investigate; or
o The AOC exhibits concentrations of COPCs at levels that do not require further investigation and obtain a NFA
decision
All work under this task order will be completed in accordance with all applicable and appropriate ANG policies, regulations and guidance, and Federal, State and local laws. Key references and policy documents for this investigation include, but are not limited to, the following:
• ANG 2004 Memorandum: CEV 04-01- Policy on Air National Guard Investigation or Remediation Derived Waste (IDW/RDW) Management, July 20.
• Air National Guard Readiness Center. 2009. Air National Guard, Environmental Restoration Program, Investigation Guidance. September.
• National Guard Bureau (NGB). 2010. Memorandum A70 10-01, Environmental Resources Program Information
Management System. September.
• EPA Guidance for Performing SIs under CERCLA; Interim Final, September 1992 (http://www.hanford.gov/ dqo/project/level5/sicercla.pdf).
• NCDEQ’s Division of Water Quality Groundwater Classification and Standards, NC Administrative Code 15A NCAC 02L.0200 (also referred to as the 2L Groundwater Standards).
AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 1-2
June 2018
• Guidelines for Assessment and Corrective Action. North Carolina Department of Environmental Quality (NCDEQ)
Division of Waste Management (DWM). Effective July, 2017.
1.2 Work Plan Organization
This PA/SI Work Plan is organized into the following seven sections:
• Section 1 provides an introduction to the project including the scope and objectives.
• Section 2 provides historical information about the installation.
• Section 3 provides background information on the AOC.
• Section 4 provides site background information including the site location and physical and environmental conditions.
• Section 5 describes the exposure pathways at the installation.
• Section 6 summarizes the results of PA.
• Section 7 details the planned SI field operations that will be conducted to obtain required data including appropriate
measures to ensure data quality and achievement of project objectives.
• Section 8 provides a list of references used in this Work Plan.
The following appendices are included in this Work Plan:
• Appendix A of this Work Plan presents the figures referred to in the Work Plan.
• Appendix B of this Work Plan presents historical information regarding the AOC.
• Appendix C of this Work Plan is the Uniform Federal Policy (UFP) – Tier II Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPP). The Tier II QAPP is a streamlined version of the UFP-QAPP that includes worksheets applicable to an SI. This UFP-QAPP
consists of the procedures/methods for contaminant sampling and analysis, and addresses all quality assurance (QA) and quality control (QC) methods used to control sampling activities on the project.
• Appendix D of this Work Plan is the Site Specific Health and Safety Plan.
• Appendix E of this Work Plan contains all field-related Standard Operating Procedure (SOPs).
• Appendix F of this Work Plan contains the Laboratory Accreditation Certificate.
1.3 Project Organization and Responsibilities
The AECOM project organization is detailed in Figure 1 (Appendix A). This figure also shows the communication pathways and lines of authority for the overall project. Details on personnel and subcontractor roles/responsibilities are presented in the UFP-
QAPP (Appendix B). For this SI, Ms. Megan Donahue is the AECOM Project Manager, Ms. Amanda Taylor, PG is the Regional Project Manager, Mr. Greg Wills is the ANG Installation Program Manager, and Lt. Col. Sam Ingram is the 145 ALW Environmental Manager.
For the SI field operations, Mr. Brett Schaefer is the AECOM Field Operations Leader. He will supervise and coordinate all field activities and will act as the liaison between the installation and AECOM field staff, laboratory personnel, and the Quality Assurance Manager.
The AECOM field team will be supported by office-based personnel including the Project Chemist (Naoum Tavantzis), Health & Safety Manager (Robert Brookshire), and the Quality Assurance Manager (Amanda Taylor, PG).
1.4 Quality Assurance/Quality Control
The UFP-QAPP details the QA/QC procedures for the investigation activities that will be implemented to ensure the data quality
objectives (DQOs) of the SI are achieved. The DQOs are qualitative and quantitative statements developed to clarify the study objectives, define the most appropriate data to collect under what conditions, and specify tolerable limits on decision errors that
AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 1-3
June 2018
are used as the basis for establishing the quantity and quality of data needed to support decision-making. The specific DQOs are presented in the UFP-QAPP (Appendix C).
The quality of analytical data will be assessed through the collection and analysis of field and laboratory QC samples. QC
samples will be used to check the sampling methodology and analytical precision, accuracy and representativeness.
1.5 Health and Safety Requirements
Health and safety requirements for SI field activities are provided in the Site Specific Health and Safety Plan (SSHSP) (Appendix D). Field investigations will be carried out in Level D personal protective equipment. Detailed job hazard analyses identifying the
physical, chemical, and biological hazards that may be encountered at the site and the associated mitigation methods are presented in the SSHSP.
All on-site personnel who may be exposed to hazardous conditions will be required to meet training requirements identified in
Federal Regulation 29 CFR 1910.120 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER). At least one personnel trained in first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) will be onsite during field activities. All training certificates for personnel (HAZWOPER 40-hour training; current HAZWOPER 8-hour refresher training; and first aid/CPR) will be maintained
onsite by the Field Operations Lead.
All personnel and visitors who enter the site will be required to review the SSHSP and sign the acknowledgement form, and site workers will be required to sign the daily tailgate safety meeting form. Safety issues that arise during implementation of site
activities will be addressed during tailgate safety meetings held daily before the workday and will be documented in the daily tailgate safety meeting form.
1.6 Public Affairs
A project-specific community relations plan is not required for this investigation. AECOM will not disclose any data resulting from
the SI to the news media, the public, regulatory agencies, or any other non-project-involved personnel. All press or public contacts will be referred to an ANG Representative.
1.7 Schedule
The proposed schedule for the completion of key SI activities is provided in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1. Proposed Schedule - 145th ALW NCANGB

Activities Scheduled
Field Work Mobilization Within 30 days of Final Work Plan approval
Completion of the Field Work Within 60 days of mobilization
Receipt of the Laboratory Data 30 days after demobilization
Prepare and Submit Draft PA/SI Report 90 days after receipt of the laboratory data
Prepare and Submit Draft Final PA/SI Report 60 days after receipt of review comments
Prepare and Submit Final PA/SI Report 60 days after receipt of Regulatory review comments
1.8 Data Management
Field and analytical data collected during this project are critical to site characterization efforts and the establishment of a
conceptual site model (CSM). Investigation data will be recorded and maintained for future use and reporting. Logbooks and field data sheets will be used to record data collection activities. Project documentation will be collected and managed onsite during the field activities. Field and laboratory data will be recorded and entered into a computerized submission format in accordance
with NGB/A70 Policy Letter A70 10-01 (NGB, 2010) and the Environmental Resources Program Information Management System (ERPIMS) Data Loading Handbook.
AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 1-4
June 2018
The field and analytical laboratory data required to complete Group 1, 2 and 3 data tables and satisfy ERPToolsX field, record and submission data validity requirements will be collected including:
− Sample site information
− Soil boring/sample location coordinates (latitude, longitude, elevation)
− Lithology/stratigraphy/hydrogeology
− Temporary/permanent groundwater monitoring well construction details
− Field tests (e.g., water level, temperature, pH, specific conductivity, turbidity)
− Sample type (e.g., normal, field QC), matrix, sampling method, collection date/time, depth interval
− Sample handling, preparation and analyses
− Sample results (analyte concentrations, dilutions, data qualifiers, method reporting/detection limits)
Samples collected during the SI will be analyzed by Gulf Coast Analytical Laboratories, LLC (GCAL) using methods identified in
the UFP-QAPP (Appendix B). Sample collection, data analysis, and data reporting are addressed in the Tier II UFP QAPP (Appendix B). GIS data will be compliant with the latest ANG spatial data requirements.
1.9 SI Report
AECOM will prepare and submit a Draft, Draft Final, and Final SI Report for 145 ALW NCANGB. The SI Report will be comprehensive describing the site history and source of COPC, site setting, current and future land use, scope of project investigation activities, investigation results and updated CSM, the rationale and data used to arrive at conclusions/recommendations concerning contaminants, and the QA/QC procedures utilized to check assumptions and verify
findings. Detailed maps of the site including the AOC, site boundaries, structures and other site-specific details will be provided. The SI Report will compile and analyze site data in a clear and concise manner as well as provide defensible justifications for recommendations.
The SI Report will contain the following major elements:
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Background 1.2 Purpose 1.3 Scope
1.4 Methodology 2.0 INSTALLATION DESCRIPTION 2.1 Location
2.2 Organization and History 3.0 ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING 3.1 Climate
3.2 Topography 3.3 Geology 3.4 Soils 3.5 Surface Water Hydrology 3.6 Hydrogeology 4.0 FIELD PROGRAM 4.1 General Approach 4.2 Geophysical Surveys
4.3 Temporary Well Installation/Screening Sampling 4.4 Soil Borings 4.5 Groundwater Sampling (low flow discussion)
5.0 INVESTIGATION RESULTS 5.1 OW012 5.1.1 Field activities (specifics on how many samples were collected, map, photoionization detector (PID) and
sample collection processes) 5.1.2 Investigation Results 5.2 Investigation-Derived Waste Management
5.3 Deviations from the Work Plan 6.0 CONCLUSIONS-Summary 7.0 RECOMMENDATIONS-Summary
8.0 REFERENCES
AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 1-5
June 2018
APPENDICES (as warranted) APPENDIX A: BORING/WELL/PIEZOMETER LOGS APPENDIX B: TEMPORARY WELL CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAMS
APPENDIX C: ANALYTICAL REPORTS APPENDIX D: FIELD CHANGE REQUEST FORMS APPENDIX E: DATA PACKAGE FOR HRS
APPENDIX F: INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE MANAGEMENT (Data Tables, Correspondence, etc.) APPENDIX G: EMAIL CORRESPONDENCE WITH NCDEQ

AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 1-6
June 2018

This page intentionally left blank.
AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 2-1
June 2018
2 Site History
The NCANG origins date back to March 15, 1948 with the establishment of the 156th Fighter Squadron, the oldest unit of the North Carolina Air National Guard. The Guard was federally recognized and activated at Morris Field, near Charlotte, and was
equipped with F-47D Thunderbolts. Its mission was the air defense of the state.
In 1950, the 156th was re-equipped with former World War II F-51 Mustangs, now designated RF-51D, which had been used in
the United States in a training role. The squadron became part of Tactical Air Command as a Tactical Reconnaissance Squadron. In 1955, the facilities at Morris Field were expanded. Two years later the 145th Fighter Group (FG) was organized and consisted of the 156th Fighter Squadron and subordinate units. In 1960, the 145th FG group was re-designated the 145th Aeromedical
Transport Group (ATG) flying evacuation missions. In 1964, the 145th ATG was re-designated 145th Air Transport Group (Heavy).
NCANG now flies C-130 H-3 "Hercules" aircraft, performing federal and state missions to include aerial firefighting, with 145th Airlift Wing's C-130s equipped with the Modular Airborne Firefighting System and the 156th Aeromedical Evacuation Squadron, which responds to natural disasters.
AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 2-2
June 2018
This page intentionally left blank.
AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 3-1
June 2018
3 AOC History
In August 2010, BB&E conducted site reconnaissance to identify potential sites results from a records review. The records review indicated a number of areas of potential concern. Based on findings from PA/SI Trip Report (One Clean Report) – Charlotte ANG;
BB&E (2 September 2010) recommended further investigation at the AOC-OW012 Building 22 OWS. AOC-OW012 was a 750 gallon OWS that collected waste oil from disposal activities associated with a former hangar adjacent to the OWS. Additional information could not be found regarding the OWS prior to removal in 2012.
According to a 24-Hour Release and UST Leak Reporting Form, submitted by the ANG on February 17, 2012, a release was identified following removal of the oil water separator (See Appendix B). Analytical results indicated that total petroleum hydrocarbons as diesel and gasoline (TPH-DRO and TPH-GRO) in a sample taken from below the west end of the former UST at
concentrations (151 mg/kg and 395 mg/kg) that exceeded the NCDEQ action level of 10 mg/kg.
A NCDEQ Notice of Regulatory Requirements, dated February 23, 2012, outlined the necessary initial abatement and response action requirements following identification of the release (See Appendix B). The former UST has not been granted closure by
NCDEQ and the incident number is still active.
During the PA, AECOM reviewed all the documentation and determined that additional soil and groundwater samples were required to evaluate if a release requiring a limited site investigation was identified during the completion of OWS closure
activities.
AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 3-2
June 2018

This page intentionally left blank.

AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 4-1
June 2018
4 Site Description
This section describes the topography and site conditions for NCANGB. The NCANGB is located at the Charlotte Douglas International Airport approximately five miles west of downtown Charlotte, North Carolina. The NCANG first occupied the site in
1948 and has maintained a presence at Charlotte Douglas International Airport to present day. The base houses the 145th Airlift Wing which flies the C-130 H-3 "Hercules" aircraft, performing federal and state missions to include aerial firefighting. Activities at the NCANG include aircraft maintenance, aerospace ground equipment maintenance, ground vehicle maintenance, and fuel
management and facilities maintenance. The surrounding area is occupied by transportation, light industrial and residential properties.
4.1 Site Topography and Drainage
A review of the United States Geological Survey (USGS) 7.5-minute topographic quadrangle map for Charlotte West, North Carolina, 1993 shows that the NCANGB lies at an elevation of approximately 736 feet above mean sea level (msl) at its western
side and 688 feet msl along its the eastern side. The majority of the ANGB is paved. Storm water is conveyed by a system of storm water structures and pipes that generally follow the local topography. The storm water system discharges into a storm water retention basin located on the southwest corner of Morris Field Drive and Airport Drive. The closest surface water body to the site is Taggart Creek, which is approximately
2,000 feet to the east of the NCANGB (see Figure 1 in Appendix A).
4.2 Site Geology/Hydrogeology
The NCANGB is located within the Charlotte geologic belt of the Piedmont physiographic province of North Carolina. The Piedmont province is bordered to the east by the Coastal Plain physiographic province and to the west by the Blue Ridge physiographic province. The Charlotte geologic belt dominantly consists of intrusive igneous rocks of gabbro to granitic
composition with smaller localities of metamorphosed volcanic sequences. The Charlotte geologic belt is bounded to the east by the Gold Hill Shear zone and to the west by the Eufola/Boogertown Shear zone, which separate the Charlotte geologic belt from the Carolina Slate belt and the Kings Mountain/Inner Piedmont belt respectively.
Unconsolidated materials above the Charlotte belt bedrock consist of a saprolitic regolith. Saprolite thickness generally does not exceed 60 feet although it can be much greater. In profile, the saprolite normally grades from clayey soils near the land surface to highly weathered rock above the competent bedrock. The appearance of the saprolitic soils in the Charlotte belt is typical of the Piedmont region, with grain size increasing and degree of weathering decreasing with depth (The North Carolina Geological
Survey, 1985). The occurrence and movement of groundwater within the Piedmont province is within two separate but interconnected water-
bearing zones. Precipitation enters the shallow aquifer system by percolating downward to the water table within the regolith, and then moves laterally toward discharge zones. A shallow water-bearing zone occurs within the saprolite and a deeper zone within the underlying bedrock. Groundwater in the shallow saprolite zone is typically under water table conditions with generalized
groundwater flow being from topographic highs (recharge areas) to topographic lows (discharge areas). The occurrence and movement of groundwater in the underlying bedrock is controlled by joints, fractures and faults. Groundwater within the bedrock may occur under unconfined or confined conditions (LeGrand, 1989). Groundwater flow is generally expected to flow to the
southeast based on site topography.

AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 4-2
June 2018

This page intentionally left blank.

AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 5-1
June 2018
5 Preliminary Pathway Evaluation
The purpose of the preliminary pathway evaluation is to identify the migration pathways and evaluate available data, including potential contamination sources, contamination concentrations, and potential targets.
5.1 Groundwater Pathway
There are no drinking water wells on the site. Drinking water is supplied to the site by the City of Charlotte, which uses surface
water sources at Mountain Island Lake for water supply. Mountain Island Lake is located about nine miles north of the base. The water is piped to a municipal treatment facility before distribution to the city and the Base.
According to the Regional Compliance Restoration Program PA/SI NCANGB Charlotte Douglas International Airport, Charlotte,
North Carolina by URS, dated May 2016, shallow groundwater is encountered within approximately 10-30 ft. bgs. As documented in Mecklenburg County’s Groundwater regulations, a water supply well will not be permitted by the county if the property does not meet specified setbacks from known groundwater contamination. Due to the documented groundwater
contamination at the site, it is unlikely that the NCANB will be able to install a water supply well at the base; however, this pathway is still considered a pathway for future receptors of drinking water since the groundwater contamination is currently being remediated.
5.2 Surface Water Pathway
The primary contaminant pathway for surface water consists of overland flow and the groundwater surface water interface. Topography at the site is generally described in Section 4.1 and shown on Figure 1. Based upon topography and general site conditions, groundwater beneath the NCANGB would be expected to flow to the southeast. The closest surface water body to the
site is Taggart Creek, which is approximately 2,000 feet to the east of the NCANGB. Based on general geology of the area, this drainage is believed to receive groundwater discharge and surface water runoff from the surrounding area. According to NCDENR’s Division of Water Quality Surface Water Classifications, Taggart Creek is a Class C surface water body. Class C
water bodies are waters protected for uses such as secondary recreation, fishing, wildlife, fish consumption, aquatic life, survival and maintenance of biological integrity, and agriculture. It is not considered a water supply surface water body; therefore this exposure pathway isn’t complete (N.C. Department of Environment and Natural Resources Division of Water Quality, n.d.).
5.3 Soil Exposure and Migration Pathways
The site has paved and landscaped areas, so there are no known current pathways to soil and air migration from disturbed soils and the site under normal operating conditions. However, during excavation, a worker could be exposed to soil and dust from soil. The soil to groundwater pathway is another potential exposure route, so the soil screening levels for groundwater protection
are utilized.
AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 5-2
June 2018

This page intentionally left blank.

AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 6-1
June 2018
6 Preliminary Assessment
AECOM conducted the PA at 145th ALW NCANGB on September 12, 2017 to evaluate whether the AOC proposed for investigation should be investigated or should be recommended for NFA. The location of the AOC is shown on Figure 3
(Appendix A) and it is discussed below with the recommendations. The Site identification are summarized on Table 5-5. This effort was based on findings from the 2010 One Clean Trip Report (BB&E, 2010).
For soil sample evaluations, NCDEQ Division of Waste Management’s UST regulations were used to assess exceedances of
measured concentrations above Maximum Soil Concentration Cleanup (MSCC) goals for AOCs pertaining to the OWS. Groundwater samples will be evaluated and compared against North Carolina 2L Groundwater Quality Standards (2L).
Note that this preliminary screening represents only one of the factors for evaluation of constituents at the AOC. Maximum concentrations above the screening criteria are not necessarily justification for further investigation/action. The results of the screening are intended to be used in conjunction with the historical and current AOC use and nature and extent of a constituent to
indicate if the AOC is recommended for further investigation as part of the SI or NFA.
Table 5-1 below is a list of the key persons involved in this PA/SI with 145th ALW NCANG.
Table 6-1. Points of Contact
Name Position Phone E-mail Address Mailing Address
Greg Wills NGB/A4OR
Program Manager 240-612-8366 [e-mail]
NGB/A4OR Shepperd Hall
3501 Fetchet Avenue Joint Base Andrews, MD 20762-5157
Lt. Col. Sam Ingram
145 ALW Base
Environmental Manager 704-391-4327 [e-mail]
North Carolina ANGB 145 AW/EM
4930 Minuteman Way Charlotte, NC 28208-5797
Aaron Etnyre Principal, BB&E, Inc. 248-489-9636 ext. 303 (o)
248-797-1092(c )
[e-mail] 235 East Main Street Suite 107
Northville, MI 48167
Megan Donahue AECOM Project Manager 703-682-9142 (o) 808-375-0410 (c ) [e-mail]
3101 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 900
Arlington, VA 22201
Amanda Taylor AECOM Regional
Project Manager
704-716-0755 (o)
704-615-1732 (c ) [e-mail]
5925 Carnegie Blvd
Suite 370
Charlotte, NC 28209
6.1 Regulatory Framework
For the purposes of the SI Report, soil and groundwater analytical testing results will be screened against Applicable or Relevant
and Appropriate Requirements and other regulatory criteria including:
• Guidelines for Assessment and Corrective Action. North Carolina Department of Environmental Quality (NCDEQ) Division of Waste Management (DWM). Effective July, 2017.
• NCDEQ’ Division of Water Quality Groundwater Classification and Standards, NC Administrative Code 15A NCAC 02L.0200 (also referred to as the 2L Groundwater Standards).
Where multiple criteria exist, the more conservative screening value will be used. The selected criteria for each COPC and analytical method are presented on Worksheet #15 in the UFP-QAPP (Appendix C). Soil and groundwater results must meet the lowest applicable standard to receive “No Further Action” status for the AOC.

AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 6-2
June 2018
6.2 AOC-OW012
According to a 24-Hour Release and UST Leak Reporting Form, submitted by the ANG on February 17, 2012, a release was identified following removal of the oil water separator. Analytical results indicated exceedances of the previous action levels of 10 mg/kg for TPH-DRO and TPH-GRO. A NCDEQ Notice of Regulatory Requirements, dated February 23, 2012, outlined the
necessary initial abatement and response action requirements following identification of the release. The former UST has not been granted closure by NCDEQ and the incident number is still active.
6.2.1 Previous Investigation
During the PA AECOM located a 24-Hour Release and UST Leak Reporting Form submitted by the ANG on February 17, 2012, which includes limited details on the OWS removal and soil sampling activities. No other details and/or records pertaining to UST
removal and/or sampling activities were located.
6.2.2 Recommendation
Based on email correspondence with NCDEQ and a letter dated May 17, 2018 from NCDEQ (Appendix G), AECOM proposes to
install two borings to collect soil samples and install one temporary monitoring well to collect a groundwater sample in order to complete the NCDEQ UST closure process for OW012. In accordance with the NCDEQ Guidelines for Site Checks for UST Closure Requirements, soil samples shall be collected 10 feet below ground surface in the former OWS Pit. The borings will be
advanced to depths up to 10 feet bgs unless groundwater is encountered first. If groundwater is encountered before the target soil sample depth, a sample will be collected above the water table in the unsaturated zone. If soil exhibits evidence of contamination based on field observations during borehole logging, including PID readings, odor or evidence of staining, an additional soil sample will be collected from the most impacted interval for laboratory analysis. Because the former UST location was over-excavated and clean fill emplaced in the excavation, it is anticipated that some borings may not be sampled for soil from two
depth intervals. Based on the correspondence letter from NCDEQ dated May 17, 2018, a groundwater sample is not required, but AECOM
proposes to install a temporary monitoring well within the former OWS pit and collect a sample. AECOM shall request that this groundwater sample be placed on hold at the lab prior to analysis and will be analyzed only if the soil sample results indicate levels of COCs greater than the NCDEQ protection of groundwater MSCCs. If the soil samples results indicate COCs below the
protection of groundwater MSCCs, the groundwater sample shall not be analyzed, but will be disposed of accordingly at the laboratory.
The samples will be analyzed for the NCDEQ Approved Methods for Soil Analyses at Petroleum UST Site Checks for diesel fuel compounds (See QAPP Worksheet #15-Appendix C for specific analytes and methodology). The proposed sampling locations
are shown on Figure 3 (Appendix A).
6.3 Summary
Table 5-5 outlines the recommendation for additional investigation for AOC-OW012. The field sampling approach for this AOC is summarized in Section 6.
Table 6-2. Summary of the Preliminary Assessment
AOC
Code
AOC
Description Recommendation Rationale
AOC-
OW012
Building 22
OWS
Collect soil and
groundwater samples
A release requiring additional site investigation activities was identified during the completion of OWS closure activities. AECOM proposes installing two (2) borings and one (1) temporary monitoring well to collect
soil and groundwater samples for analysis of VOCs, SVOCs, MADEP VPH, and MADEP EPH.

AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 7-1
June 2018
7 SI Field Operations
This section summarizes the SI field activities proposed at the OWS. The field investigation operations consist of site preparation activities including the mobilization/demobilization of field team personnel and equipment, utility clearance, direct push and
subsurface and groundwater sampling for contaminants including the NCDEQ UST Section’s Required Target Analytes for Petroleum. Specific details concerning sampling activities and analytical methodology (including NCDEQ UST Section’s Required Target Analyte list) are presented in the UFP QAPP (Appendix C). Health and safety requirements for SI field activities are
provided in the APP (Appendix D).
Table 7-1: Sampling Program
AOC ID
Code
AOC
Description
Estimated
Number
of Borings
Depth of
Borings
(ft. bgs) Analysis Required1
Figure Showing
Sampling
Locations
AOC-
OW012
Building 22
OWS
3
(2 soil, 1
Temp.
Monitoring
well)
10 (soil)
40 (temp
well)
Soil (4): The NCDEQ UST Section’s Required Target Analytes for Petroleum Contaminated Soil
Groundwater (1): The NCDEQ UST Section’s Required Target Analytes for Petroleum Contaminated Water
Figure 3
Note: Due to clean fill in placement at the former OWS location, soil will not be collected from two depth intervals if backfill material is
observed.
7.1 Site Preparation
The site preparation activities for the SI operations include mobilization/demobilization of field team personnel and equipment.
Vegetation clearance will not occur during field investigation activities; rather the field team will work around existing site conditions.
7.2 Personnel Qualifications
All personnel mobilized to the site will meet applicable Occupational Safety and Health Administration training including HAZWOPER and medical surveillance requirements as specified in the SSHSP (Appendix D).
7.3 Permits and Notifications
During the September 12, 2017 Site Kick-Off Meeting, The ANGB Environmental Manager, Lt. Col Ingram, noted that coordination with him will be required prior to starting work on-site. In addition, site worker background checks to enter the ANGB for SI field work must be completed in advance of mobilization.
7.4 Sample Identification
The sample identification number will consist of an alphanumeric designation related to the installation, site, event, media type,
and consecutive number, according to the following conventions:
Installation: Charlotte
Site: CLT-xxx = Charlotte
Media Type: SB = Subsurface Soil, GW = Groundwater
Consecutive Number: 01, 02, 03, etc.
Depth: Depth below ground surface (feet)
Sample Type: D for duplicate
AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 7-2
June 2018
For example, the sample identification number for the first subsurface soil sample at the AOC-OW012 will be CLT-012-SB01-15. Duplicate sample identification numbers will be followed with a “D”.
Trip blank (TB) and equipment blank (EB) QC samples will be identified as follows:
Trip Blanks = CLT -TB-date (mmddyr)
Equipment Blanks = CLT-EB-date (mmddyr)
7.5 Analyses
The analytical and preparation methods can be referenced on QAPP Worksheet # 19 in Appendix C. Samples will be shipped to
GCAL Laboratories, a Department of Defense (DoD) approved laboratory that is experienced in handling military munitions samples, holds applicable state certifications to perform the analytical methods required, and meets DoD Installation Restoration QA Program requirements. The laboratory will provide analytical results within 30 days of sample receipt. Data validation/review
will be conducted on all laboratory results in accordance with procedures specified in the QAPP.
Each sample will be collected into laboratory-supplied glassware and submitted to the laboratory for analysis of selected parameters. The laboratory MDLs for these analytes are presented in the UFP-QAPP (Attachment B). Samples will be packaged
on ice and transported daily via overnight commercial carrier under standard chain-of-custody procedures to the laboratory.
Field duplicate samples will be collected at a rate of 10% and analyzed for the same parameters as the accompanying samples. Matrix spike and matrix spike duplicate (MS/MSD) samples will be collected at the rate of 5% and analyzed for the same
parameters as the accompanying samples. Trip blanks will accompany each cooler containing samples for VOC analysis and will be analyzed for select VOCs. EBs will not be prepared or analyzed unless a deviation from this plan requires sample handling using non-dedicated equipment. If non-dedicated sampling equipment is used, an equipment blank will be collected and
analyzed for the same analytes as the soil samples. A temperature blank will be placed in each cooler to ensure that samples are preserved at or below four degrees Celsius during shipment.
7.6 Subsurface Soil Sampling- Direct Push
Soil samples will be collected in accordance with the Air National Guard Investigation Guidance via direct-push technology (DPT) at the locations illustrated in Figure 3. A GeoProbe® 7822DT (or equivalent) will be used to collect continuous soil cores to the
target depth. Borings will be advanced to depths of approximately 10 ft., or to probe refusal, whichever occurs first. If refusal is encountered before the desired depth of sample location, one attempt will be made adjacent to the original location to collect a
soil sample below the depth of refusal. In the event that a soil sample cannot be collected at desired depth via the DPT approach, alternate drilling methods may be considered if deemed feasible.
Continuous soil sampling will be accomplished by advancing a 4- or 5-foot coring barrel fitted with dedicated, disposable PVC
liners. The soil core will be screened for VOC immediately upon opening the sleeve with a PID utilizing a 10.6 electron-Volt bulb. Details regarding the air monitoring procedures and specific action levels are provided in the SSHSP. The soil core will be logged for lithologic descriptions by a field geologist. Observations and measurements will be recorded on a soil boring log. Photographs
will also be taken of the boring cores. At a minimum, depth interval, recovery thickness, PID concentrations, moisture, relative density, color (using a Munsell soil color chart), and texture (using the Unified Soil Classification System [USCS]) will be recorded. Additional observations to be recorded may include detectable odors, groundwater or perched water depth, organic material,
cultural debris, or color changes indicating staining.
Two subsurface soil samples will generally be collected from each direct push location except as indicated in Section 5. The first sample is intended to be collected from within 2 feet below the assumed depth of the former USTs. The second sample will be
collected if field observations in the borehole indicate higher organic vapor analyzer OVA readings or visual staining indicate a potential release is present in the native material. If groundwater is encountered prior to reaching the indicated depth for the first soil sample, the sample will be collected immediately above the water table in the unsaturated zone. The second sample will be collected from the interval observed with the highest VOC concentration measured with the PID or visual staining is observed. VOC samples will be collected using a sampling corer (Terra Core or equivalent) and in accordance with SOP No. 6, see Appendix E).
DPT borings created will be abandoned at completion of sampling activities. Borings in grass will be abandoned by backfilling with bentonite chips. Borings in asphalt shall be abandoned by backfilling with bentonite chips to approximately 1 ft. bgs, and the
remainder of the borehole will be restored at each location to match the surrounding area.
AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 7-3
June 2018
7.7 Groundwater Sampling
Groundwater samples will be collected in accordance to the Air National Guard Investigation Guidance from temporary wells
installed using DPT methodology at the location listed in Table 6-1. The borehole for the temporary well will be created using a GeoProbe® 7782DT (or equivalent). Once the hole has been advanced to depth that intersects the water table, a 5-10 foot section of 1 inch Schedule 40 PVC screen will be installed in the borehole with sufficient casing to reach ground surface. A temporary well
will be installed at the specified boring location to a depth of approximately 40 ft bgs or until the water table or refusal is encountered. If refusal is encountered before the desired depth of sample location, one attempt will be made adjacent to the original location to collect a groundwater sample below the depth of refusal. Filter sand will be placed in the annulus surrounding the well screen to a depth of 1 foot above the top of screen. A 2-foot thick bentonite seal will be placed above the filter sand and hydrated with water. Following installation, the temporary wells will be allowed to equilibrate with the surrounding formation until
they contain a sufficient amount of water to fill the required sample containers. Samples will be collected via low-flow sampling methods using a peristaltic or bladder pump. Non-dedicated groundwater samplers will be decontaminated between boring locations (See AECOM SOP No. 11 in Appendix E).
7.8 IDW Management
IDW generated during SI activities (e.g., decontamination water, excess soil) will be containerized in 55-gallon drums. IDW will be
labeled and stored at the installation Central Accumulation Point. The IDW parameter requirements for waste profiling will be determined with the permitted landfill or recycling facility prior to field work and coordinated with the Base Environmental Manager. IDW will be sampled and characterized for waste profiling in a timely manner. Copies of waste profile results will be
provided to the Base Environmental Manager. Disposal of the IDW will be coordinated with Base Environmental Manager. The IDW will be disposed of by a licensed disposal subcontractor in a timely manner. IDW will be managed in accordance with ANG Policy 05-1 for IDW (ANG, 2009). AECOM will be responsible for arranging transportation and disposal of the IDW.
7.9 Documentation
The field logbook will serve as the primary record of field sampling activities. Entries will be made chronologically and in sufficient detail to allow the writer or a knowledgeable reviewer to reconstruct each day's events (See SOP No.8 for additional information).

AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 7-4
June 2018

This page intentionally left blank.

AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 8-1
June 2018
8 References
Air National Guard Environmental Restoration Program. 2009. Air National Guard Environmental Restoration Program Investigation Guidance. Andrews Air Force Base, MD: Air National Guard.
BB&E Consulting Professionals and Engineers. 2010. One Clean Report 145th Airlift Wing, Charlotte, North Carolina.
LeGrand, Harry E. 1989. A Conceptual Model of Ground Water Settings in the Piedmont Region, in Groundwater in the Piedmont, Charles C. Daniel III et al. eds., Clemson University, Clemson, SC, 317-327
UST-61- 24-Hour Release and UST Leak Reporting Form. North Carolina Department of Environmental and Natural Resources Division of Waste Management.

AECOM Work Plan for the Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program, North Carolina National Guard, Charlotte, North Carolina 8-2
June 2018

This page intentionally left blank.

June 2018
Appendix A
Figures
Figure 1: Site Location Map
Figure 2: Organization Chart Figure 3: AOC and Proposed Sampling Locations
June 2018
This page intentionally left blank.
APPROX. SCALE, ft.
0
SHEET
AECOM TECHNICAL SERVICESOF NORTH CAROLINA5925 CARNEGIE BLVD, SUITE 370
TEL: [phone]
FAX: [phone]
CHARLOTTE, NC 28209
FIG.
2,000
North Carolina Air National Guard Base
1
SITE VICINITY MAP145thAIRLIFT WINGNORTH CAROLINA AIR NATIONAL GUARDCHARLOTTE DOUGLAS INTERNATIONAL AIRPORTCHARLOTTE, NORTH CAROLINA
Reference: 7.5 USGS Topographic Maps: Charlotte West, N.C. (1993)
DRAWNBY:CHECKEDBY:PROJECTNO.:BGS-01/30/18MD-01/30/1860553852AECOMTECHNICALSERVICESOFNORTHCAROLINA5925CARNEGIEBLVD,SUITE370TEL:[phone]FAX:[phone]CHARLOTTE,NC28209ORGANIZATIONALCHART145thAIRLIFTWINGNORTHCAROLINAAIRNATIONALGUARDCHARLOTTEDOUGLASINTERNATIONALAIRPORTCHARLOTTE,NORTHCAROLINA
``@A
Source: Esri, DigitalGlobe, GeoEye, Earthstar Geographics, CNES/Airbus
DS, USDA, USGS, AeroGRID, IGN, and the GIS User Community
SURVEY BY DATE
³
DRAWN BY
CHECKED BY
APPROVED BY
DATE
DATE
DATE
0 40
SCALE (FEET)
PROJECT NO.FIGURE NO.REV.
NA
AJW
BGS
N/A
1/18/2018
60553852 3
AOC & ProposedField Sampling Locations
NORTH CAROLINA AIR NATIONAL GUARD BASECHARLOTTE DOUGLAS INTERNATIONAL AIRPORTCHARLOTTE, NORTH CAROLINA
CONFIDENTIAL - ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - PROPERTY OF
AECOM TECHNICAL SERVICES OF NORTH CAROLINA, INC.
1/30/18
NA
Legend`Proposed Soil Boring Location@AProposed Temporary Monitoring Well Location
Approximate Location of the former oil water separator
June 2018
This page intentionally left blank.

June 2018
Appendix B
Historical AOC Documentation

June 2018
This page intentionally left blank.
FIGURES

Scale: AS SHOWN
Checked by:
Drawn by: RAS
Date: 02/01/12
USGS Topographic Map
NC Air National Guard
4930 Minuteman Way, Building 22
Charlotte, North Carolina

Figure

1 S&ME Project No.: 1354-12-026
Site Area
Based Map taken from: Charlotte West, NC USGS Quadrangle dated 1993.

Scale: AS SHOWN
Checked by:
Drawn by: RAS
Date: 02/01/12
2009 Site & Surrounding Area Map
NC Air Nation Guard
4930 Minuteman Way, Building 22
Charlotte, North Carolina

Figure

2 S&ME Project No.: 1354-11-026
Map obtained from Mecklenburg County POLARIS Website
Approximate
Scale: 1” = ~ 180’
Location of
Former
Oil/Water
Separator
Approximate
location of
background
samples SB-1’
& SB-2’
!´Ð !´ÐSand Fill
FormerOil / Water Separator||8'||15'||3'Clean-outManhole||14'
OW-West OW-East
!´Ð!´Ð
Former Oil / Water Separator
Extent of Excavation||11'
||15'||8'||4'
ASPHALT ASPHALT
Extent of Concrete Pad Removal
SewerManholeOW-West OW-East
SAMPLE LOCATIONS
NC AIR NATIONAL GUARD
4930 MINUTEMAN WAY, BUILDING 22CHARLOTTE, NORTH CAROLINA
3
1354-12-026
DDH WWW.SMEINC.COM
SCALE:
PROJECT NO:
DATE:
DRAWN BY:
FIGURE NO.
02-08-12
1 " = 4 'Q:\1354\2012\026 NC Air National Guard\figure3_samplelocation.mxdENGINEERING LICENSE NO: F-0176
±
!´Ð Soil Sample Location048
Feet
CROSS-SECTION VIEW
PLAN VIEW
TABLE
Summary of Closure Soil Sampling ResultsOil/Water Separator ClosureNorth Carolina Air National GuardFacility ID No. 0-0318284930 Minuteman Way, Building 22Charlotte, Mecklenburg County, North Carolina S&ME Project 1354-12-026Sample ID Date Location Depth (ft) PID (ppm)TPH-GRO (mg/kg)TPH-DRO (mg/kg)Total Lead (mg/kg)Total Chromium (mg/kg)OW-West 2/2/2012 Below West End of Former UST 8 322.5151 39510.331.7OW-East 2/2/2012 Below East End of Former UST 8 4.1 8.0 <6.5 7.626.0BKG-1 2/2/2012 Background Sample 1 0.0 NA NA 9.539.7BKG-2 2/2/2012 Background Sample 2 0.0 NA NA 9.342.610 10 NL NLNL NL 270 5.4NL NL 400 47NL NL 400 1,226NotesPID Photoionization DetectorGRO Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons, Gasoline Range OrganicsDRO Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons, Diesel Range Organicsppm parts per millionmg/kg milligrams per kilogramft feet below land surfaceBKG Background SampleNL No Current LevelMSCC Maximum Soil Contamination LevelValueExceeds NCDENR Action Level of 10 mg/kg for USTs.ValueExceeds NCDENR Soil to Groundwater MSCC (but below Residential MSCC, Industrial/Commercial MSCC)North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources - Action Level North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources - Soil to Groundwater MSCCNorth Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources - Industrial/Commercial MSCCNorth Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources - Residential MSCC
LABORATORY REPORT
AND
CHAIN OF CUSTODY RECORD
February 10, 2012
LIMS USE: FR - ROGER SMITH
LIMS OBJECT ID: 92111492
92111492
Project:
Pace Project No.:
RE:
Mr. Roger Smith
S&ME, Inc.
9751 Southern Pine Blvd.
Charlotte, NC 28273
NC ANG
Dear Mr. Smith:
Enclosed are the analytical results for sample(s) received by the laboratory on February 03, 2012.
The results relate only to the samples included in this report. Results reported herein conform to the
most current TNI standards and the laboratory's Quality Assurance Manual, where applicable, unless
otherwise noted in the body of the report.
Analyses were performed at the Pace Analytical Services location indicated on the sample analyte
page for analysis unless otherwise footnoted.
If you have any questions concerning this report, please feel free to contact me.
Sincerely,
Kevin Herring
[e-mail]
Project Manager
Enclosures
REPORT OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS
This report shall not be reproduced, except in full,
without the written consent of Pace Analytical Services, Inc..
Page 1 of 15
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
9800 Kincey Ave. Suite 100
Huntersville, NC 28078
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
2225 Riverside Dr.
Asheville, NC 28804
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
205 East Meadow Road - Suite A
Eden, NC 27288
[phone]
CERTIFICATIONS
Pace Project No.:
Project:
92111492
NC ANG
Charlotte Certification IDs
9800 Kincey Ave. Ste 100, Huntersville, NC 28078North Carolina Drinking Water Certification #: 37706
North Carolina Field Services Certification #: 5342North Carolina Wastewater Certification #: 12South Carolina Certification #: 99006001
South Carolina Drinking Water Cert. #: 99006003Virginia Drinking Water Certification #: 00213
Connecticut Certification #: PH-0104Florida/NELAP Certification #: E87627
Kentucky UST Certification #: 84Louisiana DHH Drinking Water # LA 100031West Virginia Certification #: 357
Virginia/VELAP Certification #: 460144
Asheville Certification IDs
2225 Riverside Dr., Asheville, NC 28804
Florida/NELAP Certification #: E87648Massachusetts Certification #: M-NC030North Carolina Drinking Water Certification #: 37712
North Carolina Wastewater Certification #: 40
South Carolina Certification #: 99030001
Virginia Certification #: 00072West Virginia Certification #: 356Virgina/VELAP Certification #: 460147
REPORT OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS
This report shall not be reproduced, except in full,
without the written consent of Pace Analytical Services, Inc..
Page 2 of 15
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
9800 Kincey Ave. Suite 100
Huntersville, NC 28078
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
2225 Riverside Dr.
Asheville, NC 28804
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
205 East Meadow Road - Suite A
Eden, NC 27288
[phone]
SAMPLE SUMMARY
Pace Project No.:
Project:
92111492
NC ANG
Lab ID Sample ID Matrix Date Collected Date Received
92111492001 OW-WEST Solid 02/02/12 13:50 02/03/12 15:00
92111492002 OW-EAST Solid 02/02/12 13:55 02/03/12 15:00
92111492003 BKG-1 Solid 02/02/12 15:00 02/03/12 15:00
92111492004 BKG-2 Solid 02/02/12 15:10 02/03/12 15:00
REPORT OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS
This report shall not be reproduced, except in full,
without the written consent of Pace Analytical Services, Inc..
Page 3 of 15
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
9800 Kincey Ave. Suite 100
Huntersville, NC 28078
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
2225 Riverside Dr.
Asheville, NC 28804
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
205 East Meadow Road - Suite A
Eden, NC 27288
[phone]
SAMPLE ANALYTE COUNT
Pace Project No.:
Project:
92111492
NC ANG
Lab ID Sample ID Method
Analytes
Reported LaboratoryAnalysts
92111492001 OW-WEST EPA 8015 Modified 2 PASI-CMEJ
EPA 8015 Modified 2 PASI-CAW
EPA 6010 2 PASI-AJMW
ASTM D2974-87 1 PASI-CKDF
92111492002 OW-EAST EPA 8015 Modified 2 PASI-CMEJ
EPA 8015 Modified 2 PASI-CAW
EPA 6010 2 PASI-AJMW
ASTM D2974-87 1 PASI-CKDF
92111492003 BKG-1 EPA 6010 2 PASI-AJMW
ASTM D2974-87 1 PASI-CKDF
92111492004 BKG-2 EPA 6010 2 PASI-AJMW
ASTM D2974-87 1 PASI-CKDF
REPORT OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS
This report shall not be reproduced, except in full,
without the written consent of Pace Analytical Services, Inc..
Page 4 of 15
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
9800 Kincey Ave. Suite 100
Huntersville, NC 28078
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
2225 Riverside Dr.
Asheville, NC 28804
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
205 East Meadow Road - Suite A
Eden, NC 27288
[phone]
HITS ONLY
Pace Project No.:
Project:
92111492
NC ANG
Parameters AnalyzedResult
Lab Sample ID
Report Limit QualifiersUnitsMethod
Client Sample ID
92111492001 OW-WEST
Diesel Components 395 mg/kg 02/07/12 23:596.8EPA 8015 Modified
Gasoline Range Organics 151 mg/kg 02/09/12 11:326.3EPA 8015 Modified
Chromium 31.7 mg/kg 02/09/12 12:310.61EPA 6010
Lead 10.3 mg/kg 02/09/12 12:310.61EPA 6010
Percent Moisture 26.5 %02/06/12 14:410.10ASTM D2974-87
92111492002 OW-EAST
Gasoline Range Organics 8.0 mg/kg 02/09/12 12:216.4EPA 8015 Modified
Chromium 26.0 mg/kg 02/09/12 12:350.40EPA 6010
Lead 7.6 mg/kg 02/09/12 12:350.40EPA 6010
Percent Moisture 23.9 %02/06/12 14:410.10ASTM D2974-87
92111492003 BKG-1
Chromium 39.7 mg/kg 02/09/12 12:390.58EPA 6010
Lead 9.5 mg/kg 02/09/12 12:390.58EPA 6010
Percent Moisture 27.2 %02/06/12 14:420.10ASTM D2974-87
92111492004 BKG-2
Chromium 42.6 mg/kg 02/09/12 12:430.50EPA 6010
Lead 9.3 mg/kg 02/09/12 12:430.50EPA 6010
Percent Moisture 30.9 %02/06/12 14:420.10ASTM D2974-87
REPORT OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS
This report shall not be reproduced, except in full,
without the written consent of Pace Analytical Services, Inc..
Page 5 of 15
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
9800 Kincey Ave. Suite 100
Huntersville, NC 28078
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
2225 Riverside Dr.
Asheville, NC 28804
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
205 East Meadow Road - Suite A
Eden, NC 27288
[phone]
ANALYTICAL RESULTS
Pace Project No.:
Project:
92111492
NC ANG
Sample:OW-WEST Lab ID:92111492001 Collected:02/02/12 13:50 Received:02/03/12 15:00 Matrix:Solid
Results reported on a "dry-weight" basis
Parameters Results Units DF Prepared Analyzed CAS No.QualMDLLimit
Report
8015 GCS THC-Diesel Analytical Method: EPA 8015 Modified Preparation Method: EPA 3546
Diesel Components 395 mg/kg 1 02/07/12 23:59 68334-30-502/06/12 11:306.8 6.1
Surrogates
n-Pentacosane (S)81 %1 02/07/12 23:59 629-99-202/06/12 11:3041-119
Gasoline Range Organics Analytical Method: EPA 8015 Modified Preparation Method: EPA 5035A/5030B
Gasoline Range Organics 151 mg/kg 1 02/09/12 11:32 8006-61-902/09/12 10:306.3 6.3
Surrogates
4-Bromofluorobenzene (S)190 %1 02/09/12 11:32 460-00-4 S502/09/12 10:3070-167
6010 MET ICP Analytical Method: EPA 6010 Preparation Method: EPA 3050
Chromium 31.7 mg/kg 1 02/09/12 12:31 7440-47-302/08/12 15:450.61 0.036
Lead 10.3 mg/kg 1 02/09/12 12:31 7439-92-102/08/12 15:450.61 0.58
Percent Moisture Analytical Method: ASTM D2974-87
Percent Moisture 26.5 %1 02/06/12 14:410.10 0.10
REPORT OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS
This report shall not be reproduced, except in full,
without the written consent of Pace Analytical Services, Inc..
Date: 02/10/2012 04:00 PM Page 6 of 15
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
9800 Kincey Ave. Suite 100
Huntersville, NC 28078
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
2225 Riverside Dr.
Asheville, NC 28804
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
205 East Meadow Road - Suite A
Eden, NC 27288
[phone]
ANALYTICAL RESULTS
Pace Project No.:
Project:
92111492
NC ANG
Sample:OW-EAST Lab ID:92111492002 Collected:02/02/12 13:55 Received:02/03/12 15:00 Matrix:Solid
Results reported on a "dry-weight" basis
Parameters Results Units DF Prepared Analyzed CAS No.QualMDLLimit
Report
8015 GCS THC-Diesel Analytical Method: EPA 8015 Modified Preparation Method: EPA 3546
Diesel Components <6.5 mg/kg 1 02/08/12 00:29 68334-30-502/06/12 11:306.5 5.8
Surrogates
n-Pentacosane (S)83 %1 02/08/12 00:29 629-99-202/06/12 11:3041-119
Gasoline Range Organics Analytical Method: EPA 8015 Modified Preparation Method: EPA 5035A/5030B
Gasoline Range Organics 8.0 mg/kg 1 02/09/12 12:21 8006-61-902/09/12 10:306.4 6.4
Surrogates
4-Bromofluorobenzene (S)113 %1 02/09/12 12:21 460-00-402/09/12 10:3070-167
6010 MET ICP Analytical Method: EPA 6010 Preparation Method: EPA 3050
Chromium 26.0 mg/kg 1 02/09/12 12:35 7440-47-302/08/12 15:450.40 0.024
Lead 7.6 mg/kg 1 02/09/12 12:35 7439-92-102/08/12 15:450.40 0.38
Percent Moisture Analytical Method: ASTM D2974-87
Percent Moisture 23.9 %1 02/06/12 14:410.10 0.10
REPORT OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS
This report shall not be reproduced, except in full,
without the written consent of Pace Analytical Services, Inc..
Date: 02/10/2012 04:00 PM Page 7 of 15
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
9800 Kincey Ave. Suite 100
Huntersville, NC 28078
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
2225 Riverside Dr.
Asheville, NC 28804
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
205 East Meadow Road - Suite A
Eden, NC 27288
[phone]
ANALYTICAL RESULTS
Pace Project No.:
Project:
92111492
NC ANG
Sample:BKG-1 Lab ID:92111492003 Collected:02/02/12 15:00 Received:02/03/12 15:00 Matrix:Solid
Results reported on a "dry-weight" basis
Parameters Results Units DF Prepared Analyzed CAS No.QualMDLLimit
Report
6010 MET ICP Analytical Method: EPA 6010 Preparation Method: EPA 3050
Chromium 39.7 mg/kg 1 02/09/12 12:39 7440-47-302/08/12 15:450.58 0.035
Lead 9.5 mg/kg 1 02/09/12 12:39 7439-92-102/08/12 15:450.58 0.56
Percent Moisture Analytical Method: ASTM D2974-87
Percent Moisture 27.2 %1 02/06/12 14:420.10 0.10
REPORT OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS
This report shall not be reproduced, except in full,
without the written consent of Pace Analytical Services, Inc..
Date: 02/10/2012 04:00 PM Page 8 of 15
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
9800 Kincey Ave. Suite 100
Huntersville, NC 28078
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
2225 Riverside Dr.
Asheville, NC 28804
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
205 East Meadow Road - Suite A
Eden, NC 27288
[phone]
ANALYTICAL RESULTS
Pace Project No.:
Project:
92111492
NC ANG
Sample:BKG-2 Lab ID:92111492004 Collected:02/02/12 15:10 Received:02/03/12 15:00 Matrix:Solid
Results reported on a "dry-weight" basis
Parameters Results Units DF Prepared Analyzed CAS No.QualMDLLimit
Report
6010 MET ICP Analytical Method: EPA 6010 Preparation Method: EPA 3050
Chromium 42.6 mg/kg 1 02/09/12 12:43 7440-47-302/08/12 15:450.50 0.030
Lead 9.3 mg/kg 1 02/09/12 12:43 7439-92-102/08/12 15:450.50 0.48
Percent Moisture Analytical Method: ASTM D2974-87
Percent Moisture 30.9 %1 02/06/12 14:420.10 0.10
REPORT OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS
This report shall not be reproduced, except in full,
without the written consent of Pace Analytical Services, Inc..
Date: 02/10/2012 04:00 PM Page 9 of 15
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
9800 Kincey Ave. Suite 100
Huntersville, NC 28078
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
2225 Riverside Dr.
Asheville, NC 28804
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
205 East Meadow Road - Suite A
Eden, NC 27288
[phone]
QUALITY CONTROL DATA
Pace Project No.:
Project:
92111492
NC ANG
QC Batch:
QC Batch Method:
Analysis Method:
Analysis Description:
GCV/5734
EPA 5035A/5030B
EPA 8015 Modified
Gasoline Range Organics
Associated Lab Samples:92111492001, 92111492002
Parameter Units
Blank
Result
Reporting
Limit Qualifiers
METHOD BLANK:719770
Associated Lab Samples:92111492001, 92111492002
Matrix:Solid
Analyzed
Gasoline Range Organics mg/kg <5.9 5.9 02/09/12 10:20
4-Bromofluorobenzene (S)%96 70-167 02/09/12 10:20
Parameter Units
LCS
Result
% Rec
Limits Qualifiers% RecConc.
719771LABORATORY CONTROL SAMPLE:
LCSSpike
Gasoline Range Organics mg/kg 22.324.4 91 70-165
4-Bromofluorobenzene (S)%84 70-167
Parameter Units
MS
Result
% Rec
Limits Qual% RecConc.
719774MATRIX SPIKE & MATRIX SPIKE DUPLICATE:
MSSpike
Result
92111492002
719775
MSD
Result
MSD
% Rec RPD RPD
Max
MSDMS
Spike
Conc.
Gasoline Range Organics mg/kg 26.8 88 47-18788 0 3026.88.0 31.7 31.5
4-Bromofluorobenzene (S)%93 70-16796
REPORT OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS
This report shall not be reproduced, except in full,
without the written consent of Pace Analytical Services, Inc..
Date: 02/10/2012 04:00 PM Page 10 of 15
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
9800 Kincey Ave. Suite 100
Huntersville, NC 28078
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
2225 Riverside Dr.
Asheville, NC 28804
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
205 East Meadow Road - Suite A
Eden, NC 27288
[phone]
QUALITY CONTROL DATA
Pace Project No.:
Project:
92111492
NC ANG
QC Batch:
QC Batch Method:
Analysis Method:
Analysis Description:
MPRP/9860
EPA 3050
EPA 6010
6010 MET
Associated Lab Samples:92111492001, 92111492002, 92111492003, 92111492004
Parameter Units
Blank
Result
Reporting
Limit Qualifiers
METHOD BLANK:719167
Associated Lab Samples:92111492001, 92111492002, 92111492003, 92111492004
Matrix:Solid
Analyzed
Chromium mg/kg <0.50 0.50 02/09/12 11:47
Lead mg/kg <0.50 0.50 02/09/12 11:47
Parameter Units
LCS
Result
% Rec
Limits Qualifiers% RecConc.
719168LABORATORY CONTROL SAMPLE:
LCSSpike
Chromium mg/kg 49.950 100 80-120
Lead mg/kg 50.050 100 80-120
Parameter Units
MS
Result
% Rec
Limits Qualifiers% RecConc.
719169MATRIX SPIKE SAMPLE:
MSSpike
Result
5057829001
Chromium mg/kg 22102300 95 75-125ND
Lead mg/kg 22002300 94 75-125ND
Parameter Units
Dup
Result
Max
RPD QualifiersRPDResult
92111452001
719170SAMPLE DUPLICATE:
Chromium mg/kg 0.73 20ND
Lead mg/kg 50.4 D61082015.1 ug/g
REPORT OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS
This report shall not be reproduced, except in full,
without the written consent of Pace Analytical Services, Inc..
Date: 02/10/2012 04:00 PM Page 11 of 15
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
9800 Kincey Ave. Suite 100
Huntersville, NC 28078
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
2225 Riverside Dr.
Asheville, NC 28804
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
205 East Meadow Road - Suite A
Eden, NC 27288
[phone]
QUALITY CONTROL DATA
Pace Project No.:
Project:
92111492
NC ANG
QC Batch:
QC Batch Method:
Analysis Method:
Analysis Description:
OEXT/16333
EPA 3546
EPA 8015 Modified
8015 Solid GCSV
Associated Lab Samples:92111492001, 92111492002
Parameter Units
Blank
Result
Reporting
Limit Qualifiers
METHOD BLANK:718215
Associated Lab Samples:92111492001, 92111492002
Matrix:Solid
Analyzed
Diesel Components mg/kg <5.0 5.0 02/07/12 21:31
n-Pentacosane (S)%84 41-119 02/07/12 21:31
Parameter Units
LCS
Result
% Rec
Limits Qualifiers% RecConc.
718216LABORATORY CONTROL SAMPLE:
LCSSpike
Diesel Components mg/kg 54.065.8 82 49-113
n-Pentacosane (S)%86 41-119
Parameter Units
MS
Result
% Rec
Limits Qual% RecConc.
718217MATRIX SPIKE & MATRIX SPIKE DUPLICATE:
MSSpike
Result
92111478001
718218
MSD
Result
MSD
% Rec RPD RPD
Max
MSDMS
Spike
Conc.
Diesel Components mg/kg 84.2 113 10-14686 18 3083.844.4 139 117
n-Pentacosane (S)%82 41-11982
REPORT OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS
This report shall not be reproduced, except in full,
without the written consent of Pace Analytical Services, Inc..
Date: 02/10/2012 04:00 PM Page 12 of 15
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
9800 Kincey Ave. Suite 100
Huntersville, NC 28078
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
2225 Riverside Dr.
Asheville, NC 28804
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
205 East Meadow Road - Suite A
Eden, NC 27288
[phone]
QUALITY CONTROL DATA
Pace Project No.:
Project:
92111492
NC ANG
QC Batch:
QC Batch Method:
Analysis Method:
Analysis Description:
PMST/4472
ASTM D2974-87
ASTM D2974-87
Dry Weight/Percent Moisture
Associated Lab Samples:92111492001, 92111492002, 92111492003, 92111492004
Parameter Units
Dup
Result
Max
RPD QualifiersRPDResult
92111493025
718211SAMPLE DUPLICATE:
Percent Moisture %22.6 0 2522.6
Parameter Units
Dup
Result
Max
RPD QualifiersRPDResult
92111499002
718212SAMPLE DUPLICATE:
Percent Moisture %93.4 0 2593.5
REPORT OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS
This report shall not be reproduced, except in full,
without the written consent of Pace Analytical Services, Inc..
Date: 02/10/2012 04:00 PM Page 13 of 15
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
9800 Kincey Ave. Suite 100
Huntersville, NC 28078
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
2225 Riverside Dr.
Asheville, NC 28804
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
205 East Meadow Road - Suite A
Eden, NC 27288
[phone]
QUALIFIERS
Pace Project No.:
Project:
92111492
NC ANG
DEFINITIONS
DF - Dilution Factor, if reported, represents the factor applied to the reported data due to changes in sample preparation, dilution of
the sample aliquot, or moisture content.
ND - Not Detected at or above adjusted reporting limit.
J - Estimated concentration above the adjusted method detection limit and below the adjusted reporting limit.
MDL - Adjusted Method Detection Limit.
S - Surrogate
1,2-Diphenylhydrazine (8270 listed analyte) decomposes to Azobenzene.
Consistent with EPA guidelines, unrounded data are displayed and have been used to calculate % recovery and RPD values.
LCS(D) - Laboratory Control Sample (Duplicate)
MS(D) - Matrix Spike (Duplicate)
DUP - Sample Duplicate
RPD - Relative Percent Difference
NC - Not Calculable.
SG - Silica Gel - Clean-Up
U - Indicates the compound was analyzed for, but not detected.
N-Nitrosodiphenylamine decomposes and cannot be separated from Diphenylamine using Method 8270. The result reported for
each analyte is a combined concentration.
Acid preservation may not be appropriate for 2-Chloroethylvinyl ether, Styrene, and Vinyl chloride.
Pace Analytical is TNI accredited. Contact your Pace PM for the current list of accredited analytes.
LABORATORIES
Pace Analytical Services - AshevillePASI-A
Pace Analytical Services - CharlottePASI-C
ANALYTE QUALIFIERS
The relative percent difference (RPD) between the sample and sample duplicate exceeded laboratory control limits.D6
Surrogate recovery outside control limits due to matrix interferences (not confirmed by re-analysis).S5
REPORT OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS
This report shall not be reproduced, except in full,
without the written consent of Pace Analytical Services, Inc..
Date: 02/10/2012 04:00 PM Page 14 of 15
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
9800 Kincey Ave. Suite 100
Huntersville, NC 28078
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
2225 Riverside Dr.
Asheville, NC 28804
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
205 East Meadow Road - Suite A
Eden, NC 27288
[phone]
QUALITY CONTROL DATA CROSS REFERENCE TABLE
Pace Project No.:
Project:
92111492
NC ANG
Lab ID Sample ID QC Batch Method QC Batch Analytical Method
Analytical
Batch
92111492001 OEXT/16333 GCSV/11330OW-WEST EPA 3546 EPA 8015 Modified
92111492002 OEXT/16333 GCSV/11330OW-EAST EPA 3546 EPA 8015 Modified
92111492001 GCV/5734 GCV/5735OW-WEST EPA 5035A/5030B EPA 8015 Modified
92111492002 GCV/5734 GCV/5735OW-EAST EPA 5035A/5030B EPA 8015 Modified
92111492001 MPRP/9860 ICP/9097OW-WEST EPA 3050 EPA 6010
92111492002 MPRP/9860 ICP/9097OW-EAST EPA 3050 EPA 6010
92111492003 MPRP/9860 ICP/9097BKG-1 EPA 3050 EPA 6010
92111492004 MPRP/9860 ICP/9097BKG-2 EPA 3050 EPA 6010
92111492001 PMST/4472OW-WEST ASTM D2974-87
92111492002 PMST/4472OW-EAST ASTM D2974-87
92111492003 PMST/4472BKG-1 ASTM D2974-87
92111492004 PMST/4472BKG-2 ASTM D2974-87
REPORT OF LABORATORY ANALYSIS
This report shall not be reproduced, except in full,
without the written consent of Pace Analytical Services, Inc..
Date: 02/10/2012 04:00 PM Page 15 of 15
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
9800 Kincey Ave. Suite 100
Huntersville, NC 28078
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
2225 Riverside Dr.
Asheville, NC 28804
[phone]
Pace Analytical Services, Inc.
205 East Meadow Road - Suite A
Eden, NC 27288
[phone]

June 2018
Appendix C
Tier 2 UFP-QAPP

June 2018

This page intentionally left blank.
Quality Assurance Project Plan for 145th Airlift
Wing North Carolina Air National Guard Base –
Charlotte, North Carolina
Final
Site:
145th Airlift Wing North Carolina Air National Guard BaseCharlotte, North Carolina
Prepared for:
Air National Guard Headquarters
NGB/A7OR
3500 Fetchet AvenueAndrews Air Force Base, MD 20762
Contract #: W9133L-14-D-0001Delivery Order #: 0009
June 2018
This page intentionally left blank
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: June 2018
Table of Contents
WORKSHEET #1 TITLE AND APPROVAL PAGE ................................................................................................................. 1
WORKSHEET #2 QAPP IDENTIFYING INFORMATION ........................................................................................................ 2
WORKSHEET #3 DISTRIBUTION LIST ................................................................................................................................ 7
WORKSHEET #4 PROJECT PERSONNEL SIGN-OFF SHEET ............................................................................................. 8
WORKSHEET #5 PROJECT ORGANIZATIONAL CHART ..................................................................................................... 9
WORKSHEET #6 COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS ............................................................................................................. 10
WORKSHEET #7 PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES AND QUALIFICATIONS .................................................................... 13
WORKSHEET #8 SPECIAL PERSONNEL TRAINING REQUIREMENTS TABLE ................................................................. 14
WORKSHEET #9 PROJECT SCOPING SESSION PARTICIPANTS SHEET ........................................................................ 15
WORKSHEET #10 PROBLEM DEFINITION ........................................................................................................................ 17
WORKSHEET #11 PROJECT QUALITY OBJECTIVES/SYSTEMATIC PLANNING PROCESS STATEMENTS .................... 18
WORKSHEET #12-1 MEASUREMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA ................................................................................... 21
WORKSHEET #12-2 MEASUREMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA ................................................................................... 22
WORKSHEET #12-3 MEASUREMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA ................................................................................... 23
WORKSHEET #12-4 MEASUREMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA ................................................................................... 24
WORKSHEET #12-5 MEASUREMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA ................................................................................... 25
WORKSHEET #13 SECONDARY DATA CRITERIA AND LIMITATIONS TABLE .................................................................. 26
WORKSHEET #14 SUMMARY OF PROJECT TASKS ........................................................................................................ 28
WORKSHEET #15-1 REFERENCE LIMITS AND EVALUATION TABLES ............................................................................ 30
WORKSHEET #15-2 REFERENCE LIMITS AND EVALUATION TABLES ............................................................................ 32
WORKSHEET #15-3 REFERENCE LIMITS AND EVALUATION TABLES ............................................................................ 34
WORKSHEET #15-4 REFERENCE LIMITS AND EVALUATION TABLES ............................................................................ 35
WORKSHEET #15-5 REFERENCE LIMITS AND EVALUATION TABLES ............................................................................ 37
WORKSHEET #15-6 REFERENCE LIMITS AND EVALUATION TABLES ............................................................................ 42
WORKSHEET #16 PROJECT SCHEDULE/TIMELINE TABLE ............................................................................................. 43
WORKSHEET #17 SAMPLING DESIGN AND RATIONALE................................................................................................. 45
WORKSHEET #18 SAMPLING LOCATIONS AND METHODS/SOP REQUIREMENTS ........................................................ 46
WORKSHEET #19 ANALYTICAL SOP REQUIREMENTS TABLE ....................................................................................... 47
WORKSHEET #20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLE SUMMARY TABLE ..................................................................... 48
WORKSHEET #21 PROJECT SAMPLING PROCEDURES REFERENCES TABLE ............................................................. 50
WORKSHEET #22 FIELD EQUIPMENT CALIBRATION, MAINTENANCE, TESTING, AND INSPECTION TABLE ................ 51
WORKSHEET #23 ANALYTICAL SOP REFERENCES TABLE............................................................................................ 53
WORKSHEET #24 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION TABLE ............................................................................. 55
WORKSHEET #25 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENT AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE, TESTING, AND INSPECTION TABLE .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 60
WORKSHEET #26 SAMPLE HANDLING SYSTEM ............................................................................................................. 64
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: June 2018
WORKSHEET #27 SAMPLE CUSTODY REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 66
1.1 Field Sample Custody Procedures (Sample Collection, Packaging, Shipment, and Delivery to Laboratory)............. 66
1.2 Laboratory Sample Custody Procedures (Receipt of Samples, Archiving, Disposal) ............................................... 66
1.3 Sample Identification Procedures ......................................................................................................................... 66
1.4 COC Procedures ................................................................................................................................................. 67
WORKSHEET #28-1 QC SAMPLES TABLE ........................................................................................................................ 68
WORKSHEET #28-2 SAMPLES TABLE .............................................................................................................................. 69
WORKSHEET #28-3 SAMPLES TABLE .............................................................................................................................. 70
WORKSHEET #28-4 SAMPLES TABLES ........................................................................................................................... 72
WORKSHEET #29 PROJECT DOCUMENTS AND RECORDS TABLE ................................................................................ 74
WORKSHEET #30 ANALYTICAL SERVICES TABLE .......................................................................................................... 75
WORKSHEET #31 PLANNED PROJECT ASSESSMENTS TABLE ..................................................................................... 76
WORKSHEET #32 ASSESSMENT FINDINGS AND CORRECTIVE ACTION RESPONSES TABLE ..................................... 77
WORKSHEET #33 QA MANAGEMENT REPORTS TABLE ................................................................................................. 78
WORKSHEET #34 VERIFICATION (STEP I) PROCESS TABLE ......................................................................................... 79
WORKSHEET #35 VALIDATION (STEPS IIA AND IIB) PROCESS TABLE .......................................................................... 80
WORKSHEET #36 VALIDATION (STEPS IIA AND IIB) SUMMARY TABLE ......................................................................... 81
WORKSHEET #37 USEABILITY ASSESSMENT ................................................................................................................. 83
1.1 Summary of the Usability Assessment Process and Procedures ........................................................................... 83
1.2 Evaluative Procedures Used To Assess Overall Measurement Error Associated with the Project ........................... 83
1.3 Personnel Responsible for Performing the Usability Assessment .......................................................................... 83
1.4 Documentation to Be Generated During Usability Assessment and How Results Will Be Presented ....................... 83
1.5 Precision ............................................................................................................................................................. 83
1.6 Accuracy ............................................................................................................................................................. 84
1.7 Representativeness ............................................................................................................................................. 85
1.8 Comparability ...................................................................................................................................................... 85
1.9 Completeness ..................................................................................................................................................... 85
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: June 2018
List of Acronyms and Abbreviations
ºC degrees Celsius
%RSD percent relative standard deviation
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
CAS Chemical Abstracts Service
CERCLA Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act
CLP Contract Laboratory Program
COC chain of custody
COPC contaminant of potential concern
CRAC Capital Region Airport Commision
CVOC chlorinated volatile organic compounds
DoD Department of Defense
DPT direct push technology
DQI data quality indicator
DQO data quality objective
EB equipment blank
EDD electronic data deliverable
ELAP Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
GC gas chromatograph
GC/MS gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer
GC/FID gas chromatograph flame ionization detector
H&S Health and Safety
ICAL initial calibration
ICP inductively coupled plasma
ID identification
IDW investigation-derived waste
IRA interim remedial action
LCSD laboratory control sample duplicate
LOQ limit of quantitation
LCS laboratory control sample
MB method blank
mg/kg milligram per kilogram
mL milliliter
MPC measurement performance criteria
MS/MSD matrix spike/matrix spike duplicate
N/A not applicable
%RSD percent relative standard deviation
PAH polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbon
PQO project quality objective
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: June 2018
QA quality assurance
QAPP Quality Assurance Project Plan
QC quality control
QSM Quality Systems Manual
RI remedial investigation
RPD relative percent difference
RSD relative standard deviation
RSL regional screening levels
SIM selected ion monitoring
SOP standard operating procedure
SOW Statement of Work
SVOA semivolatile organic analysis
SVOC semivolatile organic compound
TCLP toxicity characteristic leaching procedure
TOC total organic carbon
UFP Uniform Federal Policy
U.S.United States
NGB United States National Guard Bureau
VOA volatile organic analysis
VOC volatile organic compound
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: June 2018
Page 1 of 88
Worksheet #1 Title and Approval Page
Site Name/Project Name:145th ALW North Carolina Air National Guard Base
Site Location:Charlotte, NC
Document Title:Quality Assurance Project Plan 145th ALW North Carolina Air National Guard Base
Lead Organization: National Guard Bureau (NGB)
Preparer’s Name and Organizational Affiliation: Brett Schaefer, AECOM
Preparer’s Address, Telephone Number, and E-mail Address:5925 Carnegie Blvd, Ste. 370, Charlotte NC. 704-499-6991. [e-mail]
Preparation Date (Day/Month/Year): (January-2018)
Investigative Organization’s Project Manager:
Signature:
Megan Donahue/AECOM/11 JAN 2018
Investigative Organization’s Project QA Officer/Chemist:
Signature
Naoum Tavantzis /AECOM/11 JAN 2018
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: June 2018
Page 2 of 88
Worksheet #2 QAPP Identifying Information
Site Name/Number:NCANGB AOC-OWS-012
Operable Unit (OU):OU1
Contractor Name:AECOM
Contract Number:W9133L-14-D-0001
Contract Title:FY17 EASTERN IRP
Work Assignment Number:Delivery Order 0009
1. Identify guidance used to prepare Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPP):
This QAPP was prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform Federal Policy for Quality Assurance ProjectPlans (UFP-QAPP) (March, 2005); U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Guidance for Quality Assurance ProjectPlans, EPA QA/G-5, QAMS (EPA, 2002); EPA Guidance on Systematic Planning Using the Data Quality ObjectivesProcesses, EPA QA/G-4 (EPA, 2006a); Department of Defense (DoD) Quality Systems Manual (QSM) for Environmental
Laboratories version 4.2 (DoD, 2010); NGB EM 200-1-3, Requirements for the Preparation of Sampling and Analysis Plans;and NGB ER 1110-1-263, Chemical Data Quality Management for Hazardous, Toxic, Radioactive Waste Remedial Activities.
2. Identify regulatory program: Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA).
3. Identify approval entity: NGB
4. This QAPP is: a project-specific plan.
5. List dates of scoping sessions that were held: Kick-off meeting 12 September 2017.
6. List dates and titles of any QAPP documents written for previous site work that are relevant to the currentinvestigation: Quality Assurance Project Plan for Site 1, Basewide Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air NationalGuard Base. March 2011
7. List organizational partners (stakeholders) and connection with lead organization:
Organization Partners / Stakeholders Role
Capitol Region Airport Commission Property owner
NGB Former property leasee. Provides project funding andtechnical oversight.
North Carolina Department of Environmental Quality (NCDEQ) Lead regulator overseeing investigation efforts.
8. List data users: AECOM Project/Task Leads, Engineering, support personnel, NGB.
9. If any required QAPP elements and required information are not applicable to the project or are providedelsewhere, then note the omitted elements and provide an explanation for their exclusion below:
There are no worksheets exluded in this project-specific QAPP.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: June 2018
Page 3 of 88
Worksheet #2 QAPP Identifying Information (continued)
A cross-reference from the required QAPP elements/information to the QAPP worksheets is presented in
Table 2-1.
Table 2-1: Crosswalk to QAPP Information
Required QAPP Element(s) and
Corresponding UFP-QAPP Manual Section(s)Required Information QAPP Worksheet #
Project Management and Objectives
2.1 Title and Approval Page - Title and Approval Page 1
2.2 Document Format and Table of Contents
2.2.1 Document Control Format
2.2.2 Document Control Numbering
System
2.2.3 Table of Contents
2.2.4 QAPP Identifying Information
- Table of Contents
- QAPP Identifying Information
2
2.3 Distribution List and Project Personnel
Sign-Off Sheet
2.3.1 Distribution List
2.3.2 Project Personnel Sign-Off Sheet
- Distribution List
- Project Personnel Sign-Off
Sheet
3
4
2.4 Project Organization
2.4.1 Project Organizational Chart
2.4.2 Communication Pathways
2.4.3 Personnel Responsibilities and
Qualifications
2.4.4 Special Training Requirements and
Certification
- Project Organizational Chart
- Communication Pathways
- Personnel Responsibilities and
Qualifications Table
- Special Personnel Training
Requirements Table
5
6
7
8
2.5 Project Planning/Problem Definition
2.5.1 Project Planning (Scoping)
2.5.2 Problem Definition, Site History, and
Background
- Project Planning Session
Documentation (including
Data Needs tables)
- Project Scoping Session
Participants Sheet
- Problem Definition, Site
History, and Background
- Site Maps (historical and
present)
9
10
2.6 Project Quality Objectives and Measurement
Performance Criteria
2.6.1 Development of Project Quality
Objectives Using the Systematic
Planning Process
2.6.2 Measurement Performance Criteria
- Site-Specific Project QualityObjectines (PQOs)
- Measurement Performance
Criteria Table
11
12
2.7 Secondary Data Evaluation - Sources of Secondary Data
and Information
- Secondary Data Criteria and
Limitations Table
13
2.8 Project Overview and Schedule
2.8.1 Project Overview
2.8.2 Project Schedule
- Summary of Project Tasks
- Reference Limits and
Evaluation Table
- Project Schedule/Timeline
Table
14
15
16
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: June 2018
Page 4 of 88
Worksheet #2 QAPP Identifying Information (continued)
Table 2-1: Crosswalk to QAPP Information (continued)
Required QAPP Element(s) and
Corresponding QAPP Section(s)Required Information QAPP Worksheet #
Measurement/Data Acquisition
3.1 Sampling Tasks
3.1.1 Sampling Process Design and Rationale
3.1.2 Sampling Procedures and Requirements
3.1.2.1 Sampling Collection Procedures
3.1.2.2 Sample Containers, Volume, and
Preservation
3.1.2.3 Equipment/Sample Containers
Cleaning and Decontamination
Procedures
3.1.2.3 Field Equipment Calibration,Maintenance, Testing, and InspectionProcedures
3.1.2.4 Supply Inspection and Acceptance
Procedures
3.1.2.6 Field Documentation Procedures
- Sampling Design and
Rationale
- Sample Location Map
- Sampling Locations and
Methods/SOP Requirements
Table
- Analytical Methods/SOP
Requirements Table
- Field Quality Control Sample
Summary Table
- Sampling SOPs
- Project Sampling SOP
References
Table
- Field Equipment Calibration,
Maintenance, Testing, and
Inspection Table
17
18
19
20
21
22
3.2 Analytical Tasks
3.2.1 Analytical SOPs
3.2.2 Analytical Instrument Calibration
Procedures
3.2.3 Analytical Instrument and Equipment
Maintenance, Testing, and Inspection
Procedures
3.2.4 Analytical Supply Inspection and
Acceptance Procedures
- Analytical SOPs
- Analytical SOP References
Table
- Analytical Instrument
Calibration Table
- Analytical Instrument and
Equipment Maintenance,
Testing, and Inspection Table
23
24
25
3.3 Sample Collection Documentation,
Handling, Tracking, and Custody
Procedures
3.3.1 Sample Collection Documentation
3.3.2 Sample Handling and Tracking
System
3.3.3 Sample Custody
- Sample Collection
Documentation Handling,
Tracking, and Custody
SOPs
- Sample Container
Identification
- Sample Handling Flow
Diagram
- Example Chain-of-Custody
Form and Seal
3.4 Quality Control Samples
3.4.1 Sampling Quality Control Samples
3.4.2 Analytical Quality Control Samples
- QC Samples Table
- Screening/Confirmatory
Analysis Decision Tree
26
3.5 Data Management Tasks
3.5.1 Project Documentation and Records
3.5.2 Data Package Deliverables
3.5.3 Data Reporting Formats
3.5.4 Data Handling and Management
3.5.5 Data Tracking and Control
- Project Documents and
Records Table
- Analytical Services Table
- Data Management SOPs
27
28
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: June 2018
Page 5 of 88
Worksheet #2 QAPP Identifying Information (continued)
Table 2-1: Crosswalk to QAPP Information (continued)
Required QAPP Element(s) and
Corresponding QAPP Section(s)Required Information QAPP Worksheet #
Assessment/Oversight
4.1 Assessments and Response Actions
4.1.1 Planned Assessments
4.1.2 Assessment Findings and Corrective
Action Responses
- Assessments and Response
Actions
- Planned Project Assessments
Table
- Audit Checklists
- Assessment Findings and
Corrective Action Responses
Table
29
30
4.2 QA Management Reports - QA Management Reports
Table
31
4.3 Final Project Report
Data Review
5.1 Overview
5.2 Data Review Steps
5.2.1 Step I: Verification
5.2.2 Step II: Validation
5.2.2.1 Step IIa Validation Activities
5.2.2.2 Step IIb Validation Activities
5.2.3 Step III: Usability Assessment
5.2.3.1 Data Limitations and Actions
from Usability Assessment
5.2.3.2 Activities
- Verification (Step I) Process
Table
- Validation (Steps IIa and IIb)
Process Table
- Validation (Steps IIa and IIb)
Summary Table
- Usability Assessment
32
33
34
35
5.3 Streamlining Data Review
5.3.1 Data Review Steps To Be
Streamlined
5.3.2 Criteria for Streamlining Data
Review
5.3.3 Amounts and Types of Data
Appropriate for Streamlining
QC quality control
SOP standard operating procedure
PQO project quality objective
IIa Compliance with methods, procedures, and contracts (see Table 10, page 117, UFP-QAPP manual, V.1, March, DoD 2005.)
IIb Comparison with measurement performance criteria in the QAPP (see Table 11, page 118, UFP-QAPP manual, V.1, March,DoD 2005.)
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: June 2018
Page 6 of 88
This page intentionally left blank.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, North Carolina Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 7 of 88
Worksheet #3 Distribution List
QAPP Recipients Title Organization TelephoneNumber Email Address
Greg Wills ANG Project Manager NGB 240-612-8366 [e-mail]
Lt. Col, Sam Ingram Environmental Manager 704-391-4327 [e-mail]
Aaron Etnyre NGB Technical OversightContractor BB&E 248-489-9636 [e-mail]
Mark MacEwan Program Manager AECOM 703-706-0133 [e-mail]
Megan Donahue Project Manager AECOM 703-706-0133 [e-mail]
Alberto Munuera Site Supervisor/Site Safety &
Health Officer AECOM 757-408-4276 [e-mail]
Brett Schaefer Task Manager AECOM 704-499-6991 [e-mail]
Andrew Wreschnig Field Lead AECOM 980-345-1102 [e-mail]
William Wright Senior Manager, Engineering AECOM 412-526-6109 [e-mail]
Naoum Tavantzis Project QA Officer/ Chemist AECOM 919-461-1100 [e-mail]
Kimberly Drag Laboratory Manager GCAL Laboratories 704.607.7735 [e-mail]
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, North Carolina Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 8 of 88
Worksheet #4 Project Personnel Sign-Off Sheet
Name Project Title/Role Education/Experience Signature/Date
Megan Donahue Project Manager Education: BS Geology, MS GeologyExperience: 27 years
Naoum Tavantzis Project Chemist Education: BA, Environmental Science,Masters of Business Administration
Experience: 8+ Years
*Signatures indicate personnel have read and agree to implement this QAPP as written
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, North Carolina Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 9 of 88
AECOM Support
AECOM
Subcontracted Firms
Lab/Drilling
Alberto Munuera
Health and Safety Manager
AECOM
John Maier
Project QC Manager
AECOM
Amanda M. Taylor, PG
Senior Manager, Geology
AECOM
Brett G. Schaefer, PE
Task Manager/Project Engineer
AECOM
Naoum Tavantzis
Project Chemist
AECOM
Andrew Wreschnig, PG
Field Team Lead
AECOM
Megan Donahue, PG
Program Manager
AECOM
Greg Willis
ANG Program Manager
NGB/A4OR
Aaron Etnyre
NGB Oversight Support
BB&E
Stephanie MacKay
Contracting Officer Representative
NGB/A7OR
Mark MacEwan, PE
Program Manager
AECOM
Worksheet #5 Project Organizational Chart
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, North Carolina Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 10 of 88
Worksheet #6 Communication Pathways
Communication Drivers Responsible Entity Name Phone Number Procedure(Timing, Pathways, etc.)
Conducts reviews of alldeliverables from lease (ANG)perspective
NGB Program Manager Greg Wills 240-612-8366 All materials and information about the projectwill be forwarded to ANG through Greg Wills
Conducts reviews of all technical
deliverables
BB&E Aaron Etnyre 248-489-9636 Aaron Etnyre is responsible for completing
technical reviews of all technical deliverables
Manages all Project Phases AECOM Project Manager Megan Donahue 703-682-9142 Notifies Greg Wills of field related QA/QCproblems by phone or email by COB the nextbusiness day.
Real time modification,notification, and approval AECOM QA Officer Naoum Tavantzis 919-461-1100 Notify Megan Donahue by phone and email ofchanges and obtain approval within 2 working
days.
QAPP changes in the field AECOM Task Manager Brett Schaefer 704-499-6991 Notify Naoum Tavantzis by phone and email ofchanges within by COB the same day.
Daily Field QC Reports AECOM Task Manager Brett Schaefer 704-499-6991 E-mail daliy QC reports to Megan Donahue.
Field sampling activities
coordination with laboratory
AECOM Project Chemist Naoum Tavantzis
919-461-1100
The Project Chemist will contact the laboratory
by e-mail to order the necessary samplecontainers and appropriate shipping fordelivery on site before field sampling beginsand throughout the project.
Daily chain of custody (COC)reports and shippingdocumentation
AECOM Field Lead Andrew Wreschnig 980-345-1102 COCs and shipping records will be submittedvia fax or e-mail to the Project Chemist at theend of each day that samples are collected.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, North Carolina Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 11 of 88
Worksheet #6 Communication Pathways (continued)
Communication Drivers Responsible Entity Name Phone Number Procedure(Timing, Pathways, etc.)
Sample shipmentcoordination withlaboratory
AECOM Field Lead Andrew Wreschnig
980-345-1102
Coordinate with the laboratory on days ofsample shipment to inform it of anticipatedshipment arrival dates, including number ofcoolers shipped. Provide laboratory withCOCs, shipment tracking numbers, and anyother pertinent information
Laboratory results GCAL Project Manager Kimberly Drag 704-607-7735 Laboratory results will be reported to theProject Chemist in accordance with thelaboratory SOW.
Reporting laboratory dataquality issues GCAL Project Manager Kimberly Drag 704-607-7735 QA/QC issues that potentially affect datausability will be reported by the LaboratoryProject Manager to the Project Chemist by e-mail within 1 business day.
Field and analyticalcorrective actions AECOM Project Chemist Naoum Tavantzis 919-461-1100 The Project Chemist will immediately notifythe Project Manager and Program QC
Manager by e-mail of field or analyticalprocedures that were not performed inaccordance with the planning documents.
The Project Chemist, in coordination with theProgram QC Manager, will completedocumentation of the nonconformance, and
corrective actions to be taken. The ProjectChemist will verify that the corrective actionshave been implemented.
Release of analytical data AECOM Project Chemist Naoum Tavantzis 919-461-1100 The Project Chemist will review faxed/e-
mailed data to verify that data qualityobjectives are met as described in theplanning documents before the data arereleased.
Data validation issues AECOM Project Data Validator Naoum Tavantzis 919-461-1100 The Data Validator will coordinate with theProject Chemist and analytical laboratory to
ensure data packages provided by thelaboratory are complete and allow for fullvalidation. The Data Validator willimmediately notify the Project Chemist ofdata that are qualified as rejected, or R-flagged.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, North Carolina Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 12 of 88
Worksheet #6 Communication Pathways (continued)
Communication Drivers Responsible Entity Name Phone Number Procedure(Timing, Pathways, etc.)
Sampling procedurerevision during fieldactivities
AECOM Task Manager Brett Schaefer 704-499-6991 The Task Manager will prepare a field changerequest for any changes in samplingprocedures that occur because of conditionsin the field. This request will be submitted tothe Project Manager for approval prior to
initiation of the change.
Data usability AECOM Project Chemist and TaskManager Naoum Tavantzis/BrettSchaefer 919-461-1100/704-499-6991 The Project Chemist will notify the ProjectManager of any data usability issues that areidentified during data analysis or validationimmediately. Similarly, the Task Manager willnotify the Project Manager of any field
conditions, sample collection techniques, orsample shipping issues that impact datausability at the end of the same day of
occurrence or earlier as deemed appropriate.
Corrective action, auditfindings, and management
review records
AECOM QA Officer Naoum Tavantzis 919-461-1100 Problems or audit findings indicating QAPPnot being properly implemented will be
reported to Megan Donahue within 24 hoursof problem notation.
QAPP AmendmentsApproval NGB Project Manager Greg Wills
240-612-9433
Any changes to the QAPP that would impactthe project specific data quality objective(DQOs) must be approved by NGB beforechanges can be implemented.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, North Carolina Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 13 of 88
Worksheet #7 Personnel Responsibilities and Qualifications
Name Title OrganizationalAffiliation Responsibilities Education and ExperienceQualfications
Greg Wills Technical Manager NGB Manages NGB resources and oversees the project.QA overight on technical matters.
Dan Bowser Incident Manager NCDEQ QA oversight on analytical deliverables; determines
additional steps toward site closure.
Mark MacEwan Program Manager AECOM Manages coordination with NGB and completion ofcontractor investigation efforts.B.S. Chemical Engineering; and 30 yearsexperience
Megan Donahue Project Manager AECOM Manages coordination with NGB and completion of
contractor investigation efforts.
B.S, M.S. Geology; and 27 years experience
Brett Schaefer Task Manager AECOM Leads/supervises field efforts and coordinatesproject deliverables.B.S., Environmental Engineering, and 16 yearsexperience
William Wright Remediation
Specialist
AECOM Oversee groundwater investigation program and
remediation activities.
B.S., Civil Engineering; M.S., Civil & Environmental
Engineering; and 24 years experience.
Naoum Tavantzis QA Officer/ProjectChemist AECOM QA oversight and sample coordination withlaboratory.B.A., Environmental Science, MBA, and 8 yearsexperience
Kimberly Drag Laboratory ProjectManager GCAL Manages generation of analytical data.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, North Carolina Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 14 of 88
Worksheet #8 Special Personnel Training Requirements Table
Project Function Specialized Training By Titleor Description of Course TrainingProvider TrainingDate Personnel / GroupsReceiving Training
Personnel TitlesOrganizationalAffiliation
Location of TrainingRecords/Certificates
Field SamplingTeam, Field
Technicians,Geologists,Environmental
Scientists,Engineers
40-Hour Occupational Safetyand Health Administration
Hazardous Waste Operationsand Emergency Response(HAZWOPER) Training;
8-Hour HAZWOPERRefresher Training; first aid/cardiopulmonary resuscitation
Varies (1)Varies (1)All personnelperforming on-site work AECOM Certificates availableupon request and
maintained at projectoffice.
(1)Training provider and date of training will vary from person to person because of the individual scheduling of training.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, North Carolina Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 15 of 88
Worksheet #9 Project Scoping Session Participants Sheet
Project Name:145th Airlift Wing
North Carolina Air National Guard
Projected Date(s) of Sampling:March 2018Project Manager:Megan Donahue
Site Name:AOC-OWS-012Site Location:Charlotte, NC
Date of Session:12 September 2017Scoping Session Purpose:Kick-off Meeting
Name Title Affiliation Phone #E–Mail Address Project Role
Greg Wills ANG Project Manager ANG 240-612-8366 [e-mail] ANG Project Manager
Dan Bowser Incident Manager NCDEQ 704-235-2172 [e-mail] State Regulatory Oversight
Mark MacEwan, P.E.Program Manager AECOM 703-682-4901 [e-mail] Program Manager
William Wright, P.E.Manager, Engineering AECOM 412-526-6109 [e-mail] Remediation Planning
Brett G. Schaefer, P.E.Task Manager AECOM 704-499-6991 [e-mail] Project coordination
Aaron Etnyre Senior EnvironmentalEngineer BB&E 248-489-9636 [e-mail] Technical oversight
Comments/Decisions: The objective of the meeting was to discuss issues related to the site investigation activities that will be conducted by AECOM to determine thepresence of soil and groundwater impacted by dipsoal activities associated with the former OWS.
Action Items: Key action items from the meeting included an outline of the project schedule, documents awaiting approval, and planned documents to be written.
Consensus Decisions: Based on the meeting discussions, it was agreed that AECOM would proceed with planned project activities.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, North Carolina Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 16 of 88
This page intentionally left blank.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 17 of 88
Worksheet #10 Problem Definition
The problem to be addressed by the project.AOC-OWS012 at NCANGB in Charlotte, NC has been identified forpreliminary assessments and site investigations process based on historical investigations identifying the precence of TPH-GRO and TPH-DRO at elevated contaminat concentrations at the site.
The environmental questions being asked. What environmental remediation will be needed at AOC-OWS012 forgroundwater Trichloroethene contamination?
Observations from any site reconnaissance reports. In August 2010, BB&E conducted site reconnaissance to identifypotential sites results from a records review. The records review indicated a number of areas of potential concern. Based on
findings from PA/SI Trip Report (One Clean Report) – Charlotte ANG; BB&E Consulting Engineers and Professionals (BB&E)(2 September 2010) recommended further investigation at the AOC-OW012 Building 22 OWS. AOC-OW012 was a 750gallon OWS that collected waste oil from activities associated with a former hangar building adjacent to the OWS.
A synopsis of secondary data or information from site reports. According to a 24-Hour Release and UST Leak
Reporting Form, submitted by the ANG on February 17, 2012, a release was identified following removal of the oil waterseparator (See Figure 3 in Appendix A). Analytical results indicated that total petroleum hydrocarbons as diesel and gasoline(TPH-DRO and TPH-GRO) in a sample taken from below the west end of the former UST at concentrations (151 milligrams
per kilogram [mg/kg] and 395 mg/kg) that exceeded the NCDEQ action level of 10 mg/kg. A NCDEQ Notice of RegulatoryRequirements, dated February 23, 2012, outlined the necessary initial abatement and response action requirementsfollowing identification of the release. The former UST has not been granted closure by NCDEQ and the incident number isstill active. During the PA, AECOM reviewed all the documentation and determined that additional soil and groundwatersamples were required to evaluate if a release requiring a limited site investigation was identified during the completion ofOWS closure activities. For this investigation four (4) soil borings will be installed around the perimeter of the former OWS toa depth of approximately 10 (ft) feet below ground surface (bgs). One (1) temporary well will be installed approximately 40 ftbgs at a presumed downgradient location of the former OWS location. Soil and groundwater samples will be collected and
analyzed for volatile organic compounds, semi-volatile organic compounds (SVOC), Massachusetts Department ofEnvironmental Protection (MADEP) volatile and extractable petroleum hydrocarbons (MADEP EPH and MADEP VPH).
The possible classes of contaminants and the affected matrices.Analytical groups planned for soil investigations andgroundwater sampling include VOCs, SVOCs, MADEP VPH, MADEP EPH, and metals.
The rationale for inclusion of chemical and nonchemical analyses. The chemical analyses were included based onprevious investigations and historical site information.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 18 of 88
Worksheet #11 Project Quality Objectives/Systematic Planning Process
Statements
Who will use the data? The data collected during this task order will be used by the project team and will be reviewed bythe NGB, CRAC, and NCDEQ.
What will the data be used for? The data will then be used to design remedial activities, monitor remediation effectiveness,and monitor the contamination plume.
What type of data are needed?To determine the source, nature, and extent of contamination released to the environment,data will be collected from groundwater using direct push technology (DPT) temporary wells and sampling of new andexisiting monitoring wells.
How “good” do the data need to be in order to support the environmental decision? The quality of the data must beuseable (as discussed in Worksheet #37) including meeting the identified reference limits (Worksheet #15) when possible tolimit the uncertainty in the evaluation of the nature and extent of contamination and risk.
How much data are needed? The amount of data needed by site is presented in Table 11.1.
Where, when, and how should the data be collected/generated? The data summarized in Table 11.1 will be collected atthe locations identified in accordance with the final approved Work Plan.
Who will collect and generate the data? Samples will be collected by an AECOM field team and supporting
subcontractors.
How will the data be reported? The data will be reported in text, tables, and figure in the groundwater monitoring report.
How will the data be archived?AECOM will electronically archive project data as it is generated on the network server
located in the Arlington, Virginia office located at 3101 Wilson Blvd, Arlington VA 22201. Access to all servers is passwordcontrolled. AECOM will also provide NGB a copy of electronically archived data and reports for the Administrative Record.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 19 of 88
Table 11-1 Summary of Field Investigation Activities
Activity DPT Groundwater Substrate Injections
Soil Borings Advance DPT borings andcollect soil samples (8)
Analysis: VOCs, SVOCs,Metals, VPH, EPH
None None
Temporary WellInstallation Advance DPT boring andcollect grab groundwatersample (1) by temporarywell installation
Analysis: VOCs, SVOCs,Metals, VPH, EPH
See DPT None
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 20 of 88
This page intentionally left blank.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 21 of 88
Worksheet #12-1 Measurement Performance Criteria
Matrix Ground Water
Analytical_Group VOC
ConcentrationLevel Unknown
SamplingProcedure(s)1 AnalyticalMethod/SOP2 Data Quality Indicators(DQIs)MeasurementPerformance_Criteria
QC Sample and/or Activity
Used to AssessMeasurement Performance
QC Sample AssessesError for Sampling (S),Analytical (A) or Both(S&A)
2, 4 8260B/SOP202 Accuracy/Bias + 20% recovery Second source calibration
verification.A
Inertness of the injection port < 15% for bothdichlorodiphenyltrichloroethaneand Endrin
Breakdown check (SVOAanalysis only)A
Accuracy/Bias
As per DoD QSM V4.2 MS/MSD S&A
Area count within -50 to +100%RT must be +/- 30 seconds fromthe last calibration check Internal Standards A
As per DoD QSM V4.2 LCS A
Surrogate Spikes A
Precision
RPD < 30% when VOA/SVOAdetects for both duplicates are> QL.Laboratory Duplicates A
RPD < 40% when VOA/SVOAdetects for both duplicates are> QL.Field Duplicates S&A
Accuracy/Bias-Contamination No target analytes detected
> ½ RL
Equpiment Blanks, Field
Blanks, Method Blanks, TripBlanks (VOA only)S&A
Sensitivity + 40% recovery at QL Laboratory Foritifed Blank atQL A
Completeness > 95%Data Completeness Check S&A1Reference from QAPP WS #21;2Reference from QAPP WS #23LCSRPD Relative percent difference
SVOA Semi-volatile organic analysisVOA Volatile organic analysis
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 22 of 88
Worksheet #12-2 Measurement Performance Criteria
Matrix Ground Water
Analytical Group Metals
ConcentrationLevel Low
SamplingProcedure(s)1 AnalyticalMethod/SOP2 Data Quality Indicators
(DQIs)MeasurementPerformance_Criteria
QC Sample and/or ActivityUsed to AssessMeasurement Performance
QC Sample AssessesError for Sampling (S),Analytical (A) or Both(S&A)
4 SW846 3005A,
6010C/SOP103,SOP104, SOP105 Accuracy/Bias
+ 10% recovery Second source calibration
verification.A
As per DoD QSM V4.2 MS/MSD S&A
+ 20% recovery of true value Interference check sampleISCAB A
As per DoD QSM V4.2 LCS A
Precision
RPD < 20% when detects for both
duplicates are > QL.Laboratory Duplicates A
RPD < 40% when detects for bothduplicates are > QL.Field Duplicates S&A
Accuracy/Bias-Contamination
No target analytes detected
> ½ RL
Equpiment Blanks, Field
Blanks, and Method Blanks S&A
No target analytes detected> LOD Calibration Blanks A
Sensitivity + 40% recovery at QL Laboratory Foritifed Blank atQL A
Completeness > 95%Data Completeness Check S&A
1Reference from QAPP WS #212Reference from QAPP WS #23
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 23 of 88
Worksheet #12-3 Measurement Performance Criteria
Matrix Ground Water
Analytical Group Sulfide &
Alkalinity
ConcentrationLevel Low
SamplingProcedure(s)1 Analytical
Method/SOP2 Data Quality Indicators
(DQIs)
MeasurementPerformance_Criteria
QC Sample and/or ActivityUsed to AssessMeasurement Performance
QC Sample AssessesError for Sampling (S),Analytical (A) or Both(S&A)
1, 2, 4, 7 SM4500-S F, EPA376.1, SW 8469030B,
9034/SOP154
EPA
310.2/SOP154
Accuracy/Bias Analyte-specific (seeWorksheet 15.16)
LCS recoveries A
MS/MSD recoveries S&A
Precision RPD ≤20%MS/MSD RPD3 S&A
LCS/LCSD4 RPD A
RPD ≤30%Field duplicate analyses5 S&A
Accuracy/Bias andRepresentativeness
No analytes detected >½ LOQand >1/10 the amountmeasured in any sample(whichever is greater)
Method Blank (MB)A
Accuracy/Bias and
Representativeness
No target compound
concentrations >½ LOQ Equipment Blank (EB)S&A
Sensitivity Analyte DL ≤½ LOQ DL study A
LOD ≥DL LOD study A
1Reference from QAPP WS #212Reference from QAPP WS #23
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 24 of 88
Worksheet #12-4 Measurement Performance Criteria
Matrix Ground Water
Analytical Group TOC
Total andDissolved
ConcentrationLevel Unknown
SamplingProcedure(s)1 Analytical
Method/SOP2
Data QualityIndicators
(DQIs)
Measurement Performance_Criteria
QC Sample and/orActivity Used to AssessMeasurementPerformance
QC Sample AssessesError for Sampling (S),Analytical (A) or Both(S&A)
1, 2, 4, 7 EPA 415.1, SW8469060, SOP221 Accuracy/Bias Analyte-specific (see Worksheet 15.16)LCS recoveries A
MS/MSD recoveries S&A
Precision RPD ≤20%MS/MSD RPD3 S&A
LCS/LCSD4 RPD A
RPD ≤30%Field duplicate analyses5 S&A
Accuracy/Bias andRepresentativeness
No analytes detected >½ LOQ and >1/10 theamount measured in any sample (whichever isgreater)MB A
Accuracy/Bias and
Representativeness No target compound concentrations >½ LOQ EB S&A
Sensitivity
Analyte DL ≤½ LOQ DL study
LOD ≥DL LOD study
LOQ for each analyte At or below lowconcentration of calibration
curve
Completeness ≥95%Data completeness check
Accuracy/Precision r ≥0.995 Calibration (minimum offive standards and a blank)A
Accuracy/Precision %D ≤20% for each analyte ICV (second source)A
CCV A
Accuracy/Bias andRepresentativeness
No analytes detected >½ LOQ and >1/10 theamount measured in any sample (whichever isgreater)
ICB7 A
CCB7 A
1Reference from QAPP WS #21;2Reference from QAPP WS #23
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 25 of 88
Worksheet #12-5 Measurement Performance Criteria
Matrix Ground Water
Analytical Group RSK-175
ConcentrationLevel Unknown
SamplingProcedure(s)1 Analytical
Method/SOP2 Data Quality Indicators
(DQIs)MeasurementPerformance_Criteria
QC Sample and/or ActivityUsed to AssessMeasurement
Performance
QC Sample Assesses Errorfor Sampling (S), Analytical(A) or Both (S&A)
1, 2, 4, 7 EPA RSKSOP-
175/SOP236 Accuracy/Bias Analyte-specific (see Worksheet15.15)
LCS recoveries A
MS/MSD recoveries S&A
Precision RPD ≤30%MS/MSD RPD S&A
LCS/LCSD3 RPD A
RPD ≤30%Field duplicate analyses4 S&A
Accuracy/Bias andRepresentativeness
No analytes detected >½ LOQand >1/10 the amount measuredin any sample (whichever isgreater)
MB A
Accuracy/Bias and
Representativeness
No target compound
concentrations >½ LOQ EB S&A
Sensitivity
Analyte DL ≤½ LOQ DL study A
LOD ≥DL LOD study A
LOQ for each analyte At or below lowconcentration of calibration
curve
A
Completeness ≥95%Data completeness check S&A
Accuracy/Precision r ≥0.995 Calibration (minimum of fivestandards)A
Accuracy/Precision %D ≤20% for each analyte ICV (second source)
CCV A
1Reference from QAPP WS #212Reference from QAPP WS #23
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 26 of 88
Worksheet #13 Secondary Data Criteria and Limitations Table
Secondary
Data
DataSource (Originating
Organization, Report Title, andDate)
DataGenerator(s) (OriginatingOrganization, Data Types,Data Generation / CollectionDates)
How Data
Will Be Used
Limitations
On Data Use
Soil Quality S&ME, NCDENR UST-61, 24-HrRelease and UST Leak ReportingForm, NCANGB, 2012
S&ME; OWS Removal; 2012 Indicated where contaminationmay be and where boringshould be installed to avoidbackfill
Excavation was not surveyed
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 27 of 88
This page intentionally left blank.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 28 of 88
Worksheet #14 Summary of Project Tasks
Sampling Tasks: See Table 11-1 for a summary of planned sampling efforts.
Analysis Tasks: See Table 11-1 for a summary of planned analyses.
Quality Control Tasks: All matrices will have the following QC samples analyzed: duplicates, matrix spikes, matrix spikeduplicates, VOA trip blanks, and equipment blanks. All analytical methods wil perform: initial calibrations, tuning, reagent
blanks, surrogates, replicates, laboratory control spikes, and all other applicable QC defined in the method.
Secondary Data: See Worksheet #13.
Data Management Tasks: Analytical data will be placed in a secure database after validation.
Documentation and Records: All samples collected will have GPS locations documented, records of each sample collected
in notebooks, and all field measurements documented in notebooks. COCs, airbills, and sample logs will be prepared andretained for each sample.
Assessment/Audit Tasks: Field Sample Collection and Documentation Audits: March/April 2018, while field operations areactive.
Data Review Tasks: The laboratory performing the analyses of samples will verify that all data are complete for samplesreceived. Data will be validated by an independent 3rd party in accordance with Worksheets #35 and #36. Data useability will
be assessed by the AECOM Chemist. Data limitation will be determined. Data will be compared to historical data and qualityobjectives. Corrective action will be initiated if necessary.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 29 of 88
This page intentionally left blank.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 30 of 88
Worksheet #15-1 Reference Limits and Evaluation Tables
Matrix: Soil (UST)
Analytical Group: VOCs – 8260B
Analyte CAS
Number
Project
Action
Limit
(µg/kg)
Project
Action
Limit
Reference
Laboratory
Control
Spike
Lower
Control
Limit (%)
Laboratory
Control
Spike Upper
Control
Limit (%)
Laboratory-specific
Quantitation Limits
LOQ
(µg/kg)
LOD
(µg/kg)
DL
(µg/kg)
1,1,1,2-Tetrachloroethane 630-20-6 4 NUP 78 78 125 5 2
1,1,1-Trichloroethane 71-55-6 1600 NUP 73 73 130 5 2
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane 79-34-5 11 NUP 70 70 124 5 2
1,1,2-Trichloroethane 79-00-5 2 NUP 78 78 121 5 2
1,1-Dichloroethane 75-34-3 32 NUP 76 76 125 5 2
1,1-Dichloroethene 75-35-4 45 NUP 70 70 131 5 2
1,1-Dichloropropene 563-58-6 NE NUP 76 76 125 5 2
1,2,3-Trichlorobenzene 87-61-6 NE NUP 66 66 130 5 2
1,2,3-Trichloropropane 96-18-4 NE NUP 73 73 125 5 2
1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene 120-82-1 2600 NUP 67 67 129 5 2
1,2,4-Trimethylbenzene 95-63-6 8500 NUP 75 75 123 5 2
1,2-Dibromoethane 106-93-4 0.0981 NUP 78 78 122 5 2
1,2-Dichlorobenzene 95-50-1 230 NUP 78 78 121 5 2
1,2-Dichloroethane 107-06-2 1.91 NUP 73 73 128 5 2
1,2-Dichloropropane 78-87-5 3 NUP 76 76 123 5 2
1,3,5-Trimethylbenzene 108-67-8 8300 NUP 73 73 124 5 2
1,3-Dichlorobenzene 541-73-1 7600 NUP 77 77 121 5 2
1,3-Dichloropropane 142-28-9 NE NUP 77 77 121 5 2
1,4-Dichlorobenzene 106-46-7 99 NUP 75 75 120 5 2
2,2-Dichloropropane 594-20-7 NE NUP 67 67 133 5 2
2-Butanone 78-93-3 16000 NUP 51 51 148 10 8
2-Chlorotoluene 95-49-8 NE NUP 75 75 122 5 2
2-Hexanone 591-78-6 100 NUP 53 53 145 10 8
4-Chlorotoluene 106-43-4 100 NUP 72 72 124 5 2
Acetone 67-64-1 24000 NUP 36 36 164 20 16
Benzene 71-43-2 5.6 NUP 77 77 121 5 2
Bromobenzene 108-86-1 NE NUP 78 78 121 5 2
Bromochloromethane 74-97-5 NE NUP 78 78 125 5 2
Bromodichloromethane 75-27-4 NE NUP 75 75 127 5 2
Bromoform 75-25-2 26 NUP 67 67 132 5 2
Bromomethane 74-83-9 400 NUP 53 53 143 5 4
Carbon tetrachloride 56-23-5 NE NUP 70 70 135 5 2
Chlorobenzene 108-90-7 440 NUP 79 79 120 5 2
Chlorodibromomethane 124-48-1 2.1 NUP 74 74 126 5 2
Chloroethane 75-00-3 NE NUP 59 59 139 5 4
Chloroform 67-66-3 370 NUP 78 78 123 5 2
Chloromethane 74-87-3 20 NUP 50 50 136 5 4
cis-1,2-Dichloroethene 156-59-2 350 NUP 77 77 123 5 2
cis-1,3-Dichloropropene 10061-01-5 11 NUP 74 74 126 5 2
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 31 of 88
Analyte CAS
Number
Project
Action
Limit
(µg/kg)
Project
Action
Limit
Reference
Laboratory
Control
Spike
Lower
Control
Limit (%)
Laboratory
Control
Spike Upper
Control
Limit (%)
Laboratory-specific
Quantitation Limits
LOQ
(µg/kg)
LOD
(µg/kg)
DL
(µg/kg)
Dichlorodifluoromethane 75-71-8 210000 NUP 29 29 149 5 4
Ethanol 64-17-5 16000 NUP 45 45 159 500 250
Ethyl tert-butyl ether (ETBE) 63-79-23 200 NUP 72 72 126 5 2
Ethylbenzene 100-41-4 4900 NUP 76 76 122 5 2
Isopropylbenzene 98-82-8 1700 NUP 68 68 134 5 2
Isopropyl ether 108-20-3 370 NUP 69 69 127 5 2
m,p-Xylene 108-38-3 NE NUP 77 77 124 5 2
Methyl isobutyl ketone
(MIBK)108-10-1 400 NUP 65 65 135 10 8
Methyl tert-butyl Ether 1634-04-4 91 NUP 73 73 125 5 2
Methylene chloride 75-09-2 20 NUP 70 70 128 5 4
Naphthalene 91-20-3 160 NUP 62 62 129 5 2
n-Butylbenzene 104-51-8 4300 NUP 70 70 128 5 2
n-Propylbenzene 103-65-1 1700 NUP 73 73 125 5 2
o-Xylene 95-47-6 NE NUP 77 77 123 5 2
p-Isopropyltoluene 99-87-6 120 NUP 73 73 127 5 2
sec-Butylbenzene 135-98-8 3300 NUP 73 73 126 5 2
Styrene 100-42-5 1500 NUP 76 76 124 5 2
tert-Amyl alcohol (TAA)75-85-4 100 NUP TBD TBD TBD 200 TBD
tert-Amyl methyl ether
(TAME)994-05-8 520 NUP 73 73 126 5 2
tert-Butyl alcohol (TBA)75-65-0 40 NUP 68 68 133 100 40
tert-Butyl formate (TBF)762-75-4 100 NUP TBD TBD TBD 20 TBD
tert-Butylbenzene 98-06-6 3400 NUP 73 73 125 5 2
Tetrachloroethene 127-18-4 7.4 NUP 73 73 128 5 2
Toluene 108-88-3 4300 NUP 77 77 121 5 2
trans-1,2-Dichloroethene 156-60-5 540 NUP 74 74 125 5 2
trans-1,3-Dichloropropene 10061-02-6 11 NUP 71 71 130 5 2
Trichloroethene 79-01-6 19 NUP 77 77 123 5 2
Trichlorofluoromethane 75-69-4 29000 NUP 62 62 140 5 4
Vinyl chloride 75-01-4 1.81 NUP 56 56 135 5 2
Xylene (total)1330-20-7 4600 NUP 78 78 124 5 2
Vinyl Acetate 108-05-4 390 NUP 50 50 151 10 4
NUP: NCDENR UST Program’s Soil to Groundwater Maximum Soil Contaminant Concentration Levels (MSCCs) for Required Target Analytes of
Petroleum Contaminated Soil
NE: Not established
TBD: To be Determined
1: The Project Action Limit will be elevated to the achievable laboratory LOD, when this LOD is not less than the referenced standard
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 32 of 88
Worksheet #15-2 Reference Limits and Evaluation Tables
Matrix: Aqueous (UST)
Analytical Group: VOCs – 6200B
Analyte CAS
Number
Projec
t
Action
Limit
(ug/L)
Project
Action
Limit
Referenc
e
Laboratory
Control Spike
Lower Control
Limit (%)
Laboratory
Control Spike
Upper Control
Limit (%)
Laboratory-specific
Quantitation Limits
RL
(µg/L)
MDL
(µg/L)
1,1,1,2-Tetrachloroethane 630-20-6 1 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,1,1-Trichloroethane 71-55-6 200 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane 79-34-5 0.2 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,1,2-Trichloroethane 79-00-5 0.6 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,1-Dichloroethane 75-34-3 6 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,1-Dichloroethene 75-35-4 7 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,1-Dichloropropene 563-58-6 NE NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,2,3-Trichlorobenzene 87-61-6 NE NC 2L NA NA 0.5 0.1
1,2,3-Trichloropropane 96-18-4 0.0051 NC 2L 70 130 2.0 0.3
1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene 120-82-1 70 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,2,4-Trimethylbenzene 95-63-6 400 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,2-Dibromoethane 106-93-4 0.021 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,2-Dichlorobenzene 95-50-1 20 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,2-Dichloroethane 107-06-2 0.4 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,2-Dichloropropane 78-87-5 0.6 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,3,5-Trimethylbenzene 108-67-8 400 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,3-Dichlorobenzene 541-73-1 200 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,3-Dichloropropane 142-28-9 NE 70 130 0.5 0.1
1,4-Dichlorobenzene 106-46-7 6 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
2,2-Dichloropropane 594-20-7 NE 70 130 0.5 0.1
2-Butanone 78-93-3 4,000 NC 2L 70 130 5.0 1.0
2-Chlorotoluene 95-49-8 100 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
2-Hexanone 591-78-6 40 NC 2L 70 130 5.0 1.0
4-Chlorotoluene 106-43-4 24 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Acetone 67-64-1 6,000 NC 2L 70 130 12 3.0
Benzene 71-43-2 1 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Bromobenzene 108-86-1 NE 70 130 0.5 0.1
Bromochloromethane 74-97-5 NE 70 130 0.5 0.1
Bromodichloromethane 75-27-4 0.6 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Bromoform 75-25-2 0.6 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Bromomethane 74-83-9 100 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Carbon tetrachloride 56-23-5 0.3 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Chlorobenzene 108-90-7 50 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Chlorodibromomethane 124-48-1 0.4 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Chloroethane 75-00-3 3,000 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Chloroform 67-66-3 70 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Chloromethane 74-87-3 3 NC 2L 70 130 0.8 0.2
cis-1,2-Dichloroethene 156-59-2 70 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
cis-1,3-Dichloropropene 10061-01-
5 0.4 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 33 of 88
Matrix: Aqueous (UST)
Analytical Group: VOCs – 6200B
Analyte CAS
Number
Projec
t
Action
Limit
(ug/L)
Project
Action
Limit
Referenc
e
Laboratory
Control Spike
Lower Control
Limit (%)
Laboratory
Control Spike
Upper Control
Limit (%)
Laboratory-specific
Quantitation Limits
RL
(µg/L)
MDL
(µg/L)
Dichlorodifluoromethane 75-71-8 1,000 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Ethanol 64-17-5 4,000 NC 2L NA NA 200 50
Ethyl tert-butyl ether (ETBE)63-79-23 47 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Ethylbenzene 100-41-4 600 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Isopropylbenzene 98-82-8 70 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Isopropyl ether 108-20-3 70 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
m,p-Xylene 108-38-3 NE NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Methyl isobutyl ketone
(MIBK)108-10-1 100 NC 2L 70 130 5.0 1.0
Methyl tert-butyl Ether 1634-04-4 20 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Methylene chloride 75-09-2 5 NC 2L 70 130 0.8 0.2
Naphthalene 91-20-3 6 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
n-Butylbenzene 104-51-8 70 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
n-Propylbenzene 103-65-1 70 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
o-Xylene 95-47-6 NE 70 130 0.5 0.1
p-Isopropyltoluene 99-87-6 25 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
sec-Butylbenzene 135-98-8 70 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Styrene 100-42-5 70 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
tert-Amyl alcohol (TAA)75-85-4 40 NC 2L 70 130 50 10
tert-Amyl methyl ether (TAME)994-05-8 128 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
tert-Butyl alcohol (TBA)75-65-0 10 NC 2L 70 130 16 4.0
tert-Butyl formate (TBF)762-75-4 40 NC 2L 70 130 5.0 1.0
tert-Butylbenzene 98-06-6 70 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Tetrachloroethene 127-18-4 0.7 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Toluene 108-88-3 600 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
trans-1,2-Dichloroethene 156-60-5 100 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
trans-1,3-Dichloropropene 10061-02-
6 0.4 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Trichloroethene 79-01-6 3 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Trichlorofluoromethane 75-69-4 2,000 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Vinyl chloride 75-01-4 0.031 NC 2L 70 130 0.5 0.1
Xylene (total)1330-20-7 500 NC 2L NA NA 0.5 0.1
Vinyl Acetate 108-05-4 88 NC 2L 70 130 0.8 0.2
NC 2L: North Carolina 15A NCAC 02L .0202 Groundwater Standards
NE: Not established
TBD: To be Determined
1: The Project Action Limit will be elevated to the achievable laboratory LOD, when this LOD is not less than the referenced standard.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 34 of 88
Worksheet #15-3 Reference Limits and Evaluation Tables
Matrix: Aqueous (UST)
Analytical Group: VOCs – EPA 624
Analyte CAS
Number
Project
Action
Limit
(ug/L)
Project
Action
Limit
Reference
Laboratory
Control Spike
Lower Control
Limit (%)
Laboratory
Control Spike
Upper Control
Limit (%)
Laboratory-specific
Quantitation Limits
LOQ
(µg/L)
LOD
(µg/L)
DL
(µg/L)
1,2-Dichlorobenzene 95-50-1 20 NC 2L 80 119 5 2 1
1,3-Dichlorobenzene 541-73-1 200 NC 2L 80 119 5 2 1
1,4-Dichlorobenzene 106-46-7 6 NC 2L 79 118 5 2 1
Benzene 71-43-2 11 NC 2L 79 120 5 2 0.9
Chlorobenzene 108-90-7 50 NC 2L 82 118 5 2 0.8
Ethylbenzene 100-41-4 600 NC 2L 79 121 5 2 0.8
m,p-Xylene 108-383 NE NC 2L 80 121 5 2 0.9
o-Xylene 95-47-6 NE NC 2L 78 122 5 2 0.9
Toluene 108-88-3 600 NC 2L 80 121 5 2 0.8
Xylene (total)1330-20-7 500 NC 2L 79 121 5 2 0.9
NC 2L: North Carolina 15A NCAC 02L .0202 Groundwater Standards
NE: Not established
1: The Project Action Limit will be elevated to the achievable laboratory LOD, when this LOD is not less than the referenced standard.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 35 of 88
Worksheet #15-4 Reference Limits and Evaluation Tables
Matrix: Soil (UST)Analytical Group: SVOC -8270D
Analyte CASNumber
ProjectActionLimit(µg/kg)
ProjectActionLimitReference
LaboratoryControlSpike LowerControlLimit (%)
LaboratoryControlSpike UpperControlLimit (%)
Laboratory-specificQuantitation Limits
LOQ
(µg/Kg)
LOD
(µg/Kg)
DL
(µg/Kg)
1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene 120-82-1 2600 NUP 34 118 33 33 17
1,2-Dichlorobenzene 95-50-1 230 NUP 33 117 33 33 17
1,2-Diphenylhydrazine 122-66-7 NE NUP 41 125 33 33 17
1,3-Dichlorobenzene 541-73-1 7600 NUP 30 115 33 33 17
1,4-Dichlorobenzene 106-46-7 99 NUP 31 115 33 33 17
2,4,6-Trichlorophenol 88-06-2 101 NUP 39 126 33 33 17
2,4-Dichlorophenol 120-83-2 3.41 NUP 40 122 33 33 17
2,4-Dimethylphenol 105-67-9 640 NUP 30 127 33 33 17
2,4-Dinitrophenol 51-28-5 NE NUP 56 120 1000 1000 300
2-Chloronaphthalene 91-58-7 NE NUP 41 114 33 13 7
2-Chlorophenol 95-57-8 NE NUP 34 121 33 33 17
2-Methylnaphthalene 91-57-6 3600 NUP 38 122 17 13 3
2-Methylphenol 95-48-7 NE NUP 32 122 33 33 17
2-Nitrophenol 88-75-5 NE NUP 36 123 33 33 17
3,3'-Dicholorobenzidine 91-94-1 NE NUP 22 121 330 330 100
3+4-Methylphenol 106-44-5 NE NUP 42 126 33 33 17
4,6-Dinitro-2-methylphenol 534-52-1 NE NUP 29 132 500 500 170
4-Bromophenyl-phenylether 101-55-3 NE NUP 46 124 33 33 17
4-Chloro-3-methylphenol 59-50-7 NE NUP 45 122 33 33 17
4-Chloroaniline 106-47-8 NE NUP 17 106 33 33 17
4-Chlorophenyl-phenyl
ether 7005-72-3 NE NUP 45 121 33 33 17
4-Nitrophenol 100-02-7 NE NUP 30 132 500 500 170
Acenaphthene 83-32-9 8200 NUP 40 123 17 13 3
Acenaphthylene 208-96-8 11000 NUP 32 132 17 13 3
Anthracene 120-12-7 940000 NUP 47 123 17 13 3
Benzo(a) pyrene 50-32-8 96 NUP 45 129 17 13 3
Benzo(a)anthracene 56-55-3 350 NUP 49 126 17 13 3
Benzo(b) fluoranthene 205-99-2 1200 NUP 45 132 17 13 3
Benzo(g,h,i) perylene 191-24-2 6400000 NUP 43 134 17 13 3
Benzo(k) fluoranthene 207-08-9 12000 NUP 47 132 17 13 3
Benzoic acid 65-85-0 120000 NUP 41 122 500 500 167
Benzyl alcohol 100-51-6 2000 NUP 29 122 500 500 167
Bis(2-chloroethoxy)methane 111-91-1 NE NUP 36 121 33 33 17
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether 111-44-4 0.161 NUP 31 120 33 33 17
Bis(2-chloroisopropyl)ether 108-60-1 NE NUP 33 131 33 33 17
Bis(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate 117-81-7 6600 NUP 51 133 170 130 67
Butylbenzylphthalate 85-68-7 NE NUP 48 132 170 130 67
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 36 of 88
Matrix: Soil (UST)Analytical Group: SVOC -8270D
Analyte CASNumber
ProjectActionLimit(µg/kg)
ProjectActionLimitReference
LaboratoryControl
Spike LowerControlLimit (%)
LaboratoryControl
Spike UpperControlLimit (%)
Laboratory-specificQuantitation Limits
LOQ(µg/Kg)LOD(µg/Kg)DL(µg/Kg)
Chrysene 218-01-9 39000 NUP 50 124 17 13 3
Dibenzo(a,h) anthracene 53-70-3 170 NUP 45 134 17 13 3
Dibenzofuran 132-64-9 4700 NUP 44 120 33 33 17
Diethylphthalate 84-66-2 NE NUP 50 124 170 130 67
Dimethylphthalate 131-11-3 NE NUP 48 124 170 130 67
Di-n-butylphthalate 84-74-2 NE NUP 51 128 170 130 67
Di-n-octylphthalate 117-84-0 NE NUP 45 140 170 130 67
Fluoranthene 206-44-0 290000 NUP 50 127 17 13 3
Fluorene 86-73-7 47000 NUP 43 125 17 13 3
Hexachlorobenzene 118-74-1 NE NUP 45 122 17 13 3
Hexachlorobutadiene 87-68-3 230 NUP 32 123 33 33 17
Hexachlorocyclopenta-diene 77-47-4 NE NUP 60 157 500 500 170
Hexachloroethane 67-72-1 NE NUP 28 117 170 130 33
Indeno(1,2,3,-cd) pyrene 193-39-5 3400 NUP 45 133 17 13 3
Isophorone 78-59-1 NE NUP 30 122 33 33 17
Naphthalene 91-20-3 160 NUP 35 123 17 13 3
Nitrobenzene 98-95-3 NE NUP 34 122 33 33 17
N-Nitrosodimethylamine 62-75-9 NE NUP 23 120 167 167 67
N-Nitroso-di-npropylamine 621-64-7 NE NUP 36 120 33 33 17
N-Nitrosodiphenylamine 86-30-6 NE NUP 38 127 33 33 17
Pentachlorophenol 87-86-5 6.51 NUP 25 133 170 170 33
Phenanthrene 85-01-8 56000 NUP 50 121 17 13 3
Phenol 108-95-2 170 NUP 34 121 33 33 17
Pyrene 129-00-0 270000 NUP 47 127 17 13 3
NUP: NCDENR UST Program’s Soil to Groundwater Maximum Residential Soil Contaminant Concentration Levels (MSCCs) for
Required Target Analytes of Petroleum Contaminated Soil
NE: Not established
TBD: To be Determined
1: The Project Action Limit will be elevated to the achievable laboratory LOD, when this LOD is not less than the referenced standard.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 37 of 88
Worksheet #15-5 Reference Limits and Evaluation Tables
Matrix: Aqueous (UST)Analytical Group: SVOC –EPA 625 plus 10 largest non-target peaks
Analyte CASNumber
ProjectActionLimit(ug/L)
ProjectActionLimitReference
LaboratoryControlSpike LowerControlLimit (%)
LaboratoryControlSpike UpperControlLimit (%)
Laboratory-specificQuantitation Limits
LOQ(µg/L)LOD(µg/L)DL(µg/L)
1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene 120-82-1 70 NC 2L 29 116 5 1 0.3
1,2,Diphenylhydrazine 122-66-7 NE NC 2L 49 122 5 0.5 0.2
1,2-Dichlorobenzene 95-50-1 20 NC 2L 32 111 5 1 0.3
1,3-Dichlorobenzene 541-73-1 200 NC 2L 28 110 5 1 0.3
1,4-Dichlorobenzene 106-46-7 6 NC 2L 29 112 5 1 0.3
1-Methylnaphthalene 90-12-0 1 NC 2L 41 119 5 1 0.3
2,4,6-Trichlorophenol 88-06-2 4 NC 2L 50 125 5 2 0.7
2,4-Dichlorophenol 120-83-2 0.981 NC 2L 47 121 5 1 0.3
2,4-Dimethylphenol 105-67-9 100 NC 2L 31 124 5 1 0.3
2,4-Dinitrophenol 51-28-5 NE NC 2L 23 143 40 40 10
2-Chloronaphthalene 91-58-7 NE NC 2L 40 116 5 0.5 0.2
2-Chlorophenol 95-57-8 0.41 NC 2L 38 117 5 1 0.3
2-Methylnaphthalene 91-57-6 30 NC 2L 40 121 5 1 0.3
2-Methylphenol 95-48-7 400 NC 2L 30 117 5 1 0.3
2-Nitrophenol 88-75-5 NE NC 2L 47 123 5 1 0.4
3,3'-Dicholorobenzidine 91-94-1 NE NC 2L 27 129 5 3 0.8
4-Methylphenol 106-44-5 40 NC 2L 25 120 5 1 0.3
4,6-Dinitro-2-methylphenol 534-52-1 NE NC 2L 44 137 15 15 4
4-Bromophenyl-phenylether 101-55-3 NE NC 2L 55 124 5 1 0.3
4-Chloro-3-methylphenol 59-50-7 NE NC 2L 52 119 5 1 0.3
4-Chloroaniline 106-47-8 NE NC 2L 33 117 5 1 0.3
4-Chlorophenyl-phenylether 7005-72-3 NE NC 2L 53 121 5 1 0.3
4-Nitrophenol 100-02-7 NE NC 2L 20 73 15 15 5
Acenaphthene 83-32-9 80 NC 2L 47 122 5 1 0.3
Acenaphthylene 208-96-8 200 NC 2L 41 130 5 1 0.3
Anthracene 120-12-7 2,000 NC 2L 57 123 5 0.5 0.2
Benzoic Acid 65-85-0 30,000 NC 2L 10 64 30 25 10
Benzo(a) pyrene 50-32-8 0.0051 NC 2L 54 128 5 1 0.3
Benzo(a)anthracene 56-55-3 0.051 NC 2L 58 125 5 0.5 0.2
Benzo(b) fluoranthene 205-99-2 0.051 NC 2L 53 131 5 1 0.3
Benzo(g,h,i) perylene 191-24-2 200 NC 2L 50 134 5 0.5 0.2
Benzo(k) fluoranthene 207-08-9 0.51 NC 2L 57 129 5 1 0.3
Benzyl alcohol 100-51-6 700 NC 2L 31 112 5 2 0.7
Bis(2-chloroethoxy)
methane 111-91-1 NE NC 2L 48 120 5 2 0.5
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether 111-44-4 0.031 NC 2L 43 118 5 1 0.4
Bis(2-chloroisopropyl)ether 108-60-1 NE NC 2L 37 130 5 1 0.3
Bis(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate 117-81-7 3 NC 2L 55 135 5 3 1
Butylbenzylphthalate 85-68-7 1,000 NC 2L 53 134 5 3 0.8
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 38 of 88
Matrix: Aqueous (UST)Analytical Group: SVOC –EPA 625 plus 10 largest non-target peaks
Analyte CAS
Number
ProjectAction
Limit(ug/L)
ProjectActionLimitReference
LaboratoryControlSpike LowerControlLimit (%)
LaboratoryControlSpike UpperControlLimit (%)
Laboratory-specificQuantitation Limits
LOQ(µg/L)LOD(µg/L)DL(µg/L)
Chrysene 218-01-9 5 NC 2L 59 123 5 0.5 0.2
Dibenzo(a,h) anthracene 53-70-3 0.0051 NC 2L 51 134 5 1 0.4
Dibenzofuran 132-64-9 28 NC 2L 53 118 5 0.5 0.2
Diethylphthalate 84-66-2 6,000 NC 2L 56 125 5 1 0.3
Dimethylphthalate 131-11-3 NE NC 2L 45 127 5 3 1
Di-n-butylphthalate 84-74-2 700 NC 2L 59 127 5 2 0.5
Di-n-octylphthalate 117-84-0 100 NC 2L 51 140 5 2 0.5
Fluoranthene 206-44-0 300 NC 2L 57 128 5 1 0.3
Fluorene 86-73-7 300 NC 2L 52 124 5 1 0.3
Hexachlorobenzene 118-74-1 0.021 NC 2L 53 125 5 3 1
Hexachlorobutadiene 87-68-3 0.41 NC 2L 22 124 5 3 0.8
Hexachlorocyclopentadie
ne 77-47-4 NE NC 2L 39 133 15 5 2
Hexachloroethane 67-72-1 NE NC 2L 21 115 5 1 0.4
Indeno(1,2,3,-cd) pyrene 193-39-5 0.051 NC 2L 52 134 5 1 0.3
Isophorone 78-59-1 40 NC 2L 42 124 5 1 0.3
Naphthalene 91-20-3 6 NC 2L 40 121 5 0.5 0.2
Nitrobenzene 98-95-3 NE NC 2L 45 121 5 2 0.5
N-Nitroso-di-npropylamine 621-64-7 NE NC 2L 49 119 5 1 0.4
N-Nitrosodiphenylamine 86-30-6 NE NC 2L 51 123 5 1 0.3
Pentachlorophenol 87-86-5 0.31 NC 2L 35 138 15 10 3
Phenanthrene 85-01-8 200 NC 2L 59 120 5 0.5 0.2
Phenol 108-95-2 30 NC 2L 30 70 5 1 0.4
Pyrene 129-00-0 200 NC 2L 57 126 5 0.5 0.2
NC 2L: North Carolina 15A NCAC 02L .0202 Groundwater Standards
NE: Not established
1: The Project Action Limit will be elevated to the achievable laboratory LOD, when this LOD is not less than the referenced standard.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 39 of 88
Worksheet #15-5 Reference Limits and Evaluation Tables (continued)
Matrix: Soil (UST)Analytical Group: PAH -8270D SIM
Analyte CASNumber
ProjectActionLimit
(µg/kg)
ProjectActionLimitReference
LaboratoryControlSpike LowerControlLimit (%)
LaboratoryControl SpikeUpperControl Limit(%)
Laboratory-specificQuantitation LimitsLOQ(µg/kg)
LOD(µg/kg)
DL(µg/kg)
1-Methylnaphthalene 90-12-0 4000 NUP 43 111 1.7 1.33 0.67
2-Methylnaphthalene 91-57-6 3600000 NUP 39 114 1.7 1.33 0.67
Acenaphthene 83-32-9 8200000 NUP 44 111 1.7 1.33 0.67
Acenaphthylene 208-96-8 11000000 NUP 39 116 1.7 1.33 0.33
Anthracene 120-12-7 940000 NUP 50 114 1.7 1.33 0.33
Benz(a)anthracene 56-55-3 350000 NUP 54 122 1.7 1.33 0.67
Benzo(a)pyrene 50-32-8 96000 NUP 50 125 1.7 1.33 0.67
Benzo(b)fluoranthene 205-99-2 1200000 NUP 53 128 1.7 1.33 0.67
Benzo(g,h,i)perylene 191-24-2 6400000 NUP 49 127 1.7 1.33 0.67
Benzo(k)fluoranthene 207-08-9 12000000 NUP 56 123 1.7 1.33 0.67
Chrysene 218-01-9 3900000
0 NUP 57 118 1.7 1.33 0.33
Dibenzo(a,h)anthra-
cene 53-70-3 170000 NUP 50 129 1.7 1.33 0.67
Dibenzofuran 132-64-9 4700000 NUP 35 108 1.7 TBD TBD
Fluoranthene 206-44-0 290000 NUP 55 119 1.7 1.33 0.67
Fluorene 86-73-7 4700000
0 NUP 47 114 1.7 1.33 0.67
Indeno(1,2,3-
cd)pyrene 193-39-5 3400000 NUP 49 130 1.7 1.33 0.67
Naphthalene 91-20-3 160000 NUP 38 111 1.7 1.33 0.67
Phenanthrene 85-01-8 56000000 NUP 49 113 1.7 1.33 0.67
Pyrene 129-00-0 270000 NUP 55 117 1.7 1.33 0.33
NUP: NCDENR UST Program’s Soil to Groundwater Maximum Residential Soil Contaminant Concentration Levels(MSCCs) for Required Target Analytes of Petroleum Contaminated Soil
NE: Not established
TBD: To be Determined
1: The Project Action Limit will be elevated to the achievable laboratory LOD, when this LOD is not less than thereferenced standard.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 40 of 88
Worksheet #15-5 Reference Limits and Evaluation Tables (continued)
Matrix: Aqueous (UST)Analytical Group: PAH -8270D SIM
Analyte CASNumber
ProjectActionLimit(ug/L)
ProjectActionLimitReference
LaboratoryControlSpikeLowerControlLimit (%)
Laboratory
ControlSpike UpperControlLimit (%)
Laboratory-specificQuantitation Limits
LOQ(µg/L)LOD(µg/L)DL(µg/L)
1-Methylnaphthalene 90-12-0 1 NC 2L 41 115 0.05 0.04 0.01
2-Methylnaphthalene 91-57-6 30 NC 2L 39 114 0.05 0.04 0.01
Acenaphthene 83-32-9 80 NC 2L 48 114 0.05 0.04 0.01
Acenaphthylene 208-96-8 200 NC 2L 35 121 0.05 0.04 0.01
Anthracene 120-12-7 2,000 NC 2L 53 119 0.05 0.04 0.01
Benz(a)anthracene 56-55-3 0.05 NC 2L 59 120 0.05 0.04 0.01
Benzo(a)pyrene 50-32-8 0.0051 NC 2L 53 120 0.05 0.04 0.01
Benzo(b)fluoranthene 205-99-2 0.05 NC 2L 53 126 0.05 0.04 0.01
Benzo(g,h,i)perylene 191-24-2 200 NC 2L 44 128 0.05 0.04 0.01
Benzo(k)fluoranthene 207-08-9 0.5 NC 2L 54 125 0.05 0.04 0.01
Chrysene 218-01-9 5 NC 2L 57 120 0.05 0.04 0.01
Dibenzo(a,h)anthracene 53-70-3 0.0051 NC 2L 44 131 0.05 0.04 0.01
Dibenzofuran 132-64-9 28 NC 2L 35 120 0.05 0.04 0.01
Fluoranthene 206-44-0 300 NC 2L 58 120 0.05 0.04 0.01
Fluorene 86-73-7 300 NC 2L 50 118 0.05 0.04 0.01
Indeno(1,2,3-cd)pyrene 193-39-5 0.05 NC 2L 48 130 0.05 0.04 0.01
Naphthalene 91-20-3 6 NC 2L 43 114 0.06 0.1 0.03
Phenanthrene 85-01-8 200 NC 2L 53 115 0.06 0.1 0.03
Pyrene 129-00-0 200 NC 2L 53 121 0.05 0.04 0.01
NC 2L: North Carolina 15A NCAC 02L .0202 Groundwater Standards
NE: Not established
1: The Project Action Limit will be elevated to the achievable laboratory LOD, when this LOD is not less than thereferenced standard.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 41 of 88
Worksheet #15-5 Reference Limits and Evaluation Tables (continued)
Matrix: Aqueous (UST)Analytical Group: MADEP EPH/VPH
Analyte Range
ProjectActionLimit(ug/L)
Project ActionLimit Reference
LaboratoryControlSpikeLowerControlLimit (%)
LaboratoryControlSpikeUpperControlLimit (%)
Laboratory-specificQuantitation Limits
LOQ(µg/L)LOD(µg/L)DL(µg/L)
Aliphatics – C5-C8 C5-C6 400 NCDENR USTProgram 70 130 100 100 50
C9-C12 C9-C12 A NCDENR USTProgram 70 130 100 100 50
C9-C18 C9-C18 B NCDENR USTProgram 40 140 30 30 30
C19-C36 C19-C36 10,000 NCDENR USTProgram 40 140 50 50 50
Aromatics C9-C10 C9-C10 C NCDENR USTProgram 70 130 100 40 20
C11-C22 C11-C22 D NCDENR USTProgram 40 140 40 40 40
C9-C18 Aliphatics = a+b, Action Limit = 700 ug/L
C9-C22 Aromatics = c+d, Action Limit = 200 ug/L
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 42 of 88
Worksheet #15-6 Reference Limits and Evaluation Tables
Matrix: Solid (UST)Analytical Group: MADEP EPH/VPH
Analyte CASNumber
ProjectActionLimit(ug/kg)
Project ActionLimit Reference
LaboratoryControlSpikeLowerControlLimit (%)
LaboratoryControlSpikeUpperControlLimit (%)
Laboratory-specificQuantitation Limits
LOQ
(µg/Kg)
LOD
(µg/Kg)
DL
(µg/Kg)
Aliphatics – C5-C8 C5-C6 68 NCDENR USTProgram 70 130 5000 5000 2500
C9-C12 C9-C12 a NCDENR USTProgram 70 130 5000 5000 2500
C9-C18 C9-C18 b NCDENR USTProgram 40 140 6000 6000 6000
C19-C36 C19-C36 No
Limit
NCDENR UST
Program 40 140 12000 12000 12000
Aromatics C9-C10 C9-C10 c NCDENR USTProgram 70 130 5000 5000 2500
C11-C22 C11-C22 d NCDENR USTProgram 40 140 12000 12000 12000
C9-C18 Aliphatics = a+b, Action Limit = 540 mg/kg
C19-C36 = Considered immobileC9-C22 Aromatics = c+d, Action Limit 31 mg/kg
Matrix: Soil (UST)
Analytical Group: 3050B/6010C
Analyte CASNumber
ProjectActionLimit(mg/kg)
ProjectAction LimitReference
LaboratoryControlSpike LowerControl Limit(%)
LaboratoryControlSpikeUpperControl
Limit (%)
Laboratory-specificQuantitation Limits
LOQ(mg/Kg)LOD(mg/Kg)DL(mg/Kg)
Chromium(Total)7440-47-3 5.4 NCDENRUSTProgram 85 113 3 0.375 0.11
Lead 7439-92-1 270 NCDENRUSTProgram 81 112 3 0.75 0.5
Matrix: Water
Analytical Group: 6010C/7470
Analyte CASNumber
ProjectActionLimit(ug/L)
ProjectActionLimitReference
LaboratoryControlSpike LowerControl Limit(%)
LaboratoryControlSpike UpperControlLimit (%)
Laboratory-specificQuantitation Limits
LOQ(µg/L)LOD(µg/L)DL(µg/L)
Chromium (Total) 7440-47-3 10 NC 2L 90 113 30 3.75 1.3
Lead 7439-92-1 15 NC 2L 86 113 30 7.5 4.7
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 43 of 88
Worksheet #16 Project Schedule/Timeline Table
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 44 of 88
This page intentionally left blank.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 45 of 88
Worksheet #17 Sampling Design and Rationale
Describe and provide a rationale for choosing the sampling approach (e.g., grid system, biased statisticalapproach):
The sampling design was developed based on scoping sessions with project stakeholders and the project team. Projectobjectives were discussed and identified during scoping sessions.
Describe the sampling design and rationale in terms of what matrices will be sampled, what analytical groups will
and at what concentration levels, the sampling locations (including QC, critical, and background samples), thenumber of samples to be taken, and the sampling frequency (including seasonal considerations) [May refer to mapor Worksheet #18 for details]:
The final sampling design to meet project objectives and goals are presented in Table 11-1. The proposed samplinglocations are presented in the WP.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 46 of 88
Worksheet #18 Sampling Locations and Methods/SOP Requirements
Refer to work plan for sampling locations, methods, and analyses.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: November 2012
Page 47 of 88
Worksheet #19 Analytical SOP Requirements Table
Media Method Container/ Sample Size Preservative Holding Time
Aqueous VOC by 6200B (3) 40-mL glass vials, Teflon-lined septum caps Cool to 6 ºC; <2 with HCL, noheadspace 14 Days
Aqueous VOC by 624 (3) 40-mL glass vials, Teflon-lined septum caps Cool to 6 ºC; <2 with HCL, no
headspace 14 days
Aqueous SVOC by 625 +TICs (2) 1-L amber glass, Teflon-lined lid Cool to 6 ºC Extracted within 7 days after collectionAnalyzed within 40 days after extraction
Aqueous MADEP VPH (2) 250 mL amber glass, Teflon-lined lid Cool to 6 ºC Extracted within 7 days after collectionAnalyzed within 40 days after extraction
Aqueous MADEP EPH (2) 1-L amber glass, Teflon-lined lid Cool to 6 ºC Extracted within 14 days after collectionAnalyzed within 40 days after extraction
Aqueous
Metals by 6010C (UST)Or
Metals by 6010C/7470 (AcidTank)
(1) 250-mL plastic Cool to 6 ºC ;HNO3 to pH <2
72 hours to digestion (North Carolina only)28 days to analysis (Hg)6 months to analysis (all other metals)
Aqueous Corrosivity as pH by 9045D (1) 250-mL plastic Cool to 6 ºC Analyze immediately
Soil VOCs by 5035B/8260B
(3) 40 mL glass vials, Teflon-lined septum caps
OR(3) En Core™ samplers
(2) 1g of sodium bisulfate in 5
mL DI(1) 5 ml methanolVials or Encores : Cool to 6ºC
Encores preserved at lab within 48 hours
14 days to analysis
Soil MADEP VPH
(1) 40 mL glass vials, Teflon-lined septum caps
OR(1) En Core™ samplers
(1) 5 mL of methanol
Vials or Encores: Cool to 6 ºC
Terracore preserved in field within 48 hours
Encores preserved at lab within 48 hours28 days to analysis
Soil SVOCs by 8270D (1) 100 g glass container Cool to 6 ºC Extracted within 14 daysAnalyzed within 40 days after extraction
Soil PAH SIM by 8270D (1) 100 g glass container Cool to 6 ºC Extracted within 14 daysAnalyzed within 40 days after extraction
Soil MADEP EPH (1) 125 g glass container Cool to 6oC Extracted within 14 daysAnalyzed within 40 days after extraction
Soil GRO by 8015D (1) 40 mL glass vials, Teflon-lined septum capsOR(1) En Core™ samplers
(1) 5 mL of methanol
Vials or Encores: Cool to 6ºC
Encores preserved at lab within 48 hours14 days to analysis
Soil DRO by 8015D (1) 125 g glass container Cool to 6oC Extracted within 14 daysAnalyzed within 40 days after extraction
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: November 2012
Page 48 of 88
Worksheet #20 Field Quality Control Sample Summary Table
Quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) samples will be collected to ensure field and laboratory protocols result inconsistent and valid data. The following types of QA/QC samples will be collected:
·Field Duplicates:One additional set of sample containers is collected along with the normal sample. Duplicate isanalyzed as a normal sample at the laboratory. Duplicates will be collected at a frequency of one duplicate per tensamples.
·Matrix Spike/Matrix Spike Duplicates (MS/MSD): Two additional sets of sample containers are collected along with thenormal sample. The MS and MSD are spiked with known concentrations of target analytes at the laboratory prior toanalysis to evaluate the accuracy of laboratory procedures. MS/MSDs will be collected at a frequency of one MS/MSD
per twenty samples.
·Equipment Blanks: One equipment blank will be collected from each set of sampling equipment during the samplingevent. Equipment blanks will be collected by pouring Type II deionized water through a decontaminated pump andcollecting the water in the appropriate sample containers.
·Trip Blanks: One trip blank will be included with each shipment of samples for VOC analysis.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: November 2012
Page 49 of 88
This page intentionally left blank.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 50 of 88
Worksheet #21 Project Sampling Procedures References Table
ReferenceNumber Title, Revision Dateand/or Number
OriginatingOrganization ofSampling SOP
EquipmentType
Modified forProject Work?(Y/N)Comments
1 Baseline Groundwater Monitoring Work
Plan
AECOM Drill rig, peristaltic pump, bladder pump, pump
controller, qater quality meter, water level meter,tubing, glass vial for VOA sampling.
N See activity specific WP
for detailed samplingmethodology.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 51 of 88
Worksheet #22 Field Equipment Calibration, Maintenance, Testing, and Inspection Table
FieldEquipment Calibration/Inspection Activity Frequency AcceptanceCriteria CorrectiveAction ResponsiblePerson SOPReference
Solinst WaterLevel Meter MaintenanceActivities As needed Remove dirt and waterfrom around the central
sensor pin duringcleaning
Andy Gerringer See Solinst Water Level Meter:Op Instructions Model 101
(Solinst 7/6-09) for additionaldetails.
As needed If the central sensor pinis corroded or coated,use emery cloth topolish it
Every use Check the probe
seal/strain relief andreplace the black heatshrink if there is any
cracking or otherdamage
Trouble Shooting No sound when theprobe is immerse inwater could be due todead battery, low waterconductivity,disconnected wires oncircuit board, broken
tape, or disconnectedwire inside probe.
Corrective actions mayinclude replacing the 9Vbattery, increasing thesensitivy switch setting,repair wire or tape. ContactSolinist concerning repairsto tape repairs and wires
inside probes.
Andy Gerringer
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 52 of 88
Worksheet #22 Field Equipment Calibration, Maintenance, Testing, and Inspection Table (continued)
FieldEquipment Calibration/Inspection Activity Frequency AcceptanceCriteria CorrectiveAction ResponsiblePerson SOPReference
Horiba Multi-ParameterWater QualityMonitoringSystem
AUTO CalibrationMethod Beforeperformingmeasurement
AndyGerringer See Multi-Parameter WaterQuality Monitoring SystemOperations Manual (Horiba 2001)for additional details.Maintenance ofprobe and sensors Daily,Monthly, and
Annual
See manual for details AndyGerringer
MiniRAE3000 PID The majormaintenance itemsfor the instrument
area the batterypack, sensormodule, PID lamp,sampling pump, andinlet connectors andfilters.
The battery requirescharging when thedisplay shows a
flashing empty batteryicon. The chargingtime for a fullydischarged battery isless than 8 hours andthe instrument shouldrun up to 16 hours.
See the user’s guide forbattery replacement.
AndyGerringer See MiniRAE 3000 User’s Guide(RAE Systems April 2007) foradditional details.
Maintenance shouldbe performed by
qualified personnelonly.
Clean the PID sensormodule, the lamp and the
lamp housing only whenthe reading is inaccurateeven after calibration; the
reading is very sensitive toair moisture, or a chemicalliquid has been sucked intothe unit and damaged theunit.
AndyGerringer
When approaching the endof the specified lifetime ofthe pump, it will consumehigher amounts of energyan reduce its sample draw.Pump replacement will benecessary.
AndyGerringer
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 53 of 88
Worksheet #23 Analytical SOP References Table
ReferenceNumber Title, Revision Date, and / orNumber Definitive orScreening Data AnalyticalGroup Instrument OrganizationPerformingAnalysis
Modified forProject Work?(Y/N)
GCMSV-005 Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) byGas Chromatography/MassSpectrometry, 04/04/17, Revision 3
Definitive Water/Volatiles
Agilent 6890 & 7890 GCwith a 5973 or 5975 MassSpectrometer, ATOMXTekmar purge and trapautosampler
GCAL N
WL-051 SOP for Sulfide by Titration andHydrogen Sulfide (Calculation),08/07/17, Revision 13 Definitive Water/Sulfide N/A GCAL N
WL-042 Anions by Ion Chromatography (IC),09/15/17, Revision 21 Definitive Water/Anions by IC
Dionex Series 500 I IonChromatograph with GP40gradient pump, DionexAutomated Sampler,Dionex AS14 and AG14columns
GCAL N
WL-051 SOP for Sulfide by Titration andHydrogen Sulfide (Calculation),08/07/17, Revision 13 Definitive Water/Sulfide Burette GCAL N
GCV-024 Dissolved Gas Analysis by GCHeadspace Equilibrium Technique,07/25/17, Revision 13.1 Definitive Water/DissolvedGases
HP 6890N Series II GCwith FID & TCD, J&W GS-Q 30 m x 0.53 mm IDColumn, Fisher ScientificDigital Vortex mixer,myBlock Dry Bath
Incubator
GCAL N
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 54 of 88
Worksheet #23 Analytical SOP References Table (continued)
ReferenceNumber Title, Revision Date, and / orNumber Definitive orScreening Data AnalyticalGroup Instrument OrganizationPerforming
Analysis
Modified forProject Work?
(Y/N)
WL-063 SOP for Alkalinity by Titration,09/26/17, Revision 13 Definitive Water/Alkalinity byTitration Mettler Toledo DL 53Autotitrator GCAL N
GCMSV-003 Volatile Organic Compounds by GasChromatography/Mass Spectrometry,06/01/17, Revision 30 Definitive Solid &Water/Volatiles
Agilent 6890 & 7890 GCwith a 5973 or 5975 MassSpectrometer, Agilent
5890 GC with a 5971A or5972 Mass Spectrometer,Teledyne Tekmar VelocityXPT purge and trap,Teledyne Tekmar Solatek72 autosampler, ATOMXTekmar purge and trapautosampler
GCAL N
MET-021 Metals Analysis by ICP-MS, 04/28/17Revision 14 Definitive Water/Metals Agilent 7700 ICP-MS orAgilent 7900 ICP-MS GCAL N
WL-043 SOP for Total Organic Carbon (TOC),04/19/17, Revision 16 Definitive Water/Total OrganicCarbon (TOC)Shimadzu TOC-V CSH orTOC-V CPH analyzer GCAL N
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 55 of 88
Worksheet #24 Analytical Instrument Calibration Table
Instrument Calibration
Procedure
Frequency of
Calibration
Acceptance
Criteria
Corrective
Action (CA)
Person Responsible
for CA
SOP
Reference
Mass Spectrometer Calibration verification(CCV)
CV daily, before sampleanalysis, at the end of abatch and every 12hours of analysis time.
Initial CCV: All targets
≤20 %D/Drift ClosingCCV: All targets
≤50%D/Drift
Repeat initial calibrationand reanalyze all samplesanalyzed since the lastsuccessful Calibrationverification. Alternatively,immediately analyze twoconsecutive CCVs for thefailed analytes. If bothpass, samples may bereported without re-analysis.
Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager GCMSV-005
Mass Spectrometer Minimum five-point initialcalibration for analytes(ICAL)
Initial calibration prior tosample analysis
Average RSD ≤15% for allcompounds, linear orquadratic curve fit withCOD ≥0.99
Repeat calibration ifcriterion is not met Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager GCMSV-005
Mass Spectrometer Second Source calibrationverification Once after each initialcalibration All analytes within ± 20%of expected value Remake standard,recalibrate if necessary.Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager GCMSV-005
Mass Spectrometer Evaluation of Relative
Retention Times (RRT)Prior to sample analysis Set at mid-point of ICALor CCV if ICAL notperformed; ± 0.06 RRT
CCV fails, perform columnmaintenance, inspectpumps, and leak checks
Analyst, Supervisor,
QA Manager GCMSV-005
Mass Spectrometer Tune check Every 12 hours beforecalibration SOP criteria for ionabundance Perform instrument tuningand/or maintenance Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager GCMSV-005
Mass Spectrometer LOD/LOQ verification Quarterly
LOD meets methodquantitative requirementsor is at least 3x higherthat noise; LOQ is withinLOQ criteria
Perform instrumentmaintenance and repeat
failed LOD or LOQ studypassing two consecutivetests or perform new DL
study
Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager GCMSV-005
GasChromatography/
Mass Spectrometer
Minimum five-point initialcalibration for all analytes
(ICAL)
Initial calibration prior tosample analysis
RSD ≤ 30 for RFs of theCCCs, average % RSD ≤15% for all compounds,
linear or quadratic curvefit with COD ≥0.99
Repeat calibration ifcriterion is not met Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager GCMSV-003
GasChromatography/Mass Spectrometer
Second source calibrationverification Once after each initialcalibration All analytes within ± 20%of expected value Remake standard,recalibrate if necessary Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager GCMSV-003
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 56 of 88
Instrument CalibrationProcedure Frequency ofCalibration AcceptanceCriteria CorrectiveAction (CA)Person Responsiblefor CA SOPReference
GasChromatography/Mass Spectrometer
Evaluation of relativeretention times (RRT)Prior to sample analysis Set at mid-point of ICAL,+/- 30 seconds each CCV
CCV fails, perform columnmaintenance, inspectpumps and leak checks
Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager GCMSV-003
Gas
Chromatography/Mass Spectrometer Tune Check Every 12 hours beforecalibration SOP criteria for ionabundance Perform instrument tuningand/or maintenance.Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager GCMSV-003
GasChromatography/Mass Spectrometer LOD/LOQ verification Quarterly
LOD meets methodqualitative requirementsor is at least 3 x higherthan noise; LOQ is withinLCS/LCSD criteria
Perform instrumentmaintenance and repeatfailed LOD or LOQ studypassing two consecutivetests or perform DL study.
Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager GCMSV-003
Analytical Balances Class “S” weight arecompleted by an approvedISO 17025 Each day prior to use ±0.1% or±0.5 mg
Clean pan andcompartment daily and/oras needed. Replace asneeded
Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager WL-051
Auto-Pipettes Two standard volumes thatbracket the ranges ofmeasurements to be used
Each day prior to use
and/or quarterly 98-102%
Clean, lubricate, adjust orotherwise service the
pipet before repeatingentire procedure
Analyst, Supervisor,
QA Manager WL-051
Dionex Series 500iIon Chromatograph Retention time windows
Shall be set using themidpoint standards ofthe ICAL curve whenperformed. When ICALis not performed, theinitial CCV is used toestablish retention time
Retention time can be setat ± three times thestandard deviation foreach analyte over multiplemeasurements
N/A Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager WL-042
Dionex Series 500iIon Chromatograph Initial Calibration (ICAL) Prior to sample analysis Correlation coefficientmust be 0.995 or greater Repeat calibration ifcriteria is not met Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager WL-042
Dionex Series 500i
Ion Chromatograph Blank Immediately following
each calibration
± half the LOQ for all
anions
Source of contaminationshould be investigated
and samples should beanalyzed
Analyst, Supervisor,
QA Manager WL-042
Dionex Series 500iIon Chromatograph Low level calibrationstandard Following the ICAL ±50% (50-150% of truevalue) for all anions
Instrument maintenance,recalibrate or re-prep of
standards
Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager WL-042
Dionex Series 500iIon Chromatograph Independent CalibrationVerification (ICV)Immediately followingthe ICAL ±10% (90-110% of truevalue)
Instrument maintenance,re-analysis of ICV or Initialcalibration or re-prep of
standards
Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager WL-042
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 57 of 88
Instrument CalibrationProcedure Frequency ofCalibration AcceptanceCriteria CorrectiveAction (CA)Person Responsiblefor CA SOPReference
Dionex Series 500iIon Chromatograph Continuing CalibrationVerification (CCV)
Each day that an ICAL
is not performed, alsoevery 10 samples andat the end of analyticalbatch
±10% (90-110% of truevalue)
Repeat injection, if failsagain, inspect instrumentand re-prep standard. If
criteria are not met a newcalibration curve shouldbe prepared and allsamples that arebracketed by the failingCCV must be reanalyzed.
Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager WL-042
Dionex Series 500iIon Chromatograph Continuing CalibrationBlank (CCB)Following each CCV
Concentration of eachtarget analyte shall not begreater than half the LOQor 1/10 the amountmeasured in any sample(whichever is greater) orotherwise affect sampleresults
Repeat injection, if fails
again, inspect instrumentand re-prep standard. Ifcriteria are not met a newcalibration curve shouldbe prepared and allsamples that arebracketed by the failingCCB must be reanalyzed.
Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager WL-042
HP 6890N Series IIGC Retention Time Windows
Performed overapproximately 72 hourswhen a new column isinstalled
Retention time ± 3standard deviation, if SDis less than 0.01, a defaultwindow of ±0.03 shall beemployed
N/A Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager GCV-024
HP 6890N Series IIGC Initial Calibration (ICAL) Prior to sample analysis Less than 25% RSD Reanalyze initialcalibration Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager GCV-024
HP 6890N Series IIGC Independent CalibrationVerification (ICV)Immediately followingthe ICAL Must not exceed 20%difference from the ICAL
Instrument maintenance,reanalysis of ICV or ICAL,re-prep standards
Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager GCV-024
HP 6890N Series IIGC Continuing CalibrationVerification (CCV)
Each day that an ICALis not performed prior to
sample analysis, alsoanalyzed every 12hours and at the end of
the analytical batch
Must not exceed 20%difference from the ICAL
Repeat injection of
standard, if fails again,inspect GC, re-prepstandards, prepare new
calibration curve
Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager GCV-024
Mettler Toledo DL53Autotitrator pH Calibration Daily before use Slope must read between-52 and -65 Recalibrate instrument Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager WL-063
Mettler Toledo DL53Autotitrator Burette Calibration Annually by MettlerToledo ±0.002 mL buretteaccuracy Recalibrate instrument Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager WL-063
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 58 of 88
Instrument CalibrationProcedure Frequency ofCalibration AcceptanceCriteria CorrectiveAction (CA)Person Responsiblefor CA SOPReference
Agilent 7700x ICP-
MS,Agilent 7900 ICP-MS
Tune Check Daily
Cannot differ by more 0.1amu from true value.Resolution less than 0.9
amu full width at 5% peakheight. The % RSD mustbe ≤5% for at least 5replicate analyses
Perform instrument tuning
and/or maintenance, donot continue withcalibration
Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager
MET-021
Agilent 7700x ICP-MS,
Agilent 7900 ICP-MS
Calibration Blank
Once with each ICAL,
after every 10 samplesand at the end of ananalytical sequence
Determined concentration
≤ LOD
Determine source ofpossible contamination,
perform maintenance andrecalibrate
Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager MET-021
Agilent 7700x ICP-MS,Agilent 7900 ICP-MS
Continuing CalibrationVerification (CCV)
CCV after every 10
samples and at the endof an analyticalsequence
All analytes within ± 10%of expected value
Repeat initial calibrationand reanalyze all samples
analyzed since the lastsuccessful calibration
verification
Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager MET-021
Agilent 7700x ICP-MS,Agilent 7900 ICP-
MS
Initial calibration for allanalytes (ICAL) ICPMS:
minimum 3 standards
Daily initial calibrationprior to sample analysis correlation coefficient
≥0.998
Recalibrate and/or
perform necessaryequipment maintenance
Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager MET-021
Agilent 7700x ICP-MS,Agilent 7900 ICP-MS
Linear Dynamic range/highlevel check Every 6 months andwith major maintenance 90-110% recovery Perform maintenanceand/or reanalyzed at
lower concentration
Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager MET-021
Agilent 7700x ICP-MS,Agilent 7900 ICP-MS
Low-level calibration checkstandard Daily followingcalibration 80-120% recovery Recalibrate and/orperform necessaryequipment maintenance
Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager MET-021
Agilent 7700x ICP-MS,Agilent 7900 ICP-MS
Second source calibrationverification (ICV)Once after each initialcalibration All analytes within ± 10%of expected value
Repeat initial calibrationand reanalyze all samples
analyzed since the lastsuccessful calibration
verification
Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager MET-021
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 59 of 88
Instrument CalibrationProcedure Frequency ofCalibration AcceptanceCriteria CorrectiveAction (CA)Person Responsiblefor CA SOPReference
Agilent 7700x ICP-
MS, Agilent 7900ICP-MS
Interference CheckSolution ICS-A and ICS-AB Daily after ICAL
ICS-A: Absolute value ofobserved result ≤ LOD fornon-spiked project
analytes spiked analyteswithin +/-20% true valueICS-AB: Within ± 20% oftrue value
Correct problem;recalibrate instrument Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager MET-021
Shimadzu TOC-VCSH or TOC-V CPH Initial Calibration (ICAL)Analyzed and evaluatedbefore any result can
be quantitated.
The correlation coefficientmust be 0.995 or greater
Correct problem;recalibrate instrument,
new calibration verified
Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager WL-043
Shimadzu TOC-VCSH or TOC-V CPH Independent CalibrationVerification (ICV)Immediately followingthe ICAL ±10% (90-110% of truevalue)
Instrument maintenance,reanalysis of ICV or initialcalibration or re-preparation of thestandards
Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager WL-043
Shimadzu TOC-VCSH or TOC-V CPH Continuing CalibrationVerification (CCV)
Each day that an ICALis not performed a CCVmust be performedbefore sample analysis,Also analyze every 10samples ant at the endof analytical batch
±10 % (90-110% of truevalue)
Instrument maintenance,reanalysis of ICV or initialcalibration or re-preparation of thestandards
Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager WL-043
Shimadzu TOC-VCSH or TOC-V CPH Continuing CalibrationBlank (CCB)
Analyzed after every 10samples or morefrequently and at theend of analytical batch
Concentration must beless than the LOQ Correct problem;recalibrate instrument Analyst, Supervisor,QA Manager WL-043
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: November 2012
Page 60 of 88
Worksheet #25 Analytical Instrument and Equipment Maintenance, Testing, and Inspection Table
Instrument /Equipment MaintenanceActivity TestingActivity InspectionActivity Frequency AcceptanceCriteria CorrectiveAction ResponsiblePerson SOPReference1
GasChromatograph /MassSpectrometer(GC/MS)
Check for leaks, replace gas line filters,recondition or replace trap, replace column,clean injection port/liner Volatiles
Monitor instrumentperformance viaContinuing CalibrationVerification
As needed
Nomaintenanceisrequired aslong asinstrument QCmeets DODcriteria
Replace
connections,clean source,
replace gas linefilters, replacetrap, replaceGC column, clipcolumn, replaceinjection port
liner, cleaninjection port,replace
ElectronMultiplier
Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager
GCMSV-005
AnalyticalBalance
Clean pan and compartment, check withClass S weights, service engineer cleaningand calibrations Sulfide Monitor instrumentperformance Each dayprior to use ±0.1% or ±0.5mg
Clean pan and
compartmentdaily or asneeded.
Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager WL-051
Auto- Pipettes Clean, lubricate, adjust or service pipet Sulfide Monitor instrumentperformance
Each day
prior to useand/orquarterly
98-102%
Clean,
lubricate, adjustor service pipet
Analyst,
Supervisor,QA Manager WL-051
Dionex Series
500i IonChromatography Check for leaks, check all lines for wear Anions byIC
Monitor instrument
performance viaContinuing CalibrationVerification and CCB
As needed
or replaceasnecessary.
Loss ofsensitivity orfailingresolutionsor erraticresponse
Nomaintenanceis required as
long asinstrument QCmeets DODcriteria
Instrumentmaintenance,
repair leaks andreplace all linesthat are worn.
Analyst,
Supervisor,QA Manager WL-042
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: November 2012
Page 61 of 88
Instrument /Equipment MaintenanceActivity TestingActivity InspectionActivity Frequency AcceptanceCriteria CorrectiveAction ResponsiblePerson SOPReference1
Burette Inspect tubing, check burette drive ReactivitySulfide
Inspect tubing for
leaks and checkburette drive volumeaccuracy calibration
Daily and/oras needed
Calibrationand QCcriteria are met
Clean orreplace asneeded
Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager WL-051
HP 6890NSeries II GC Bake out injector body, check electronics RSK Monitor instrumentperformance viaContinuing Calibration
Bake outinjector asneeded,check
electronicswhen loss ofsensitivity or
failingresolutionsor witherraticresponse
Nomaintenance
is required aslong asinstrument QC
meets DODcriteria
Changecolumn,
performinstrumentmaintenance,
clean injectionport/liner
Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager GCV-024
Mettler Toledo
DL53Autotitrator
Inspect tubing for leaks daily, burette drivevolume accuracy calibration annually Alkalinity Monitor instrumentand tubing As needed
Nomaintenanceis required aslong asinstrumentneeds criteria
Instrument
maintenance,replace tubing
Analyst,
Supervisor,QA Manager WL-063
GasChromatograph /MassSpectrometer(GC/MS)
Check for leaks, replace gas line filters,recondition or replace trap, replace column,clean injection port/liner
TCLPVolatiles
Monitor instrumentperformance viaContinuing CalibrationVerification
As needed
Nomaintenanceis required aslong asinstrument QC
meets criteria
Replace
connections,clean source,replace gas linefilters, replacetrap, replaceGC column, clipcolumn, replaceinjection port
liner, cleaninjection port,replace
ElectronMultiplier
Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager
GCMSV-003
Inductively
Coupled PlasmaMassSpectrometer
(ICP-MS)
Change pump tubing, clean nebulizer,change torch, clean sample cone/skimmercone Metals
Monitor instrument
performance viaContinuing CalibrationVerification and
CCBlank
As needed
Nomaintenance
is required aslong asinstrument QC
meets DODcriteria
Change pumptubing, change
torch andwindow, cleanfilters;
recalibrate andreanalyzeaffected data
Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager MET-021
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: November 2012
Page 62 of 88
Instrument /Equipment MaintenanceActivity TestingActivity InspectionActivity Frequency AcceptanceCriteria CorrectiveAction ResponsiblePerson SOPReference1
Shimadzu TOC-
V CSH or TOC-V CPH Change injection needle, change catalyst
Total
OrganicCarbon(TOC)
Monitor instrument
performance viaContinuing CalibrationVerification
As needed
or replaceasnecessary,
loss ofsensitivity orfailing
resolutions,erraticresponse
Nomaintenance
is required aslong asinstrument QC
meets criteria
Performinstrument
maintenance,clean injectionneedle, change
catalyst
Analyst,Supervisor,QA Manager WL-043
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: November 2012
Page 63 of 88
This page intentionally left blank.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 64 of 88
Worksheet #26 Sample Handling System
Sample Collection, Packaging, and Shipment
Sample Collection: AECOM
Sample Packaging: AECOM
Coordination of Shipment: AECOM
Type of Shipment/Carrier: FedEx
Sample Receipt and Analysis
Sample Receipt: Sample Custodian, GCAL
Sample Custody and Storage: Sample Custodian, GCAL
Sample Preparation: Analytical Staff, GCAL
Sample Determinative Analysis: Analytical Staff, GCAL
Sample Archiving
Field Sample Storage: GCAL
Sample Extract/Digestate Storage: Analytical Staff, GCAL
Sample Disposal
Personnel/Organization: Sample Disposal Staff, GCAL
Number of Days from Analysis: 60
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 65 of 88
This page intentionally left blank.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 66 of 88
Worksheet #27 Sample Custody Requirements
1.1 Field Sample Custody Procedures (Sample Collection, Packaging, Shipment, andDelivery to Laboratory)
Sample handling, transport, and storage will be performed in accordance with UFP QAPP,Sample Collection Documentation,
Handling, Tracking, and Custody Procedures (UFP QAPP, 2005). Sample custody activities will adhere to the requirementsspecified in the American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM) document D4840-99 Standard Guide for Sampling Chain-
of-Custody Procedures contains information regarding chain-of-custody procedures. Samples will be placed in a coolerimmediately upon collection and then transported to the laboratory within 24 to 48 hours of collection via an overnight carrier(e.g., DHL, FedEx, or Worldwide Express).
Insulated coolers will be used to store and ship the sample containers. Coolers will be chilled with ice in double, sealable bags.Samples will be placed in the lower portion of the cooler, and the ice packs will occupy the upper portion of the cooler. Materialsuch as Styrofoam pads will line the top and bottom interior of the cooler (pads may also be placed on the sides at thediscretion of field personnel). In the case of liquid samples, an absorbent material will be placed on the bottom of the cooler tohelp contain inadvertent spillage. Glass containers will be individually wrapped in bubble-wrap or other padded material toprevent breakage. Empty spaces between containers should be filled with “peanuts” or other appropriate padded material. To
prevent leakage, water sample containers will be packed in an upright position—not on their sides or stacked. Ice will bereplaced at the time of shipment to keep the inside temperature of the cooler as close to 4 degrees Celsius (°C) as possible.
Hazardous Materials Shipment.Hazardous materials, as defined by the Department of Transportation, include petroleumhydrocarbons and solvents if they are present in concentrations considered to be hazardous. Samples to be collected duringthis Remedial Investigation (RI) are not anticipated to contain hazardous concentrations of these materials. Samples from thisinvestigation are considered nonhazardous environmental media based on historical descriptions and may be shipped asnonhazardous.
Sample Custody. Sample custody procedures to be followed will be those established in ASTM document D4840-99
Standard Guide for Sampling Chain-of-Custody Procedures,and Sample Collection Documentation, Handling, Tracking, and
Custody Procedures (UFP QAPP, 2005).
All sample lids and caps will be covered with custody seals. Two copies of the COC forms will be placed in an adhesive plasticpouch and affixed to the inside of each sample cooler. The coolers will then be sealed with waterproof tape and labeled“Fragile,” “This End Up” (with directional arrows pointing up), or other appropriate notices. Coolers will also have custody sealsplaced on them according to Sample Collection Documentation, Handling, Tracking, and Custody Procedures (UFP QAPP,2005).
1.2 Laboratory Sample Custody Procedures (Receipt of Samples, Archiving, Disposal)
Upon laboratory receipt of the coolers, the lab technician will inspect the sample containers in accordance with Sample
Collection Documentation, Handling, Tracking, and Custody Procedures (UFP QAPP 2005). The samples will either beremoved from the containers for analysis or placed in a refrigerated storage area until they are analyzed.
A list of analyses to be performed and a space to record sample condition upon receipt are located on the COC form. The samplecustodian will sign the COC form and record the temperature of the samples or cooler on the COC form and on the SampleCondition Upon Receipt form. In case of breakage or discrepancies between the COC form, sample labels, or requested analysis,the sample custodian will notify the Laboratory Project Manager. A nonconformance report will be completed, and the ProjectChemist will be notified within 24 hours. At the time of notification, corrective action will be chosen. The Sample Custodian willenter sample information into the laboratory system, and a log-in confirmation sheet will be sent to the Project Chemist within 48
hours. The laboratory will send the Project Chemist a written declaration of the samples in each sample delivery group.
1.3 Sample Identification Procedures
A sample numbering system is used to uniquely identify each sample collected and submitted for analysis. The purpose of thenumbering system is to assist in the tracking of samples and facilitate retrieval of analytical results. Sample identification
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 67 of 88
numbers should be used on sample labels, COC forms, field logbooks, and all other applicable documentation. A listing of allsample identification numbers should be recorded in the field logbook along with the depth of samples if collected in thesubsurface.
The sample number is composed of the following four-component sequence with interspersed dashes:
(well ID) – (sequential event assigned)
The sequential event number is two digits starting with 01 and running through 99.
MW1109-01 (MW1109 = well ID; 01 = event number)
Trip blanks and equipment blanks will be numbered as presented in the following examples:
TB11301201 (trip blank no. 1 collected on November 30, 2012)
EB-12301202 (equipment blank no. 2 collected on December 30, 2012)
1.4 COC Procedures
COCs will be completed in the field according to Sample Collection Documentation, Handling, Tracking, and Custody
Procedures (UFP QAPP 2005) and will remain with the samples until delivery to the laboratory. A record of all procedures towhich a sample is subjected while in possession of the laboratory shall be maintained, in accordance Section 4.12,Control of
Records, of the DoD QSM version 4.2 (DoD 2010), including the following:
1.Sample preservation including appropriateness of sample container and compliance with holding time requirement;
2.Sample identification, receipt, acceptance or rejection and log-in;
3.Sample storage and tracking including shipping receipts, sample transmittal forms (COC form); and
4.Documented procedures for the receipt and retention of samples, including all provisions necessary to protect theintegrity of samples.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 68 of 88
Worksheet #28-1 QC Samples Table
Matrix Water
Analytical Group Alkalinity
Concentration Level Unknown
Sampling SOP See Worksheet #21
Analytical Method/SOP Reference SM 2320B, EPA
310.2/SOP154
Samplers Name AECOM Field Technician
Field Sampling Organization AECOM
Analytical Organization GCAL
No. of Sampling Locations See Worksheet #18
QC Sample:Frequency/Number Method/SOP QCAcceptance Limits Corrective Action
Person(s)Responsiblefor CorrectiveAction
Data QualityIndicator (DQI)MeasurementPerformance Criteria
Method Blank One per preparatory batch,maximum of 20 samples
Concentration shall not be
greater than ½ the LOQ or1/10 the on-column amount inany sample (whichever isgreater)
The source of
contamination should beinvestigated andsamples should be re-extracted and reanalyzed
Analyst,Supervisor, QAManager
Bias/Contamination Same as method
LCS One per preparatory batch,maximum of 20 samples 90-110%
The source of inaccuracy
should be investigatedand samples reanalyzed.If additional sample isnot available, report in a
narrative.
Accuracy/bias Same as method
MS One pair per batch(assuming sufficientvolume exists) or asspecified by client request.
N/A N/A Accuracy/bias Same as method
DUP
One pair per batch
(assuming sufficientvolume exists) or asspecified by client request.
RPD should be ≤10
Investigate the source of
the precision error. Asource of precision errorin the DUP may be thehomogenous nature ofthe sample. If lab error is
suspected, repeatanalysis. If matrix issueis indicated, report with anarrative.
Precision Same as method
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 69 of 88
Worksheet #28-2 Samples Table
Matrix Water
Analytical Group Sulfide
Concentration Level Unknown
Sampling SOP See Worksheet #21
Analytical Method/SOP Reference SM 4500-S F, EPA 376.1,
SW 846 9030B, 9034/SOP164
Samplers Name AECOM Field Technician
Field Sampling Organization AECOM
Analytical Organization GCAL
No. of Sampling Locations See Worksheet #18
QC Sample Frequency/Number Method / SOP QCAcceptance Limits Corrective Action Person(s)Responsible forCorrective Action
Data QualityIndicator (DQI)
MeasurementPerformanceCriteria
Method Blank One per preparatorybatch, maximum of 20samples
Concentration shall not be
greater than ½ the LOQ or1/10 the on-columnamount in any sample(whichever is greater)
The source of contaminationshould be investigated andsamples should be re-extracted
and reanalyzed
Analyst, Supervisor,
QA Manager
Bias/Contamination Same as method
LCS One per preparatorybatch, maximum of 20samples 50-120%
The source of inaccuracy shouldbe investigated and samplesreanalyzed. If additional sample is
not available, report in a narrative.
Accuracy/bias Same as method
MS
One pair per batch(assuming sufficientvolume exists) or as
specified by clientrequest.
Evaluated against LCScontrol limits
If MS is outside of control limitsand the LCS is within limits, matrixinterference is indicated.Accuracy/bias Same as method
DUP/MSD
One pair per batch(assuming sufficientvolume exists) or asspecified by client
request.
≤20 RPD
If RPD is greater than 20,investigate the source of theprecision error. A source of
precision error in the DUP/MSDmay be the homogenous nature ofthe sample. If lab error issuspected, repeat analysis. Ifmatrix issue is indicated, report
with a narrative.
Precision Same as method
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 70 of 88
Worksheet #28-3 Samples Table
Matrix Water
Analytical Group VOCs
Concentration Level Unknown
Sampling SOP See Worksheet #21
Analytical Method/SOP Reference SW 846 9060/SOP221
Samplers Name AECOM Field Technician
Field Sampling Organization AECOM
Analytical Organization GCAL
No. of Sampling Locations See Worksheet #18
QC Sample:Frequency/Number Method/SOP QCAcceptance Limits Corrective Action
Person(s)Responsiblefor CorrectiveAction
Data QualityIndicator (DQI)
MeasurementPerformanceCriteria
Method Blank
One per preparatorybatch, maximum of 20samples
Concentration shall not be >1/2 the LOQ or 1/10 theamount of sample
The source ofcontamination shouldbe investigated andsamples should bereanalyzed. If,additional sample isnot available, reportwith narrative.
Analyst/Supervisor Bias/Contamination Same as method
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 71 of 88
Worksheet #28-3 Samples Table (continued)
QC Sample:Frequency/Number Method/SOP QCAcceptance Limits Corrective Action
Person(s)Responsiblefor CorrectiveAction
Data QualityIndicator (DQI)
MeasurementPerformanceCriteria
LCS One per preparatory batch,maximum of 20 samples 90-110%
If LCS fails to meet labcriteria, the source ofinaccuracy should be
investigated andsamples reanalyzed. Ifadditional sample is notavailable, report in anarrative.
Analyst/Supervisor Accuracy/bias
Same as method
MS One pair per batch(assuming sufficient
volume exists) or asspecified by client request.
80-120%
If recovery is outsidecontrol limits and a laberror suspected, repeatthe MS determination. If
the LCS is within controllimits and the matrixinterference is indicated,analyze a post digestion
spike and report resultswith a narrative.
Accuracy/bias
Same as method
DUP/MSD One pair per batch(assuming sufficient
volume exists) or asspecified by client request.
RPD should be ≤20
Investigate the source ofthe precision error. Asource of precision error
in the DUP/MSD may bethe homogenous natureof the sample. If lab erroris suspected, repeatanalysis. If matrix issue
is indicated, report with anarrative.
Precision
Same as method
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 72 of 88
Worksheet #28-4 Samples Tables
Matrix Water
Analytical Group ICP Metals
Concentration Level Unknown
Sampling SOP See Worksheet #21
Analytical Method/SOP Reference SW846 6020A / MET-021
Samplers Name AECOM FieldTechnician
Field Sampling Organization AECOM
Analytical Organization GCAL
No. of Sampling Locations See Worksheet #18
QC Sample:Frequency/Number Method/SOP QCAcceptance Limits Corrective Action
Person(s)Responsible forCorrective
Action
Data QualityIndicator (DQI)
MeasurementPerformanceCriteria
Method Blank One per preparatory
batch
No analytes detected > ½
RL or 1/10th the amount in
any sample
Correct problem; reanalyze any sample
associated with a blank that fails
criteria, except when the sample
analysis resulted in a non-detect.
Analyst/Supervisor,QA Manager
Bias/Contamination Same as method
LCS One LCS per
preparatory batch
QC acceptance criteria
specified by DoD QSM v
5.0 Tables 5 and 6.
Reanalyze and/or re-prep all associated
samples unless recoveries are high with
no detection of analytes.
Accuracy/bias
Same as method
Sample Duplicate
or MSD
One pair per batch
(assuming sufficient
volume exists) or as
specified by client
request.
RPD ≤ 20%
Evaluate the data to determine if the
failed criteria are due to sample matrix
or laboratory error. Re-prep if
sufficient sample is available when
appropriate.
Accuracy/bias
Same as method
Matrix Spike
One pair per batch
(assuming sufficient
volume exists) or as
specified by client
request.
For matrix evaluation, use
LCS recovery acceptance
criteria.
Evaluate the data to determine if the
failed criteria are due to sample matrix
or laboratory error. Re-prep if
sufficient sample is available when
appropriate.
Accuracy/bias
Same as method
Internal
Standards(not
applicable to
7470A)
In all field samples and
standards
IS Intensity within 30-
120% of intensity of the IS
in the ICAL.
Reanalyze all samples with IS failures. If
reanalysis confirms matrix interference,
report sample and narrate.
Accuracy/bias
Same as method
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 73 of 88
Worksheet #28-4 Samples Table (continued)
Matrix Water
Analytical Group ICP Metals
Concentration Level Unknown
Sampling SOP See Worksheet #21
Analytical Method/SOP Reference SW846 6020A / MET-021
Samplers Name AECOM FieldTechnician
Field Sampling Organization AECOM
Analytical Organization GCAL
No. of Sampling Locations See Worksheet #18
QC Sample:Frequency/Number Method/SOP QCAcceptance Limits Corrective Action
Person(s)Responsible forCorrectiveAction
Data QualityIndicator (DQI)
MeasurementPerformanceCriteria
Serial Dilution
Test
One per preparatory
batch
Five-fold dilution must
agree within ± 10% of the
original measurement for
samples with
concentrations > 50 x LOQ
Perform Post Digestion Spike
Analyst,
Supervisor,
QA Manager Accuracy/bias Same as method
Post Digestion
Spike
When dilution test fails
or analyte
concentration in all
samples < 50 x LOD
Recovery 80-120%Contact the client to determine if
additional measures are required.Accuracy/bias Same as method
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 74 of 88
Worksheet #29 Project Documents and Records Table
Sample Collection Documentsand Records On-site Analysis Documentsand Records Off-site Analysis Documentsand Records Data Assessment Documentsand Records Other
Field Logbook Field Logbook Sample receipt, custody, andtracking records Field sampling audit records
Chain-of-Custody Records Field Sampling Forms Sample prep logs Laboratory audit records
Air Bills Equipment Inspection Forms Equipment calibration logs Data validation reports
Custody Seals Boring Logs Run logs Data useability assessmentreports
Corrective Action Forms Corrective Action Forms Equipment maintenance test,
and inspection logs
Corrective Action Forms
Field Sampling Forms Daily Tailgate H&S Sign InSheet Corrective Action Forms RI Report
Sample location and depth data SSHP Acknowledgement Reported analytical results
Dig Permits Data package completeness
checklists
Sample disposal records
Extraction/cleanup records
Raw data
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 75 of 88
Worksheet #30 Analytical Services Table
Matrix Analytical Group Sample Locations/ID Number AnalyticalMethod Data PackageTurnaround Time Laboratory/Organization Backup Laboratory/Organization
Groundwater VOCs, Sulfide,TOC, Metals,Anions, Alkalinity,
RSK-175
Refer to activityspecific work plan SW8260B; SW9030B,SW9060, SW3005A, EPA9056, EPA RSK-175,
SW6020A, EPA415.1
21 Days GCAL NA
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
ID identificationIDW investigative derived wasteVOC volatile organic compound
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 76 of 88
Worksheet #31 Planned Project Assessments Table
AssessmentType Frequency Internal orExternal
OrganizationPerformingAssessment
Person(s)Responsible forPerformingAssessment
Person(s)Responsible forResponding toAssessment Findings
Person(s)Responsible forIdentifying andImplementing CA
Person(s)Responsible forMonitoringEffectiveness of CA
Field SamplingAudit Monthly Internal AECOM John Maier AndrewWreschnig/BrettSchaefer
Brett Schaefer/MeganDonahue TBD
Project Manager
Review
Monthly Internal AECOM Megan Donahue Andrew
Wreschnig/BrettSchaefer
Brett Schaefer/MeganDonahue Megan Donahue
Review of COC
forms
Daily Internal AECOM Naoum Tavantzis Andrew Wreschnig Brett Schaefer/MeganDonahue Naoum Tavantzis
Laboratory DataAssessment(validation)
Once External AECOM Naoum Tavantzis TBD Naoum Tavantzis /TBD Naoum Tavantzis
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 77 of 88
Worksheet #32 Assessment Findings and Corrective Action Responses Table
AssessmentType
Nature ofDeficienciesDocumentation
Individual(s) Notifiedof Findings(Name, Title, Organization)
Timeframe ofNotification
Nature of CorrectiveAction ResponseDocumentation
Individual(s) ReceivingCorrective Action Response(Name, Title, Organization)
Timeframefor Response
Field Sampling
Audit
Verbal
Communication/logbook record
Andrew Wreschnig, Field
Supervisor, AECOM; MeganDonahue, Project Manager,AECOM
24 hours after
audit
Letter or email Megan Donahue, Project
Manager, AECOM
24 hours after
notification
Project Manager
Review
Verbal
Communication/Logbook record
Andrew Wreschnig, Field
Supervisor
24 hours after
audit
Logbook entry Megan Donahue, Project
Manager, AECOM
24 hours after
notification
Review of COC
forms
Written Audit Report Andrew Wreschnig, Field
Supervisor, AECOM; MeganDonahue, Project Manager,AECOM
24 hours after
audit
Letter or email Naoum Tavantzis, Project
Chemist, AECOM
24 hours after
notification
Laboratory Data
Assessment(validation)
Written Audit Report TBD, Data Validator; Megan
Donahue, Project Manager,AECOM
24 hours after
audit
Letter or email Naoum Tavantzis, Project
Chemist, AECOM
1 Week after
notification
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 78 of 88
Worksheet #33 QA Management Reports Table
Type of Report Frequency(Daily, Weekly Monthly,Quarterly, Annually, Etc.)
Projected DeliveryDate(s)
Person(s) Responsible for ReportPreparation(Title And Organizational
Affiliation)
Report Recipient(s)(Title And OrganizationalAffiliation)
Third-Party Data ValidationReport Once, after all data aregenerated Refer to activity specificwork plan Data Validator, TBD Project Manager, AECOM
Data Useability AssessmentReport Once, after data is validated Refer to activity specificwork plan Project Chemist, AECOM Project Manager, AECOM
Final Remedial InvestigationReport Once, after data useability andrisk assessments are completed Refer to activity specificwork plan Project Manager, AECOM Project Manager, NGB
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 79 of 88
Worksheet #34 Verification (Step I) Process Table
Verification Input Description Internal/External Responsible For Verification (Name,Organization)
Review of field notes Determine whether field procedures are performed in accordance withthis QAPP and prescribed procedures. Notes allow reconstruction of
activities and identification of sampling locations.
Internal Andrew Wreschnig and Brett Schaefer,AECOM
Review of COC forms Determine whether samples are labeled and handled in accordancewith this QAPP and prescribed procedures, and the correct analysis isselected.
Internal Naoum Tavantzis, AECOM
Analytical Data Package All analytical data packages will be verified internally by the laboratoryperforming the work for completeness prior to submittal of the data toAECOM.
External TBD, GCAL
Laboratory Data Assessment Determine whether electronic and hard copy data upon receipt are
comparable and contain the proper reporting format. The assessmentwill consist of reviewing both types of data to verify that data weredelivered in proper fields and that all required fields are populated
correctly.
External/ Internal Naoum Tavantzis, AECOM
Electronic Data Deliverable
(EDD) (export)
All EDDs will be verified against the requirements of the latest ERPIMSdatabase prior to submittal to AECOM.External Kimberly Drag, GCAL
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 80 of 88
Worksheet #35 Validation (Steps IIa and IIb) Process Table
Step IIa/IIb Validation Input Description Responsible for Validation (Name,Organization)
IIb Onsite data All onsite data will be reviewed against QAPP requirements forcompleteness and accuracy based on the field calibration requirements
(see Worksheet # 22).
Andrew Wreschnig, AECOM
IIa Sampling Procedures Ensure that all sampling procedures were followed.Andrew Wreschnig and Brett Schaefer,AECOM
IIa COC Examine traceability of data from sample collection to generation of project
data.
Naoum Tavantzis, AECOM
IIb QLs Review QLs achieved as outlined in the QAPP and verify that thelaboratory successfully analyzed a standard at the QL.Naoum Tavantzis, AECOM
IIb QAPP Determine whether the number and type of samples specified in Worksheet#20 were collected and analyzed.Naoum Tavantzis, AECOM
IIa QAPP and LaboratorySOW Determine whether all analytes specified in Worksheet #15 were analyzedand reported by the laboratory.Naoum Tavantzis, AECOM
IIa & IIb Laboratory Data andQAPP requirements Assess and document the performance of the analytical process. Asummary of all QC samples and results will be verified for measurementperformance criteria and completeness. Full verification will be performedon 10% of the data and standard level verification will be performed on 90%of the data.
Naoum Tavantzis, AECOM
IIb Methods, Field QClogbook and QAPPrequirements
Determine impacts of any deviations from methods and corrective actionsimplemented during sampling and analysis.Brett Schaefer and Naoum Tavantzis, AECOM
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 81 of 88
Worksheet #36 Validation (Steps IIa and IIb) Summary Table
Step IIa/IIb Matrix Analytical Group Validation Criterion Responsible (Name, Organization)
IIa Groundwater SW8260B Region III Modifications to National Functional Guidelines forOrganic Data Review Multi-Media, Multi-Concentration /USEPAHazardous Waste Support Branch Validating Volatile Organic
Compounds By Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry SW-8468260B (2006)
Naoum Tavantzis, AECOM
IIa Groundwater Wet Chemistry QAPP Worksheets 12, 15, 19, 24, 27, and 28 and QC criteria
specified in the applicable methods
Naoum Tavantzis, AECOM
IIb Groundwater SW8260B QAPP Worksheets 12, 15, and 24 Naoum Tavantzis, AECOM
IIb Groundwater Metals QAPP Worksheets 12, 15, and 24 Naoum Tavantzis, AECOM
N/A not applicable
VOC volatile organic compoundUFP-QAPP Uniform Federal Policy – Quality Assurance Program Plan
USEPA United States Environmental Protection AgencyIIa Compliance with methods, procedures, and contracts (see Table 10, page 117, UFP-QAPP manual, V.1, March 2005)IIb Comparison with measurement performance criteria in the QAPP (see Table 11, page 118, UFP-QAPP manual, V.1, March 2005)
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 82 of 88
This page intentionally left blank.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 83 of 88
Worksheet #37 Useability Assessment
1.1 Summary of the Usability Assessment Process and Procedures
Data usability will be assessed upon completion of the project to ensure that the DQOs are achieved. The characteristics ofmajor importance are accuracy, precision, representativeness, comparability, and completeness. A usability assessment willbe performed to determine how well the data collected on this project support the project objectives.
During the field effort, a field audits will be performed to assess sample collection procedures. The field audits will verify thatproper procedures are followed, and soil, and groundwater data generation is acceptable. All soil, and groundwater analyticaldata will be sent to a third-party data validation firm. The validation firm will determine the usability of the analytical data and
will identify any limitations on the use of the data.
The usability of data collected during this RI will be assessed several ways. First, any deviations from proposed field activitiesand soil, sediment, surface water, and groundwater sampling and handling procedures will be reviewed, and their effect ondata usability evaluated. Second, the analytical results of the soil, sediment, surface water, and groundwater sampling will becompared to the PQOs presented on Worksheets #12 and #28 to determine whether the measurement performance criteria(MPC) were met. Upon completion of the verification and validation processes noted on Worksheet #34 and Worksheet #35,
the DQOs will be evaluated for each analytical group. Based on the results of this examination, conclusions regarding thevalidity and usability of data for each analytical group will be drawn. A Data Quality Assessment Report will be prepared by theData Validator in accordance with this project specific UFP QAPP. Overall measurement error (sampling plus analytical) willbe assessed as noted below. The RI Report will include discussions of conclusions drawn and any limitations on the use ofproject data as a result of this assessment.
1.2 Evaluative Procedures Used To Assess Overall Measurement Error Associated
with the Project
Measurement error will be evaluated by reviewing sampling design, sampling locations, and sample collection methods. Thethird-party data validation firm will evaluate QC samples (see Worksheet #20) to assess the overall measurement errorassociated with the project.
1.3 Personnel Responsible for Performing the Usability Assessment
·Naoum Tavantzis, the AECOM Project Chemist, will also perform a usability assessment of the validated data. Thisusability assessment will include (1) review of accepted or rejected data, (2) review of data qualifiers, (3) review oflaboratory surrogate recoveries, (4) review of laboratory control samples, and (5) consultation with the analytical
laboratory and data validation firm.
·Megan Donahue, the AECOM Project Manager, will use the results of both usability assessments to determine whetherthe data generated during the investigation can be used to answer the principle study questions.
1.4 Documentation to Be Generated During Usability Assessment and How Results
Will Be Presented
The third-party data validation firm will generate validated data packages to be presented in the RI Report. The usabilityassessment will generate a letter report describing the means and methods of the usability assessment and the results. Thisdataset will be evaluated using precision, accuracy, representativeness, comparability, and completeness criteria according tothis UFP QAPP.
1.5 Precision
Quality control procedures, such as control sample analyses and replicate analyses, represent the primary mechanism forevaluating measurement data variability or precision. Replicate analyses will be used to define analytical replicability, while
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 84 of 88
results for replicate samples may be used to define the total variability (replicability) of the sampling/analytical system as awhole.
Control limits for control sample analyses, acceptability limits for replicate analyses, and response factor criteria are based
upon precision in terms of RSD or RPD. The standard deviation is a measure of the average distance of an individualobservation from the mean. It is usually denoted “s” and defined as:
n n
SD =s=S xi2 - [S xi ]2 n i=1 i = 1
n - 1
In this equation, n is the number of observations and xiis the ith observation. The percent RSD is a measure of variability thatis adjusted for the magnitude of the values in the sample:
% RSD = Standard Deviation x 100 Sample Mean
The percent RSD is used when the size of the standard deviation changes with the size of the mean. RPD is another measureof variability that is adjusted for the magnitude of the measured values. It is used only when the sample contains twoobservations, and is calculated as follows:
RPD =½X1 - X2 ½ x 100 ( X1 + X2 )/2
where X1and X2 are duplicate sample measurement results. RPD is directly related to RSD for duplicate results by:
RPD = 2 RSD
RSD is used for calculating precision of response factors in calibration procedures and acceptability of the calibration. RPD iscalculated on sample duplicates or spike duplicates. RPDs cannot be calculated in the instance one or both values are non-detects. In these cases an evaluation will be made during data validation on the replication. The RPD’s will be checked
against the measurement performance criteria on Worksheet #12.
1.6 Accuracy
For surrogate compounds, laboratory control samples, and continuing calibration check standards, the calculation formula forpercent recovery is:
% Recovery = Concentration found x 100 Concentration spiked
A similar calculation used to determine the recovery of a spike concentration added to a sample. The percent spike recovery:
Value of Value of
% Spike recovery = sample plus spike - unspiked sample x 100 Value of spike added
The percent recovery is compared with the established control limits. For matrix spikes the assignable cause for recoveriesoutside acceptable limits may be, and often is, due to matrix interference. If a matrix effect is confirmed by acceptableperformance on the LCS, the data will be flagged. LCSs will be analyzed routinely to demonstrate that the analytical system isperforming within acceptable limits. These LCS results will provide another measure of accuracy of the measurement data.
Blanks will make up one other group of QC checks that will address measurement bias. Instead of assessing and controllingoverall accuracy, field and laboratory blanks will be used to control bias due to sample contamination and to assess the extent
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 85 of 88
to which this source of bias impacts the measurement results. Since sample contamination generally occurs at relatively lowconcentrations, contamination effects are most pronounced, in terms of relative error, for low-concentration samples.
The control limits for precision and accuracy established under DoD QSM V4.2, SW-846, EPA, and DOE methodology
guidelines will be used to identify outliers (data results outside the specific control limits). If outliers occur, the samples inquestion will be re-analyzed, if possible, or carefully evaluated on a case-by-case basis. The MS % recoveries will be checkedagainst the measurement performance criteria specified on Worksheet #12.
1.7 Representativeness
Representativeness expresses the degree to which sample data accurately and precisely reflect site conditions.Representativeness of the data is determined by:
·Comparing actual sampling procedures to those delineated in the field sampling plan
·Comparing analytical results of field duplicates to determine the spread in the analytical results
·Examining the results of QC blanks for evidence of contamination - contamination may be cause for qualification of theaffected samples
The data validation process will determine whether any results will be classified as questionable or qualified by any of these
criteria.
1.8 Comparability
Comparability expresses the confidence with which one set of analytical data may be compared with another. Comparability ismaintained by being aware of previous analytical work and through the use of standard analytical methods and units such as:
·Demonstrating traceability of standards to NIST or EPA sources
·Use of Standard and Approved methodologies
·Standardized units of measure
·Participation in inter-laboratory studies to demonstrate laboratory performance
The laboratory will use all of these measures to ensure the data produced are of the highest quality and comparable to that of
other quality laboratories in the industry.
1.9 Completeness
Completeness is a measure of the valid data obtained from an analysis expressed as the percentage of the total data thatshould have been obtained.
% Completeness = Amount of valid data obtained x 100 Total amount of valid data expected
During data assessment, an evaluation will be made of whether restrictions on data usability will permit the use of the data forspecific purposes identified during the DQO process.
If DQOs state that the data will only be used for screening purposes, estimated values can be used without restrictions, andeven unusable data may provide useful information. If DQOs indicate that a portion of the data will be used for confirmation of
clean-up goals, any restrictions on the data would seriously impact their usability. Completeness criteria will be presented onWorksheet #12. The completeness percentage based on rejected data should meet the 95 percent goal.
Uncertainty Discussion of Reporting Limits. The magnitude of the laboratory reporting limits might have an effect on theresults of any environmental investigation. For instance, if a chemical is present in an environmental medium at concentrationsbelow the highest reporting limit and below the screening criteria, then that chemical should be eliminated from considerationas a contaminant of potential concern (COPC).
However, it is also possible that a chemical is present below the reporting limit and above the screening criteria; therefore, theassumption that the chemical is not present would potentially result in an underestimation of the potential impact of contamination.As a result, the chemical should not be eliminated from the COPC list and may require further evaluation. An evaluation of thereporting limits will be performed, and their potential implications will be assessed for this site characterization.
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 86 of 88
Project-specific items that will be considered when part of the data usability assessment are provided in Table 37-1.
Table 37-1: Considerations for Usability Assessment
Item Assessment Activity Responsibility
Data Deliverables and QAPP Ensure that all necessary information was provided,including but not limited to QC sample results and datavalidation results.
Project Chemist
Sampling Locations, Deviation Determine whether alterations to sample locationscontinue to satisfy the PQOs.Site Supervisor
COC,
Deviation
Establish that any problems with documentation or
custody procedures do not prevent the data from beingused for the intended purpose.
Project Chemist
Holding Times,Deviation Determine the acceptability of data where holding timeswere exceeded.Project Chemist
SOPs and Methods,Deviations Evaluate the impact of deviations from SOPs andspecified methods on data quality.Site Supervisor
QC samples Evaluate the implications of unacceptable QC sampleresults on the data usability for the associated samples.
For example, consider the effects of observed blankcontamination.
Project Chemist
Matrix Evaluate matrix effects (interference or bias).Project Chemist
Meteorological Data and SiteConditions Evaluate the possible effects of meteorological (e.g.,wind, rain, temperature) and site conditions on sampleresults. Review field reports to identify whether anyunusual conditions were present and how the samplingplan was executed.
Site Supervisor
Precision Evaluate laboratory performance through analysis oflaboratory collocates and MS/MSDs.Project Chemist
Accuracy Ensure that all analytical equipment and instrumentation
will meet proper maintenance criteria.
Laboratory/ Project Chemist
Representativeness Ensure that samples accurately portray a parameter orcharacteristic of a particular site through selection ofappropriate sampling procedures and analytical
methods, proper sample identification, and COCprocedures.
Project Chemist
Completeness Evaluate the impact of missing information. Ensure thatenough information was obtained for the data to beusable (completeness as defined in PQOs documentedin the QAPP).
Project Chemist
Comparability Ensure that results from different data collectionactivities achieve an acceptable level of agreement.Project Chemist
Critical Samples Establish that critical samples and critical targetanalytes, as defined in the QAPP, were collected andanalyzed. Determine whether the results meet criteriaspecified in the QAPP.
Project Chemist
Data Restrictions Describe the exact process for handling data that do notmeet PQOs (i.e., when MPCs are not met). Depending
on how those data will be used, specify the restrictionson use of those data for environmental decision-making.
Project Chemist
Usability Decision Determine whether the data can be used to make aspecific decision considering the implications of all
deviations and corrective actions.
Project Chemist
AECOM QAPP – Site 1 Groundwater Operable Unit, Virginia Air National Guard Revision Number: 0Revision Date: January 2018
Page 87 of 88
Table 37-1: Considerations for Usability Assessment (Continued)
Item Assessment Activity Responsibility
Critical Samples Establish that critical samples and critical targetanalytes, as defined in the QAPP, were collected andanalyzed. Determine whether the results meet criteriaspecified in the QAPP.
Project Chemist
Data Restrictions Describe the exact process for handling data that do notmeet PQOs (i.e., when MPCs are not met). Depending
on how those data will be used, specify the restrictionson use of those data for environmental decision-making.
Project Chemist
Usability Decision Determine whether the data can be used to make aspecific decision considering the implications of all
deviations and corrective actions.
Project Chemist
Usability Report Discuss and compare overall precision, accuracy/bias,representativeness, comparability, completeness, andsensitivity for each matrix, analytical group, andconcentration level. Describe limitations on the use ofproject data if criteria for data quality indicators are not
met.
Project Chemist
Page 0 of 88
REFERENCES
42 United States Code (U.S.C.), 1980. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act(CERCLA) of 1980, as amended. Chapter 103. §§9601-9675.
Department of Defense, United States (DoD), 2005.Uniform Federal Policy for Quality Assurance Project Plans, Part 1: UFP-
QAPP Manual. Final Version 1. DoD: DTIC ADA 427785, EPA-505-B-04-900A. In conjunction with the U. S.
Environmental Protection Agency and the Department of Energy. Washington: Intergovernmental Data Quality TaskForce. March. On-line updates available at: http://www.epa.gov/fedfac/pdf/ufp_qapp_v1_0305.pdf.
———, 2007. Policy and Guidelines for Acquisitions Involving Environmental Sampling or Testing. November.
———, 2009a.Screening for Environmental Concerns at Sites with Contaminated Soil and Groundwater. Office of HazardEvaluation and Emergency Response. March.
United StatesEnvironmental Protection Agency (USEPA), 1996. Ecotox Thresholds. ECO Update Intermittent Bulletin Volume3, Number 2. Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response. EPA 540/F-95/038. Available on the internet athttp://www.epa.gov/oswer/riskassessment/ecotox.htm.
———, 2002.Guidance for QA Project Plans for Modeling. EPA QA/G-5M. EPA/240/R-02/007. Office of Environmental
Information. December.
———, 2005b. Uniform Federal Policy for Quality Assurance Project Plans, Part 2B, Quality Assurance/Quality ControlCompendium: Minimum QA/QC Activities. EPA-505-B-04-900A. Intergovernmental Data Quality Task Force March.
———, 2006. Hazardous Waste Support Branch. Validating Volatile Organic Compounds By Gas Chromatography/MassSpectrometry SW-846 8260B.
———, 2006a.Guidance on Systematic Planning Using the Data Quality Objectives Process. EPA QA/G-4. EPA/240/B-06/001. Office of Environmental Information. February.
———, 2010. Contract Laboratory Program National Functional Guidelines for Inorganic Superfund Data Review, January.
United States Army Corps of Engineers (NGB), 2003.Safety and Health Requirements Manual. EM-385-1-1. November.
Page 1 of 88
This page intentionally left blank.

June 2018

This page intentionally left blank.

Appendix D

Site Specific Health and Safety Plan

This page intentionally left blank.
Instructions:The author should review and complete this Health and Safety Plan (HASP). All text in RED,checklists, and forms should
be completed. The preparer may delete sections that are not applicable to the proposed work. Contact your Office Safety, Health, and
Environment (SH&E) Representative (SHER) or Area/Regional SH&E Manager (SHEM) for assistance and for review and approval upon
completion. Note: This document contain hyperlinks that require connection to the AECOM network and access to Ecosystem.
HAZWOPER
Health and Safety Plan
Template Name:DCS Americas HAZWOPER HASPTemplateVersion:1.3
Last Modified:November 8, 2017
Eastern Region Installation Restoration
Program Preliminary Assessment and
Site Inspection
145th Airlift Wing
North Carolina Air National Guard Base
4930 Minuteman Way
Charlotte, NC 28208
Expiration Date:February 26, 2019
(Max. 1-Year from signature date)
Prepared for:NGB/A7OR Prepared by:AECOMGreg Wills3501 Fetchet AvenueJoint Base Andrews, MD
5925 Carnegie Blvd.Suite 370Charlotte, NC 28209
Prepared By:Name Emily Love Signature:
Title Environmental Scientist Date:2/26/18
Region SHEM:Name Tony Indorato Signature:
Title Associate Vice President, SH&E Date:
Area SHEM:Name Lee Davis Signature:
Title Senior Manager,SH&E Date:
Project Manager:Name Megan Donahue Signature:
Title Project Professional Date:
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx i
HASP Summary
Note: This Summary is intended to provide key information only and cannot be substituted for reading, understanding, and
complying with the full HASP. This summary may be continually updated as tasks and personnel change. Use
Continuation Sheets if necessary.
Project Name:Eastern Region Installation Restoration
Program Preliminary Assessment and SiteInspection
Project Number:60553852
Summary Revision Date:2/23/18 Client Name:North Carolina Air National Guard(NCANG)
Report ALL SH&E Incidents, no matter how minor, to the Incident Hotline:[phone]Injury, Property Damage, Vehicle, Security, Regulatory Inspection, Environmental Impact, and any potentially workrelated injury, discomfort/ pain, or damage.
Identify the nearest Occupational Clinic and Hospital to the site that accepts AECOM Workers Compensation Insurance (seeAttachment A for instructions). If the nearest such clinic or hospital is an unreasonable distance from the site, identify nearerhospitals or clinics. Attach maps and directions to the clinics and hospitals in Attachment A.
Occupational Clinic:FastMed Urgent Care Nearest Hospital:Carolinas Medical Center
Address:3250 Wilkinson Blvd Unit I, Charlotte, NC28208 Address:1000 Blythe Blvd, Charlotte, NC28203
Phone Number:[phone] Phone Number:[phone]
Key Personnel
Project Manager (PM):Megan Donahue Cell Phone:[phone]
Site Supervisor (SS)Brett Schaefer Cell Phone [phone]
Safety Officer (SSO):Matt Stone Cell Phone [phone]
AECOM SH&E Mgr.Lee Davis Cell Phone:[phone]
Client PM:Greg Wills Cell Phone:[phone]
List ALL Short-Service Employees, including subcontractors (<6 Months with Company in Current Area/Job Description):
List ALL Subcontractors and their Site Safety Officers:Cascade Drilling –TBDGCAL Laboratories –Kimberly Drag
A&D Environmental Services -TBD
PM must positively verify subcontractors are approved in Subport for the work described. If there were any limitations/conditions of approval, describe them and how they are being met.
I have verified that all subcontractors are approved in Subport, and that all conditions of approval are met.
Project Manager Name Project Manager Signature Date
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx ii
Table of Contents
1. Introduction................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Applicable References.......................................................................................................1
2. Site Information and Scope of Work......................................................... 2
2.1 Site Description..................................................................................................................2
2.2 Site Background/History ....................................................................................................2
2.3 Client or Third-Party Operations at Site..............................................................................2
2.4 Scope of Work...................................................................................................................2
2.5 Scope of Work Risk Assessment.......................................................................................2
3. AECOM Safety Health and Environment Program................................... 4
3.1 AECOM Policy...................................................................................................................4
3.2 Safety For Life ...................................................................................................................5
3.3 Life Preserving Principles...................................................................................................5
3.4 Driving and Vehicle Safety.................................................................................................5
3.5 Fitness for Duty..................................................................................................................7
3.5.1 Medical Surveillance..............................................................................................................7
3.5.2 Proactive Health.....................................................................................................................7
3.5.3 Fatigue...................................................................................................................................7
3.5.4 Substance Abuse...................................................................................................................7
3.6 Rewards and Recognition..................................................................................................8
3.7 Hand Safety.......................................................................................................................8
3.8 Hazard Communication .....................................................................................................9
3.9 Hazardous Material handling and Waste Management......................................................9
3.10 Housekeeping and Personal Hygiene................................................................................9
3.11 Lone Worker....................................................................................................................10
3.12 Safety Observations.........................................................................................................10
3.13 Short Service Employee ..................................................................................................11
3.14 Stop Work Authority.........................................................................................................11
4. Roles and Responsibilities...................................................................... 12
4.1 Project Manager ..............................................................................................................12
4.2 Site Supervisor ................................................................................................................12
4.3 Site Safety Officer............................................................................................................13
4.4 Employees.......................................................................................................................13
4.5 Subcontractors.................................................................................................................14
4.6 Visitors.............................................................................................................................14
5. Training and Documentation................................................................... 15
5.1 HASP/SITE Orientation....................................................................................................15
5.2 Daily Tailgate Meetings and THA Review ........................................................................15
5.3 Worker Training and Qualifications..................................................................................15
5.4 Competent Person...........................................................................................................16
6. Hazard Assessment and Control ............................................................ 17
6.1 SH&E Procedures............................................................................................................17
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx iii
6.2 Job Safety analysis/ Pre-Job Hazard Assessment/..........................................................17
6.3 Task Hazard Assessment................................................................................................17
6.3.1 Hazard Categories...............................................................................................................17
6.4 4-Sight.............................................................................................................................18
6.5 Speak Up!/Listen Up!.......................................................................................................18
7. Physical Hazard Assessment.................................................................. 19
7.1 Physical Hazards.............................................................................................................19
8. Chemical Hazard Assessment ................................................................ 21
8.1 Potential Chemical Hazards.............................................................................................21
8.2 Potential Exposure Pathways ..........................................................................................21
8.2.1 Inhalation .............................................................................................................................21
8.2.2 Skin Contact.........................................................................................................................21
8.2.3 Ingestion ..............................................................................................................................21
8.3 Decontamination..............................................................................................................22
8.4 Air Monitoring...................................................................................................................22
8.4.1 Real-Time Exposure Measurement/ Equipment..................................................................23
8.4.2 Health and Safety Action Levels..........................................................................................23
8.4.3 Monitoring Procedures.........................................................................................................23
9. Environmental Impact Prevention........................................................... 25
9.1 Incidental Spill Prevention and Containment....................................................................25
9.1.1 Spill Prevention and Containment Practices .......................................................................25
10. Personal Protective Equipment .............................................................. 27
11. Site Control............................................................................................... 28
11.1 Site Work Zones..............................................................................................................28
11.2 Site Control Map/ Diagram...............................................................................................29
11.3 Simultaneous and Neighboring Operations......................................................................30
11.4 Site Security ....................................................................................................................30
12. Emergency Response.............................................................................. 31
12.1 Incident/ Emergency Contact Information ........................................................................31
12.2 Muster Location...............................................................................................................32
12.3 Communication Procedures.............................................................................................32
12.4 CPR/ First Aid Trained Personnel....................................................................................32
12.5 Incident Reporting............................................................................................................32
12.6 Medical Emergencies.......................................................................................................33
12.7 Vehicle Incidents..............................................................................................................33
12.8 Spill or Release................................................................................................................34
12.8.1 Environmental Spill/Release Reporting...............................................................................34
12.8.2 Spill Evaluation and Response............................................................................................35
12.8.3 Post Spill Evaluation............................................................................................................36
12.9 Fire..................................................................................................................................36
13. Personnel Acknowledgement ................................................................. 37
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx iv
Attachments
Attachment A. Hospital/Clinic Maps and Incident Reporting and Response Flow Chart
Attachment B. AECOM SH&E Procedures
Attachment C. Stretch/Flex Poster
Attachment D. Safety Data Sheets
Attachment E. Site Orientation
Attachment F. Project/Task-Specific Pre-Job Hazard Assessments Forms
Applicable References
This Health and Safety Plan (HASP) conforms to the regulatory requirements and guidelines established in the following
documents:
§Title 29, Part 1910 of the Code of Federal Regulations (29 CFR 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Standards
(with special attention to Section 120, Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response).
§Title 8 of the California Code of Regulations (8 CCR), with special attention to Section 5192 Hazardous Waste
Operations and Emergency Response, and Section 3202, Injury Illness Prevention Program.
§29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction.
§8 CCR, with special attention to Sub Chapter 4, Sections 1500 - 1938 Construction Safety Orders.
§National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health/Occupational Safety and Hazards Administration/U.S. Coast
Guard/U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous
Waste Site Activities, Publication No. 85-115, 1985.
§The requirements in this HASP also conform to AECOM’s Safety for Life Program requirements as specified in the
AECOM Safety, Health and Environment (SH&E) Manual.
§NCANG PA-SI Work Plan
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx v
Template Revision Log
Version Revised By Date Summary of Revisions
1.0 Kris Brobst October 2016 Initial Version
1.1 Patrick Walz January 2017 Updated Procedure IDs from NA to AM. Updated QR codes for Lifeguard and
IndustrySafe.
1.2 Brobst, Walz,
Cristopher
Altman & Maria
Mirabelli
January 2018
1.Technical edits, spelling corrections, & formatting changes throughout
document2.Standardized terminology for Job Safety Analysis/Pre-Job-HazardAnalysis (JSA/Pre-JHA) throughout document.
3.Updated Header to include AECOM Logo and client name throughoutdocument4.Page v: Added Revision log
5.Page 3: Updated AECOM SH&E Policy statement to 2017 version6.Page 6: Added Section 3.5.2: Protective Health7.Page 7: Added Section 3.6: Rewards and Recognition
8.Page 11: Updated Roles & Responsibilities reference to procedureS3AM-117-PR19.Page 14: Added discussion of stretching & flexing to Section 5.2 andreference to new Attachment C, a stretch-flex poster.10.Page 14: To Site-Specific Training requirements table, added training
option for Field Safety where Hazwoper training is not required. Addedoption for Speak-up/Listen Up for Environmental Business Line fieldworkers and supervisors.
11.Page 16: Inserted Risk Planning Elements figure12.Page 16:Updated Hazard Categories section with new hazard categoriesand hazard wheel.
13.Page 17: Updated 4-Sight section with new logo14.Page 17: Added Section 6.5:Speak Up/Listen Up15.Page 20: Deleted “Maximum Concentrations found on site” column.
Added note in introduction that the chemicals listed on the table aresuspected to be present at the site.16.Page 30: Updated hyperlink to Operational Security Plan template GRG-
001-RP417.Attachment C: New Stretch/Flex poster. Revised subsequent attachmentnumbers.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 1
1. Introduction
This written HASP is designed to identify, evaluate, and control safety and health hazards, and to outline emergency response
actions for AECOM-managed activities. This HASP must be kept on site during wok activities and made available to all workers
including subcontractors and other site occupants for informational purposes. AECOM subcontractors are expected to
independently characterize, assess, and control site hazards created by their specific scope of work.
This section of the HASP summarizes important AECOM SH&E Procedures that apply to all Design and Consulting Services
(DCS) Americas jobs. See Attachment B for complete copies of applicable field SH&E Procedures. This template has been
designed primarily for use in the United States; see procedure attachment S3AM-320-ATT2 for Canadian Specific Requirements
on AECOM’s ecosystem.
1.1 Applicable References
This Health and Safety Plan (HASP) conforms to the regulatory requirements and guidelines established in the following
documents:
§Title 29, Part 1910 of the Code of Federal Regulations (29 CFR 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Standards
(with special attention to Section 120, Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response).
§Title 8 of the California Code of Regulations (8 CCR), with special attention to Section 5192 Hazardous Waste
Operations and Emergency Response, and Section 3202, Injury Illness Prevention Program.
§29 CFR 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction.
§8 CCR, with special attention to Sub Chapter 4, Sections 1500 - 1938 Construction Safety Orders.
§National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health/Occupational Safety and Hazards Administration/U.S. Coast
Guard/U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous
Waste Site Activities, Publication No. 85-115, 1985.
§The requirements in this HASP also conform to AECOM’s Safety for Life Program requirements as specified in the
AECOM Safety, Health and Environment (SH&E) Manual.
§NCANG PA-SI Work Plan
Project Assumptions
§Site management will assist in locating subsurface utilities, vessels, and structures located on the property and outside the
scope of the utility locator service.
§No confined spaces will be entered on this project.
§No excavations will be entered.
§Work will be performed during daylight hours.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 2
2. Site Information and Scope of Work
2.1 Site Description
The North Carolina Air National Guard Base (NCANGB) at 4930 Minuteman Way, Charlotte NC 28208, is located at the
Charlotte Douglas International Airport approximately five miles west of downtown Charlotte, North Carolina. The North
Carolina Air National Guard (NCANG) first occupied the site in 1948 and has maintained a presence at Charlotte Douglas
International Airport to present day. The base houses the 145th Airlift Wing which flies the C-130 H-3 "Hercules" aircraft,
performing federal and state missions to include aerial firefighting. Activities at the NCANG include aircraft maintenance,
aerospace ground equipment maintenance, ground vehicle maintenance, and fuel management and facilities maintenance. The
surrounding area is occupied by transportation, light industrial and residential properties.
2.2 Site Background/History
The NCANG origins date back to March 15, 1948 with the establishment of the 156th Fighter Squadron, the oldest unit of the
North Carolina Air National Guard. The Guard was federally recognized and activated at Morris Field, near Charlotte, and was
equipped with F-47D Thunderbolts. Its mission was the air defense of the state.
In 1950, the 156th was re-equipped with former World War II F-51 Mustangs, now designated RF-51D, which had been used in
the United States in a training role. The squadron became part of Tactical Air Command as a Tactical Reconnaissance
Squadron. In 1955, the facilities at Morris Field were expanded. Two years later the 145th Fighter Group (FG) was organized
and consisted of the 156th Fighter Squadron and subordinate units. In 1960, the 145th FG group was re-designated the 145th
Aeromedical Transport Group (ATG) flying evacuation missions. In 1964, the 145th ATG was re-designated 145th Air Transport
Group (Heavy).
NCANG now flies C-130 H-3 "Hercules" aircraft, performing federal and state missions to include aerial firefighting, with 145th
Airlift Wing's C-130s equipped with the Modular Airborne Firefighting System and the 156th Aeromedical Evacuation Squadron,
which responds to natural disasters.
2.3 Client or Third-Party Operations at Site
The Site is at an active Air National Guard Base, so planes will be taxiing to and from the NCANG hangar. Additional operations
include plane fueling, maintenance, and takeoff/landing.
2.4 Scope of Work
·Gather site-specific information to evaluate the fate and transport mechanisms;·Identify topography, vegetation, soil characteristics, climate, land use at the site and adjacent real estate, potential
exposure pathways, and ground scars;·Install four (4) soil borings around the perimeter of the former oil water separator (OWS);·Install one (1) temporary monitoring well to 40 ft bgs at a presumed downgradient location of the former OWS and;·Collect and evaluate soil and groundwater samples.
2.5 Scope of Work Risk Assessment
Low Risk (examples: non-intrusive work, occasional exposure and/or low risk hazards)
Medium Risk (examples: intrusive work, heavy equipment use, frequent exposure and/or moderate hazards)
High Risk (examples: complicated scope, large/ multiple work crews, and/or constant exposure to hazards).
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 3
The following tasks/ hazards automatically trigger high risk ranking. Check all which apply. Include hazard mitigation procedures
later in the appropriate Physical, Chemical, or Environmental section of the HASP.
Asbestos Removal /Contact
ATV Use
Bridge /Dam Inspections/ Snooper Truck Use
Confined Space
Cranes and Rigging Use
Demolition
Diving –Scientific or Commercial
High Speed Traffic Exposure
Hot Work
Conditions Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health (IDLH)
Laboratory Operations
LOTO or Live Energy Source Work
On-rail / Near Rail Work
Ordinance, Munitions, Explosives Use
Pile Driving
Radiation or Radioactive Instrument Use
Remote Location or Lone Worker
Respirator Use (does not include dust mask)
Scaffolding Use
Use or Exposure to Toxic Chemicals
Trenching / Excavation
Tunnel /Underground Work
UXO / MMR
Work at Heights >4 ft.
Work at Angle >30 deg.
Work On /Over Water
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 4
3. AECOM Safety Health and Environment
Program
3.1 AECOM Policy
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 5
3.2 Safety For Life
“Safety for Life” is a comprehensive integrated AECOM Safety Management System that drives our nearly
100,000 employees toward AECOM’s commitment to achieving zero work-related injuries and/or illnesses;
preventing damage to property and the environment; and maintaining an environmentally friendly and
sustainable workplace. Our Safety for Life program is supported by nine Life Preserving Principles that apply to
all AECOM activities.
3.3 Life Preserving Principles
3.4 Driving and Vehicle Safety
The proper operation of vehicles is critical to protecting the safety of AECOM employees and subcontractors. Drivers face
numerous hazards while operating vehicles. Some of the hazards include collision with another vehicle, collision with a fixed
object, vehicle break down or failure, or falling asleep or becoming otherwise incapacitated while driving. All employees will
adhere to Driving procedure S3AM-005-PR,which includes the following key practices:
1. Authorized Drivers
Managers must authorize drivers following evaluation of driver criteria to drive and maintain an AECOM-
owned, leased or rented vehicle, a client or customer-owned vehicle, or a personal vehicle operated in the
course of conducting AECOM business.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 6
2. Electronic Devices Prohibited
AECOM prohibits use of all portable electronic devices while operating a motor vehicle/ equipment which
includes being stopped at a traffic light or stop sign. This includes cell phones, two-way radios and other
items whether hand-held or hands-free. Electronic devices include, but are not limited to, all mobile phones,
pagers, iPods, MP3s, GPS, DVD players, tablets laptops and other portable electronic devices that can cause
driver distraction. Hands-free device use is not allowed.
§GPS units and devices used for navigation may only be used if factory installed or secured to the
vehicle with a bracket that allows the driver to view the image without having to take their eyes off the
road. Electronic devices shall be setup for operation prior to commencing driving activities and shall
not be changed by the driver while driving.
3. Vehicle Inspections
The driver shall conduct pre-trip vehicle inspections prior to each trip. A vehicle inspection checklist,S3AM-
005_FM2,can be used to guide and document the inspection process. Vehicle inspection is to include a 360-
degree walk around and visual inspection under the vehicle for leaks and obstructions prior to moving the
vehicle.
4. Training
All drivers shall complete defensive driver training. Additional training (i.e., hands-on defensive driver training)
may apply for medium and high-risk drivers; see Driving procedure S3AM-005-PR and SHE Training
procedure S3AM-003-PR for more details.
5. Journey Management Plan
Drivers who undertake trips in excess of 250 miles (400 kilometers) one way, drive in remote or hazardous
areas, or when otherwise deemed necessary, shall develop and document a Journey Management Plan using
S3AM-005-FM1 or equivalent.
6. Secure Loads
Cargo is only to be carried within the passenger compartment of a vehicle when segregated and restrained to
prevent objects from becoming distractions, obstructions or projectiles to occupants should emergency vehicle
maneuvers be required (e.g., harsh braking or crash). All goods transported on flatbed trucks or in pickup
beds must be securely fastened to prevent them from becoming hazards. All applicable laws and regulations
regarding securing of loads must be met. It is prudent to check the load after a few miles to ensure that load
has not shifted or loosened prior to completing the remainder of the trip.
7. Backing Up
Reversing the vehicle is to be avoided if at all possible. If backing up is necessary, use the following
guidelines:
§Pre-plan all vehicle movements.
§If the pull-through method of parking is not possible, drivers will scan parking spot/area for hazards
and back in; thereby, facilitating departure where the first move is forward.
§A light tap of the horn should be used to alert others of your intention to back up.
§Avoid tight spaces.
§Vehicles over 10,000 pounds gross vehicular weight are required to have a competent spotter in
place when backing. A competent spotter is one that has received spotter training.
§All vehicles shall have a competent spotter in place when backing in an active work zone. Parking
and public access areas are recommended but not required to have a spotter.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 7
3.5 Fitness for Duty
One of AECOM’s nine Life-Preserving Principles is Fitness for Duty (see Fitness for Duty procedure S3AM-008-PR). Fitness for
Duty means that individuals are in a state (physical, mental, and emotional) that enables them to perform assignments
competently and in a manner that does not threaten the health and safety of themselves or others. On certain projects or for
specific tasks, fit for duty certifications may be requested of medical providers by SH&E Managers or Human Resources (HR).
Employees should report to work fit for duty and unimpaired by substances or fatigue. Supervisors must observe their
employees and work with the employee, SH&E staff, and HR to address deficiencies. AECOM will not tolerate retaliation
against any employee for filing a complaint or concern regarding their fitness for duty or participating in any way in an
investigation.
3.5.1 Medical Surveillance
AECOM’s S3AM-128-PR, Medical Screening and Surveillance,details the requirements to participate in a medical monitoring
program. Medical Surveillance provides a streamlined process to determine if employees meet the physical requirements to
perform assigned duties as defined by applicable regulations. It is also designed to provide a means to collect data relevant to
exposure to chemical and physical agents for the protection of the workers and to confirm the effectiveness of health and safety
programs.
3.5.2 Proactive Health
AECOM is committed to promoting proactive health activities in addition to the planning for prevention of safety and
environmental incidents. Proactive health activities will be completed on an on-going basis at AECOM on a corporate-wide
basis (i.e. Wellness program associated with employee benefits), at offices, and at this project site. Management will be actively
involved in providing and encouraging opportunities for health and wellness education and improvement. Health initiatives and
education will be discussed periodically during office based meetings as the safety moment or during the daily tailgate meeting
as a toolbox talk. Topics may be related to, but are not limited to:
§Heart health;
§Stress management;
§Smoking cessation;
§Diabetes prevention;
§Diet; and
§Exercise benefits.
Topics and educational materials can be located on the AECOM Wellness page, National Institutes of Health website, Centers
for Disease Control and Prevention website and other reputable sources online.
In addition, the field team will be encouraged to participate in a daily stretch and flex routine (a standardized way to avoid soft
tissue damage from work activities) to the best of their abilities, given their own personal limits. It is particularly beneficial to
warm and loosen muscles before repetitive work, manual handling of loads, and when working in cold temperatures or with
static postures. The Stretch and Flex manual and poster (Attachment C) serve as guidance for the leader to follow.
3.5.3 Fatigue
One aspect of fit for duty is fatigue management. AECOM has developed procedures that limit work periods or requires
additional rest under certain circumstances, including during long-distance travel or when working at high altitudes. These
procedures also set limits on extended work periods of 14 hours per day or 60 hours per week. A fatigue management plan is
required if longer working hours are necessary (see Fatigue Management Procedure S3AM-009-PR).
3.5.4 Substance Abuse
Drug and alcohol abuse pose a serious threat to the health and safety of employees, clients, and the general public as well as
the security of our job sites, equipment and facilities. AECOM is committed to the elimination of illegal drug use and alcohol
abuse in its workplace and regards any misuse of drugs or alcohol by employees to be unacceptable. AECOM Substance
Abuse Prevention Procedure (S3AM-019-PR) prohibits the use, possession, presence in the body, manufacture, concealment,
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 8
transportation, promotion or sale of the following items or substances on company premises. Company premises refer to all
property, offices, facilities, land, buildings, structures, fixtures, installations, aircraft, automobiles, vessels, trucks and all other
vehicles and equipment - whether owned, leased, or used.
§Illegal drugs (or their metabolites), designer and synthetic drugs, mood or mind altering substances, and drug use
related paraphernalia unless authorized for administering currently prescribed medication;
§Controlled substances that are not used in accordance with physician instructions or non-prescribed controlled
substances; and
§Alcoholic beverages while at work or while on any customer- or AECOM-controlled property.
This policy does not prohibit lawful use and possession of current medication prescribed in the employees name or over-the-
counter medications. Employees must consult with their health care provider about any prescribed medication’s effect on their
ability to perform work safely and disclose any restrictions to their supervisor.
Although some states may pass laws legalizing medical or recreational marijuana use, the use, sale, distribution and possession
of marijuana are violations of federal law and AECOM policy, and will subject an employee to disciplinary action up to and
including termination in accordance with controlling law.
3.6 Rewards and Recognition
One of AECOM’s Life Preserving Principles is Recognition and Rewards for proactive safety, health and environmentally
focused behaviors. All projects are expected to participate in the rewards and recognition programs available on the Corporate
and DCS Americas SH&E ecosystem pages. Large, long term projects are encouraged to establish a project specific rewards
and recognition program which incorporates project specific goals and activities (template available S3AM-020-FM1).All
rewards and recognition programs must emphasize the 9 Life Preserving Principles and proactive SH&E activities NOT
solely the achievement of lagging metrics (“injury/incident-free” hours, etc.) as those may discourage incident
reporting.
There are several possible appropriate methods of rewarding and recognizing employees and contractors:
1.Informal – recognition via verbal acknowledgment, email, spot awards, luncheons, etc.
2.Formal – Safety Star Award nomination (link)
3.Formal – SH&E Challenge Coins (see local SH&E manager for details)
3.7 Hand Safety
The hands are exposed to hazards more than any body part. SH&E Hand Safety Procedure S3AM-317-PR describes
requirements and best practices including these notable practices:
§All personnel shall have gloves in their immediate possession 100%of the time when in a shop or on a work
site. Gloves that address the hazard shall be worn when employees work with or near any materials or equipment
that present the potential for hand injury due to sharp edges, corrosives, flammable and irritating materials,
extreme temperatures, splinters, etc. Use the Gloves Needs Assessment (S3AM-317-FM1) to help determine the
appropriate glove for the hazard(s).
§Fixed open-blade knives are prohibited from use during the course of AECOM work. Examples of fixed open-
blade knives include pocket knives, multi-tools, hunting knives, and standard utility knives. For more information
about cutting tools, see S3AM-317-ATT1 Safe Alternative Tools.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 9
3.8 Hazard Communication
Hazardous materials that may be encountered on-site as existing environmental or physical/health contaminants are addressed
in this HASP. Their properties, hazards, and associated required controls will be communicated to all affected staff and
subcontractors in accordance with the requirements of AECOM Procedure S3AM-115-PR1 Hazardous Materials
Communication including these key elements:
§All personnel shall be briefed on the hazards of any chemical product they use and shall be aware of and have
access to the Safety Data Sheets (SDS).
§All containers on site shall be properly labeled to indicate their contents. Labeling on any containers not intended
for single-day, individual use shall contain additional information indicating potential health and safety hazards
(flammability, reactivity, etc.).
In addition, any employee or organization (contractor or subcontractor) intending to bring any hazardous material onto this
AECOM-controlled work site must first provide a copy of the item’s SDS to the Site Supervisor or Site Safety Officer for review
and filing. The Site Supervisor or Site Safety Officer will maintain copies of all SDS on site and in Attachment D. SDS may not
be available for locally obtained products, in which case an alternate form of product hazard documentation will be acceptable.
3.9 Hazardous Material handling and Waste Management
If hazardous, solid, and/or municipal wastes are generated during any phase of the project, the waste shall be accumulated,
labeled, and disposed of in accordance with applicable Federal, State, Provincial, Territorial and/or local regulations and SH&E
Procedure S3AM-116-PR Hazardous Materials Shipping. A site-specific Entity Letter may be required for the site/client; if so,
only persons named on the entity letter are allowed to sign waste shipping papers “on behalf of [client name]”. Any individual
signing shipping papers must have valid Department of Transportation and Resource Conservation and Recovery Act training
for waste shipment. Consult the HZM/HZW & TDG page on ecosystem or the SH&E Manager for further guidance on AECOM
and regulatory procedures and training requirements.
3.10 Housekeeping and Personal Hygiene
Basic housekeeping requirements for offices and work sites, as well as personal hygiene and sanitation standards can be found
in S3AM-013-PR Housekeeping. Inspections should be performed at the regular interval specified below. The housekeeping
inspection form S3AM-013-FM1 is available for use.
Complete the table below regarding site-specific Housekeeping and Personal Hygiene requirements:
Housekeeping:Inspection Frequency:Daily Inspector:Matt Stone, SSO
Eating, Drinking, Smoking:Permitted only in designated area(s)located at the back of the NCANG hangar building.
Handwashing:Water, soap and paper towels or equivalent supplies are located in restrooms inside the NCANG hangar
building.
Site staff will wash hands and face after completing work activities and prior to breaks or meals.
Toilets:Toilets are located in restrooms inside the NCANG hangar building.
NOTE: A minimum of one toilet must be provided for every 20 personnel on site. For mobile crews where
work activities and locations permit transportation to nearby toilet facilities on-site facilities are not required.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 10
Water:Water is located inside the NCANG hangar building.
A water supply meeting the following requirements will be utilized:
Potable Water:An adequate supply of potable water will be available for field personnel
consumption. Potable water can be provided in the form of water bottles,
canteens, water coolers, or drinking fountains. Disposable drinking cups for
single use and a waste receptacle will be provided as needed. Water
containers will be refilled daily and disinfected regularly. Potable water
containers will be properly identified in order to distinguish them from non-
potable water sources.
Non-Potable Water:Non-potable water may be used for hand washing and cleaning activities. Non-
potable water will not be used for drinking purposes. All containers of non-
potable water will be marked with a label stating “Non-Potable Water, Not
Intended for Drinking Water Consumption”
Illumination:Illumination will be provided in the form of flashlights if natural light or installed lighting fixtures are not
sufficient in the work area, toilet, and/or break area.
3.11 Lone Worker
AECOM discourages employees from working alone (i.e. where AECOM personnel are out of visual and audio range of others)
when performing field tasks (see SH&E Procedure S3AM-314-PR, Working Alone). If lone work is to be performed, a
communications/check-in plan must be developed and implemented using the table below.
Lone Worker:N/A
Justification:N/A
Check-In Requirement:N/A
Check-In Contact:N/A
Hazard Summary:N/A
Response Plan:N/A
3.12 Safety Observations
Safety observations are observations made by employees or subcontractors of a condition or behavior which could contribute to
an incident, prior to the incident occurring. Observations can also identify positive behaviors or interventions which contribute to
the prevention of incidents. Large, long-term projects may benefit from the use of LifeGuard to track and trend observations on
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 11
a site level. All other projects should log their observations using IndustrySafe. Both reporting systems can be accessed on any
safety page of ecosystem. Or the QR codes below can be used while off the AECOM network from a smartphone/ device.
3.13 Short Service Employee
A Short Service Employee is an employee with fewer than 6 months experience working on field projects or an employee who
has not completed the required training or received required certifications (see the Short Service Employee procedure,S3AM-
002-PR). The Project Manager will identify all Short Service Employees working on the project, and each Short Service
Employee will be assigned to an experienced team member so all activities may be monitored. Short Service Employees shall
be easily identified in the field environment, such as through wearing a specific colored hardhat, a manufacturer-approved
orange stripe applied to their hardhat, or be clearly identified by some other system. Any new employee shall wear the
designated Short Service Employee identifier until the Project Manager determines the employee has the knowledge, skills, and
ability related to the specific hazard on the project.
3.14 Stop Work Authority
AECOM empowers and expects all employees to exercise their Stop Work Authority (see Stop Work Authority Procedure S3AM-
002-PR)if an incident appears imminent, or when hazardous behaviors or conditions are observed. A stop work request can be
informal if the situation can be easily corrected, or may require shutting down operations if revised procedures are necessary to
mitigate the hazard. If an AECOM employee observes an imminently hazardous situation on a site
controlled by others (i.e., a client-managed contractor), the employee can always stop work for themselves
by removing themselves from the situation. Employees also may attempt to stop work to avoid allowing
the contractor to come to harm by immediately notifying the contractor foreman or site engineer, or if
necessary, the client or party managing the contractor.
No employee should object to the issuance of a stop-work request, nor can any disciplinary action be
levied against the employee. All employees must agree that the situation has been mitigated before
resuming work. No employee will be disciplined for refusing to work if they feel it is unsafe.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 12
4. Roles and Responsibilities
Roles and responsibilities for the project team are defined in SH&E Procedure S3AM-117-PR1, Hazardous Waste Operations.
The Project Manager (PM) is ultimately responsible for the development of this HASP and establishing a budget to implement
the controls and training required. The Project Manager is also responsible for ensuring that the plan is implemented, that
appropriate documentation is generated, and that records are maintained. The SH&E Manager is responsible for reviewing and
approving this HASP, and assisting with other SH&E matters upon request. A Site Safety Officer may be appointed to oversee
implementation of the HASP in the field. All project team members are responsible for reviewing and abiding by this HASP,
performing daily (or more frequent) task hazard assessments, stopping work when necessary to correct unsafe behaviors or
conditions, and reporting incidents promptly to the PM and AECOM Incident Reporting Hotline (Incident Hotline [phone]).
4.1 Project Manager
The Project Manager has overall management authority and responsibility for all site operations, including safety. The Project
Manager will provide the site supervisor with work plans, staff, and budgetary resources, which are appropriate to meet the
safety needs of the project operations. Some of the Project Manager's specific responsibilities include:
§Verifying that personnel, to whom this HASP applies, including AECOM subcontractors, have received a copy of it,
with ample opportunity to review the document and to ask questions.
§Providing the concurring SH&E Manager with updated information regarding conditions at the site and the scope of
site work if changes occur that will affect the accuracy of this HASP.
§Providing adequate authority and resources to the Site Supervisor or Site Safety Officer to allow for the successful
implementation of all necessary SH&E Procedures.
§Maintaining regular communications with the Site Supervisor or Site Safety Officer and, when necessary, the
AECOM Client SH&E Program Manager.
§Coordinating the activities of AECOM subcontractors and ensuring that they are aware of the pertinent health and
safety requirements for these projects, when applicable.
§Conducting Safety System Auditing by way of Management Site Visits and/or Project Manager Self-Assessments
on a regular basis.
§Approving amendments to the HASP (in conjunction with the Site Supervisor or Site Safety Officer).
§Coordinating activities with the client as needed to ensure the safe implementation of this HASP.
4.2 Site Supervisor
The Site Supervisor has the overall responsibility and authority to direct work operations at the job site according to the provided
work plans and HASP. The Project Manager may act as the Site Supervisor while on site. The Site Supervisor’s responsibilities
include:
§Discussing deviations or drift from the work plan with the Site Safety Officer and Project Manager.
§Discussing safety issues with the Project Manager, Site Safety Officer, and field personnel.
§Assisting the Site Safety Officer with the development and implementation of corrective actions for site safety
deficiencies.
§Assisting the Site Safety Officer with the implementation of this HASP and ensuring compliance.
§Assisting the Site Safety Officer with inspections of the site for compliance with this HASP and applicable SH&E
Procedures.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 13
§Reviewing Pre-Job Hazard Assessments (Pre-JHAs), Job Safety Analyses (JSAs) and Task Hazard Assessments
(THAs) with the work crew.
§Reporting incidents and ensuring incidents and observations are logged into Lifeguard or IndustrySafe.
§Verifying that all operations are in compliance with the requirements of this HASP, and halting any activity that
poses a potential hazard to personnel, property, or the environment.
§Temporarily suspending individuals from field activities for infractions against the HASP pending consideration by
the Site Safety Officer, the SH&E Manager, and the Project Manager.
4.3 Site Safety Officer
The Site Safety Officer supports the Site Supervisor in providing a safe work environment. Not all sites will have a designated
Site Safety Officer; the decision should be made by the Project Manager and SH&E Manager taking into consideration the
complexity and risks of the scope of work. The Site Supervisor may act as the Site Safety Officer on sites without one. The Site
Safety Officer’s responsibilities include:
§Updating the site-specific HASP to reflect changes in site conditions or the scope of work. HASP updates must be
reviewed and approved by the SH&E Manager.
§Inspecting the site for compliance with this HASP and the SH&E Procedures using the appropriate field audit
inspection checklist found in IndustrySafe.
§Coordinating with Site Supervisor to review JSAs/ Pre-JHAs and THAs with the work crew.
§Assisting as needed to report incidents and verify that incidents and observations are logged into Lifeguard or
IndustrySafe.
§Working with the Site Supervisor and Project Manager to develop and implement corrective action plans to correct
deficiencies discovered during site inspections. Deficiencies will be discussed with project management to
determine appropriate corrective action(s).
§Contacting the SH&E Manager for technical advice regarding safety issues.
§Determining emergency evacuation routes, establishing and posting local emergency telephone numbers, and
arranging emergency transportation.
§Checking that all site personnel and visitors have received the proper training, orientation and medical clearance
prior to entering the site.
§Establishing controlled work areas (as designated in this HASP or other safety documentation).
§Facilitating or co-leading daily tailgate meetings and maintaining attendance logs and records.
§Discussing potential SH&E hazards with the Site Supervisor, the SH&E Manager and the Project Manager.
§Selecting an alternate Site Safety Officer by name and informing him/her of their duties, in the event that the Site
Safety Officer must leave or is absent from the site.
§Verifying that all operations are in compliance with the requirements of this HASP.
§Issuing a “Stop Work Order” under the conditions set forth in this HASP.
§Temporarily suspending individuals from field activities for infractions against the HASP pending consideration by
the SH&E Manager and the Project Manager.
4.4 Employees
Responsibilities of employees associated with this project include, but are not limited to:
§Understanding and abiding by the SH&E Procedures specified in the HASP and other applicable safety policies,
and clarifying those areas where understanding is incomplete.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 14
§Providing feedback to SH&E management for continuous improvement relating to omissions and modifications in
the HASP or other safety policies and procedures.
§Notifying the Site Supervisor or Site Safety Officer of unsafe conditions and acts.
§Stopping work if there is doubt about how to safely perform a task or if unsafe acts or conditions are observed
(including subcontractors or team contractors).
§Speaking up and refusing to work on any site or operation where the SH&E procedures specified in this HASP or
other safety policies are not being followed.
§Contacting the Site Supervisor or Site Safety Officer or the SH&E Manager at any time to discuss potential
concerns.
4.5 Subcontractors
The requirements for subcontractor selection and subcontractor safety responsibilities are outlined in AECOM Procedure S3AM-
213-PR Subcontractor Management. Each AECOM subcontractor is responsible for assigning specific work tasks to their
employees. Each subcontractor's management will provide qualified employees and allocate sufficient time, materials, and
equipment to safely complete assigned tasks. In particular, each subcontractor is responsible for equipping its personnel with
any required personnel protective equipment (PPE) and all required training.
AECOM considers each subcontractor to be an expert in all aspects of the work operations for which they are tasked to provide,
and each subcontractor is responsible for compliance with the regulatory requirements that pertain to those services as well as
all other requirements applicable to their work. Each subcontractor is expected to perform its operations in accordance with its
own unique safety policies and procedures, in order to ensure that hazards associated with the performance of the work
activities are properly controlled. Copies of any required safety documentation for a subcontractor's work activities will be
provided to AECOM for review prior to the start of on-site activities.
Hazards not listed in this HASP but known to any subcontractor, or known to be associated with a subcontractor's services,
must be identified and addressed to the AECOM Project Manager or the Site Supervisor prior to beginning work operations. The
Site Supervisor or authorized representative has the authority to halt any subcontractor operations, and to remove any
subcontractor or subcontractor employee from the site for failure to comply with established health and safety procedures or for
operating in an unsafe manner.
4.6 Visitors
Authorized visitors (e.g., client representatives, regulators, AECOM management staff, etc.) requiring entry to any work location
on the site will be briefed by the Project Manager, Site Supervisor, or Site Safety Officer on the hazards present at that location.
Visitors will be escorted at all times at the work location and will be responsible for compliance with their employer's health and
safety policies. In addition, this HASP specifies the minimum acceptable qualifications, training and PPE that are required for
entry to any controlled work area; visitors must comply with these requirements at all times.
If the site visitor requires entry to any exclusion zone (EZ), but does not comply with the above requirements, all work activities
within the EZ must be suspended.
Unauthorized visitors, and visitors not meeting the specified qualifications, will not be permitted within established controlled
work areas.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 15
5. Training and Documentation
The following sections describe the standard practices or programs that AECOM will establish to prepare employees to perform
work safely and consistent with AECOM policy and Procedures.
5.1 HASP/SITE Orientation
The Project Manager shall conduct a project/site-specific HASP orientation prior to the start of field operations, with support as
needed by the SH&E Manager, Site Safety Officer, or Site Supervisor. This meeting will involve representatives from all
organizations with a direct contractual relationship with AECOM on the job site. Minimum items to be covered are listed in
Attachment E. Participants will then sign the HASP Personnel Acknowledgement register at the end of the HASP.
5.2 Daily Tailgate Meetings and THA Review
The Site Supervisor, Site Safety Officer or designee shall facilitate a tailgate meeting to discuss the specific requirements of this
HASP, review the applicable JSAs/ Pre-JHAs and/or complete THAs prior to the commencement of daily project activities.
Attendance at the daily tailgate meeting is mandatory for all employees and subcontractors at the site contracted to AECOM.
Simultaneous operations are encouraged to attend each other’s tailgate meetings or at the very least the supervisors shall
discuss the coordination of activities and associated hazards of each other’s tasks. The supervisor will then convey the
information to the work crew. The Tailgate Meeting must be documented by the Site Supervisor or Site Safety Officer on a Daily
Tailgate Meeting form, a blank copy of which is included in Attachment F.
As part of the daily tailgate meeting, employees and subcontractors will be encouraged to voluntarily warm up and stretch select
muscle groups to the best of their ability and within each person’s individual limitations. Stretching is particularly beneficial to
warm and loosen muscles before repetitive work, manual handling of loads, and when working in cold temperatures or with
static postures. The exercises included in Attachment C may be used to facilitate these efforts.
5.3 Worker Training and Qualifications
All personnel at this site must be qualified and experienced in the tasks they are assigned. SH&E Training Procedure S3AM-
003-PR establishes the general training requirements for AECOM employees. In addition,S3AM-117-PR,Hazardous Waste
Operations, explains the HAZWOPER training and S3AM-128-PR, Medical Screening and Surveillance,details the medical
surveillance requirements.
Check all required training on the table below. Verify training records of employees and subcontractors.
Site-Specific Training Requirements
Training Applies to
HASP Orientation All Employees and Subcontractors
HAZWOPER 40 –HR On HAZWOPER sites, in EZ, exposed to hazardous contamination
HAZWOPER Supervisor Employees managing others in HAZWOPER activities
Field Safety Anyone visiting the field that does not require HAZWOPER
Speak-Up/Listen Up All Environmental Business Line Field Employees and Supervisors by end of
FY2018
Fit Test/ Respiratory Protection Employees needing to wear respirators
Hazardous Materials Shipping Employee responsible for shipping HZM/HZW/DG and/or signing manifests
Annual Medical Surveillance/ Clearance Employees working in an exclusion zone and the regulatory required
exposure limit is exceeded for 30 or more days a year
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 16
Site-Specific Training Requirements
Training Applies to
Biennial Medical Surveillance/ Clearance Working in an exclusion zone more than 30 days a year and the regulatory
required exposure limit is not exceeded
OSHA 10 hr.Construction Employees working near heavy equipment
OSHA 30 hr.Construction Supervisor/SSO overseeing work with heavy equipment
Local requirements:
Client requirements:
5.4 Competent Person
A competent person is an employee who, through education, training and experience, has knowledge of applicable regulatory
requirements, is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which are
unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate
them.
AECOM’s Competent Person Designation Procedure,S3AM-202-PR, explains the roles, responsibilities and procedures of
naming a competent person. Complete the table below and include a S3AM-202-FM1 Competent Person Designation Form for
each AECOM competent person (subcontractors to use an equivalent process).
These activities require a competent person. Mark all that apply and list the name of the person.
Activity Name of Person
Asbestos
Assured Equipment Grounding Conductor
Blasting & Explosives
Concrete & Masonry Construction
Confined Spaces
Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout-Tagout)
Crane Assembly / Disassembly
Cranes & Derricks
Demolition
Electrical Wiring Design & Protections
Elevated Work Platforms & Aerial Lifts
Fall Protection
Hearing Protection
Heavy Equipment
Ionizing Radiation
Lead
Material Hoists & Personnel Hoists
Respiratory Protection
Rigging Equipment
Scaffolds
Stairways & Ladders
Steel Erection
Trench & Excavations
Underground Construction
Welding & Cutting
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 17
6. Hazard Assessment and Control
AECOM has adopted an approach to hazard assessment and control that incorporates both qualitative and quantitative methods
to identify hazards and the degree to which they may impact employees and AECOM operations. See S3AM-209-PR,Risk
Assessment and Management, for details regarding AECOM’s process. This approach involves the following:
6.1 SH&E Procedures
All AECOM SH&E procedures, in their controlled copy version, are available on the internal
SH&E Policy and Procedures ecosystem page. Programmatic procedures referenced in this
document (for example SH&E Training) do no need to be printed for inclusion in this HASP.
Only procedures that are needed for field activity reference and application MUST be printed in
full and included in this HASP. The applicable field procedures checklist is in the Physical
Hazards section below and procedures are included in Attachment B.
6.2 Job Safety analysis/ Pre-Job Hazard
Assessment/
A Job Safety Analysis (JSA) or pre-job hazard assessment (Pre-JHA) is to be developed for
each discrete task planned as part of the project. This assessment lays out the steps of the
job, potential hazards, and mitigation measures. Form S3AM-209-FM4 or an equivalent may
be used. A blank copy is included in Attachment F.
6.3 Task Hazard Assessment
The THA is a handwritten field form which is based on “Stop and Think” as the first thing you
do before starting work activities often paired with the daily tailgate meeting or work permit
issuance. Not all risks can be anticipated in this HASP or the JSA/ pre-job hazard assessment
process; therefore, the THA is used to assess, mitigate, and document the site-specific
conditions and changes to the hazard profile prior to and throughout the work task. Proper
implementation of the THA program protects worker health and safety. A blank THA form is
included in Attachment F. The THA must be signed by all employees each day and initialed
whenever a changed condition provokes a change in hazard controls.
6.3.1 Hazard Categories
JSAs/ Pre-JHAs and THAs should include consideration of the following hazard categories when identifying hazards and task
specific controls:
·Biological
·Chemical
·Electrical
·Gravity
·Mechanical
·Motion
·Pressure
·Noise
·Radiation
·Thermal
HASP
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 18
6.4 4-Sight
When preparing hazard assessments and throughout the day workers should use 4-Sight. This is a mental process through
which workers ask themselves (and each other) four questions designed to effectively assess hazards. Using these questions
during each task, especially those without formal JSA/ pre-JHA or THA, will help workers identify hazards and condition changes
so that they can control them or stop work to seek assistance.
1)What am I about to do?
2)What could go wrong?
3)What could be done to make it
safer?
4)What have I done to communicate
the hazards?
6.5 Speak Up/Listen Up
All AECOM employees have a responsibility to help create the environment where the expectation is Safety For Life. Speak
Up/Listen Up (SULU) is a technique to steward jobsite safety by utilizing 4-Sight as a basis for safety feedback conversations.
SULU has two main parts:
·Speak Up where employees use three simple steps when providing feedback to others about unsafe acts:
o Ask to discuss their hazard assessment or 4-Sight for the task
o Get a commitment from the employee to apply the hazard controls and perform the task according to the
accepted procedures
o Follow up to ensure the employee is working safely
·Listen Up where employees use two simple steps when responding to safety feedback:
o Listen – Focus on the message, not the messenger
o Commit to performing the task the safer way
SULU conversations should happen consistently throughout the work day to create clear expectations of how work should be
performed. All employees should recognize safe work behaviors in order to reinforce them and keep them going. An occasional
correction is much more effective when employees are frequently encouraged and positively recognized for their safe actions.
Managers and supervisors should be having SULU conversations during site visits and ensure peer to peer and site supervisor to
crew SULU conversations are being held.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 19
7. Physical Hazard Assessment
7.1 Physical Hazards
A physical hazard is a hazard that threatens the physical safety of an individual; contact with the hazard typically results in an
injury. The following table summarizes the physical hazards or activities containing physical hazards present at the site and the
associated procedures that address protection and prevention of harm.
All checked procedures MUST be included in Attachment B for implementation and reference.
Check all applicable hazards/ activities and add site specific description of the hazard.
Hazard/ Activity
(note: text in this column links to procedure)
Site Specific Description
[where, what phase of work, frequency,etc.]
Applicable
Procedure
Abrasive Blasting S3AM-335-PR
Aerial Work Platforms S3AM-323-PR
All-Terrain Vehicles S3AM-319-PR
Blasting and Explosives S3AM-336-PR
Bloodborne Pathogens S3AM-111-PR
Cofferdams S3AM-344-PR
Cold Stress S3AM-112-PR
Compressed Air Systems and Testing S3AM-337-PR
Compressed Gases S3AM-114-PR
Concrete Work S3AM-338-PR
Confined Spaces S3AM-301-PR
Corrosive Reactive Materials S3AM-125-PR
Cranes and Lifting Devices S3AM-310-PR
Demolition S3AM-339-PR
Diving (scientific and commercial)S3AM-334-PR
Drilling, Boring & Direct Push Probing Drillers needed for one (1) day to install one temporarygroundwater monitoring well and advance four (4) soil
borings
S3AM-321-PR
Electrical Safety S3AM-302-PR
Excavation S3AM-303-PR
Fall Protection S3AM-304-PR
Flammable and Combustible Liquids S3AM-126-PR
Gauge Source Radiation S3AM-122-PR
Hand and Power Tools S3AM-305-PR
Hazardous Waste Operations S3AM-117-PR
Heat Stress S3AM-113-PR
Heavy Equipment S3AM-309-PR
High Altitude S3AM-124-PR
Highway and Road Work S3AM-306-PR
Hoists Elevators and Conveyors S3AM-343-PR
Hot Work S3AM-332-PR
Ladders S3AM-312-PR
Lockout Tagout S3AM-325-PR
Machine Guarding Safe Work Practice S3AM-326-PR
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 20
Hazard/ Activity
(note: text in this column links to procedure)
Site Specific Description
[where, what phase of work, frequency,etc.]
ApplicableProcedure
Marine Safety and Vessel Operations S3AM-333-PR
Material Storage S3AM-316-PR
Mine Site Activities S3AM-341-PR
Mining Operations S3AM-345-PR
Non Ionizing Radiation S3AM-121-PR
Overhead Lines S3AM-322-PR
Powder-Actuated Tools S3AM-327-PR
Powered Industrial Trucks S3AM-324-PR
Radiation S3AM-120-PR
Railroad Safety S3AM-329-PR
Respiratory Protection S3AM-123-PR
Scaffolding S3AM-311-PR
Steel Erection S3AM-340-PR
Temp. Floors, Stairs, Railings, Toe-boards S3AM-342-PR
Underground Utilities S3AM-331-PR
Underground Work S3AM-330-PR
Wildlife, Plants and Insects S3AM-313-PR
Working Alone S3AM-314-PR
Working On and Near Water S3AM-315-PR
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 21
8. Chemical Hazard Assessment
AECOM will perform tasks that can expose personnel to a variety of hazards due to the operational activities, physical
conditions of the work locations, and potential presence of environmental contaminants. This section presents a variety of
potential chemical hazards, exposure pathways, and related mitigation actions. See S3AM-110-PR,Toxic and Hazardous
Substances, for information on planning, training, monitoring, and details on several specific chemicals (Benzene, Cadmium,
Chromium, Hydrogen Sulfide, Lead, and Silica).
8.1 Potential Chemical Hazards
The chemicals in the table below are known or suspected to be present at the site.
Summary of Hazardous Properties of Contaminant Exposure Hazards
PEL:......Permissible Exposure Limits
TLV:......Threshold Limit Values
Chemical Name Media PrimaryRoutes ofExposure PEL TLV IPelectronvolts (eV)
CommonSite COCs Diesel fuel (TPH-DRO)Soil, GW Inhalation n/a 15 ppm n/a
Gasoline (TPH-GRO)Soil, GW Inhalation n/a 300 ppm n/a
8.2 Potential Exposure Pathways
Occupational exposure to chemical hazards associated with the work activities could potentially occur by two primary routes
(inhalation and skin contact) and one indirect route (incidental ingestion).
8.2.1 Inhalation
The primary risks associated with AECOM’s scope of work pertain to potential exposure to airborne contaminants and explosion
hazards. Constituents that potentially pose an occupational concern to employees by the inhalation route are carbon monoxide,
hydrogen sulfide, methane, and volatile organic compounds. Air monitoring will be performed within the employee breathing
zone to assess the need to implement appropriate control measures or stop work. In addition, air monitoring will be performed at
the source to assess potential explosion hazards.
8.2.2 Skin Contact
Personnel handling residual product or waste and associated equipment may be exposed to chemical hazards by skin contact
or adsorption. However, exposure is expected to be limited since workers will be required to wear appropriate PPE (i.e.
appropriate work gloves, body clothing, and/or face shield).
8.2.3 Ingestion
Personnel handling residual product or waste and associated equipment, including project hazardous materials, may be
exposed by incidental ingestion. Typically, this exposure occurs if proper PPE was not used or personal hygiene was not
practiced. Personal protection against exposure via ingestion can be accomplished by performance of proper decontamination
procedures when exiting contaminated work areas as well as using the correct PPE.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 22
8.3 Decontamination
All possible and necessary steps shall be taken to reduce or minimize contact with chemicals and contaminated/impacted
materials while performing field activities. Decontamination steps are outlined in Hazardous Waste Operations procedure S3AM-
117-PR. Some key elements are as follows:
§All persons and equipment entering the EZ shall be considered contaminated, and thus, must be properly
decontaminated prior to exiting to clean areas of the site.
§Avoid reactions between the solutions and contaminated materials. Review the applicable SDS.
§All contaminated PPE and decontamination materials shall be contained, stored and disposed of in accordance
with site-specific requirements determined by site management.
§Use caution while working around decontamination stations, including the decontamination pad, which may be a
slip or trip hazard.
§Use disposable equipment when possible and practical.
§All employees performing equipment decontamination shall wear the appropriate PPE to protect against exposure
to contaminated materials. The level of PPE may be equivalent to the level of PPE required in the EZ. Other PPE
may include splash protection, such as face-shields and splash suits, and knee protectors.
§All decontaminated equipment shall be visually inspected for contamination prior to leaving the Contaminant
Reduction Zone (CRZ).
Decontamination Procedures & Equipment
Procedure Equipment Needed
Decontaminate drill rig Driller will provide water
Equipment Decontamination Procedures
Type Equipment Decontamination Solution Procedure
Drill rig water Drill rig will be sprayed with water in between borings
Waste Handling for Decontamination
Waste Streams/Products Disposal Procedures
Purge water from well development Containerized in 55-gallon drums and disposed of by a licensed
disposal subcontractor
Excess soil from well installation Containerized in 55-gallon drums and disposed of by a licensed
disposal subcontractor
8.4 Air Monitoring
Monitoring shall be performed within the work area on site in order to detect the presence and relative levels of toxic
substances. The data collected throughout monitoring shall be used to determine the appropriate levels of PPE. Monitoring shall
be in accordance with Exposure Monitoring Procedure S3AM-127-PR and specified in the work permit and/or JSAs/ Pre-JHAs
for the tasks. Key elements of the procedure include:
§Calibration of monitoring equipment and/or daily bump tests to verify calibrations and confirm alarm function.
§Personal monitoring and result evaluation must be directed by a Certified Industrial Hygienist or Certified Safety
Professional.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 23
8.4.1 Real-Time Exposure Measurement/ Equipment
Monitoring shall be performed within the work area on site in order to detect the presence and relative levels of toxic
substances. The data collected throughout monitoring shall be used to determine the appropriate levels of PPE. Monitoring shall
be conducted as specified in the work permit and JSAs/ Pre-JHAs as work is performed. All instrumentation need to be rated
intrinsically safe to prevent fire or explosion.
Check which real-time monitoring equipment will be used and update the model type if needed:
Instrument Manufacturer/Model Substances Detected
Photo Ionization Detector (PID)RAE Systems mini-RAE
Photovac Microtip
HNu Model Hnu
(min. 10.6 eV bulb)
·Petroleum hydrocarbons
·Organic Solvents
Multi or 4 Gas Detectors RAE Systems Multi-RAE ·Lower Explosive Limit
·Oxygen
·Carbon Monoxide
·Hydrogen Sulfide
Combustible Gas Indicator (CGI)
May be combined with individual or
multi-gas detectors.
·Explosivity
Particulate Monitor MIE Model PDM-3
mini-RAM
·Aerosols, mist, dust, and fumes
Personal Monitoring/ Badges N/A ·N/A
8.4.2 Health and Safety Action Levels
An action level is a point at which increased protection is required due to the concentration of contaminants in the work area or
other environmental conditions. The concentration level (above background level) and the ability of the PPE to protect against
that specific contaminant determine each action level. The action levels are based on concentrations in the breathing zone.
If ambient levels are measured which exceed the action levels in areas accessible to unprotected personnel, necessary control
measures (barricades, warning signs, and mitigation actions to limit, etc.) must be implemented prior to commencing activities at
the specific work area.
Personnel should also be able to upgrade or downgrade their level of protection with the concurrence of Site Supervisor or Site
Safety Officer or the Safety Manager.
Reasons to Upgrade:§Known or suspected presence of dermal hazards;
§Occurrence or likely occurrence of gas, vapor, or dust emission; or
§Change in work task that will increase the exposure or potential exposure to hazardous materials.
Reasons to Downgrade:§New information indicating that the situation is less hazardous than was originally suspected;
§Change in site conditions that decrease the potential hazard; or
§Change in work task that will reduce exposure to hazardous materials.
8.4.3 Monitoring Procedures
The monitoring procedures shown below are general guidelines for sampling activities. A reading in excess of action level
outlined below will require additional ventilation for 30 minutes, followed by re-monitoring.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 24
Monitoring Procedures and Action Levels
Parameter Zone Location andMonitoringInterval ResponseLevel Response Activity
Volatile Organic Compounds
(VOCs) and volatile
hydrocarbons
(total by PID)
Breathing zone, continuously
during tasks where exposure
to VOCs and volatile
hydrocarbons is possible
< 5 ppm Continue monitoring, may continue work in required PPE
5-25 ppm
(sustained for
5 minutes)
STOP WORK and notify PM.Investigate the cause of
elevated VOC measurements and identify measures to
reduce concentrations (cover impacted soils, ventilation,
etc.).Work activities shall only continue once levels have
decreased to or below 5 units above background.If
levels continue above 5 units,only individuals who are
medically qualified to wear respiratory protection are
permitted to continue work activities with Project Manager
approval.Don Level C PPE (organic vapor respirator
cartridges), continue monitoring, and initiate continuous
air monitoring for benzene.
> 25 ppm
(sustained for
5 minutes)
Cease work, exit, and contact the Site Safety Officer,
Site Supervisor and Project Manager.
Benzene
(by PID with benzene-specific
separation tube)
Breathing zone, continuously
where indicated by VOC
readings
> 0.25 ppm Cease work, exit the area, and contact the Site Safety
Officer, Site Supervisor and Project Manager.
Hydrogen Sulfide
(multi-gas detector or
individual H2S meter)
Breathing zone, continuously
during tasks where exposure
to hydrogen sulfide is possible
< 5 ppm Continue work activities. Contact the Site Safety Officer
to investigate the potential for contributing factors.
> 5 ppm Cease work, exit the area or confined space, and contact
the Site Safety Officer,Site Supervisor and Project
Manager..
Combustible Gas
(multi-gas meter or individual
combustible gas indicator,
CGI)
Breathing zone or in the
immediate work area
continuously during tasks
where explosive atmospheres
are possible
> 5% of LEL Cease work, exit, and contact the Site Safety Officer,
Site Supervisor and Project Manager..
Oxygen (O2)
(multi-gas detector or
individual O2meter)
Breathing zone, continuously
during tasks were oxygen
enriched or deficient
atmospheres are possible
< 19.5 %O2 Cease work deficient atmosphere), exit the area or
confined space, and contact the Site Safety Officer, Site
Supervisor and Project Manager..
> 23.5 % O2 Cease work enriched atmosphere) ,exit the area or
confined space, and contact the Site Safety Officer, Site
Supervisor and Project Manager..
Carbon Monoxide (CO)
(multi-gas detector or
individual CO meter)
Breathing zone, continuously
during tasks where exposure
to CO is possible
< 10 ppm Continue work in Level D and continue monitoring
> 10 ppm Cease work, exit the area or confined space, and contact
the Site Safety Officer, Site Supervisor and Project
Manager..
Dust not otherwise classified
(total by aerosol monitor)
Breathing zone every 30
minutes during field activities
where exposure to excessive
dusts are possible
< 5 mg/m3 Continue work in Level D and continue monitoring
> 5 mg/m3 Upgrade to Level C (P100 respirator cartridges),
implement dust suppression measures;contact the Site
Safety Officer & Site Supervisor.
> 10 mg/m3 Cease activities, implement more effective dust
suppression measures; contact the Site Safety Officer &
Site Supervisor.
Dust not otherwise classified
(total by aerosol monitor)
Edge of Exclusion Zone, every
30 minutes during excavation
activities
< 5 mg/m3 Continue work in required PPE, monitor air, and
implement engineering controls
> 5 mg/m3 Cease activities and contact the Site Safety Officer & Site
Supervisor.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 25
9. Environmental Impact Prevention
AECOM strives to avoid or control environmental impacts from our operations through planning and implementation of best
practices as well as preparing responses to react to environmental incidents. Environmental Compliance procedure S3AM-204-
PR provides details on permitting and planning requirements.
PotentialEnvironmental Impact Description of Hazard and Permit or Control Being Implemented
Air Emissions N/A
Hazardous Waste
Management
N/A
Storm Water Pollution N/A
Wetlands According to the FWS online wetlands mapper (http://www.fws.gov/wetlands/Data/mapper.html),
the Site is adjacent to a temporary forested palustrine wetland and a permanent unconsolidated
bottom lower perennial riverine.
Critical Habitat According to the FWS online critical habitat mapper tool (http://criticalhabitat.fws.gov/)there are
no critical habitats on or near the Site.
Other:N/A
9.1 Incidental Spill Prevention and Containment
Spill prevention and containment planning must be conducted and appropriate control measures established, consistent with
regulatory requirements. Personnel are not expected to perform a response action related to an uncontrolled release of a
hazardous substance. However, in the event of an incidental release of a hazardous material, a response will be performed to
absorb, neutralize or otherwise control the release within the immediate work area. Procedures contained in the SDS of the
hazardous material will be implemented to perform the response. The Emergency Response section of this HASP contains
information on spill reporting, pre- and post- spill evaluation, and response
9.1.1 Spill Prevention and Containment Practices
Work activities may involve the use of hazardous materials (i.e. fuels, solvents) or work involving drums or other containers.
When these activities exist the procedures outlined below will be used to prevent or contain spills:
§All hazardous material will be stored in appropriate containers and labelled.
§Tops/lids will be placed back on containers after use.
§Containers of hazardous materials will be stored appropriately away from moving equipment.
§Containers shall only be lifted using equipment specifically manufactured for that purpose.
§Drums/containers will be secured and handled in a manner which minimizes spillage and reduces the risk of
musculoskeletal injuries.
§Equipment will be inspected daily for signs of leaks, wear, or strain on parts that, if ruptured or broken, would result
in a spill.
§Refueling should occur in designated areas where incidental spills can be prevented from reaching permeable
ground surfaces.
§Whenever possible, position parked or stationary equipment over secondary containment and/ or absorbent
materials to prevent spills from reaching permeable ground surfaces.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 26
§A spill response kit, to include an appropriate empty container, materials to allow for booming or diking the area to
minimize the size of the spill, and appropriate clean-up material (i.e. speedy dri, absorbent pads, etc.) will be
available on the project site and positioned for quick and easy access.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 27
10. Personal Protective Equipment
PPE is considered the last line of defense in hazard control. PPE is meant to protect workers when all other methods
(elimination, substitution, engineering, and administrative) have been exhausted. All employees must be trained in the proper
use and maintenance of PPE. See Procedure S3AM-208-PR,Personal Protective Equipment.
A PPE assessment (see S3AM-208-FM1) can be performed to help determine PPE requirements. PPE upgrades for individual
tasks or steps of a task are to be identified in JSAs/ Pre-JHAs or THAs.
Minimum Required PPE (per AECOM PPE and HAZWOPER Procedures):
§Hard hat
§Safety glasses w/ side shields (may be clear or shaded)
§Safety toe work boots
§Long pants and shirts with sleeves (short or long- cover shoulders no tank or muscle shirt styles)
Complete the table below for site-specific PPE:
Additional PPE Needed On Site
(to encompass all task specific additions and upgrades)
Face/ Eyes Head/ Ears
Spoggles (Safety Glasses with
foam liner for dust protection)
Welding Mask/Goggles
Chemical Goggles
Face Shield (splash)
Face Shield (impact)
Helmet with Chin Strap
Wide Brimmed Hat
Earplugs
Over-ear Hearing Protection
Hands Legs/ Feet
Nitrile
Leather
Cut, Abrasion and
Puncture Resistant
Impact-resistant
Other Chemical Resistant :
(specify)
High Ankle Boots
Snake Guards
Rubber Boots/Waders
Metatarsal Guards
Electrically-resistant boots
Body Equipment
Sunscreen
Insect Repellent (DEET)
Permethrin Applied to Clothing
Long-sleeved Shirt
High-visibility Vest
High-visibility Pants
Disposable Coveralls
Flame Retardant Clothing
Fall Protection
Personal Floatation Device
Other:(specify)
Air/Noise Monitoring Equipment:(specify)
Traffic/Work Zone Control Equipment:(specify)
Communication Beyond Cell Phones:(specify)
Fire Controls:(specify)
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 28
11. Site Control
The purpose of site control is to protect the public from inadvertently coming into contact with site hazards and to protect
AECOM employees being impacted by hazards. This section details the equipment and actions needed to promote optimal site
control.
11.1 Site Work Zones
Site layout and site control need to be coordinated achieve a productive work environment and efficient work process while
minimizing exposure of employees and the public to hazards associated with the work. Consider the following items when
planning the site layout and controls:
§“Line of Fire” hazards- overhead utilities, falling/ tipping equipment, release of energy/ pressure, flying debris,
§Noise, dust, odor suppression
§Contamination containment and decontamination area layout
§Traffic control for site vehicles/ equipment (public traffic control requires Traffic control Plan)
§Restricted access for areas requiring special training, skills, or certifications
§Restriction of work near railroads
§Presence or creation of excavations
§Loading/unloading areas
§Portable restrooms
§Dumpsters and bins
§Equipment lay down
§Heavy equipment parking
§Overnight safety and security needs
Check the description of the site controls already in place:
Work area is within a facility/ property with secure and restricted access provided by client or third party
Work area is enclosed within facility/ property but access is not restricted via locks, guards, or gates
Work area is on a property that is open and access by the public is likely
Work area is on a property that is open but access by the public is unlikely
Work area is in a roadway or right of way of a roadway (Traffic Control Plan required S3AM-306-PR)
Work area is on or near railroad (including right of way, active lines, and crossings)
Other:(describe)
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 29
Check and describe the site controls that need to be added to protect the public and the AECOM work team.
Control Item Description of Type and Application
Fence
Locks
Barricades
Cones
Tape
Hole Covers
Other:
11.2 Site Control Map/ Diagram
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 30
11.3 Simultaneous and Neighboring Operations
Simultaneous and neighboring operations present a need for added coordination and communication to address hazards that
are presented by multiple operations.
Activity/ Company Hazard Controls/Mitigations andCommunication Methods
Simultaneous
Operation
(within the site)
NCANG Active taxiway/hanger, aircraft
maintenance, fueling
Stay off taxiway and out of hangar
area, stay behind red line
Neighboring Operation
(outside/ bordering the site)
Charlotte-Douglas International
Airport
Active international airport,
active taxiways, aircraft
maintenance,
passenger/luggage loading,
fueling
Stay off runway, taxiway, and
loading areas
11.4 Site Security
All projects should be reviewed for the potential for personal security issues (e.g., assault, robbery, threat, etc.). Check all of the
following that apply:
Project site located in a higher crime area or has a history of security incidents
Working outside of regular cellular telephone service
Idle property with potential for trespasser(s) to shelter in buildings/structures and assault personnel
Working at night
Detail the security measures to address the above risks: N/A
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 31
12. Emergency Response
AECOM requires that all projects plan for reasonably foreseeable emergencies (see Emergency Response Planning Procedure
S3AM-010-PR). Prior to the start of site operations, all personnel shall review the table below for site-specific information
regarding evacuations, muster points, communication, and other site-specific emergency procedures. An Incident Response
Flow Chart is included in Attachment A.
12.1 Incident/ Emergency Contact Information
AECOM Contacts
Name Title Telephone Number Mobile Phone
Megan Donahue Project Manager [phone] [phone]
Brett Schaefer Site Supervisor [phone] [phone]
Matt Stone Site Safety Officer [phone] [phone]
Tony Indorato Region SH&E Manager [phone] [phone]
Lee Davis Area SH&E Manager [phone] [phone]
Mark MacEwan Client Account Operations Manager [phone] [phone]
Incident Reporting DCS Incident Reporting & Help Line [phone]
AECOM Nurse direct Use only after incident reporting line [phone]
Client Contacts
Name Title Telephone Number Mobile Phone
Greg Wills Client Project Manager [phone] N/A
Lt.Col. Sam Ingram 145 ALW Base Environmental Manager 704-391-4327 N/A
Organization/Agency
Police Department (Charlotte-Mecklenburg Police Department,2550 West Blvd, Charlotte, NC 28208)911,[phone]
Fire Department (Charlotte Fire Department, Station 17, 5308 Morris Field Drive, Charlotte, NC 28208)911,[phone]
Ambulance Service (EMT will determine appropriate hospital for treatment)911
Hospital: (Site personnel to use for emergency care)
Carolinas Medical Center,1000 Blythe Blvd, Charlotte, NC 28203
[phone]
Occupational Clinic:(Site personnel to use for non-emergency care)
FastMed Urgent Care,3250 Wilkinson Blvd Unit I, Charlotte, NC 28208
[phone]
Poison Control Center [phone]
Pollution Emergency 1-800-424-8802
INFOTRAC (AECOM’s account number 74984)800-535-5053
AECOM Hazardous Material Shipping Help Line 800-381-0664
Public Utilities
Mecklenburg County 311
Call Before You Dig 811
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 32
12.2 Muster Location
Muster location is at the back of the NCANG hangar building (northeast corner).
12.3 Communication Procedures
AECOM work team will communicate by verbal, cell phone and if necessary hand signals. AECOM does not anticipate remote
work or lack of visual contact with all site workers during any time with field activities.
12.4 CPR/ First Aid Trained Personnel
Matt Stone
Emily Love
Andrew Wreschnig
12.5 Incident Reporting
Incidents involving or affecting an AECOM employee or subcontractor will be reported in a prompt manner verbally to the site
supervisor and project manager.
1. If the incident is a significant or life-threatening emergency, the employee or supervisor shall immediately dial
911 or the appropriate emergency contact phone number for your site.
2. The employee or supervisor shall contact the Incident Hotline [phone]).
3. The employee or supervisor must notify their operational leaders and the Area SH&E Manager.
4. The supervisor, or delegate, must make initial notification in IndustrySafe within 4 hours for significant
incidents, or 24 hours for less significant events event.
5. Client and account management notifications may also apply. The Project Manager will make any necessary
notifications.
Any injury, even if no treatment is required, and any incident for which assistance by SH&E Management is needed must be
immediately communicated to the Incident Hotline at 1-800-348-5046.
All incidents are also to be reported to IndustrySafe within the timeframes listed below:
Incident Type IndustrySafe Reporting Time Frame
Significant Incident, including any injury è 4 Hours
All Other Incidents è 24 Hours
Significant Incident:
§Fatality;
§Amputation;
§Hospitalization for treatment for more than 24 hours (admission);
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 33
§Any single event resulting in more than one employee requiring medical treatment or more than one employee
being away from work more than 3 days;
§Any SH&E-related Consent Agreement/Order/Lawsuit or enforcement action seeking more than $10,000 or
alleging criminal activity;
§Any spill or release of a hazardous material that is reportable to a regulatory agency;
§Any Notices of Violation resulting from not operating within a regulatory agency permit/license or consent;
§Any incident resulting in property damage expected to exceed $10,000 United States (US) dollars;
§Any security-related incident that could have caused significant harm to an AECOM employee; and/or
§Any Near Miss event that may have resulted in any of the above consequences but because of “luck” did not result
in harm to persons, property or the environment.
All Other Incidents:
§Any injury or illness to an AECOM employee or subcontractor, even if it does not require medical attention,
including work-related injuries/illnesses that have become significantly aggravated by the work environment;
§An injury to a member of the public, or clients, occurring on an AECOM-controlled work site;
§Re-occurring conditions such as back pain or cumulative trauma disorders (e.g., carpal tunnel syndrome);
§Fire, explosion, or flash that is not an intended result of a planned event (e.g.,
remediation process, laboratory Procedure);
§Any incident involving company-owned, rented, or leased vehicles (including personal
vehicles used for company business); and/or
§Any failure to comply with the requirements of a regulatory permit issued to AECOM.
§Scan the QR code below to access IndustrySafe reporting system from your
smartphone/ device.
12.6 Medical Emergencies
In the event of a life-threatening or critical emergency, AECOM employees should dial 911 and follow the recommended
instructions. However, in less serious situations, an injured employee or a co-worker should contact the Incident Hotline at 800-
348-5046 to ensure that the employee receives the best care at the best time (i.e., within the first hour following an injury or
potential injury). By contacting the Incident Hotline, the worker can be connected with AECOM’s nurses for first aid advice. If
recommended by the nurse, the supervisor or a co-worker should drive the injured employee to the project-designated clinic or
hospital. A map to the designated hospital and clinic is attached as Attachment A and the locations and addresses are
included in the table above as well as in the HASP Summary on Page i.
12.7 Vehicle Incidents
All vehicles should be rented through Carson Wagonlit Travel (accessible via Ecosystem) to ensure that AECOM insurance is
included in the rental rate. All other insurances should be declined. AECOM’s rental vehicle insurance policy for
National/Enterprise or Avis can be found on the DCS Americas United States or Canada travel pages.Drivers MUST print and
carry the applicable insurance policy for the rental.
In the event of a vehicle incident (including collisions as well as mechanical difficulties such as breakdowns and flat tires) the
following responses are recommended:
§For breakdowns and flat tires, contact an emergency provider.
§For rental vehicles, contact the rental company.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 34
§To the extent possible, AECOM personnel should not change flat tires or perform similar repairs.
§If a collision has occurred, assess the situation and move all occupants (except the injured) out of further harm’s
way. If safe to do so, remove the car from the traveled way. Call 911 if necessary, and report the incident to the
Incident Hotline at 800-348-5046 as soon as practical. If appropriate, wait for police to arrive before moving
vehicles. Provide insurance information to other drivers if necessary or requested and collect the same. If
possible, obtain names and phone numbers of witnesses. Take photographs of the scene if possible. DO NOT
ADMIT LIABILITY, AGREE TO PAY FOR DAMAGE, OR SIGN A DOCUMENT RELATED TO AN INCIDENT
EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY LAW.
12.8 Spill or Release
AECOM employees are not expected to take action or to participate in rescues or responses to chemical releases (including of
petroleum products) beyond the initial discovery of the release and immediate mitigation actions such as closing a valve, placing
absorbents, and notifying the client and or public emergency response system (911), unless there is a contractual provision for
this response and specially trained employees.
12.8.1 Environmental Spill/Release Reporting
All environmental spills or releases of hazardous materials (e.g., fuels, solvents, etc.), whether in excess of the Reportable
Quantity or not, will be reported according to the incident reporting procedure. In determining whether a spill or release must be
reported to a regulatory agency, the Site Supervisor or qualified worker will assess the quantity of the spill or release and
evaluate the reporting criteria against the state-specific reporting requirements, applicable regulatory permit, and/or client-
specific reporting procedures.If reporting to a US state or Federal regulatory agency is required, AECOM has 15 minutes
from the time of the spill/release to officially report it.
Chemical-specific Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) Reportable Quantities
for the known chemicals onsite are shown in the table below.
CERCLA Reportable Quantities
Hazardous Substance Regulatory Synonyms Final RQ (lbs)
1,1,1-Trichloroethane TCA 1,000
Arsenic N/A 1
Benzene N/A 10
Cadmium N/A 10
Carbon Tetrachloride N/A 10
Chromium N/A 5,000
Ethyl Benzene N/A 1,000
Lead N/A 10
Mercury N/A 1
Methyl Ethyl Ketone MEK 5,000
Nickel N/A 100
Pentachlorophenol PCP 10
Selenium N/A 100
Tetrachloroethylene Perchloroethylene, PCE 100
Toluene N/A 1,000
Trichloroethylene Trichloroethene, TCE 100
Xylene N/A 100
CERCLA RQ’s can be found at:http://www.epa.gov/oem/docs/er/302table01.pdf
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 35
The spill containment program addresses the following site-specific information:
§Potential hazardous substance spills and available controls;
§Initial notification and response;
§Spill evaluation and response; and
§Post-spill evaluation.
12.8.2 Spill Evaluation and Response
The SSO is responsible for evaluating spills and determining the appropriate response. When this evaluation is being made, the
spill area is isolated and demarcated to the extent possible. When an incidental release occurs, clean-up personnel receive
instructions in a pre-clean-up meeting as to spill conditions, PPE, response activities, decontamination, and waste handling.
The procedures of the Emergency Response section of this HASP are immediately implemented when the spill is determined to
require emergency precautions and action. If necessary to protect those outside the clean-up area, notification of the
appropriate authorities is made. Table 10-2 lists the spill conditions that trigger notification of Federal, state, and local agencies.
The following are general measures that response/clean-up personnel take when responding to a spill:
§To minimize the potential for a hazardous spill, hazardous substances, control/absorbent media, drums and
containers, and other contaminated materials are properly stored and labeled;
§When a spill occurs, only those persons involved in overseeing or performing spill containment operations will be
allowed within the designated hazard areas. If necessary, the area will be roped or otherwise blocked off.
Unauthorized personnel are kept clear of the spill area;
§Appropriate PPE is donned before entering the spill area;
§Appropriate spill control measures are applied during spill response;
§Whenever possible without endangerment of personnel, the spill is stopped at the source or as close to the source
as possible;
§Ignition points are removed if fire or explosion hazards exist;
§Surrounding reactive materials are removed;
§Drains or drainage in the spill area are blocked or surrounded by berms to exclude the spilled waste and any
materials applied to it;
§Provisions are made to contain and recover a neutralizing solution, if used;
§Small spills or leaks from a drum, tank, or pipe will require evacuation of at least Enter Distance feet in all
directions to allow clean-up and to prevent employee exposure. For small spills, sorbent materials such as sand,
sawdust, or commercial sorbents (see Table 10-1 above for site-specific sorbent media) are placed directly on the
spill to prevent further spreading and aid in recovery;
§Spill area is sprayed with appropriate foam where the possibility of volatile emissions exists;
§If the spill results in the formation of a toxic vapor cloud, from vaporization, reaction with surrounding materials, or
the outbreak of fire, further evacuation may be required;
§To dispose of spill waste, all contaminated sorbents, liquid waste, or other spill clean-up will be placed in small
quantities Enter QTY pounds) in approved drums for proper storage or disposal as hazardous waste; and
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 36
12.8.3 Post Spill Evaluation
As part of the incident investigation and reporting documentation, a written spill response report shall be prepared at the
conclusion of clean-up operations. The report will include, at a minimum, the following information:
§Date of spill incident;
§Cause of incident;
§Spill response actions;
§Any outside agencies involved, including their incident reports; and
§Lessons learned or suggested improvements.
The spill area is inspected to ensure the area has been satisfactorily cleaned. The use of surface and air sampling is utilized in
this determination as necessary. The root cause of the spill is examined and corrective steps taken to ensure the engineering
and control measures in place have performed as required. If alternative precautions or measures are needed, they are made
available and implemented.
All durable equipment placed into use during clean-up activities is decontaminated for future utilization. All spill response
equipment and supplies are re-stocked as required.
12.9 Fire
AECOM employees are not expected to attempt to put out fires. Stop work; notify all AECOM personnel, move upwind and
contact 911 and/or emergency response at the site. If employees have been properly trained in the operation of a fire
extinguisher, they may attempt to put out a small fire, provided that the following conditions are met:
§The fire must be small (i.e., smaller than a trash can) and in its early stages
§The employee must have an escape route
§The employee must be trained and know they have the right type of extinguisher
§The employee must be safe from toxic gases
§There must be no hazardous conditions that could quickly accelerate the fire (i.e., presence of chemicals,
especially dry grass, etc.)
§Above all, if in doubt, the employee must not attempt to fight the fire
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx 37
13. Personnel Acknowledgement
By signing below, the undersigned acknowledges that he/she has reviewed the AECOM Health and Safety Plan for the NCANG
site. The undersigned also acknowledges that he/she has been instructed in the contents of this document and understands the
information pertaining to the specified work, and will comply with the provisions contained therein. The employee understands
that they are NOT to perform any work that they have not been adequately trained for and that they are to stop work if it is
unsafe to proceed. Finally, the employee understands to notify the Site Supervisor and the Incident Hotline at 800-348-5046 for
any incident,including ANY injury even if no first aid or medical treatment is required.
Print Name Signature Organization Date
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx
Attachment A
Hospital and Clinic Directions/ Maps
Incident Reporting and Response Flow Chart
Map data ©2018 Google 1 mi
4930 Minuteman Way,yy Charlotte,NC 28208
US Air National Guard
TaTTke Morris Field Dr to Wilkinson Blvd
1.Head southeast toward 1st Union Rd
2.Turn left onto 1st Union Rd
3.Turn right onto Hercules Ave
4.Turn right onto Minuteman Way
5.Turn left onto Morris Field Dr
5 min (1.6 mi)
305 ft
217 ft
0.2 mi
0.1 mi
1.2 mi
Drive 6.9 miles, 18 minUS Air National Guard to Carolinas Medical Center
Hospital - Carolinas Medical Center, 1000 Blythe Blvd, Charlotte, NC 28203
These directions are for planning purposes only. You may 齑nd that construction projects,
tra㣠c, weather, or other events may cause conditions to differ from the map results, and you
should plan your route accordingly. You must obey all signs or notices regarding your route.
1000 Blythe Blvd, Charlotte, NC 28203
Take US-74 E and I-277 N to Kenilworth Ave. Take exit 2A from I-277 N
6. Turn right onto Wilkinson Blvd
7. Continue straight onto US-74 E/Wilkinson Blvd
Continue to follow US-74 E
8. Continue onto I-277 N/US-74 E
9. Use the right lane to take exit 2A for NC-16 S/Kenilworth Ave/Third St toward Fourth St
10. Keep right at the fork, follow signs for Kenilworth Ave
Continue on Kenilworth Ave to your destination
11. Use the 2nd from the right lane to turn right onto Kenilworth Ave
12. Turn left onto Pearl Park Way
13. Turn right onto S Kings Dr
14. Turn right onto Medical Center Dr
15. Continue straight
Destination will be on the right
Carolinas Medical Center
8 min (4.4 mi)
0.6 mi
2.2 mi
1.3 mi
410 ft
0.2 mi
5 min (0.9 mi)
0.2 mi
384 ft
0.5 mi
433 ft
210 ft
Map data ©2018 Google 2000 ft
4930 Minuteman Way,yy Charlotte,NC 28208
US Air National Guard
TaTTke Hercules AvAAe and Minuteman Way to Morris Field Dr
1.Head southeast toward 1st Union Rd
2.Turn left onto 1st Union Rd
3.Turn right onto Hercules Ave
4.Turn right onto Minuteman Way
Follow Morris Field Dr and Wilkinson Blvd
2 min (0.4 mi)
305 ft
217 ft
0.2 mi
0.1 mi
Drive 2.6 miles, 10 minUS Air National Guard to FastMed Urgent Care
Occupational Clinic - FastMed Urgent Care, 3250 Wilkinson Blvd Unit I, Charlotte, NC 28208
These directions are for planning purposes only. You may 凯�nd that construction projects,tra䵧�c, weather, or other events may cause conditions to differ from the map results, and you
should plan your route accordingly. You must obey all signs or notices regarding your route.
3250 Wilkinson Blvd Unit I, Charlotte, NC 28208
5. Turn left onto Morris Field Dr
6. Turn right onto Wilkinson Blvd
7. Continue straight to stay on Wilkinson Blvd
Drive to your destination
8. Slight left
9. Slight left at Wilkinson Blvd
10. Turn left
11. Turn left
Destination will be on the left
FastMed Urgent Care
5 min (2.0 mi)
1.2 mi
0.6 mi
0.2 mi
2 min (0.2 mi)
344 ft
299 ft
177 ft
144 ft
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx
Updated October 2016
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx
Attachment B
AECOM SH&E Field Applicable Procedures

Procedure Checklist (S3AM-209-FM3)
Revision 6 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 1 of 3
Americas
Procedure Checklist S3AM-209-FM3
The following AECOM SH&E Procedures generally apply to all projects. Review the requirements of each procedure and determine
appropriate steps to ensure project compliance with the requirements.
Determine the applicability of these procedures to
the work activity Yes See # Determine the applicability of these procedures to
the work activity Yes See #
Safe Work Standards and Rules Yes 001 First Aid Yes 012
Stop Work Authority Yes 002 Housekeeping Yes 013
SH&E Training Yes 003 Manual Lifting Yes 014
Incident Reporting, Notifications & Investigation Yes 004 Injury and Claims Management Yes 018
Driving Yes 005 Substance Abuse Prevention Yes 019
Behavior Based Safety Yes 007 Recognition & Rewards Yes 020
Fitness for Duty Yes 008 Risk Assessment & Management Yes 209
Emergency Response Planning Yes 010 Regulatory Inspections Yes 211
Fire Protection Yes 011 Compliance Assurance Yes 216
The following SH&E procedures only apply when specific activities are conducted by AECOM and AECOM subcontractor personnel. If
you answer "Yes” to any of the questions below, review the SH&E procedure indicated and determine the appropriate steps necessary
to ensure compliance with the requirements.
Will work activities involve any of the
following? No Yes See # Will work activities involve any of the
following? No Yes See #
Abrasive blasting or exposure to abrasive blasting
media or waste?
335 Excavations or exposure to excavation hazards? 303,
331
Potential exposure to ticks, snakes, poisonous
plants, and other biological hazards?
313 Flammable or combustible materials used or
stored which could constitute a fire hazard?
011,126
Use of aerial lifts (e.g. boom trucks, scissor lifts,
under bridge inspection units, etc.)?
323 Use of portable, gas powered, electric, and/or
powder actuated hand tools?
305,
327
Potential exposure to air contaminants in
hazardous concentrations?
110,123
127
Hazardous materials shipping? 116
Asbestos surveys or abatement oversight? 109 Hazardous substances – chemical or health
hazards?
110,115
127

Procedure Checklist (S3AM-209-FM3)
Revision 6 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 2 of 3
Potential exposure to Bloodborne Pathogens (i.e.
blood or other bodily fluids)?
111 Hazardous waste activities (investigative or
remedial)?
117,
204
Work over or near water? 315 Heat Stress potential to employees working in:
 Hot environments; or
 Impermeable Chemical Protective Clothing?
113
California job activities? 209 Heavy equipment use? 309
Corrosive materials used or handled? 125 Hot Work (welding, cutting, grinding)? 332
Confined space entries? 301 Drilling, boring and direct-push probing? 321,
331
Cranes or hoists? 310 Lead exposures (lead paint removal, lead in dust,
etc)?
110
Demolition activities of any type of structures? 336,
339
International travel? 214
Drilling activities? 321,
331
Use of Manbasket (Crane Suspended Personnel
Platforms) for working at heights?
310
Use of small watercraft (e.g., boats, canoes)? 333 Work on or near streets and/or roadways? 306
Environmental and hazardous waste laws and
regulations are applicable to activities?
204 Commercial motor vehicles used? 320
Exposure to chemical/physical/biological agents
and/or activities that require Medical Surveillance?
Examples would include exposures to; Noise,
Asbestos, Lead, Hazardous Waste, High
Altitudes, Carcinogens, Respirator Use.
128 Working at heights of greater than 4 feet (1.22
meters), 6 feet (1.83 meters) for
construction/demolition, or as defined by
jurisdiction?
304
Noise exposures? 118 Potential exposure to subsurface and/or overhead
utilities?
322,
331
Ladder use? 312 A chartered aircraft? 318
Exposure to eye, head, hand, foot, or other
hazards that require the use of personal protective
equipment?
208 Exposure to uncontrolled energy sources
including electrical, fluid, pneumatic, fuel, steam,
gravity, and hazardous material?
325
Use of portable gauges (e.g., nuclear-density
gauges) containing sealed radioactive source
materials?
122 Work with live electrical systems and/or potential
electrical hazards?
302
Respiratory protection use – required and/or
voluntary?
123 Work at altitudes greater than 7,000 feet (~ 2,100
meters)?
124
Scaffolding? 311 All-terrain vehicle use? 319

Procedure Checklist (S3AM-209-FM3)
Revision 6 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 3 of 3
Compressed gases? 114 Use of computer workstations for data entry,
CADD, word processing, etc.?
016
Laboratory activities? 119 Tool, equipment or job-specific potential for
musculoskeletal disorder hazards?
016
Work on or near railroad transportation systems? 329 Exposure to recognized hand hazards? 317
Work at a client site requiring compliance with the
OSHA Process Safety Management Standard?
328 Are employees or contractors required to operate
Powered Industrial Vehicles (e.g., forklift trucks)?
324
Subcontractors to perform activities (e.g., drilling,
excavation, hot work, etc.) with their own
personnel and/or equipment?
213 Down-hole geologic logging operations associated
with geotechnical explorations or caisson
inspections?
330
Competent person required to be designated? 202 Potential exposure to non-ionizing radiation? 121
Potential personnel exposure to temperatures
below 32oF?
112 Potential exposure to ionizing radiation? 120
AECOM personnel newly hired or transferred from
another position?
015 Potential inhalation of chromium VI (hexavalent
chromium)?
110
Work at a site regulated by the Mine Safety Health
Administration (MSHA)?
341 Working alone in an area where they cannot be
seen/heard by another person?
314
Diving activities? 334 Hoists, elevators or conveyors being used? 343
Coordinate construction material storage on-site? 316 Tunnels, shafts and caissons? 330
Operating and testing compressed air systems? 337 Signs, signals or barricades will be used onsite? 346
Temporary floors, stairs, railings, or toeboards
being created?
342 Project security will be required? 010
Concrete will be poured or handled? 338 Installation of cofferdams being performed? 344
Steel erection activities being performed? 340 Use or handling of explosive or blasting agents? 336
Work on or transfer to/from marine transportation
(e.g. barge, vessel)?
333 Mining operations are conducted or controlled by
AECOM?
345
Working conditions or schedule (more than 12
hours/day) may increase worker fatigue?
009 Exposure to hazards associated with moving parts
of equipment and machinery?
326
Use of unmanned aircraft systems? 347 Potential exposure to respirable crystalline silica? 128

First Aid (S3AM-012-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 1 of 8
Americas
First Aid S3AM-012-PR1
1.0 Purpose and Scope
1.1 The purpose of this procedure is to ensure employee accessibility to first aid personnel and supplies
commensurate with the hazards of the workplace.
1.2 This procedure applies to all AECOM Americas employees and operations, except where legislation is more
stringent.
2.0 Terms and Definitions
2.1 Automated External Defibrillator (AED) – A portable electronic device that automatically diagnoses the
potentially life threatening cardiac arrhythmias of ventricular fibrillation and ventricular tachycardia in a
patient, and is able to treat them through defibrillation, the application of electrical therapy which stops the
arrhythmia, allowing the heart to re-establish an effective rhythm; are used in the resuscitation of a patient in
full cardiac arrest.
2.2 Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) – An emergency procedure in which the heart and lungs are made
to work by:
• Manually compressing the chest overlying the heart, or
• Both manually compressing the chest and performing rescue breaths that force air into the lungs.
CPR is applied to a victim in respiratory distress and/or to maintain circulation when the heart stops pumping
(cardiac arrest), which may be due to heart tissue damage (heart attack), disease, electrical shock, drug
overdose, drowning, suffocation, stroke or trauma.
2.3 First Aid Provider – Is a First Aid, CPR, and AED trained employee who provides emergency first aid or
treatment (including performing CPR and applying an AED) to someone who is injured or suddenly ill, before
emergency medical services (EMS) arrives. This is a voluntary action and not an occupational duty assigned
by AECOM. They may use a limited amount of equipment to perform initial assessment and provide
immediate life support and care while awaiting arrival of emergency medical services.
2.4 High Risk Task(s) – For the purpose of this procedure, a work related task with the potential to cause
traumatic injury/illness or immediate life threatening conditions.
2.5 Occupational Exposure – Reasonably anticipated skin, eye mucous membrane, or parenteral contact with
blood or other potentially infectious materials that may result from the performance of an employee's duties.
Employees will be considered to be potentially exposed, even though they are using the precautions
specified for the project.
3.0 References
3.1 S3AM-003-PR1 SH&E Training
3.2 S3AM-004-PR1 Incident Reporting, Notifications & Investigation
3.3 S3AM-010-PR1 Emergency Response Planning
3.4 S3AM-018-PR1 Injury & Claims Management
3.5 S3AM-111-PR1 Bloodborne Pathogens
3.6 S3AM-208-PR1 Personal Protective Equipment

First Aid (S3AM-012-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 2 of 8
4.0 Procedure
4.1 Roles and Responsibilities
4.1.1 SH&E Manager
• Supporting the assessment of employees in the need for first aid, CPR and/or AED training
and making training available to required employees.
• Assisting Managers with the assessment of each office or project site for adequate response
time and availability of Emergency Medical Services (EMS).
• Assisting Managers with the development of the location specific emergency response plan.
Refer to S3AM-010-PR1 Emergency Response Planning.
• Coordinating first aid/adult cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) and automated external
defibrillator (AED) training with the Manager.
4.1.2 Managers
• Ensure location specific emergency response plans are developed. Refer to S3AM-010-PR1
Emergency Response Planning.
• Coordinating weekly / monthly inspections of first aid kits and AEDs.
• Coordinating replacement supplies to re-stock first aid kits and AEDs.
• Ensuring debriefing and availability of counselling for any Employees, including First Aid
Providers, who responded to the event, as well as any bystanders and co-workers who
witnessed the event.
• Ensuring the appropriate investigations of incidents are conducted.
• Ensuring jurisdictional requirements, such as appropriate notifications, oversight and specific
protocols are in place as necessary (e.g., requirements associated with Good Samaritan
protection).
4.1.3 Employees
• Notifying supervisors of any injuries.
• Complying with emergency response procedures.
• Reporting all work related injuries in accordance with S3AM-004-PR1 Incident Reporting,
Notifications & Investigation.
4.1.4 AECOM First Aid Providers
• Maintaining all required First Aid, CPR, and AED training.
• Providing emergency first aid or treatment if they so choose (including performing CPR and
applying an AED) in accordance with training.
4.1.5 Designated Individual
• Ensuring First Aid Providers have been trained and maintain valid certificates in First Aid,
CPR, and AED.
• Ensuring appropriate maintenance, testing and inspections of emergency equipment and
supplies are completed as identified by this procedure and manufacturer requirements.
• Coordinating replacement supplies to re-stock first aid kits and AEDs.
• Ensuring appropriate documentation and reporting is completed as identified by this procedure
and manufacturer requirements.

First Aid (S3AM-012-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 3 of 8
4.2 Requirements
4.2.1 An assessment shall be made by the Manager for each office or work site for first aid and medical
requirements. The following factors should be considered:
• Types of incidents that could reasonably occur.
• Location of local clinics and hospitals.
• Response time for external emergency services (EMS).
o Consult applicable legislation for minimum response time required as determined by
hazards and distance to medical facilities.
• Corrosive or hazardous materials that may be used.
• Industry specific requirements.
• Types of training for Employees and First Aid Providers.
• First aid supplies required to be available.
4.2.2 A location specific emergency response plan must be developed and communicated to all affected
personnel. Refer to S3AM-010-PR1 Emergency Response Planning.
4.2.3 The responsible Manager shall ensure adequate first aid supplies are available and an adequate
number of trained First Aid Providers (but not less than one) are available during hours of normal
operation or while performing work if either of these conditions cannot be met or relied on:
• High Risk Tasks: In workplaces locations where life-threatening injuries can reasonably be
expected, emergency medical services must be available within 3-4 minutes. This generally
means that community emergency medical services cannot be relied on since their response
time is usually greater than 3 minutes.
• Remote Potential for Serious Injury: If no life-threatening work-related injuries can reasonably
be expected, the response time for trained personnel is extended to 15 minutes.
4.2.4 The number of First Aid Providers and the type and quantity of first aid supplies will vary depending
upon the number of workers, location of the office or project site, associated site hazards and
legislation.
4.2.5 The trained First Aid Providers should be designated so that the other employees know who they
are and how to contact them. Location specific emergency response plans shall include emergency
contact lists that identify and provide contact information for the designated First Aid Providers.
Refer to S3AM-010-PR1 Emergency Response Planning.
4.2.6 All on-site personnel must be aware of the First Aid Room (if applicable), First Aid Provider’s
location and contact information.
4.2.7 For certain long-term, heavily staffed, or high hazard projects, AECOM may opt to establish a first
aid station on site. It should be staffed with a person who is a nurse, Emergency Medical
Technician (EMT), or Emergency Medical Technician Paramedic (EMT-P) who may practice limited
treatment under the direction of a physician.
4.3 First Aid Rooms
4.3.1 Where required by the applicable federal, provincial, or territorial legislation, every first aid room
will:
• Be located in an area that is easily accessible to workers at all times;
• Be clearly identified as a first aid room;
• Be used exclusively for the purposes of administering first aid and medical examinations and
to provide rest for persons who are ill or injured;

First Aid (S3AM-012-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 4 of 8
• Have adequate lighting, ventilation, and heating and be covered by a floor made of non-porous
material;
• Be of an adequate size to accommodate all supplies;
• Be equipped with
• An appropriately sized First Aid Kit;
• Instructions on how and where to access a first aider,
• A communication system capable of communicating with the medical facility to which an
injured worker would be transported,
• A permanently installed sink with hot and cold potable running water,
• A cot or bed with a moisture-protected mattress and two pillows;
• A stretcher.
• During working hours, be supervised by a first aid provider, who is readily available to provide
first aid; and
• Be kept clean and sanitary.
4.4 First Aid Supplies
4.4.1 It is required that all AECOM locations maintain an adequate amount of first aid supplies in an
easily identifiable and accessible location (this may by a vehicle in vehicle-based operations in
remote locations). All locations (including vehicles) must be equipped with a complete first aid kit
appropriate to the number of staff, location of work, and site hazards, as dictated by the applicable
legislation and regulation.
4.4.2 First aid kits must be inspected to ensure contents meet jurisdictional requirements given the
number of staff, work location, and potential hazards prior to being placed in the determined
location or sent to site and, as a minimum, monthly thereafter.
• For construction operations, first aid kits shall be checked before being sent out to each job
and at least weekly thereafter.
• An inventory (listing required and approved items) and weekly / monthly inspection form shall
be included with each first aid kit. Any items not listed on the inventory (listed as required or
approved for the kit) will be removed during the weekly / monthly inspection unless specifically
approved by a health care professional for inclusion and added to the inventory. Refer to
S3AM-012-FM1 First Aid Kit / AED Inventory and Inspection form.
• At no time will over-the-counter medications such as antacids, aspirin, cold or cough drops, or
other sundry items be stored in the kits without the prior approval of a health care professional
(where permitted by local legislation) and inclusion in the kit’s listed inventory. Over-the-
counter medications may be provided to employees with work-related injuries if recommended
by a medical professional and/or a SH&E Manager.
• First aid kit content usage shall periodically be assessed for demand and supply inventory
increased accordingly.
4.4.3 The Designated Individual identified on each individual project / location will be responsible for
ensuring the weekly / monthly documented inspection of first aid kits for their assigned projects or
locations, including all vehicles.
4.4.4 Each item in first aid kits shall be individually sealed to protect the contents from contamination.
The first aid equipment and supplies shall be maintained in a clean, dry and serviceable condition,
contained in a material that protects the contents from the environment, and clearly identified as
first aid equipment and supplies.

First Aid (S3AM-012-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 5 of 8
4.5 First Aid Response
4.5.1 Any Employee who recognizes a medical emergency immediately initiates an emergency response
in accordance with the location-specific Emergency Response Plan. Refer to S3AM-010-PR1
Emergency Response Planning.
4.5.2 First Aid Providers assess the emergency scene to determine and initiate the appropriate course of
action based on their observations, the victim’s condition, their training and according the location-
specific Emergency Response Plan.
4.5.3 As is applicable to the victim’s condition, First Aid Providers arrange for an escort to a suitable
medical provider.
• For work related non-critical injuries and illnesses, Employees must follow procedures outlined
in S3AM-004-PR1 Incident Reporting, Notifications & Investigation.
• Contact shall be made with their Manager, Supervisor or SH&E Manager prior to seeking any
medical treatment for non-critical injuries/illnesses. Refer to S3AM-018-PR1 Injury & Claims
Management.
4.5.4 As is applicable to the victim’s condition, First Aid Providers transfer the victim’s care to the EMS
agency for appropriate advanced medical treatment and provides a report including: The initial time
of the event.
• The initial time of the event.
• Any care given prior to the First Aid Provider’s arrival.
• Victim’s condition upon the First Aid Provider’s arrival.
• Treatment rendered to the victim by the First Aid Provider.
• Available medical information about the victim.
4.5.5 If an AED was used, leave the defibrillator attached to the victim until instructed to remove it by
EMS personnel or higher medical authority.
4.5.6 Reporting shall be completed in accordance with S3AM-004-PR1 Incident Reporting, Notifications
& Investigation and S3AM-018-PR1 Injury & Claims Management.
4.6 Automated External Defibrillator (AED)
4.6.1 While locations are not mandated to acquire AEDs, an AED should be considered based on the
number of employees, response time of local Emergency Medical Services (EMS), and access to
other AED units (e.g., those provided by the office building management).
4.6.2 The selection of AED equipment will be based on the most current listing of approved AED
manufacturers as provided by the American Heart Association, Heart and Stroke Foundation of
Canada or country equivalent.
4.6.3 Many jurisdictions require Emergency Medical Services (EMS) notification as a requirement for
placing an AED.
• This allows the servicing or responding agency to know that an AED is at a particular location.
In some instances the 911 dispatcher will have that information and can advise callers as to its
location.
• To meet this requirement, each location purchasing an AED will contact the local Emergency
Response Services (EMS) or fire department to determine where notification(s) need to be
sent.
• Some jurisdictions also require registration of AEDs. The Heart and Stroke Foundation,
Department of Health or Office of Emergency Medical Services of the applicable jurisdiction
may be helpful in this determination.

First Aid (S3AM-012-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 6 of 8
• Once it has been determined who must be notified, notification(s) will be made via certified
mail, and records of notification will be delivered to the Designated Individual and maintained
in the applicable project/ location files.
• Notification requirements shall be provided in AED procedures included in the location specific
emergency response plan.
4.6.4 AEDs should be placed in a location that optimizes the fastest response time an individual walking
at a rapid pace would incur to reach the victim. A general rule of thumb by the American Heart
Association is that it should take no longer than 3 minutes to retrieve an AED and return to the
victim. The AED should be in an easily accessible position with the location well-communicated to
all staff.
4.6.5 In order to ensure readiness for use and integrity of the device, AEDs shall be inspected after use
and on a monthly basis, and maintained, cleaned and tested according to manufacturer’s
specifications.
• Check equipment, supplies, accessories and spares for quantities, performance, expiration
dates and defects. Additional items that should be stored and accessible with the AED:
o Simplified written directions for CPR and the use of the AED.
o Non-latex protective gloves (several pairs in various sizes).
o Breathing barrier (CPR)
o Disposable razor to shave chest hair if necessary.
o Biohazard clean-up kit with two biohazard disposal bags.
o Absorbent towels.
• AEDs shall be serviced according the manufacturer’s specifications.
• After-use maintenance shall be performed according to manufacturer’s specifications before it
is returned to service.
• Inspections, cleaning, maintenance, tests and results shall be documented on S3AM-012-FM1
First Aid Kit / AED Inventory and Inspection form.
• All documentation (e.g. inspections, service records, etc.) will be delivered to the Designated
Individual and maintained in the applicable project/ location files.
4.6.6 AEDs shall only be used by individuals with current and proper training.
4.6.7 Each location that has an AED will incorporate AED procedures into its location specific emergency
response plan. Refer to S3AM-010-PR1 Emergency Response Planning.
4.6.8 AEDs shall be used in conjunction with CPR according to training and the equipment’s operator
directions when a victim is unresponsive and not breathing.
4.6.9 AEDs shall be applied to a victim and operated by a First Aid Provider in accordance with training
and the equipment’s instructions.
• Once the AED is turned on, it coaches the user through the steps for use. AEDs are
completely safe. The device gives its users step-by-step instructions on what to do in an
emergency situation and will only deliver a shock if the heart rhythm can be corrected by
defibrillation.
4.6.10 Once an AED has been applied to a victim, it shall not be removed or turned off even if the device
advises ‘No Shock’. The AED will continue background monitoring of the victim’s heart rhythm and
alert the First Aid Provider(s) if a shock is required. The AED shall only be turned off or removed
upon direction of the device itself, EMS personnel or higher medical authority.

First Aid (S3AM-012-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 7 of 8
4.6.11 When an AED has been used and has been detached from the victim, the First Aid Provider shall
deliver the equipment as soon as possible to the Designated Individual who will download the data
from its internal memory and, as necessary, subsequently erase the AEDs memory (ensures
adequate memory space for future data).
4.6.12 Ensure any additional reporting or notifications required as per jurisdictional or client requirements
is completed. Note: Jurisdictional requirements may specify additional actions, reports or
notifications necessary in order for Good Samaritan protections to apply.
4.7 Eyewash and Body Flush (Shower) Facilities
4.7.1 If corrosive, irritating or otherwise hazardous materials are used, review applicable safety data
sheets to assist in determining whether eyewash and body flush (shower) facilities must be
provided.
4.7.2 Employees who may be exposed to corrosive, irritating or otherwise hazardous materials will be
instructed in the location and proper use of emergency eyewash units and body flush (shower)
facilities.
4.7.3 Eyewash and body flush (shower) facilities will be assembled and installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
4.7.4 These facilities should highly visible, clearly identified and, if possible, within 10 seconds of the
hazard. The water source / flushing fluid must be tepid, pressure controlled, and maintained to
prevent freezing and contamination of the fluid.
4.7.5 Eyewash facilities must be capable of flushing both eyes simultaneously and providing at least 15
minutes of potable water flow at a velocity low enough so as not to cause injury to the user (not
less than 0.4 gallons per minute (gpm), or 1.5 liters per minute (lpm)).This generally requires
between 7 and 15 gallons depending on flow.
4.7.6 Plumbed eyewash and body flush (shower) equipment will be activated weekly to verify operation
and ensure that flushing fluid is available. Self-contained eyewash and body flush (shower)
equipment will be visually checked regularly to determine whether the flushing fluid needs to be
changed or supplemented.
4.7.7 Body flush (shower) facilities will be capable of delivering flushing fluid at a rate of not less than 20
gpm (75.7lpm) for 15 minutes.
4.7.8 Eye/face wash facilities will meet all the criteria outlined for facewash facilities, except the
equipment will be capable of delivering flushing fluid at a rate of not less than 3.0 gpm (11.4 lpm)
for 15 minutes.
4.7.9 All eyewash and body flush (shower) equipment will be included in site inspections as well as
inspected annually for compliance with this procedure.
4.8 Training
4.8.1 First Aid Provider(s) shall possess a valid certificate in First Aid, CPR, and AED training from an
approved provider for the applicable jurisdiction (e.g., the U.S. Bureau of Mines, the American Red
Cross, St. John Ambulance, etc.), that can be verified by documentary evidence. Refer to S3AM-
003-PR1 Training.
4.8.2 First Aid, CPR, and AED training will be renewed 30 days before expiration. Specific training may
also be considered for such topics including wilderness survival and rescue for employees
performing work in remote locations where access by EMT is limited by extreme terrain.
4.8.3 If there is potential for occupational exposure to bloodborne pathogens, requirements of
S3AM-111-PR1 Bloodborne Pathogens will be followed (where regulatory required).

First Aid (S3AM-012-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 8 of 8
4.9 Providing Assistance to Injured Employees
4.9.1 In the case of an emergency, the First Aid Provider may provide injured workers with a level of care
within the scope of the their training, objectively record observed or reported signs and symptoms
of injuries and exposures to contaminants, and refer workers with injuries considered to be serious
or beyond the scope of the provider’s training to medical personnel.
4.10 Program Review
4.10.1 This program will be evaluated at least annually.
5.0 Records
5.1 Documented inspections shall be maintained in the office / location / project files.
5.2 Records associated with treatment will be filed and maintained with strict confidentiality.
5.3 Downloaded AED data shall be stored in a secure location.
6.0 Attachments
6.1 S3AM-012-FM1 First Aid Kit / AED Inventory & Inspection

Cold Stress (S3AM-112-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 1 of 8
Americas
Cold Stress S3AM-112-PR1
1.0 Purpose and Scope
1.1 To protect employees from the severest effects of cold stress (hypothermia) and cold injury and to identify
exposures to cold working conditions under which it is believed nearly all employees can be repeatedly
exposed without adverse health effects.
1.2 This procedure applies to all AECOM Americas based employees and operations working outdoors in damp
and cool (below 50 degrees Fahrenheit [°F] or 10 degrees Celsius [°C]) conditions or anytime temperatures
are below 32°F or 0°C.
2.0 Terms and Definitions
2.1 Cold Stress – The production of physiological effects due to cold temperatures and\or wind chill.
2.2 Equivalent Chill Temperature (ECT) – Also known as Wind Chill (see below).
2.3 Frostnip – Superficial cooling of tissues without cellular destruction.
2.4 Frostbite – Freezing of tissue, resulting in tissue destruction.
2.5 Hypothermia – Condition of reduced core body temperature to 95oF (35oC) resulting in loss of dexterity,
loss of mental alertness, collapse, and possible death.
2.6 Wind Chill – The combined effect of air temperature and wind. Also expressed as "equivalent chill
temperature" (ECT), wind chill is defined as heat loss resulting from the effects of air temperature and wind
velocity upon exposed skin.
3.0 References
3.1 S3AM-003-PR1 SH&E Training
3.2 S3AM-128-PR1 Medical Screening & Surveillance Program
3.3 S3AM-208-PR1 Personal Protective Equipment
3.4 S3AM-314-PR1 Working Alone
3.5 S3AM-315-PR1 Working On or Near Water
3.6 S3AM-333-PR1 Marine Safety & Vessel Operations
4.0 Procedure
4.1 Roles and Responsibilities
4.1.1 Manager
• Ensuring the safety of employees on their project sites, consistent with regulatory standards.
• Implement cold stress prevention measures as applicable at each work site.
• Develop/coordinate a work-warning regimen, as applicable.
• Confirm cold stress hazard assessments/evaluations were completed for the planned
activities.
• Assign employees physically capable of performing the assigned tasks. Consider acclimation
to cold weather when evaluating employee capability.
• Confirm employees are properly trained to recognize the symptoms of cold stress.

Cold Stress (S3AM-112-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 2 of 8
4.1.2 Safety, Health and Environment (SH&E) Manager
• Conduct/support cold stress assessments/evaluations.
• Conduct/support incident investigations related to potential cold stress-related illnesses.
• Assist project teams develop appropriate work-warming regimens.
• Provide cold stress awareness training.
4.1.3 Supervisor
• Identify the tasks that may be most impacted by cold stress and communicate the hazard to
the assigned employees.
• Confirm that employees have been trained on the recognition of cold stress-related illnesses.
• Confirm that adequate supplies of warm fluids/drinks are readily available to employees.
• Confirm that a warm/sheltered rest area is available, as applicable.
• Conduct cold stress monitoring, as applicable.
• Implement the work-warming regimen.
• Confirm that first aid measures are implemented once cold stress symptoms are identified.
• Confirm that employees are physically capable of performing the assigned tasks and are not in
a physically compromised condition.
4.1.4 Employee
• Observe each other for the early symptoms of cold stress-related illnesses.
• Maintain an adequate intake of available fluids.
• Report to work in a properly rested condition.
• Report all suspected cold stress-related illnesses.
4.2 Requirements
4.2.1 Carefully plan work anticipated to be performed in cool or cold conditions. If possible, heavy work
should be scheduled during the warmer parts of the day or when the wind is most calm. Include
costs in project budgets for specialized equipment and supplies needed to complete the field
activities.
4.2.2 Staff working in extreme cold (wind chill or ECT below 10oF or -12oC) shall not work alone. The
Buddy System shall be utilized to keep an eye on each other and to watch for signs of cold stress.
Refer to S3AM-314-PR1 Working Alone. Watch for symptoms and signs of hypothermia
4.2.3 Monitor weather forecasts and weather conditions such as ambient temperature, wind speed, and
precipitation. Use observations prior to entering and while in the field to ensure appropriate
protections are in place:
• If possible, move the work to a warm location.
• If possible and as applicable, erect shelters or screens around the work area.
• If possible, heat the work area.
• If possible, adjust schedule according to the cold conditions, work level and worker
acclimatization.
• Implement a work-warming regimen by taking breaks out of the cold. As applicable, consult
S3AM-112 ATT1 Temperature Thresholds to determine wind chill and work-warming schedule.
• Take frequent short breaks in warm dry shelters to allow your body to warm up. Limit time of
exposure to the cold. If shelter is not readily available, consider supplying temporary shelters.

Cold Stress (S3AM-112-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 3 of 8
• Provide assistance to prevent body heat loss, such as:
o Providing appropriate sources of heat (e.g. warm packs, portable heaters, etc.).
o Use of insulating materials on equipment handles when temperatures drop below 30°F
(-1°C).
4.2.4 All staff working in extreme cold or snow conditions should understand the following guidelines for
preventing and detecting hypothermia and frostbite; refer to S3AM-112-ATT2 Symptoms &
Treatment:
• Ensure appropriate PPE requirements are established and adhered to.
• Avoid exhaustion or fatigue because energy is needed to keep muscles warm.
• Because prolonged exposure to cold air or to immersion in cold water at temperatures even well
above freezing can lead to dangerous hypothermia, whole-body protection shall be used.
• Eat high calorie snacks to help maintain body metabolism.
• Confirm extra blankets or sleeping bags are on-site.
• Drink plenty of warm liquids. It is easy to become dehydrated in cold weather.
• Avoid caffeine and alcohol, which can act as diuretics. Alcohol consumption, depending upon
quantity, can dilate blood vessels enhancing body heat loss or constrict blood vessels
decreasing heat delivery to extremities.
• NEVER IGNORE SHIVERING. Persistent or violent shivering is a clear warning that you are on
the verge of hypothermia.
• If you experience frost bite or hypothermia, find shelter and warmth and contact a medical
practitioner if symptoms persist, refer to S3AM-128-PR1 Medical Screening & Surveillance.
4.3 Training
Before they begin work in a cold environment, employees that might be exposed to cold stress will be
informed of the potential for cold stress and how to prevent cold stress. Employees that have not had the
training within the twelve prior months shall repeat the training before exposure to cold stress, refer to
S3AM-003-PR1 SH&E Training. Employees potentially exposed to cold stress will receive training including,
but not limited to:
4.3.1 Sources of cold stress, the influence of protective clothing, and the importance of acclimatization.
4.3.2 How the body loses heat.
4.3.3 Recognition of cold-related illness symptoms.
4.3.4 Cold stress preventative/corrective measures including, but not limited to:
• Weather monitoring.
• Proper eating and drinking practices.
• Work-warming schedules and proper re-warming techniques.
• Buddy system.
• Safe cold work practices appropriate to the work that is to be performed.
• Proper use of cold environment personal protective clothing.
4.3.5 The harmful effects of excessive alcohol consumption in a cold stress environment.
4.3.6 The hazards associated with unstable snow or ice build ups.
4.3.7 First aid procedures for symptoms related to cold stress.

Cold Stress (S3AM-112-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 4 of 8
4.4 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
Wearing the right clothing is crucial to avoiding cold stress. The type of fabric also makes a difference.
Cotton loses its insulation value when it becomes wet. Wool, on the other hand, retains its insulation even
when wet. Adequate insulating dry clothing will be required in air or wind chill temperatures below 40 °F
(4.4°C)
All PPE will comply with the requirements of S3AM-208-PR1 Personal Protective Equipment and consider
the following requirements:
4.4.1 Wear at least 3 layers of clothing to help prevent cold stress. It is important to preserve the air
space between the body and the outer layer of clothing to retain body heat.
• Wear a middle layer of down, wool, or similar materials to provide insulation.
• Avoid cotton, especially blue jeans.
• Wear an outer layer to break the wind and allow some ventilation (e.g., Gortex® or nylon)
• Do not wear tight clothing. Loose clothing allows better ventilation.
4.4.2 Wear proper clothing, including head coverings and gloves or mittens for cold, wet, and windy
conditions.
4.4.3 Wear a hat or hardhat liner. Up to 40 percent of body heat can be lost when the head is left
exposed.
4.4.4 Use insulated footwear with adequate traction to prevent slips and falls.
4.4.5 Wear insulated boots or other insulated footwear, and insulated gloves to help reduce the chance
of frostbite.
4.4.6 Keep a change of dry clothing available in case work clothes become wet.
4.4.7 Eye and face protection for employees employed outdoors in a snow and/or ice-covered terrain
should be supplied.
• Sunglasses (with UVA and UVB protection) and sunscreen should be used when there is a
persistent combination of snow and direct sun.
• Special safety goggles to protect against blowing ice crystals and ultraviolet light and glare
(which can produce temporary conjunctivitis and/or temporary loss of vision) should be
required when there is an expanse of snow coverage causing a potential eye exposure hazard.
• Ensure face guards are used to protect skin in cold, windy conditions, including riding on an
unshielded vehicle.
4.5 General Cold Stress Prevention Measures
4.5.1 In order to prevent hypothermia:
• Wear appropriate clothing and PPE as determined by the weather conditions.
• When active, ventilate excess heat by opening or removing outer layers of clothing to avoid
sweating.
o Start with the mitten or gloves, unless protection from ice, snow, or cold metal surfaces is
needed.
o Next remove head gear and neck wrappings.
o Then coats/parkas should be opened at the waist and sleeves.
o Finally, layers of clothing should be taken off.
o When resting or tired, or colder conditions are encountered, add additional layers of
clothing/ close outer layers in the reverse of the above order, or get out of the cold. Have a
sweet drink but do not indulge in heavy eating.

Cold Stress (S3AM-112-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 5 of 8
• Garments worn to keep out rain and spray should also allow water vapor to escape.
• Take advantage of heat from the sun and stay out of the wind as much as possible.
• Have available emergency shelter providing protection from wind and rain and insulation from
the ground.
• Replace wet clothing. If wet clothing cannot be replaced, then cover it with a layer of
non-breathing material to prevent evaporation. Place an insulation layer over this
non-breathing material.
• Get adequate rest; conserve energy.
• Get adequate nutrition to replenish energy stores; rest after meals.
• Drink adequate fluids to avoid dehydration.
• If any project / location staff member shows signs of hypothermia, stop and treat him/her.
4.5.2 In order to prevent frost bite:
• Dress to prevent hypothermia and protect the feet and hands.
• Avoid obstruction of circulation by, for example, tight boots or tightly fitting clothing.
• Avoid nicotine (particularly cigarettes) and do not consume alcohol.
• Keep ears and nose covered and out of the wind.
• Frostbite of the corneas of the eyes can be prevented by protective goggles.
• Adopt a “buddy system” of constantly watching the faces of others in the party for white skin
tissue, which is evidence of frostbite (frostnip).
• Practice constant personal vigilance for signs of trouble in one’s own fingers and toes; when in
doubt, investigate thoroughly before it is too late.
4.5.3 Adequate, insulating dry clothing that will help maintain core temperatures above 96.8°F (37°C)
shall be provided to employees if work is performed in air temperatures below 40°F (4.4°C). Wind
chill cooling rate and the cooling power of air are critical factors. The higher the wind speed and the
lower the temperature in the work area, the greater the insulation value of the protective clothing
required.
4.5.4 An Equivalent Chill Temperature (ECT) chart relating the actual dry bulb air temperature and the
wind velocity is presented in S3AM-112-ATT1 Temperature Thresholds. Unless unusual or
extenuating circumstances exist, cold injury to other than hands, feet, and head is not likely to
occur without the development of the initial signs of hypothermia. Superficial or deep local tissue
freezing will occur only at temperatures below 32°F (0°C) regardless of wind speed. However, older
employees, those with circulatory problems and those with previous cold injuries require special
precautionary protection against cold injury. The use of extra insulating clothing and/or a reduction
in the duration of the exposure period are among the special precautions that should be
considered.
4.5.5 Continuous exposure of skin should not be permitted when the air speed and temperature results in
an ECT of –25°F (-32°C) or below.
4.5.6 At air temperatures of 40°F (4.4°C) or less, it is imperative that employees who become immersed
in water or whose clothing becomes wet be immediately removed from the cold environment,
provided a change of clothing, and be treated for hypothermia.
4.5.7 If the air velocity at the job site is increased by wind, draft, or artificial ventilating equipment, the
cooling effect of the wind should be reduced by shielding the work area or by wearing an easily
removable windbreak garment.
4.5.8 Adequate protection, such as general ventilation, shall be incorporated into any warming shelter
design to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning.

Cold Stress (S3AM-112-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 6 of 8
4.5.9 Operation of internal combustion or similar devices within warming shelters is prohibited.
4.5.10 If the available clothing does not give adequate protection to prevent hypothermia or frostbite, work
should be modified or suspended until adequate clothing is made available or until weather
conditions improve.
4.5.11 Walking and working surfaces shall be cleared of ice and snow to prevent slips and falls.
4.5.12 Confirm that employees carry fire starter materials if working in remote areas.
4.5.13 Supplies such as PPE, fuels, enclosures, de-icing, traction aids, warm drinks, and batteries will be
specified by the SH&E Manager and/or the Manager and made available. These supplies will be
inspected at least weekly during cold weather projects and replaced when necessary.
4.6 Cold Stress Prevention Measures for the Hands
4.6.1 Special protection of the hands is required to maintain manual dexterity for the prevention of
accidents including, but not limited to the following:
• If fine work is to be performed with bare hands for more than 10 to 20 minutes in an
environment below 60oF (15oC), special provisions should be established for keeping the
employees’ hands warm. For this purpose, warm air jets, radiant heaters (fuel burner or
electric radiator), or contact warm plates may be utilized. Metal handles of tools and control
bars should be covered by thermal insulating material at temperatures below 30oF (-1o C).
• If the air temperature falls below 60oF (15oC) for sedentary work, 40oF (4.4o C) for light work, or
20oF (-6oC) for moderate work, and fine manual dexterity is not required, employees should
use gloves.
4.6.2 To prevent contact frostbite, employees should wear anti-contact gloves:
• When cold surfaces below 20°F (-6°C) are within reach, each employee should be warned to
prevent inadvertent contact by bare skin.
• If the air temperature is 0°F (-18°C) or less, employees should protect their hands with mittens
or appropriate gloves. Machine controls and tools for use in cold conditions should be
designed so that they can be handled without removing the mittens or gloves.
• Ensure an adequate supply of dry gloves is available to replace wet gloves.
4.6.3 Provisions for additional total body protection are required if work is performed in an environment at
or below 40oF (4.4oC). The employees should wear cold protective clothing appropriate for the level
of cold and physical activity.
4.6.4 Additional Cold Stress Prevention Measures:
For work practices at or below 10oF (-12oC) ECT, the following will apply:
• The employee should be under constant protective observation (buddy system or supervision).
• The work rate should not be so high as to cause heavy sweating that will result in wet clothing.
If heavy work is being performed, rest periods should be taken in heated shelters and
opportunities to change into dry clothing should be provided.
• New employees should not be required to work full time in the cold during the first days of
employment until they become acclimated to the working conditions and required protective
clothing. Refer to S3AM-112-ATT1 Temperature Thresholds for guidance.
• The weight and bulkiness of clothing should be included in estimating the required work
performance and weights to be lifted by the employee.
• The work should be arranged in such a way that sitting still or standing still for long periods is
minimized. Unprotected metal chair seats should not be used. The employee should be
protected from drafts to the greatest extent possible.

Cold Stress (S3AM-112-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 7 of 8
4.6.5 Employees handling evaporative liquid (gasoline, alcohol, or cleaning fluids) at air temperatures
below 40oF should take special precautions to avoid soaking of clothing or gloves with the liquids
because of the added danger of cold injury due to evaporative cooling. Special note should be
taken of the particularly acute effects of splashes of “cryogenic fluids” or those liquids with a boiling
point that is just above ambient temperature.
4.6.6 Trauma sustained in freezing or subzero conditions requires special attention, because an injured
employee is predisposed to cold injury. Special provisions should be made to prevent hypothermia
and freezing of damaged tissue in addition to providing for first aid treatment.
4.7 Hypothermia in Water
4.7.1 Loss of body heat heat to the water is a major cause of deaths in boating and working near water
incidents. Often the cause of death is listed as drowning; however, the primary cause is often
hypothermia. It should also be noted that alcohol lowers the body temperature around 2 to 3
degrees by dilating the blood vessels. Do not drink alcohol around cold water. The following table
shows the effects of hypothermia in water:
WATER TEMPERATURE EXHAUSTION SURVIVAL TIME
32.5°F (0°C) Under 15 minutes Under 15 to 45 minutes
32.5 to 40°F (0 to 4°C) 15 to 30 minutes 30 to 90 minutes
40 to 50°F (4 to 10°C) 30 to 60 minutes 1 to 3 hours
50 to 60°F (10 to 16°C) 1 to 2 hours 1 to 6 hours
60 to 70°F (16 to 21°C) 2 to 7 hours 2 to 40 hours
70 to 80°F (21 to 27°C) 3 to 12 hours 3 hours to indefinite
Over 80°F (27°C) Indefinite Indefinite
4.7.2 Some points to remember when water is a potential hazard:
• Wear a personal flotation device when drowning is a potential hazard. Refer to S3AM-315-PR1
Working On or Near Water, and S3AM-333-PR1 Marine Safety & Vessel Operations.
• If the water is less than 50°F (10°C), wear a wet suit or dry suit for work in water (e.g., wading,
or if a significant potential to fall in water exists).
• While in the water, do not attempt to swim unless to reach nearby safety. Unnecessary
swimming increases the rate of body heat loss. Keep the head out of the water. This will
increase survival time.
• Keep a positive attitude about rescue. This will increase chances of survival.
• If there is more than one person in the water, huddling is recommended to conserve body
heat.
4.7.3 If an employee or equipment is to work on ice and the water beneath the ice is or may be more
than 3¼ feet (1m) deep at any point:
• Test the ice prior to commencing to ensure it will support the load to be placed on it. Ongoing
testing may be necessary.
• If there is any risk of falling through the ice employees must wear personal protective
equipment that will ensure buoyancy and protect against hypothermia at all times while on the
ice.
4.8 Work-Warming Regimen
4.8.1 If work is performed continuously in the cold at an equivalent chill temperature (ECT) at or below
19oF (–7oC), heated warming shelters (tents, cabins, rest rooms, etc.) should be made available
nearby. The employees should be encouraged to use these shelters at regular intervals; the
frequency will depend on the severity of the environmental exposure. Refer to S3AM-112-ATT1
Temperature Thresholds for guidance.

Cold Stress (S3AM-112-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 8 of 8
4.8.2 The onset of heavy shivering, minor frostbite (frostnip), the feeling of excessive fatigue, drowsiness,
irritability, or euphoria are indications for immediate return to the shelter.
4.8.3 When entering the heated shelter, the outer layer of clothing should be removed and the remainder
of the clothing should be loosened to permit sweat evaporation or a change of dry work clothing
provided.
4.8.4 A change of dry work clothing should be provided as necessary to prevent employees from
returning to the cold environment with wet clothing.
5.0 Records
5.1 Exposure assessments will be documented in the location’s files.
6.0 Attachments
6.1 S3AM-112-ATT1 Temperature Thresholds
6.2 S3AM-112-ATT2 Symptoms & Treatment

Heat Stress (S3AM-113-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 1 of 9
Americas
Heat Stress S3AM-113-PR1
1.0 Purpose and Scope
1.1 Establishes a Heat Illness Prevention Program to guide employees in preventing heat illness, recognition of
the symptoms of heat stress-related illnesses and in taking the appropriate corrective action.
1.2 This procedure applies to all AECOM Americas-based employees and operations.
2.0 Terms and Definitions
2.1 Acclimated – Employees who have developed physiological adaptation to hot environments characterized
by increased sweating efficiency, circulation stability, and tolerance of high temperatures without stress.
Acclimatization occurs after 7 to 10 consecutive days of exposure to heat and much of its benefit may be
lost if exposure to hot environments is discontinued for a week.
2.2 Chemical Protective Clothing (CPC) – Apparel that is constructed of relatively impermeable materials
intended to act as a barrier to physical contact of the Employee with potentially hazardous materials in the
workplace. Such materials include Tyvek coveralls (all types) and polyvinyl chloride coveralls and rain
suits.
2.3 Heat Cramps – A form of heat stress brought on by profuse sweating and the resultant loss of salt from the
body.
2.4 Heat Exhaustion – A form of heat stress brought about by the pooling of blood in the vessels of the skin
and in the extremities.
2.5 Heat Rash – A heat-induced condition characterized by a red, bumpy rash with severe itching.
2.6 Heat Stress – The combination of environmental and physical work factors that constitute the total heat load
imposed on the body.
2.7 Heat Stroke – The most serious form of heat stress, which involves a profound disturbance of the body's
heat-regulating mechanism.
2.8 Sunburn – Caused by unprotected exposure to ultraviolet radiation present in sunlight that is damaging to
the skin (Refer to S3AM-121-PR1 Non-Ionizing Radiation). The injury is characterized by red painful skin,
blisters, and/or peeling.
2.9 Unacclimated – Employees who have not been exposed to hot work conditions for one week or more or
who have become heat-intolerant due to illness or other reasons.
3.0 References
3.1 S3AM-003-PR1 SH&E Training
3.2 S3AM-004-PR1 Incident Reporting, Notifications & Investigation
3.3 S3AM-010-PR1 Emergency Response Planning
3.4 S3AM-121-PR1 Non-Ionizing Radiation
3.5 S3AM-208-PR1 Personal Protective Equipment
3.6 S3AM-209-PR1 Risk Assessment & Management

Heat Stress (S3AM-113-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 2 of 9
4.0 Procedures
4.1 Roles and Responsibilities
4.1.1 Managers
• Evaluate the need for heat illness prevention measures and incorporate as appropriate into the
Safe Work Plan or Task Hazard Analysis.
• Allocate sufficient resources for the management of heat illness in the field including the
provision of water, a shaded break area, and sufficient schedule to allow for breaks.
4.1.2 Safety, Health and Environment (SH&E) Manager
• Provide heat illness awareness training.
• Assist in developing appropriate work-rest schedules.
• Conduct/support incident investigations related to potential heat stress-related illnesses.
4.1.3 Supervisor
• Identify those tasks that may be most impacted by heat stress and communicate the hazard to
the assigned Employees.
• Confirm that Employees have been trained on the recognition of heat illness.
• Confirm that this procedure, along with any applicable Safe Work Plan and/or Task Hazard
Analysis (and heat exposure control plan that may be contained therein) are made available to
affected Employees.
• Confirm that adequate supplies of appropriate fluids are readily available to Employees.
• Confirm that a proper rest area is available.
• Conduct heat illness monitoring, as applicable.
• Implement the work-rest schedule.
• Confirm that first aid measures are implemented once heat stress symptoms are identified.
• Confirm personnel are physically capable of performing the assigned tasks and are not in a
physically compromised condition.
• Report all suspected heat illnesses.
4.1.4 Employee
• Observe each other for the early symptoms of heat illnesses.
• Maintain an adequate intake of available fluids.
• Be familiar with heat stress hazards, predisposing factors, and preventative measures.
• Report to work in a properly vested and hydrated condition.
• Report all suspected heat stress-related illnesses.
4.2 Restrictions
4.2.1 The Buddy System is required when working in high heat conditions; Employees shall not work
alone.
4.2.2 Employees shall not be exposed to levels exceeding those specified for the given work level and
work-rest regimen as listed in S3AM-113-ATT1 Temperature Thresholds.
4.2.3 Clothing corrections shall be applied in accordance with the tables provided in S3AM-113-ATT1
Temperature Thresholds.

Heat Stress (S3AM-113-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 3 of 9

4.3 Exposure Controls
4.3.1 It shall be determined whether Employees are or may be exposed to hazardous heat levels. The
Supervisor shall:
• Conduct a heat stress assessment to determine the potential for hazardous exposure of
Employees. Assessment shall include, but not limited to:
o Ambient temperature.
o Amount of sunshine (cloudy, clear). Refer to S3AM-121-PR1 Non-Ionizing Radiation
additional direction concerning ultraviolet radiation exposures.
o Other radiant heat sources (e.g. motor, fire, etc.).
o Humidity.
o Air flow.
o Amount or type of physical labor being performed,
o Physical condition of the Employees (e.g., acclimated/not)
o Protective clothing in use.
o Referral to S3AM-113-ATT1 Temperature Thresholds to assist in determining whether
hazardous heat exposures may exist.
• If potential for hazardous exposure is identified, the Supervisor shall develop and implement a
heat stress exposure control plan within the Safe Work Plan and/or Task Hazard Analysis.
Refer to S3AM-209-PR1 Risk Assessment & Management.
4.3.2 If Employees are or may be exposed, the Supervisor shall implement engineering controls (e.g.,
shelters, cooling devises, etc.) to reduce the exposure of Employees to levels below those
specified for the given work level and work-rest regimen as listed in S3AM-113-ATT1 Temperature
Thresholds.
4.3.3 If engineering controls are not practicable, the Supervisor shall reduce the exposure of Employees
to levels below those listed in S3AM-113-ATT1 Temperature Thresholds by providing
administrative controls, including a work-rest cycle or personal protective equipment, if the
equipment provides protection equally effective as administrative controls.
4.3.4 If Employees are or may be exposed, the Supervisor shall provide and maintain an adequate
supply of cool, fresh, potable water close to the work area for the use of a heat exposed Employee.
Water shall be provided (paid) by the project or program; if Employees purchase their own drinking
water because water is not otherwise available on site, they shall be reimbursed.
4.3.5 If an Employee shows signs or reports symptoms of heat stress or strain, they shall be removed
from the hot environment and treated by an appropriate first aid attendant on site, if available, or by
a physician, refer to S3AM-113-ATT2 Symptoms & Treatment for more specifics.
4.4 Heat Stress Planning
4.4.1 Heat stress can be a significant site hazard, especially for Employees wearing CPC. To prepare for
emergency response planning, refer to S3AM-010-PR1 Emergency Response Planning procedure.
4.4.2 The project and site specific risks need to be planned using the SH&E Plan and the Task Hazard
Assessments (THA). Refer to the S3AM-209-PR1 Risk Assessment & Management procedure.
4.4.3 The heat a worker is exposed to may be a combination of air temperature, radiant heat, and
humidity. The WBGT (wet-bulb globe thermometer) is a useful index of the environmental
contribution to heat stress. Because WBGT is only an index of the environment, the contributions of

Heat Stress (S3AM-113-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 4 of 9
work demands, clothing, and state of acclimatization shall also be accounted for, as described in
the following steps.
• Monitor ambient temperatures and conduct heat stress monitoring in accordance with the
location specific SH&E Plan. Revise the heat stress monitoring and controls if there are any
reports of discomfort due to heat stress.
• Monitor temperatures in each unique environment in which workers perform work (e.g., take
WBGT measurements inside truck cabs for truck drivers, and take separate WBGT
measurements in the outdoor area where field employees work, etc.). Follow manufacturer’s
instructions on proper use of the WBGT.
• Determine if individual workers are acclimatized or un-acclimatized. Full heat acclimatization
requires up to 3 weeks of continued physical activity under heat-stress conditions similar to
those anticipated for the work. Its loss begins when the activity under those heat-stress
conditions is discontinued, or when there is a sustained increase in temperatures of 10 °F
(5.6 °C) or more, and a noticeable loss occurs after 4 days. A worker can be considered
acclimatized for the purpose of this procedure when they have been exposed to the site
conditions (including level of activity) for 5 of the last 7 days.
• Determine the approximate workload of each worker or group of workers. The following
examples (Table 1) can be used for comparison:
Table 1
Examples of Activities within Workload Categories
Categories Example Activities
Resting
Sitting quietly
Sitting with moderate arm movements
Light
Sitting with moderate arm and leg movements
Standing with light work at machine or bench while using mostly arms
Using a table saw
Standing with light or moderate work at machine or bench and some walking about
Moderate
Scrubbing in a standing position
Walking about with moderate lifting or pushing
Walking on level at 3.5 miles/hr (6 km/hr) while carrying 6.6 lbs (3kg) weight load
Heavy
Carpenter sawing by hand
Shoveling dry sand
Heavy assembly work on a non-continuous basis
Intermittent heavy lifting with pushing or pulling (e.g., pick-and-shovel work)
Very Heavy Shoveling wet sand
• Determine the approximate proportion of work within an hour during a typical shift. Typically,
the initial work schedule will be 60 minutes of work per hour (100 percent work) with a small
break in the morning and afternoon, as appropriate, and a 30-minute lunch break mid-day.
• For workers wearing cloth coveralls (e.g., Nomex fire resistant clothing), add 3 to the
measured WBGT. For impermeable clothing, such as Tyvek or Saranex, the WBGT
procedures cannot be used. For these situations, workers should begin physiological
monitoring as soon as the temperature in the work area exceeds 70ºF (21°C).
• Use the collected information to develop appropriate work to rest schedules as detailed in
S3AM-113-ATT1 Temperature Threshold.
4.4.4 Given the work demands (light, moderate, heavy or very heavy), heat of the work environment, and
such aspects as PPE in use, workload will be adjusted appropriately to allow for proper acclimation.

Heat Stress (S3AM-113-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 5 of 9
• This is the process by which the body "gets used to" hot work environments. This is achieved
by slowly increasing workloads.
• New and returning Employees (absent one week or more) who have not had time to
acclimatize may be more susceptible to heat related illnesses, even in seemingly low risk heat
exposures.
• All Employees shall be allowed time to acclimatize in the event of a heat wave. All Employees
assigned to a new process with additional heat exposures shall be allowed to acclimatize.
• Minimize workload and gradually increase as tolerance is built up. Allow for more frequent
breaks.
• While acclimatization normally takes approximately 5 to 7 days, heightened monitoring of
these Employees will be maintained for the first 14 days.
4.4.5 Employees shall be instructed in the recognition of heat stress symptoms, the first aid treatment
procedures for severe heat stress, and the prevention of heat stress injuries. Employees shall be
encouraged to immediately report any heat stress that they may experience or observe in fellow
Employees. Supervisors shall use such information to adjust the work-rest schedule to
accommodate such problems.
4.4.6 Wherever possible, a designated break area should be established in an air conditioned space, or
in shaded areas where air conditioning is impractical. The break area should be equipped to allow
Employees to loosen or remove protective clothing, and sufficient seating should be available for all
Employees. During breaks, Employees shall be encouraged to drink plenty of water or other liquids,
even if not thirsty, to replace lost fluids and to help cool off. Cool water should be available at all
times in the break area, and in the work area itself unless hygiene/chemical exposure issues
prevent it.
4.5 Symptoms and Treatment
4.5.1 Refer to S3AM-113-ATT2 Symptoms & Treatment.
4.5.2 Employees who exhibit ANY signs of significant heat stress (e.g., profuse sweating, confusion and
irritability, pale, clammy skin) shall be relieved of all duties at once, made to rest in a cool location,
and provided with large amounts of cool water.
4.5.3 Anyone exhibiting symptoms of heat stroke (red dry skin, or unconsciousness) shall be taken
immediately to the nearest medical facility. Steps shall be taken to cool the person during
transportation (clothing removal, wet the skin, air conditioning, etc.).
4.5.4 Severe heat stress (heat stroke) is a life-threatening condition that shall be treated by a competent
medical authority.
4.6 Prevention
4.6.1 Requirements for working in extreme heat may be triggered by a regulatory established criteria
(e.g. CAL/OSHA requires high heat procedures when temperature equals or exceeds 95°F) or as a
result of a hazard analysis assessing various contributory factors (refer to S3AM-113-ATT1
Temperature Thresholds). Employees working in extreme heat or sun should understand and apply
the following guidelines for preventing and detecting heat exhaustion and heat stroke.
• When possible, begin hydrating at least three days prior to working in high heat conditions.
• Review the heat stress exposure control plan within the Safe Work Plan and/or Task Hazard
Analysis.
• If the supervisor is not immediately available confirm a reliable method of communication is in
place to allow for contact with supervision. In the absence of cellular reception a satellite
phone or similar device may be required.

Heat Stress (S3AM-113-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 6 of 9
• Take frequent short breaks in areas sheltered from direct sunlight; eat and drink small amounts
frequently.
• Try to schedule work for the coolest part of the day, early morning and evening.
• Avoid strenuous physical activity outdoors during the hottest part of the day.
• Avoid sudden changes of temperature. Refer to S3AM-113-ATT1 Temperature Thresholds.
• Air out a hot vehicle before getting into it.
• Obtain medical direction if taking diuretics during hot weather (a lower dose may be
necessary).
• When working in heat, drink 1 quart of water per hour of work.
• Avoid caffeine and alcohol as they increase dehydration.
• Monitor urine frequency and color to detect dehydration. Refer to the S3AM-113-ATT3
Dehydration Chart.
• The Buddy System is required when working in high heat conditions to enable effective
communication and cross-observation for indications of heat stress.
• Initiate emergency response procedures when necessary, including contacting emergency
medical services as appropriate and in accordance with the Emergency Response Plan.
4.6.2 Personal Protective Equipment
• Review the S3AM-208-PR1 Personal Protective Equipment procedure.
• Wear a hat and light-colored, loose-fitting clothing to reflect the sun.
• Apply sunscreen to exposed skin (SPF 30 or greater, follow directions on label).
• Wear sunglasses with UV protection.
• Pack extra water to avoid dehydration (try freezing water in bottles overnight to help keep the
water cooler for longer during the day).
4.7 Work-Rest Schedule Practices
4.7.1 Intake of fluid will be increased beyond that which satisfies thirst, and it is important to avoid "fluid
debt," which will not be made up as long as the individual is sweating.
• Two 8-ounce glasses of water should be taken prior to beginning work, then up to 32 ounces
(1 quart) per hour during the work shift; fluid replacement at frequent intervals is most effective.
• The best fluid to drink is water; liquids like coffee or soda do not provide efficient hydration and
may increase loss of water.
• If commercial electrolyte drinks (e.g., Gatorade) are used, the drink should be diluted with
water, or 8 ounces of water should be taken with each 8 ounces of electrolyte beverage.
4.7.2 Additional salt is usually not needed and salt tablets should not be taken.
4.7.3 Replacement fluids should be cool and fresh, but not cold.
4.7.4 Breaks will be taken in a cool, shaded location, and any impermeable clothing should be opened or
removed.
• A relatively cool, shaded area shall be provided for breaks when working in hot environments.
For hazardous waste sites, the rest area should be located in the support zone adjacent to the
contamination reduction zone, situated so that part of it is in the decontamination area so
workers can take breaks without going through full decontamination.

Heat Stress (S3AM-113-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 7 of 9
• If shade is not available, shaded areas shall be constructed. This same type of canopy can be
set up to shade personnel performing various types of work in hot weather.
• Cooling measures other than shade (e.g., misting, air conditioned break areas, air conditioned
vehicles, etc.) can be used in lieu of shade provided it can be demonstrated that they are at
least as effective in cooling employees.
• Employees should have access to these rest areas at break times and at any other time when
suffering from heat illness or believing a preventive recovery period is needed.
4.7.5 Dry clothing or towels will be available to minimize chills when taking breaks.
4.7.6 Manual labor will not be performed during breaks, other than paperwork or similar light tasks.
4.7.7 Other controls that may be used include:
• Scheduling work at night or during the cooler parts of the day (6 am–10 am, 3 pm–7 pm).
• Erecting a cover or partition to shade the work area.
• Auxiliary cooling - wearing cooling devices beneath protective garments, but over any
underclothing.
o If cooling devices are worn, only physiological monitoring will be used to determine work
activity.
o These vests typically provide cooling via one of two methods: the use of ice or other
frozen media, or the use of a vortex cooler. Each method has its advantages and
disadvantages.
o The frozen media vest requires a means for freezing the media, and the media (usually
water or "blue ice") will melt, requiring replacement.
o The vortex cooler tends to cool more uniformly. Instead of frozen media, this vest uses the
expansion of compressed air to cool the wearer. The drawback is the compressed air
requirement, but this is negated when the wearer is already using an airline respirator
supplied by a compressor. A vortex cooler should not be supplied from air cylinders, as
this will draw down the cylinders rapidly.
• Auxiliary cooling should be considered when the following conditions exist:
o Ambient temperature over 80°F (26°C).
o Workers are wearing impermeable garments (i.e., Tyvek, Saranex, Chemrel, etc.).
o It is desirable to have long work shifts with minimum interruption.
4.8 Evaluating the Work-Rest Schedule’s Effectiveness
4.8.1 Once a work-rest schedule is established, the Supervisor shall continually evaluate its
effectiveness through observation of Employees for signs/symptoms of heat stress. Have workers
assess themselves and their body’s reaction to the heat and work conditions (self-assessment),
and report any signs or symptoms of heat illness. These can include nausea or dizziness, heat
cramps, extreme thirst, or very dark urine.
4.8.2 Measurement or physiological monitoring of each Employee’s vitals (e.g., pulse, blood pressure,
and temperature) can provide additional information in determining if the schedule is adequate.
Refer to S3AM-113-ATT1 Temperature Thresholds for additional guidance on when physiological
monitoring should be conducted.
4.8.3 Frequency of physiological monitoring is increased or decreased depending upon such factors as
worker fitness, acclimatization, temperature of the work environment, type of PPE, etc.
Based on the results of the physiological monitoring and on the workers’ self-assessments, the
work period may be adjusted as follows:

Heat Stress (S3AM-113-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 8 of 9
• The work period may be increased (generally, by 5- to 10-minutes intervals, up to a maximum
of 4 hours) if the results of the first 2 hours of the physiological monitoring and the workers’
self-assessments indicate that workers are recovering adequately (see below), and on the
judgment of the SH&E Manager.
• The work period shall be decreased if the results of the physiological monitoring and the
workers’ self-assessment indicate that workers are NOT recovering adequately (see below).
4.8.4 If physiological monitoring is conducted, the Employee and/or the SH&E Manager (or appropriate
designate) shall measure and record body temperature and pulse rate as described below.
4.8.5 Monitor body temperature to determine if Employees are adequately dissipating heat build-up. Ear
probe thermometers which are adjusted to oral temperature (aural temperature) are convenient and
the preferred method of measurement. Determine work/rest regimen as follows:
• Measure oral body temperature at the end of the work period. Oral body temperatures are to
be obtained prior to the employee drinking water or other fluids.
• If temperature exceeds 99.6°F (37.5°C), shorten the following work period by 1/3 without
changing the rest period.
• If, at the next rest period, temperature still exceeds 99.6°F (37.5°C), the worker should not be
allowed to continue work until repeated temperature measurements are in the acceptable
range (i.e., less than 99.6°F). Do not leave the worker alone during the recovery time. Watch
for signs of heat illness and be prepared to implement emergency response as necessary.
• Do not allow a worker to wear impermeable PPE when his/her oral temperature exceeds
100.6°F (38.1°C).
4.8.6 At the start of the workday each Employee’s baseline pulse rate (in beats per minute [bpm]) is
determined by taking a pulse count for 15 seconds and multiplying the result by four or by using an
automated pulse count device. Pulse rates can then be measured at the beginning of each break
period and two minutes thereafter to determine if the rest period allows for adequate recovery.
• Take the radial (wrist) pulse as early as possible in the rest period and determine the worker’s
heart rate in beats per minute. The heart rate is determined by counting the pulse for ten
seconds and multiplying the number by 6 to get the beats per minute. Record this as P1.
• Wait 2 minutes and repeat the pulse measurement. Record this as P2.
• If P1 is greater than or equal to 110 beats per minute (bpm) and if (P1 – P2) is less than or
equal to 10 bpm (indicating that workers are not recovering adequately), shorten the next work
cycle by 1/3 without changing the rest period.
• At the next rest period, if P1 is still equal to or greater than 110 bpm, and if (P1 – P2) is still
less than or equal to 10 bpm, shorten the following work cycle by 1/3 without changing the rest
period.
• At the third rest period, if P1 is still equal to or greater than 110 bpm and (P1 – P2) is still less
than or equal to 10 bpm, the worker should not be allowed to continue work until repeated
pulse measurements are in the acceptable range (i.e., P1 is less than 110 bpm and (P1 – P2)
is greater than 10 bpm). Do not leave the worker alone during the recovery time. Watch for
signs of heat illness and be prepared to implement emergency response as necessary.
4.8.7 Use of an automated or similar blood pressure device will be used to assess each Employee’s
blood pressure at the beginning and end of each break period to determine if the rest period allows
adequate cooling by applying the following criteria:
• If the blood pressure of an Employee is outside of 90/60 to 150/90, then the Employee will not
be allowed to begin or resume work; extend the break period by at least five minutes, at the
end of which blood pressure rates will be re-measured and the end-of-break criteria again
applied.

Heat Stress (S3AM-113-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 9 of 9
4.8.8 All physiological monitoring of heat stress will be documented using S3AM-113-FM1 Heat Stress
Monitoring Log.
4.9 Training
4.9.1 Employees and their Supervisors that may be exposed to the hazard will be trained and oriented to
the hazard and the controls prior to work commencing.
4.9.2 Those Employees, including Supervisors, potentially exposed to heat stress will receive training,
refer to the S3AM-003-PR1 SH&E Training procedure. Training will include, but is not limited to:
• Sources of heat stress (environmental and personal), influence of protective clothing, and
importance of acclimatization;
• How the body handles heat and acclimatization;
• Recognition of heat-related illness symptoms;
• Preventative/corrective measures including, but not limited to;
o Employees will be informed of the harmful effects of excessive alcohol consumption in the
prevention of heat stress.
o All Employees will be informed of the importance of adequate rest and proper diet in the
prevention of heat stress.
• First aid procedures for heat stress-related illnesses; and
• Immediate reporting of any heat-related incident (injury, illness, near-miss), refer to the S3AM-
004-PR1 Incident Reporting, Notifications & Investigation procedure.
5.0 Records
5.1 None
6.0 Attachments
6.1 S3AM-113-ATT1 Temperature Thresholds
6.2 S3AM-113-ATT2 Symptoms & Treatment
6.3 S3AM-113-ATT3 Dehydration Chart
6.4 S3AM-113-FM1 Heat Stress Monitoring Log

Hearing Conservation (S3AM-118-PR1) Revision 0 March 1, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 1 of 6
Americas
Hearing Conservation S3AM-118-PR1
1.0 Purpose and Scope
1.1 Establishes procedures to confirm that personal noise exposure remains within acceptable limits and
establishes the requirements of an acceptable hearing conservation program.
1.2 This procedure applies to all AECOM Americas-based employees and operations.
2.0 Terms and Definitions
2.1 ABC System – The system used in Canada to classify hearing protectors on the basis of the attenuation
provided by the hearing protection.
2.2 Action Level – May also be referred to as Monitoring Level. An eight-hour, time-weighted average
established by the applicable jurisdiction, measured on the A-scale, slow response. Depending upon
jurisdiction, this can vary anywhere from 74dBA to 85dBA, and may additionally be defined as 50% of the
allowable noise dose. In the absence of a specified jurisdictional action level, 85dBA shall be used as the
default action level.
2.3 Attenuation – The reduction of the sound level at the ears of a person wearing hearing protectors.
2.4 Decibel (dB) – Logarithmic unit of measurement of sound level.
2.5 Established Exposure Limit – The maximum regulatory noise exposure to which an individual may be
exposed to for an 8- hour time weighted average (TWA).
• This limit is referred to by different terminology depending upon the given jurisdiction (e.g. Permissible
Exposure Limit (PEL), Contamination Limit, Occupational Exposure Limit (OEL), Threshold Limit Value
(TLV), etc.).
• Acceptable methods of adjusting this limit to correspond to a different exposure period (e.g. 10 hours)
vary by jurisdiction.
2.6 Standard Threshold Shift (STS) – When one’s hearing threshold has changed (relative to the baseline
audiogram) an average of 10 dB or more at 2000, 3000, or 4000 Hz in either ear).
2.7 Noise Reduction Rating (NRR) – The measure, in decibels, of how well a hearing protector reduces noise
(attenuation), as specified by the United States of America Environmental Protection Agency. It is a
requirement in the USA that all hearing protectors have the NRR stamped on their packaging.
2.8 Time-Weighted Average (TWA) Sound Level – That sound level, which if constant over an 8-hour
exposure, would result in the same noise dose as is measured.
3.0 References
3.1 S3AM-003-PR1 SH&E Training
3.2 S3AM-127-PR1 Exposure Monitoring
3.3 S3AM-128-PR1 Medical Screening & Surveillance
4.0 Procedure
4.1 Roles and Responsibilities
4.1.1 SH&E Manager
• Provide access to initial and refresher hearing conservation training.

Hearing Conservation (S3AM-118-PR1) Revision 0 March 1, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 2 of 6
• Inform employees of noise monitoring results when full-shift noise exposure is at or above the
action level.
• Designate areas and tasks where employees’ exposure is at or above the action level.
• Conduct noise monitoring and supervise noise surveys, as applicable, and support hazardous
noise assessment/evaluation efforts.
4.1.2 Manager
• Implement the hearing conservation program.
• Confirm that a hazardous noise assessment/evaluation has been conducted.
• Confirm that a hazardous noise assessment/evaluation is conducted when a change in
equipment, procedures, or personnel may increase employee exposure to noise.
• Implement engineering controls to reduce noise levels when such measures are considered
feasible and when required by regulation.
• Purchase, monitor, and replenish for employees’ use, a supply of hearing protection devices
with a minimum Noise Reduction Rating (NRR) of 26 dBA, or of the appropriate classification
for the applicable jurisdiction.
• Confirm that individuals included in the program receive training and that the training meets the
criteria outlined in this program.
• Investigate and implement corrective action to all reports of non-conformance with this
procedure, including reports of standard threshold shifts or employees’ failure to wear hearing
protectors in designated areas.
• Maintain an awareness of the noise levels in work areas for which he/she is responsible.
• Place warning signs in areas where sound levels would require the use of hearing protectors.
• Request that a hazardous noise assessment/evaluation be conducted when a change in
equipment, procedures, or personnel may increase employee exposure to noise above action
levels.
• Confirm that all employees are aware of the requirements for hearing protection for any
designated area or task.
• Enforce the use of hearing protection by employees in designated areas and for designated
tasks.
4.1.3 Employee
• Comply with the requirements of the Hearing Conservation program.
• Wear hearing protection devices in designated areas or for designated tasks.
• Inspect and maintain hearing protection devices.
• Report any suspected change in noise levels of work area to supervisor.
• Report any signs or symptoms experienced that could be the result of overexposure to noise to
supervisor.
• Participate in audiometric testing and hearing protection training when required.
4.2 General Requirements
4.2.1 The requirements of this procedure apply to all locations/facilities/projects where employee noise
exposure may equal or exceed the action level.
4.2.2 SH&E Plans and Task Hazard Assessments (THA) shall identify applicable hazards related to
noise exposure. Identify established exposure limits and action levels specified by the applicable
jurisdiction, or in the absence of specifications, an 8-hour TWA of 85 dBA.

Hearing Conservation (S3AM-118-PR1) Revision 0 March 1, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 3 of 6
• The below chart is intended to provide basic established exposure limits by jurisdiction. Please
consult the applicable jurisdictional legislation to obtain further information and to verify
accuracy.

8hr TWA Established Exposure Limit (dBA)
8hr TWA Action Level
(dBA)
OSHA 90 85
Canada - Federal 87 74
Alberta 85 85
British Columbia 85 82
Manitoba 85 80
New Brunswick 85 80
Newfoundland 85 85
Northwest Territories 85 80
Nova Scotia 85 85
Nunavut 85 85
Ontario 85 85
Prince Edward Island 85 85
Quebec 90 85
Saskatchewan 85 80
Yukon 85 80
• Acceptable methods of adjusting this limit to correspond to a different exposure period (e.g. 10
hours) vary by jurisdiction.
4.2.3 When processes or areas present noise exposures that are or could be at or above the action level
identified for the given jurisdiction, monitoring and interpretation of results shall be undertaken by a
trained and competent individual using approved equipment (sound level meters, sound
dosimeters) to assess the hazard.
4.2.4 Resulting documentation (e.g. noise maps, results of the sound level survey data, etc.) will be
posted at the location.
4.2.5 Noise assessments shall be repeated when there is any change in processes or equipment that
could affect the noise level or the exposure duration.
4.2.6 Eliminate noise sources or reduce noise levels to the extent possible prior to implementing hearing
protection PPE. Examples of controls that shall be considered include:
• Adding or replacing mufflers on motorized equipment.
• Adding mufflers to air exhausts on pneumatic equipment.
• Following equipment maintenance procedures to lubricate dry bearings and replace worn or
broken components.
• Isolating loud equipment with barriers.
• Replacing loud equipment with newer and quieter models.
• Using caution signs and Hearing Protection Required signs to designate noisy work areas.
• Installing hearing protection device-dispensing stations at the entrance to noisy work areas.
4.2.7 Where practicable, a clearly visible warning sign shall be posted at every approach to an area in
the workplace where the sound level regularly exceeds 85 dBA.

Hearing Conservation (S3AM-118-PR1) Revision 0 March 1, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 4 of 6
4.3 Hearing Protectors
4.3.1 Hearing protectors will be used in the event that administrative or engineering controls are either
not effective or not feasible.
4.3.2 Selection of appropriate hearing protectors shall be based on actual or anticipated exposure levels,
the attenuation provided by the device, and the manufacturer’s information about the use and
limitations of the device.
4.3.3 At a minimum, hearing protectors shall provide a level of protection that brings actual or anticipated
exposure below the established exposure limit for the applicable jurisdiction. Additional information
relative to hearing protector use is as follows:
• The use of hearing protectors is required in any location where powered or motorized
equipment, portable tools or any other noise source could reasonably be expected to exceed
noise levels specified by the applicable jurisdiction, or in the absence of specifications, an 8-
hour TWA of 85 dBA.
• Hearing protection will be mandatory for all employees working in any area that has not been
evaluated for noise exposure and the ambient noise level in the area is such that a raised
voice is necessary to have a normal conversation with someone less than three feet (1 meter)
away, and/or when within 25 feet (7.6 meters) of an operating piece of heavy equipment.
• Hearing protection will be mandatory for all employees who work on or near heavy equipment
unless personal dosimetry or other techniques have been used to document actual exposure.
• Hearing protectors will be made available to all employees at no cost to the employees who
may be exposed to noise levels specified by the applicable jurisdiction, or in the absence of
specifications, an 8-hour TWA of 85 dBA.
• Hearing protection will be mandatory for all employees exposed to 85 dBA for any period of
time and who have experienced an STS.
• Whenever information indicates that any employee’s exposure may equal or exceed specified
levels (or as applicable, an 8-hour TWA of 85 dBA), the manager will be responsible for
enforcing the proper use of hearing protectors.
• At least two types of hearing protectors shall be available to employees free of charge, and the
type of hearing protector shall be suitable to the task and approved to the applicable
jurisdiction.
• Hearing protectors shall be used in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications to effectively
protect hearing. Refer to S3AM-118-ATT1 Hearing Protection Guidelines.
4.3.4 Evaluate the effectiveness of the hearing protectors chosen.
4.3.5 The manufacturer’s assigned noise reduction rating (NRR) or attenuation for hearing protection
devices can seldom be achieved in workplace conditions; therefore this rating shall be adjusted for
real world conditions and use.
• For devices with an NRR rating, subtract 7 from the NRR of the protector provided by the
manufacturer. Divide this result by 2, and then subtract the remained from the observed “A”
scale sound level measurement collected in the employee’s work area (see Section 4.B). If
this number is below 85, the hearing protectors are adequate for use in the work area.
4.3.6 Implement a hearing conservation program as applicable and in accordance with jurisdictional
requirements
4.4 Training
4.4.1 All employees with potential exposure above the action levels applicable to their jurisdiction, or who
otherwise utilize any type of hearing protector will participate in a hearing conservation training
program. Refer to S3AM-003-PR1 SH&E Training.

Hearing Conservation (S3AM-118-PR1) Revision 0 March 1, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 5 of 6
4.4.2 The initial and subsequent annual hearing conservation training will address, at a minimum, the
following topics:
• The effects of noise on hearing, recognizing hazardous noise, and symptoms of overexposure
to hazardous noise.
• When and/or where hearing protectors are required to be worn.
• The purpose of hearing protectors.
• The advantages, disadvantages, and effectiveness of various types of protectors.
• Instructions on care and use of hearing protectors, including its limitations, proper fitting,
inspection and maintenance and, if applicable, the cleaning and disinfection of the protector.
• The purpose of audiometric testing, including an explanation of the test procedures.
• Hearing Conservation Program requirements and responsibilities.
4.4.3 Hearing protection training is conducted annually for all affected employees or more frequently for
employees who do not properly use hearing protectors or otherwise fail to comply with this policy.
4.5 Audiometric Testing
4.5.1 All AECOM personnel with exposure greater than the action level shall be enrolled in the medical
surveillance program and undergo a baseline audiogram within 6 months of the first exposure
(consult local jurisdiction for more stringent timelines).
4.5.2 Thereafter, annual audiograms will be compared with the baseline exam. Testing to establish a
baseline audiogram will be preceded by 14 hours without exposure to noise, including noise
exposure away from work. Hearing protectors may be used as a substitute for the requirement that
a baseline audiogram will be preceded by 14 hours without exposure to noise.
4.5.3 Enrolled employees will receive audiograms during their exit physicals; refer to S3AM-128-PR1
Medical Screening & Surveillance Program.
• Audiometric tests will be performed by a person meeting the requirements specified by the
applicable jurisdiction.
• The medical surveillance provider will notify employees of the need to avoid high levels of non-
occupational noise exposure during the 14-hour period immediately preceding the audiometric
examination.
• For multi-year projects, an annual audiogram will be obtained for each employee exposed at or
above the level specified by the applicable jurisdiction, or in the absence of specifications, an
8-hour TWA of 85 decibels.
4.5.4 Each employee’s annual audiogram will be compared to that employee’s baseline audiogram to
determine if the audiogram is valid, and if there is a standard threshold shift (STS).
4.5.5 When a Standard Threshold Shift (STS), as identified by the AECOM Medical Consultant, is noted
between the last valid baseline and the annual audiogram, the following steps will be taken:
• A retest will be conducted within 30 days to confirm the STS. The employee will not be
exposed to workplace/hobby noise for 14 hours or will be provided with adequate hearing
protection prior to testing.
• If the STS persists, ear protection will be evaluated and refitted, and may be upgraded to one
with a greater NRR or classification. The hearing protection will have a minimum NRR of 26
dBA, or be of the appropriate classification for the applicable jurisdiction.
• The employee will be counselled and AECOM will obtain information regarding the employee's
possible noise exposure away from the workplace or existing ear pathology.
• Qualified medical personnel will review the audiograms. This group will determine the need for
a medical referral.

Hearing Conservation (S3AM-118-PR1) Revision 0 March 1, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 6 of 6
• The employee will be notified in writing by either the SH&E Manager or the AECOM Medical
Provider of the STS, within 21 days of determination, or as required by the applicable
jurisdiction.
• The employee's supervisor will be notified of the shift in hearing threshold.
4.5.6 An employee who has experienced an STS shall comply with any recommendations made by
medical personnel as they relate to the employees assigned work duties (e.g. dual hearing
protection of earplugs and earmuffs).
4.6 Employee Monitoring
4.6.1 When information indicates that any employee's exposure may equal or exceed the applicable
action level, the SH&E Manager shall develop and implement a site-specific monitoring program to
identify employees for inclusion in the hearing conservation program and to enable the proper
selection of hearing protectors. Refer to S3AM-118-FM1 Site-Specific Hearing Conservation
Program and S3AM-127-PR1 Exposure Monitoring.
4.6.2 Noise surveys shall be conducted in a manner that reasonably reflects the exposure of the affected
employees. Surveys shall be conducted under the supervision of an AECOM SH&E Manager.
Refer to S3AM-118-FM2 Sound Level Survey and S3AM-118-FM3 Noise Dosimetry Record.
4.6.3 Sound-level meters and audio dosimeters used to determine employee exposure to noise sources
shall be Type II (accurate to within +/- 2 dBA), operated in “slow” response, on the “A” scale, and
be calibrated to factory guidelines (including periodic factory recalibration).
5.0 Records
5.1 Noise exposure measurement records, surveys and Site-Specific Hearing Conservation Plans will be
retained at the project/facility for the duration of the project.
5.2 Audiogram records will be retained in the employee’s medical records as per S3AM-128-PR1 Medical
Screening & Surveillance Program.
5.3 Employee training session documentation will be retained in accordance with S3AM-003-PR1 SH&E
Training.
6.0 Attachments
6.1 S3AM-118-ATT1 Hearing Protection Guidelines
6.2 S3AM-118-FM1 Site-Specific Hearing Conservation Program
6.3 S3AM-118-FM2 Sound Level Survey
6.4 S3AM-118-FM3 Noise Dosimetry Record

Environmental Compliance (S3AM-204-PR1) Revision 3 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 1 of 8
Americas
Environmental Compliance S3AM-204-PR1
1.0 Purpose and Scope
1.1 This procedure establishes a process for assuring compliance with applicable environmental laws and
regulations.
1.2 This procedure applies to all AECOM America-based employees and operations.
2.0 Terms and Definitions
The terms and definitions relating to environmental compliance and hazardous waste management are
included in the respective laws and regulations in Canada, Latin America and the United States.
2.1 Applicable Environmental and Hazardous Waste Management Laws and Regulations – The specific
legal requirements that apply to an AECOM office or project. Laws and regulations vary considerably
throughout the Americas.
2.2 Compliance Map – a document defining and detailing the actions necessary to assure compliance with
applicable environmental legal requirements.
2.3 Reportable Quantity (RQ) – quantities of hazardous substances, which when released to the environment
require notification to the appropriate authorities / agencies (e.g., National Response Center, local police,
coast guard, state / provincial / territorial reporting agency, etc.). Multiple agencies and regulations have
established RQs; RQs may differ by agency.
2.4 Subject Matter Expert – a person who is an expert in a particular topic or area based on experience,
technical/regulatory knowledge, and/or training.
2.5 Hazardous Wastes – Hazardous waste laws and regulations are complex and vary considerably throughout
the Americas. For example, based on the Canadian Environmental Protect Act of 1999, in Canada
hazardous wastes and hazardous recyclable materials are defined as those with properties such as
flammability, corrosiveness or inherent toxicity. According to EPA regulations, a hazardous waste is a waste
with properties that make it dangerous or potentially harmful to human health or the environment. Hazardous
waste can take many physical forms and may be solid, semi-solid, liquid, or even contained gases.
Hazardous wastes fall into the categories of listed wastes and characteristic wastes. The characteristic
wastes exhibit one of more of the following characteristics: ignitability, corrosivity, reactivity and toxicity.
2.6 Generator of Hazardous Wastes – For example, based on the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act
(RCRA) and Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) regulations in the United States, a hazardous waste
generator is any person or site whose processes and actions create hazardous waste. Generators are
divided into three categories based on the quantity of waste they produce. Large quantity generators
generate 1,000 kilograms per month or more of hazardous waste, more than 1 kilogram per month of
acutely hazardous waste, or more than 100 kilograms per month of acute spill residue or soil. Small quantity
generators generate more than 100 kilograms, but less than 1,000 kilograms, of hazardous waste per
month. Very Small Quantity Generators generate 100 kilograms or less per month of hazardous waste, or 1
kilogram or less per month of acutely hazardous waste, or less than 100 kilograms per month of acute spill
residue or contaminated soil, water, or other debris.
2.7 Storage – Per EPA regulations, storage is defined as the temporary holding of waste before the waste is
treated, disposed of or stored somewhere else.
2.8 Treatment and Disposal – Per EPA regulations, treatment and disposal is any process that changes the
physical, chemical or biological characteristics of a waste to minimize its threat to the environment.

Environmental Compliance (S3AM-204-PR1) Revision 3 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 2 of 8
3.0 References
3.1 AECOM Safety, Health and Environment Policy Statement
3.2 S3AM-004-PR1 Incident Reporting, Notifications & Investigation
3.3 S3AM-017-PR1 Injury & Illness Recordkeeping
3.4 S3AM-109-PR1 Asbestos
3.5 S3AM-116-PR1 Hazardous Materials Shipping
3.6 S3AM-119-PR1 Laboratories
3.7 S3AM-209-PR1 Risk Assessment & Management
3.8 S3AM-216-PR1 Compliance Assurance
4.0 Procedure
Subject matter experts knowledgeable in Canada, Latin Americas and the United States environmental and
hazardous waste laws and regulations should be consulted for clarification of the requirements. Hazardous
waste laws and regulation may vary by provinces in Canada, countries in Latin Americas and states in the
United States. It is critical to understand the specific requirements in the various offices and project locations
in the Americas.
4.1 Roles and Responsibilities
4.1.1 Managers (Operations) directing activities of the facility, site, or project location
 Ensure the areas they manage are in compliance with applicable environmental and
hazardous waste laws and regulations. The SH&E Plan shall identify all applicable SH&E
requirements the particular project/location is responsible for meeting.
 Participate in assessing the applicable activities, products or services for associated
environmental impacts. Refer to S3AM-204-ATT2 Aspects and Environmental Impacts
Assessment as a guideline.
 Ensure the necessary resources exist to comply with these requirements and is responsible for
working with the SH&E team to audit compliance.
 Consult subject matter experts on an ongoing basis to ensure up-to-date specific requirements
of applicable legislation and regulation are met.
 Ensure relevant information and compliance requirements are communicated to all affected
personnel. As applicable, refer to S3AM-204-ATT3 Environmental Management Plan (Sample).
4.1.2 Project / Location Manager
 Identifying and implementing the actions necessary to ensure compliance with the project /
location’s applicable environmental and hazardous waste requirements. As applicable, this
may include:
o Participating in the assessment of applicable activities, products or services for associated
environmental impacts. Refer to S3AM-204-ATT2 Aspects and Environmental Impacts
Assessment as a guideline.
o Ensuring procedures for conducting any activities that could have a significant
environmental impact are established.
o Ensuring procedures for identification of significant environmental aspects of goods and
services used by AECOM are established.
o Identifying and understanding the applicable legal requirements that apply to the project /
location’s activities.

Environmental Compliance (S3AM-204-PR1) Revision 3 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 3 of 8
o Verifying that staff have the appropriate environmental and hazardous waste management
training prior to performing assigned activities.
o Budgeting the necessary resources into each project / location to achieve compliance with
applicable legal requirements.
o As applicable, verifying that Legal Counsel and Office of Risk Management (ORM) have
reviewed and approved the signed client’s Agency Agreement authorizing AECOM to sign
a waste manifest or sign shipping papers “as an agent of that client.” NOTE: It is
AECOM’s policy that AECOM personnel will not sign client waste manifests or shipping
papers unless authorized to do so by AECOM Legal Counsel and ORM.
o Obtaining all applicable environmental permits prior to the start of any regulatory permitted
activity, including those permits held by the client which may impact AECOM’s activities.
o Assessing the compliance status of AECOM’s activities.
o Implementing any identified corrective actions relative to noted potential environmental
compliance deficiencies.
o Identifying environmental regulatory noncompliance or near misses to AECOM’s incident
report system
 Ensuring project / location-specific environmental compliance plan is developed and
documented in the form of Environmental Management Plans (EMP) or equivalent (refer to
S3AM-204-ATT3 Environmental Management Plan (Sample) as a guideline and to S3AM-204-
ATT1 Environmental Compliance Maps for examples of Compliance Maps).
 Consult subject matter experts on an ongoing basis to ensure up-to-date specific requirements
of environmental legislation and regulation are met.
 Ensure relevant information and compliance requirements are communicated to all affected
staff.
4.1.3 SH&E Manager
 Assisting operations personnel in assuring that activities undertaken by Operations are in
compliance with environmental legal requirements, including but not limited to:
o Assisting operations in identifying applicable environmental and hazardous waste laws
and regulations and Subject Matter Experts.
o Supporting compliance assessments of operations activities as needed. Refer to S3AM-
204-ATT2 Aspects and Environmental Impacts Assessment as a guideline.
o Reporting regulatory potential noncompliance events that result in a notice of violation,
notice of noncompliance, or other indication of noncompliance to both management and
region counsel.
o Reporting to management and legal counsel, as applicable, on the status of identified
corrective actions.
4.1.4 Legal Counsel
 Reviewing, commenting on, and approving a client’s signed Agency Agreement letter
authorizing AECOM to sign a waste manifest or shipping papers “as an agent of the client.”
 Taking appropriate action upon notification that AECOM received a notice of violation or any
other written notice of noncompliance, or becoming aware of a noncompliance situation.
 Supporting operation’s response to notices of violation or any other written notice of
noncompliance issued to AECOM from a regulatory agency.
4.1.5 America’s Office of Risk Management
 Reviewing, commenting on, and approving a client’s signed Agency Agreement letter

Environmental Compliance (S3AM-204-PR1) Revision 3 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 4 of 8
authorizing AECOM to sign a waste manifest or shipping papers “as an agent of the client.”
4.1.6 Employees
 Reporting all environmental releases or permit exceedances immediately as per S3AM-004-
PR1 Incident Reporting, Notifications & Investigation.
 Performing all project-related tasks in compliance with applicable environmental legal
requirements.
 Signing waste manifests only if authorized by the Project Manager and Region Counsel. Refer
to S3AM-116-PR1 Hazardous Materials Shipping.
4.2 Office Compliance
4.2.1 Overall – AECOM offices must comply with the applicable environmental and hazardous waste
laws and regulations. This section describes some potential office related activities that can be
subject to environmental laws and regulations.
4.2.2 Shipping Materials – The shipping and manifesting of hazardous materials from an AECOM office
is subject to S3AM-116-PR1 Hazardous Materials Shipping procedure. Employees associated with
shipping (such as with Federal Express, UPS and others) must be trained in their responsibilities
and ensure they comply with the applicable shipping and manifesting requirements.
4.2.3 Storage of Chemicals and Wastes - Some AECOM offices may store chemicals and wastes. If so,
these offices must comply with the applicable laws and regulations governing these activities.
4.2.4 Applicable Permits – Most AECOM offices will not require an air or water permit for discharges. If
hazardous wastes are present in AECOM offices, they should be properly managed, stored, and
disposed of in compliance with the applicable regulation and permitting requirements (e.g., United
States EPA – storage permit required if hazardous waste is to be stored in excess of 90 days
without having obtained regulator extension). The off-site disposal of hazardous waste from
AECOM offices shall be properly manifested and both the waste hauler and the disposal facility
shall be certified / permitted by the applicable environmental agencies.
4.3 Project Compliance
4.3.1 Obtaining Necessary Permits
4.3.1.1 Air Permits – If a project will result in emissions to the air, the project may require an air
permit. It is important to work closely with the client as the permit may need to be applied
for by the client.
4.3.1.2 Water Permits – For projects that involve discharges to receiving bodies of water (rivers,
streams, etc.), storm sewers and sanitary sewers, AECOM needs to work closely with our
clients to ensure all water related permits are obtained prior to start-up of the projects.
4.3.1.3 Waste Management and Waste Storage Permits – Federal, state, provincial and local
environmental agencies have many regulations related to proper waste management (i.e.
approval of spill containment plans, wastes placed in drums and containers must be
properly labeled, etc.). Ensure appropriate approvals and permits are in place where
required (i.e. British Columbia – approval of Operational Plan; United States – permit
required for hazardous wastes stored on sites longer than generator status allowances).
This may require working closely with the client to obtain required approvals and/or
permits.
4.3.1.4 For projects where a client is authorizing AECOM to manage their waste, AECOM
Employees must never sign a waste manifest indicating AECOM is the generator of the
waste unless approved to do so by AECOM Legal Counsel and Americas Office of Risk
Management.

Environmental Compliance (S3AM-204-PR1) Revision 3 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 5 of 8
4.3.2 Incident Reporting – Employees must promptly report to the client and work closely with the client
in reporting to regulatory agencies any spills or releases into the environment. This includes:
discharges of contaminated groundwater to a sanitary sewer or storm water sewer system unless
authorized by the regulatory agencies involved to do so; spills of oil, petroleum products, or other
chemicals to the ground or water bodies; and any release of hazardous substances in amounts
greater than their “reportable quantities” –as defined by regulations. Employees must also report
these incidents into AECOM’s incident reporting system.
4.3.3 Laboratory Operations – Where AECOM has laboratory operations, the disposal of laboratory
chemicals into laboratory drains is not allowed. Water discharges from laboratory operations must
meet applicable environmental legal requirements.
4.3.4 Asbestos Management – There are many regulations governing asbestos management.
Regulations may include implementing an Asbestos Management Plan; providing notice to air and
other regulatory agencies relating to demolition or asbestos abatement plans within the specified
timelines prior to the start of any abatement operations; and the abatement and disposal of
asbestos. Refer to S3AM-109-PR1 Asbestos.
4.3.5 Environmental Management Plan (EMP) or equivalent – Documented at the site/office and project
level, to ensure proper planning of operations with respect to the environment (as determined by
the aspects and impacts assessment). Refer to S3AM-204-ATT3 Environmental Management Plan
(Sample).
 Initial steps in developing the EMP include assessing environmental impacts of the activities,
products or services to be undertaken. Refer to S3AM-204-ATT2 Aspects and Environmental
Impacts Assessment as a guideline. This completed assessment may be included in the EMP.
 As required, each office / project must identify and document applicable environmental
regulatory requirements in their EMP, or equivalent.
o It is advisable to develop a Compliance Map for those projects where AECOM is a permit
holder or where AECOM is operating under a client’s permit. Compliance maps can
indicate the applicable actions, limits, records retention requirements, and applicable
submittals to ensure compliance with applicable environmental legal requirements.
o Refer to S3AM-204-ATT1 Environmental Compliance Maps for examples of Compliance
Maps.
 EMP (or equivalent) shall include documented procedures for conducting any activities that
could have a significant environmental impact (e.g., requirements to maintain segregation of
hazardous wastes from other wastes, disposal requirements, remodeling activities, laboratory
operations, etc.).
o If AECOM is responsible for selecting the waste disposal site/facility, the identified disposal
site/facility shall meet regulatory requirements of the applicable jurisdiction.
 EMP shall identify required records management with respect to any environmental-related
monitoring equipment (e.g., tank monitoring equipment, pH meters used prior to discharge to
sanitary sewers, etc.).
 As applicable, the EMP, or equivalent, shall include procedures for identification of significant
environmental aspects of goods and services used by AECOM (e.g., office supplies, utilities,
subcontractors, commuting, and project- and overhead-related travel).
 If customer, client, or facility owner EMP fully encompasses AECOM operations, it is not
necessary to create an AECOM - specific EMP.
 If not already included in SH&E Plans and Emergency Response plans, the EMP or equivalent
shall include procedures to identify the potential for and response to upsets, incidents, and
emergency situations. These plans also include procedures for preventing and mitigating the
negative impacts of any emergencies.
 EMP (or equivalent) shall include provisions for a commitment to conduct (at least annually) an

Environmental Compliance (S3AM-204-PR1) Revision 3 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 6 of 8
evaluation of compliance with relevant environmental legislation, as well as opportunities for
improvements.
 As applicable, EMP (or equivalent) shall identify opportunities and procedures to prevent and
reduce the generation of waste, as well as recycle or reuse waste, both in the execution of
activities or services and in the procurement of goods and services used by AECOM.
 S3AM-204-ATT3 Environmental Management Plan may be used as a template to prepare an
EMP.
4.3.6 Releases/Spills – Where the possibility of an environmental release exists due to AECOM
activities, the Reportable Quantity for regulated substances must be identified prior to the start of
work. Any release or spill must be immediately reported to the client and depending on the material
and quantity of material released or spilled, reported to regulatory agencies.
4.3.7 Subject Matter Experts – When necessary, project teams will consult with Subject Matter Experts to
identify the necessary permitting/licensing and/or applicable regulations governing the planned
scope of work. Example guiding questions that project teams may use to initially assess their
project’s environmental compliance needs include, but are not limited to:
 Will AECOM’s activities have the potential to discharge any hazardous or other regulated
chemicals/materials to the air?
 Is there any equipment on site that has an air permit or similar regulatory requirement
governing air discharges to the environment? Note: This should include client-owned
equipment that AECOM will operate and have contractual regulatory liability for during the
planned scope of work.
 Will AECOM manage characteristic or listed hazardous waste for the client?
 Will AECOM activities generate nonhazardous, universal, or hazardous waste subject to
requirements?
 Is this a site or facility where AECOM will perform activities under the Resource Conservation
and Recovery Act (RCRA – United States), Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA –
Canada), a Consent Order or any other applicable jurisdictional regulatory body?
 Is the site or facility a hazardous waste generator (e.g., large quantity, small quantity, or very
small quantity)?
 Will AECOM be required to select a waste disposal facility?
 What oil storage capacity does the site or facility have (count containers/equipment with
capacities of 55 gal or greater)?
 Will AECOM’s activities create a discharge into a surface water body?
 Will AECOM’s activities disturb ≥ 1 acre of land surface area?
 Will AECOM’s activities physically disturb or impact a wetland?
4.4 Environmental Compliance Assessments
4.4.1 AECOM will periodically assess its operations (offices and project sites) and activities to verify
ongoing activities comply with applicable environmental legal requirements. Assessments shall be
conducted, as a minimum, on an annual basis. The frequency of these documented environmental
compliance assessments should be based on the complexity of the project/size of the office and
the associated environmental compliance risks to AECOM.
4.4.2 The Managers (Operations) or Project/Location Managers will conduct the assessment or
designate a qualified individual to conduct the assessment.
4.4.3 The environmental compliance assessment, refer to S3AM-204-FM1 Office/Project Environmental
Compliance Assessment Checklist, will provide information to AECOM management on the

Environmental Compliance (S3AM-204-PR1) Revision 3 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 7 of 8
environmental compliance performance of specific operations.
4.4.4 The assessment can be combined into a periodic, comprehensive audit; typically, a business
systems audit incorporating quality assurance, health and safety, and environmental components.
4.5 Environmental Incident or Non-Compliance
4.5.1 Should an assessment identify non-compliance issues or an environmental incident occurs, the
severity level must be assessed for appropriate response. Refer to S3AM-004-PR1 Incident
Reporting, Notifications & Investigation. Ensure the parties appropriate to the severity are
contacted and involved with issue resolution (e.g., Legal Counsel).
4.5.2 If a regulatory Notice of Violation (NOV) is received by an AECOM facility or project, Legal Counsel
shall be contacted and involved with issue resolution.
4.5.3 The issue or incident must be investigated and will be documented and tracked. Refer to S3AM-
004-PR1 Incident Reporting, Notifications & Investigation. The documented investigation must:
 Identify the cause (root cause).
 Identify corrective actions.
 Assign responsibility to implement or modify controls to prevent reoccurrences and establish
scheduled date of completion.
 Identify methods to inform impacted staff of any revisions to written procedures.
4.5.4 The documentation must be reviewed for actual completion and effectiveness of controls.
4.5.5 Document, review, and communicate appropriate lessons learned for incidents and near misses
(including environmental).
5.0 Records
5.1 Comply with S3AM-017-PR1 Injury & Illness Recordkeeping requirements.
5.2 Maintain or keep accessible the following additional records/documentation:
5.2.1 Relevant laws and regulations (may be accessed via the web).
5.2.2 Facility and project non-compliance records.
5.2.3 Training records (maintained at the facility level, with the exception of modules tracked in
computer-based training).
5.2.4 Required equipment inspections, waste storage area inspections, maintenance, and calibration
information (in accordance with site EMP).
5.2.5 Relevant contractor/supplier information (in accordance with the site EMP or project-specific waste
management plans) with respect to waste disposal vendors, transportation companies, etc.
5.2.6 Agency citations/Notice of Violations and any supporting information.
5.2.7 Information on emergency preparation and response.
5.2.8 Copies of Environmental Aspect and Impact Assessments (maintained by the safety representative
for office locations or in the project files for project-related assessments). Refer to S3AM-204-ATT2
Aspects and Environmental Impacts Assessment.
5.2.9 Completed Compliance Assessment checklists and audit results.
6.0 Attachments
6.1 S3AM-204-FM1 Office/Project Environmental Compliance Assessment Checklist
6.2 S3AM-204-ATT1 Environmental Compliance Maps

Environmental Compliance (S3AM-204-PR1) Revision 3 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 8 of 8
6.3 S3AM-204-ATT2 Aspects and Environmental Impacts Assessment
6.4 S3AM-204-ATT3 Environmental Management Plan (Sample)

Subcontractor Management (S3AM-213-PR1)
Revision 3 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 1 of 4
Americas
Subcontractor Management S3AM-213-PR1
1.0 Purpose and Scope
This procedure applies to all AECOM Americas based employees and operations. 1.1
A subcontractor is considered a person or business which has a contract (and is not an employee) with 1.2
AECOM to provide some portion of the work or services on a project which the contractor has agreed to
perform. This procedure is applicable to the operations of subcontractors and sub-subcontractors of any
tier.
This procedure does not apply to vendors. For the purposes of this procedure, a vendor is a service 1.3
provider and, is a person or business which performs services. Examples of a vendor could be a food
machine vendor supplier for a site canteen; a portable toilet delivery company; an office equipment
repair service; etc.
This procedure does not apply to third-party contractor operations where there is no subcontract 1.4
relationship between the contractor and AECOM. Safety issues regarding third-party contractor
operations are governed by project-specific contracts, and are not covered by this procedure.
This procedure provides requirements on the evaluation of subcontractor safety, health, and 1.5
environmental programs; contractual risk management; subcontractor safety performance on the job site;
and the responsibilities of the Manager with respect to subcontractor jobsite performance.
Each AECOM subcontractor must be evaluated at least annually using S3AM-213-FM1 Subcontractor 1.6
SH&E Evaluation Form, or equivalent process (e.g., third-party qualification vendor, internal pre-
qualification databases), in order to perform work on any AECOM projects.
2.0 Terms and Definitions
Subcontractor - For the purposes of this procedure, a person or business which has a contract directly 2.1
with AECOM to provide work or services related to AECOM or client work scopes beyond delivery or
basic repairs. Examples of a subcontractor could be an engineer; a sign installer; a welding company; an
office renovation company; etc. A person or business with a contract directly with AECOM that does not
fall clearly within this definition may also be required by the applicable business group to comply with this
procedure.
3.0 References
S3AM-015-PR1 Short Service Employees 3.1
4.0 Procedure
Implementation of this procedure is the responsibility of the AECOM manager (Manager) directing 4.1
activities of the facility, site, or project location.
Subcontractors must be competent and capable to perform their activities in a safe, healthful, and 4.2
environmentally responsible manner.
Pre-qualification of Subcontractor – The Manager will complete the following for all subcontractors 4.3
proposed for projects covered by this procedure unless an equivalent process (e.g., third-party
prequalification vendor, internal pre-qualification databases and procurement processes, etc.) is used.
The Manager shall also require subcontractors to follow these procedures with respect to pre-
qualification of sub-subcontractors of any tier.

Subcontractor Management (S3AM-213-PR1)
Revision 3 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 2 of 4
4.3.1 Request all subcontractor candidates to complete the attached S3AM-213-FM1 Subcontractor
SH&E Evaluation Form or equivalent (e.g., third-party prequalification vendors, internal pre-
qualification databases).
4.3.2 Conduct an assessment of each subcontractor’s qualifications with respect to the Subcontractor
Evaluation Criteria contained in S3AM-213-ATT1 Subcontractor Evaluation Criteria.
4.3.3 If the subcontractor does not meet criteria outlined in S3AM-213-ATT1 Subcontractor Evaluation
Criteria, the decision will be that the subcontractor will not be used. However, if a unique business
need exists (e.g., subcontractor is a specialty subcontractor, lowest or only bid, client required,
small business/minority set asides), the Manager should initiate S3AM-213-FM2 Subcontractor
Variance Form (or equivalent vendor/database approval).
4.3.4 If the subcontractor has been successfully evaluated within the last 12 months, that evaluation may
be substituted.
4.3.5 For long-term operations, update this evaluation within 12 months of the previous evaluation.
Contractual and Risk Management Requirements of Subcontractors 4.4
4.4.1 Ensure that the subcontractor is contractually bound to comply with applicable client and AECOM
SH&E Program requirements (e.g. alcohol and drug policies, procedures, insurance, licenses,
registrations, etc.).
4.4.2 Ensure that subcontractor develops additional safety procedures for work that is exclusive to their
activities on the site, and for which they may have superior knowledge.
4.4.3 Ensure that AECOM has the right in its subcontract, without liability to AECOM, to stop the
subcontractor’s work in the event of any violations of the applicable safety requirements.
4.4.4 Managers shall require subcontractors to follow pre-qualification procedures for lower-tiered
subcontractors.
Subcontractor Safety Representative 4.5
4.5.1 Require each subcontractor to appoint a Subcontractor Safety Representative (SSR) who:
• Is knowledgeable of the subcontractor’s activities.
• Understands the safety requirements of the subcontractor’s activities.
• Has the ability to recognize and the authority to correct safety deficiencies and execute a stop
work order should an imminent danger arise.
• Has the responsibility for the administration of the subcontractor safety program.
• Will serve as the direct contact with AECOM regarding resolution of SH&E issues
• Will report work-related injuries/illnesses/incidents, environmental incidents and regulatory
inspections/violations to AECOM according to AECOM procedures and/or client requirements.
Communication 4.6
4.6.1 Provide the SSR with information regarding site safety program including but not limited to:
• Client Requirements
• AECOM SH&E Program
• Site Hazard Communication Program
• Site Emergency Plan
• Any additional safety information from other contractors or subcontractors working on the site.

Subcontractor Management (S3AM-213-PR1)
Revision 3 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 3 of 4
4.6.2 Require the participation of subcontractors in site safety briefings including, and as applicable,
orientations, project kick-off meetings, hazard assessments, inspections, tailgate / toolbox
meetings, and post-job meetings.
4.6.3 Require subcontractor compliance with all safety directives and/or stop work orders issued by the
AECOM representatives.
4.6.4 Require the subcontractor to notify the AECOM manager when they will utilize short service
employees (SSE) to perform on-site activities. The AECOM manager must approve the use of any
SSE by the subcontractor prior to mobilization. Site management will interact with the short service
employee to verify their level of competency and manage the SSE in accordance with S3AM-015-
PR1 Short Service Employees.
4.6.5 Prior to the start of work, roles, responsibilities, communication chain-of-command, and emergency
preparedness procedures will be established.
Subcontractor Performance 4.7
4.7.1 To the extent reasonable in light of AECOM’s scope of work under the client contract, the AECOM
Manager (or designee) should visit the site and periodically observe subcontractor’s operations
(e.g., conduct spot checks) to assess whether subcontractor appears to be conducting their
operations in accordance with applicable safety requirements. Periodically review any required
subcontractor health and safety performance and written documentation for compliance with
applicable requirements. S3AM-213-FM4 Subcontractor SH&E Data Submission may be used to
obtain monthly SH&E metrics from the subcontractor.
4.7.2 Information shall be compiled and subcontractor performance assessment should be documented
using S3AM-FM3 Subcontractor SH&E Performance Assessment or equivalent.
4.7.3 In the event that unsafe acts or unsafe conditions are observed, immediately stop work, and bring
them to the attention of the SSR for resolution.
4.7.4 The AECOM Manager shall ensure incidents and significant near misses related to subcontractor
operations are investigated to identify causes and corrective actions.
4.7.5 In the event of serious and/or continuing subcontractor breaches of applicable requirements,
contact legal counsel to assess whether formal contractual action is appropriate under the
subcontract.
4.7.6 Once a job is completed, a subcontractor’s performance should be reviewed and feedback
provided to subcontractor management. This should be documented using S3AM-FM3
Subcontractor SH&E Performance Assessment or equivalent.
5.0 Records
The following documentation will be maintained in the project file:
S3AM-213-FM1 Subcontractor SH&E Evaluation Form or equivalent. 5.1
S3AM-213-FM2 Subcontractor Variance Form or equivalent, if applicable. 5.2
S3AM-213-FM3 Subcontractor SH&E Performance Assessment or equivalent. 5.3
S3AM-213-FM4 Subcontractor SH&E Data Submission, if applicable. 5.4
Identified safety deficiencies as applicable for subcontractors and verification of correction of conditions. 5.5
All other safety-related subcontractor documentation (e.g., training certifications, incident reports, etc. 5.6
6.0 Attachments
S3AM-213-ATT1 Subcontractor Evaluation Criteria 6.1

Subcontractor Management (S3AM-213-PR1)
Revision 3 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 4 of 4
S3AM-213-FM1 Subcontractor SH&E Evaluation Form 6.2
S3AM-213-FM2 Subcontractor Variance Form 6.3
S3AM-213-FM3 Subcontractor SH&E Performance Assessment 6.4
S3AM-213-FM4 Subcontractor SH&E Data Submission 6.5

Wildlife, Plants & Insects (S3AM-313-PR1) Revision 4 December 15, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 1 of 10
Americas
Wildlife, Plants & Insects S3AM-313-PR1
1.0 Purpose and Scope
1.1 Communicates the requirements and precautions to be taken by AECOM employees to protect against the
biological hazards associated with insects, arachnids, snakes, poisonous plants, and other animals referred
to herein collectively as “biological hazards”.
1.2 This procedure applies to all AECOM Americas-based employees and operations.
2.0 Terms and Definitions
2.1 Field Work – Any activity conducted at a site that contains brush, overgrown grass, leaf litter, poisonous
plants, or is located near mosquito breeding areas and includes work in structures where animals might exist
that harbor fleas or ticks or where spiders and mites could be present. Field work includes, but is not limited
to, Phase I, Phase II, Operations Monitoring & Maintenance, biological surveys, and other work that meets
the definition of field work.
2.2 Poisonous – Capable of harming or killing by or as if by poison; toxic or venomous.
2.3 Phase I Environmental Site Assessment – Investigation of real property to determine the possibility of
contamination, based on visual observation and property history, but no physical testing. Under new
Environmental Protection Agency regulations that went into effect on November 1, 2006, a Phase I, as it is
called for short, will be mandatory for all investors who wish to take advantage of Comprehensive
Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act defenses that will shield them from liability for
future cleanup, should that prove necessary. The new Phase I rules, called “All Appropriate Inquiry” or AAI,
also require more investigation than previously mandated. Investors can expect to see dramatic price
increases over prior experiences.
2.4 Phase II Environmental Site Assessment – Investigation of real property through physical samplings and
analyses to determine the nature and extent of contamination and, if indicated, a description of the
recommended remediation method.
3.0 References
3.1 RS2-001-PR1 Firearms Standard
3.2 S3AM-004-PR1 Incident Reporting, Notifications & Investigation
3.3 S3AM-008-PR1 Fitness for Duty
3.4 S3AM-113-PR1 Heat Stress
3.5 S3AM-208-PR1 Personal Protective Equipment
3.6 S3AM-209-PR1 Risk Assessment & Management
4.0 Procedure
4.1 Roles and Responsibilities
4.1.1 Managers / Supervisors
 Responsible for managing field work.
 Work with employees to see that a Task Hazard Analysis (THA) for the work to be conducted
has been performed prior to the beginning of the field work and that it includes an assessment
of potential biological hazards.

Wildlife, Plants & Insects (S3AM-313-PR1) Revision 4 December 15, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 2 of 10
 Implement control measures at the location to reduce the potential for employees to be
exposed to injuries and illnesses from biological hazards while working.
 If the exposures cannot be eliminated or managed with engineering controls, approve the use
and cost of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and protective repellents and lotions and
confirm that exposed employees have and use these products.
4.1.2 SH&E Manager
 Confirm training and guidance is provided to employees consistent with this procedure.
 During the performance of site visits, assess the precautions being taken against biological
hazards for compliance with this procedure.
 Assist AECOM personnel in identifying hazards and selecting appropriate control measures.
 As applicable, review and approve relevant SH&E Plans for locations that have biological
hazards.
4.1.3 Employees
 Participate in required training related this procedure.
 Participate in the development of THAs for the task, identify control measures to limit exposure
and request PPE, repellents, and protective lotions identified by this procedure.
 Update the applicable THA when a new, unaccounted for biological hazard is identified.
Employee shall stop work to identify appropriate elimination or control measures (and obtain
any necessary guidance) before continuing work.
 Obtain approval from Managers and/or Supervisors to purchase selected PPE prior to
purchasing.
 Implement the precautions appropriate to prevent exposure to the hazardous wildlife, insects
and plants.
 Observe requirements for reporting (e.g. tick bites, skin irritations, etc.) as detailed within the
procedure and attachments.
4.2 Training
4.2.1 Employees shall be trained to recognize organisms that represent a threat in the regions in which
they work – experienced field staff shall provide on the job training to assist staff with hazard
recognition.
4.2.2 Employees shall be properly trained to the anticipated tasks and the associated required PPE.
4.3 Overview
4.3.1 The procedures discussed below are detailed because these hazards have historically posed the
most significant risk to AECOM employees. Note that this discussion is not a fully encompassing
list of hazards. As part of the SH&E Plan and THA developed by the AECOM personnel, in
accordance with S3AM-209-PR1 Risk Assessment & Management, additional consideration shall
be given to other biological hazards.
4.3.2 Departments of Public Health local to the worksite, as well as the Centers for Disease Control
(CDC) can serve as a resource for identifying biological hazards not discussed in this procedure.
4.3.3 If additional biological hazards are identified, employees should stop work and contact the SH&E
Manager to discuss the hazards and identify effective control measures. Those control measures
shall be implemented at the location prior to restarting work.
4.4 Employee Sensitivity
4.4.1 Sensitivity to toxins generated by plants, insects and animals varies according to dosage and the
ability of the victim to process the toxin; therefore, it is difficult to predict whether a reaction will

Wildlife, Plants & Insects (S3AM-313-PR1) Revision 4 December 15, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 3 of 10
occur, or how severe the reaction will be. Employees should be aware that there are a large
number of organisms capable of causing serious irritations and allergic reactions. Some reactions
will only erupt if a secondary exposure to sunlight occurs. Depending on the severity of the
reaction, the result can be severe scarring, blindness or even death.
4.4.2 Employees also need to consider whether they are sensitive to the use of insect repellents.
4.5 Planning and Hazard Assessment
4.5.1 AECOM personnel shall confirm that the potential for exposure to specific biological hazards are
assessed prior to the commencement of work and that the procedures specified by this procedure
are integrated into the THA planning process and conveyed to employees conducting the field
work. This information shall be communicated in the location-specific SH&E plan, the THA, pre-
project kickoff meetings, and tailgate meetings at the location.
4.5.2 It is important to note that the precautions to be taken by employees to decrease the risk of
exposure to biological hazards can directly increase the risk of heat-related illness due to thermal
stresses. Therefore, heat stress monitoring and precautions shall be included as a critical
component of the task-specific THA in accordance with S3AM-511-PR1 Heat Stress.
4.5.3 During the preparation of the location-specific SH&E plan and task specific THA, Managers,
Supervisors, and employees shall determine what biological hazards might be encountered during
the task or operations and shall prescribe the precautions to be taken to reduce the potential for
exposure and the severity of resulting illnesses. Consideration will be given to conditions such as
weather, proximity to breeding areas, host animals, and published information discussing the
presence of the hazards.
4.5.4 It should be assumed that at least one of the biological hazards exists whenever working on
undeveloped property. This can include insect activity any time that local temperatures exceed 40
degrees Fahrenheit (4.5 degrees Celsius) for a period of more than 24 hours. The stubble and
roots of poisonous plants can be a hazard any time of year, including when some plants are
dormant or mown.
4.5.5 The hazard assessments shall also consider the additional hazards posed by vegetative clearing
such as the increased risk of coming in contact with poison ivy, oak or sumac and hazards
associated with the use of tools and equipment to remove vegetation.
4.5.6 Employees in the field where biological hazards exist shall not enter the hazard areas unless they
are wearing the appropriate protective clothing, repellents, and barrier creams specified below. If
the hazard is recognized in the field but was not adequately assessed during the THA, the field
staff shall stop work and not proceed until the THA has been amended and approved and
protective measures implemented.
4.5.7 Employees who have severe allergic reactions are strongly recommended to notify their Manager,
field Supervisor and co-workers of the potential for a reaction and demonstrate what medication
they might need, where they keep it and how it is administered.
4.5.8 A decision flow chart and table for determining the potential for biological hazards in the Americas
has been provided in S3AM-313-ATT1 Biological Hazard Assessment Flow Chart.
4.5.9 Restrictions:
 No firearms or weapons are allowed to be used without express permission by the Region
Executive and Chief Resilience Officer, refer to the RS2-001-PR1 Firearms Standard.
 No weapons related work shall occur without an assessment that includes appropriate hazard
control measures and training.
 Staff with life-threatening reactions shall not undertake work in areas infested with the allergen
(e.g., wasps, poison ivy), unless precautions are met which satisfy a medical practitioner’s
requirements. Refer to S3AM-008-PR1 Fitness for Duty.
4.5.10 Precautions

Wildlife, Plants & Insects (S3AM-313-PR1) Revision 4 December 15, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 4 of 10
 Be aware of the potential irritants in your area and know how to recognize them.
 Modify activities to avoid encounters (diurnal rhythms, seasonal rhythms).
 Avoid wearing perfume and cologne and strong smelling deodorants, lotions, soaps, and
shampoos.
 When working in areas where there may be small insects that “hitchhike” (e.g., ticks, spiders,
scorpions), it is recommended that clothes are turned inside out and shaken at the end of day;
do not wear same clothes two days in a row.
 Staff should always be aware of where they are placing their hands, or where they are sitting in
order to avoid contact with potential toxins. Avoid reaching into areas where visibility is limited.
4.6 Wildlife Hazards (Wild Animals, Reptiles and Birds)
4.6.1 Employees shall not work alone in areas where the risk of an encounter with dangerous wildlife is
high. Wildlife handling shall only be completed under direct supervision of an experienced
individual. Refer to the following work instructions for more specifics:
 S3AM-313-ATT13 Alligators
 S3AM-313-ATT9 Large Carnivores & Ungulates
 S3AM-313-ATT10 Bear Safety
 S3AM-313-ATT11 Small Mammals
 S3AM-313-ATT12 Snakes & Scorpions
4.7 Ticks, Spiders and other Insects
4.7.1 Insects for which precautionary measures should be taken include but are not limited to:
mosquitoes (potential carriers of disease aside from dermatitis), black flies, wasps, bees, ticks, fire
ants and European fire ants.
4.7.2 Employees with known allergies to insect stings should consult their personal physician for advice
on any immediate medications that they should carry with them. Epi-pens1 shall be carried at all
times in the field by employees who are aware that anaphylactic shock is a possibility for them
AECOM highly recommends that employees with known allergies inform their co-workers of the
allergy and the location of the medications they might carry for the allergy.
4.7.3 Habitat Avoidance, Elimination and/or Control
 The most effective method to manage worker safety and health is to eliminate, avoid and/or
control hazards. Clearing the location of brush, high grass and foliage reduces the potential for
exposure to biological hazards. Clearing will not eliminate the exposure to flying insects and
there might be an increased exposure to ticks and spiders during the clearing process.
 Projects such as subsurface environmental assessment or remediation are often candidates
for brush and overgrown grass to be cleared. In these instances, the Manager shall either
request that the client eliminate vegetation, or request approval from the client to have
vegetation clearing added to the scope of work.
o It should be noted that vegetation clearance may unintentionally serve to spread noxious
and poisonous plant materials around the site.
o As applicable, measures should be taken to prevent spread, such as but not limited to,
confirming equipment and materials are not placed on affected areas, and equipment is
decontaminated after use and before removal from site.

1 Epi-pens must be prescribed by a personal physician. Renew epi-pens on a regular schedule to ensure effectiveness and make sure your field companions know where it is and how to use it if you cannot self-administer the dose.

Wildlife, Plants & Insects (S3AM-313-PR1) Revision 4 December 15, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 5 of 10
 When work shall be conducted in areas that cannot or may not be cleared of foliage, personal
precautions and protective measures shall be prescribed.
 Mosquitoes breed in stagnant water and typically only travel a quarter mile (less than half a
kilometer) from their breeding site. Whenever possible, stagnant water should be drained to
eliminate breeding areas. Managers and client site managers should be contacted to
determine whether water can be drained and the most appropriate method for draining
containers, containment areas, and other objects of standing water.
 If water cannot be drained, products similar to Mosquito Dunks® can be placed in the water to
control mosquitoes. Once wet, the Mosquito Dunks® kill the immature, aquatic stage of the
mosquito. The active ingredient is a beneficial organism that is lethal to mosquito larvae, but
harmless to fish, humans, and other animals. Mosquito Dunks® provide long-term protection
for 30 days or more.
4.7.4 Ticks
 Ticks can be encountered when walking in tall grass or shrubs. They crawl up clothing
searching for exposed skin where they will attach themselves. The most serious concern is a
possibility of contracting a disease.
 Data from the CDC indicates that tick-borne diseases have become increasingly prevalent. At
the same time, tick repellents have become both safe and effective so it is possible to prevent
the vast majority of bites and, therefore, most related illnesses. The use of permethrin is
strongly advised.
 The most common and severe tick-borne illnesses in the U.S. are Lyme disease, Ehrlichiosis,
and Rocky Mountain spotted fever. A summary table listing CDC informational resources for
these diseases is provided in S3AM-313-ATT2 Ticks along with a listing of CDC information
resources and maps showing the distribution of common tick-borne diseases in the U.S.
 When working in areas where ticks may occur, it is recommended that clothes are turned
inside out and shaken at the end of day; do not wear the same clothes two days in a row.
 To remove ticks that are embedded in skin, utilize a tick key. Alternatively use tweezers or
fingers to carefully grasp the tick as close to the skin as possible and pull slowly upward,
avoiding twisting or crushing the tick. Do not try to burn or smother the tick. Cleanse the bite
area with soap and water, alcohol, or household antiseptic. Note the date and location of the
bite and save the tick in a secure container such as an empty pill vial or film canister. A bit of
moistened paper towel placed inside the container will keep ticks from drying out. Follow
AECOM incident reporting guidelines to report the tick bite within 4 hours and notify the
Manager or Supervisor.
 Familiarize yourself with the characteristic bulls-eye pattern of Lyme disease infection
surrounding the bite. If you notice this type of pattern or rash resulting from a tick bite,
immediately report the issue to your supervisor and follow the incident reporting requirements
for your business group.
 If you experience symptoms such as fever, headache, fatigue, and a skin rash, you should
immediately visit a medical practitioner as Lyme disease is treated easily with antibiotics in the
early stages, but can spread to the heart, joints, and nervous system if left untreated.
4.7.5 Chiggers
 Chiggers are mite larvae, approximately ½ millimeter in size, and typically invisible to the
naked eye. While chiggers are not known to carry infectious diseases, their bites and resulting
rashes and itching can lead to dermatitis and a secondary infection.
 Chiggers are typically active from the last hard freeze in the winter or spring to the first hard
freeze. They are active all year in the Gulf Coast and tropical areas.
4.7.6 Spiders

Wildlife, Plants & Insects (S3AM-313-PR1) Revision 4 December 15, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 6 of 10
 Spiders can be found in derelict buildings, sheltered areas, basements, storage areas, well
heads and even on open ground. Spiders can be found year round in sheltered areas and are
often present in well heads and valve boxes.
 Most spider bites produce wounds with localized inflammation and swelling. The Black Widow
and Brown Recluse spiders in the U.S. and others outside the U.S. inject a toxin that causes
extensive tissue damage and intense pain.
 Additional information on spider identification can be found in attachment S3AM-313-ATT3
Poisonous Spider Identification.
4.7.7 Mosquitoes
 When a mosquito bites, it injects an enzyme that breaks down blood capillaries and acts as an
anticoagulant. The enzymes induce an immune response in the host that results in itching and
local inflammation. The tendency to scratch the bite sites can lead to secondary infections.
 CDC data indicates that mosquito-borne illnesses, including the strains of encephalitis, are a
health risk. At least one of the Encephalitis strains listed below is known to exist in every area
of the U.S. and in many other countries as well:
o Eastern Equine encephalitis
o Western Equine encephalitis
o West Nile Virus
o St. Louis encephalitis
o La Crosse encephalitis
 Mosquitoes can transmit the West Nile Virus and other forms of encephalitis after becoming
infected by feeding on the blood of birds which carry the virus.
 Most people infected with the virus experience no symptoms or they have flu-like symptoms.
Sometimes though, the virus can cause severe illness, resulting in hospitalization and even
death, so proper precautions should be taken. Consult a medical practitioner if you suspect
you have West Nile Virus. Other diseases including Dengue Fever and Malaria are spread by
mosquitoes in the sub-tropic and tropical parts of the world. See S3AM-313-ATT4 Mosquito
Borne Diseases for information on the locations where mosquito borne diseases are known to
be present.
4.7.8 Bees, Wasps and Hornets
 Wasps and bees will cause a painful sting to anyone if they are harassed. They are of most
concern for individuals with allergic reactions who can go into anaphylactic shock. Also,
instances where an individual is exposed to multiple stings can cause a serious health concern
for anyone. These insects are most likely to sting when their hive or nest is threatened.
 Bees, hornets, and wasps may be found in derelict buildings, sheltered areas, behind covers
or lids and even on open ground. Other protective measures are not normally effective against
aggressive, flying insects. Be aware of the potential areas for these types of insects, approach
these locations cautiously. Avoid reaching into areas where visibility is limited.
 If you see a nest in the area you are working in stop work. Contact the Manager or Site
Supervisor for procedures to have the nest removed.
 If stung by a wasp, bee or hornet, notify a co-worker or someone who can help should you
have an allergic reaction. Stay calm and treat the area with ice or cold water. Follow AECOM
incident reporting guidelines to report the sting within 4 hours and notify the Manager or
Supervisor immediately. Seek medical attention if you have any reactions to the sting such as
developing a rash, excessive swelling or pain at the site of the bite or sting, or any swelling or
numbness beyond the site of the bite or sting.

Wildlife, Plants & Insects (S3AM-313-PR1) Revision 4 December 15, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 7 of 10
4.7.9 Fire Ants
 The fire ant (southern and western U.S.) and the European fire ant (northeastern U.S. and
eastern Canada) is often very abundant where it is established. It is very aggressive and
commonly climbs up clothing and stings unprovoked when it comes into contact with skin.
Painful irritations will persist for an hour or more.
4.7.10 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
 Chemically-treated field clothing, full-length clothing, or Tyvek® coveralls.
 Gloves shall also be worn consistent with the recommendations of the site-specific SWP
and/or THA to minimize hand exposure.
 Where ticks, chiggers, and spiders are presumed to exist, the Tyvek® or chemically treated
clothing will be taped to the work boots.
 See S3AM-313-ATT2 Ticks for configuration of clothing for protection against ticks and insects.
 Application of insect repellent to clothing and/or exposed skin. Oil of lemon eucalyptus, DEET,
and Permethrin have been recommended by the CDC for effective protection against
mosquitoes that may carry the West Nile virus and related diseases.
 Note that DEET will reduce the effectiveness of Fire Resistance Clothing (FRC) and should not
be applied to this clothing. If working in FRC, employees can use Permethrin as it has been
shown not to reduce the effectiveness of FRC. Permethrin will need to be applied to FRC well
in advance of the planned work. If permethrin is unavailable employees can apply DEET to
their skin and let dry prior to putting FRC on.
o Oil of Lemon Eucalyptus is a plant-based insect repellent on the market as Repel Lemon
Eucalyptus. The products have been proven to be effective against mosquitoes, deer
ticks, and no-see-ums for up to six hours. Derived from Oil of Lemon Eucalyptus, this non-
greasy lotion or spray has a pleasant scent and is not known to be toxic to humans. The
spray or lotions will be effective for approximately two to six hours and should be reapplied
every two hours to sustain protection. Lemon Eucalyptus products cannot be applied to
fire retardant clothing.
o Permethrin is an insecticide with repellent properties registered with the Environmental
Protection Agency and recommended by the CDC.
 Permethrin is highly effective in preventing tick bites when applied to clothing, but is
not effective when applied directly to the skin. Two options are available for
Permethrin treatment of clothing worn during field work: 1) pre-treatment of fabric by
the clothing manufacturer; or 2) manual treatment of their personal clothing using
Permethrin spray in accordance with recommendations manufacturers
recommendations. This will likely require treatment at home or the office prior to field
mobilization. Caution should be used when applying Permethrin as it is highly toxic to
fish and house cats. AECOM strongly recommends the first option (employees
obtaining pre-treated clothing) to avoid the time required, potential risk, and
housekeeping issues involved with manually treating the clothing with spray.
Purchase pre-treated clothing in accordance with S3AM-208-PR1 Personal Protective
Equipment and with the approval of your Supervisor or Manager.
 The Permethrin pre-treatment is odorless and retains its effectiveness for
approximately 25 washings. After 25 washings, the pre-treated clothing will be
considered no longer effective and removed from service. Clothing that has been
manually treated by employees will be considered effective for five wash cycles.
 Also, use of clothing that has been pre-treated with Permethrin offers a reduction in
the use and application of other insect repellents that shall be applied directly to the
skin. Supervisor or Manager approval is required prior to purchase.

Wildlife, Plants & Insects (S3AM-313-PR1) Revision 4 December 15, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 8 of 10
 If the employee opts not to utilize chemically pre-treated clothing while potentially
exposed to insects, spiders and/or ticks, they shall either: 1) wear Tyvek® coveralls
taped to the boots, or 2) wear full-length clothing consisting of long-legged pants and
long-sleeved shirts treated with an insect repellent containing Permethrin, DEET, or
an oil of lemon eucalyptus to their work clothing.
 Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for the repellents, lotions, and cleansers discussed in this
Procedure are not required because the repellents, lotion, and clothing are consumer
products used in the manner intended for the general public. Although not required, a
SDS should be obtained for the products used and placed into the office SDS library
and site-specific safety plan.
4.8 Poisonous Plants
4.8.1 Habitat Avoidance, Elimination and/or Control
 If poisonous plants are identified in the work area, employees will mark the plants using either
flags or marking paint, and discuss what the specific indicator will be to signal to other
employees to avoid the designated area. If employees decide to use ground-marking paint to
identify poisonous plants, they should discuss this tactic with the Manager (and Client as
appropriate) for approval.
 If removal of the plants is considered, it should be subcontracted to a professional landscaping
service that is capable and experienced in removing the plant. If herbicides are considered for
use, a discussion shall need to occur with the Manager (and Client as appropriate) to
determine whether it is acceptable to apply herbicides at the work site. Application of
herbicides may require a license.
 Employees shall not attempt to physically remove poisonous plants from the work area unless
a clearing procedure, including PPE, is prepared in advance and approved by the SH&E
Manager. The clearing procedure should be included in the SH&E Plan and THA and the
required PPE specified.
4.8.2 Poisonous plants that employees should recognize and take precautions to avoid include: poison
sumac, poison ivy (terrestrial and climbing), poison oak, giant hogweed2 (or giant cow parsnip), wild
parsnip, devil’s club and stinging nettle. Many others are extremely poisonous to eat (e.g., poison
hemlock; water parsnip) – do not eat anything that has not been identified. Refer to S3AM-313-
ATT5 Plants of Concern for information on locations where some of these poisonous plants are
found in the U.S.
 Of the toxic plants in the cashew family, poison ivy (Rhus radicans) is most widespread. It
grows in a variety of forms such as a low sprawling shrub, dense ground cover, or a thick
woody vine that grows high into the tree canopy. Poison oak (Rhus diversiloba) is typically a
low shrub in drier soils. Both of these plants have leaves of three and white berries. Poison
sumac (Rhus vernix) is a tall shrub that is less prolific in distribution. It grows in wet areas, has
a compound leaf with a red leaf stem (rachis), and white berries. All of these plants possess
urushiol oils in all parts of the plant. Touching the plant causes an itchy skin rash that can
show up within 4-72 hours following contact. People have a wide range of reactions including
swelling, itching, rash and bumps, patches or blisters.
 Uroshiol oil can also transfer onto clothing and equipment. The oil can remain active on
surfaces for up to 5 years and can be transferred to your skin.
 Wild parsnip is found throughout the U.S. and contains a poison that produces a rash similar to
poison oak and ivy. Unlike poison oak and ivy, the active oil will not be present on unbroken
leaves. See S3AM-313-ATT6 Wild Parsnip Identification for additional information and photos
of wild parsnip.

2 Phytodermatisi producer: keep skin covered and wash well after exposure

Wildlife, Plants & Insects (S3AM-313-PR1) Revision 4 December 15, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 9 of 10
 Several plants in the carrot family contain toxic sap that causes severe dermatitis if it comes
into contact with skin that is then exposed to sunlight. The most serious reaction is caused by
the giant hogweed (Heracleum mantegazzianum), a plant that is spreading in southern Ontario
and is also present in southwestern British Columbia. The plant is enormous, attaining up to 16
feet (5 meters) in height, which it does in one growing season. Contact causes painful
blistering that can cause permanent disfigurement. It is to be avoided. Similar but less serious
reactions can be caused by meadow parsnip (Pastinaca sativa) and cow parsnip (Heracleum
lanatum). Meadow parsnip can be very abundant on disturbed sites.
 Nettles, particularly stinging nettle (Urtica dioica) and wood nettle (Laportea canadensis)
contain urticating hairs on the leaves and stems that cause sharp pain or itchiness on contact
with skin. The irritation is immediate and normally lasts no more than an hour and there are no
lasting consequences.
 Some plants contain abundant stiff spines that can present a safety hazard, particularly if one
is to fall into them. These include the cactus (Opuntia spp.), devils club (Oplopanax horridum),
and prickly-ash (Zanthoxylon americanum).
4.8.3 A large number of plants are not harmful to touch but may contain poisonous berries or foliage that
could cause serious complications or death if they are ingested. It goes without saying to not eat
any berries or plants if you are unsure of their identity.
 Remember that in the fall and winter the hazard still exists in the form of stubble and roots.
4.8.4 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
 Employees conducting clearing, grubbing, or similarly disturbing work activities in areas where
poisonous plants exist shall wear long-sleeve clothing or Tyvek® coveralls, and disposable
cotton, leather or synthetic gloves. Employees shall not touch exposed skin (neck and face)
with potentially contaminated gloves. Tyvek® and gloves worn to protect from exposure to
poisonous plants shall be treated as contaminated, removed from the body in a manner that
the contamination is not spread, and placed in plastic bags for disposal.
 Personal clothing that has been exposed to poisonous plants shall be decontaminated with a
poisonous plant cleanser such as Tecnu® or removed in a careful manner, bagged and
washed separately from other clothing to remove urushiol.
 Work boots will be decontaminated with either soap and water or a cleansing agent such as
Tecnu® cleanser.
 If foliage is being cleared and includes poisonous plants, exposed skin shall be treated with a
dermal barrier cream such as Tecnu®’s Oak ‘n Ivy Armor or Enviroderm’s Ivy Block and either
a full-face respirator or a half-face respirator (with goggles) fitted with a P-100 (HEPA) dust
filter.
4.9 Bird Droppings and Biological Soil Hazards
4.9.1 Work in any area where pigeons or other flying animals (e.g. bats) may nest requires a written
statement from the client which states the potential for, and extent of, accumulation of excrement
on/in the structure from pigeons or other winged animals.
4.9.2 Substantial accumulations of droppings can pose physical and health risks as slippery surfaces (if
wet) and if the material is disturbed and becomes airborne, it can be inhaled or ingested if personal
hygiene practices are not implemented. Inhalation of airborne droppings can cause diseases such
as histoplasmosis. Exposure to surfaces with bird droppings shall be safeguarded by implementing
proper work practices, training employees for awareness and using PPE. See S3AM-313-ATT8
Bird Droppings.
4.9.3 Tularemia is a problem with contaminated soil in some locations. Tularemia is a disease of animals
and humans caused by the bacterium Francisella tularensis. Rabbits, hares, and rodents are
especially susceptible and often die in large numbers during outbreaks. Workers can contract
Tularemia through tick and deer fly bites, but also through inhalation of contaminated aerosols or

Wildlife, Plants & Insects (S3AM-313-PR1) Revision 4 December 15, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 10 of 10
agricultural dusts. Check work areas for carcasses before disturbing the ground (e.g. mowing,
brushing, grubbing, excavation, etc.).
4.10 Personal Hygiene and Body Checks
4.10.1 Tick-borne diseases typically require that the tick be imbedded for four hours to begin disease
transfer. The oils from poisonous plants can take up to 4 hours after exposure to penetrate the skin
and react with the live proteins under the skin.
4.10.2 It is recommended that exposed skin be checked frequently for the presence of ticks, insects,
rashes, or discolorations. External clothing should also be checked for the presence of ticks and
insects; these should be retained for identification and to determine if medical treatment is needed.
4.10.3 Employees shall shower as soon as practical after working in the field and examine their bodies for
the presence of ticks, insect bites, rashes, or swollen areas. If imbedded ticks are found, they
should be removed using the technique described in S3AM-313-ATT2 Ticks.
4.11 Employees shall immediately notify their Manager or Supervisor of the presence of an imbedded tick, bee,
wasp or hornet sting, other insect bite, rash, or any abnormal reaction. Reporting shall occur within 4 hours
for a significant incident and 24 hours for all other SH&E incidents, and in accordance with S3AM-004-PR
Incident Reporting, Notifications & Investigation.
4.12 The Manager or Supervisor shall forward the report to the SH&E Manager for follow up.
5.0 Records
None
6.0 Attachments
6.1 S3AM-313-ATT1 Biological Hazard Assessment Flow Chart
6.2 S3AM-313-ATT2 Ticks
6.3 S3AM-313-ATT3 Poisonous Spider Identification
6.4 S3AM-313-ATT4 Mosquito Borne Diseases
6.5 S3AM-313-ATT5 Plants of Concern
6.6 S3AM-313-ATT6 Wild Parsnip Identification
6.7 S3AM-313-ATT7 Alligators
6.8 S3AM-313-ATT8 Bird Droppings
6.9 S3AM-313-ATT9 Large Carnivores & Ungulates
6.10 S3AM-313-ATT10 Bear Safety
6.11 S3AM-313-ATT11 Small Mammals
6.12 S3AM-313-ATT12 Snakes & Scorpions

Hand Safety (S3AM-317-PR1)
Revision 0 March 1, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 1 of 5
Americas
Hand Safety S3AM-317-PR1
1.0 Purpose and Scope
This procedure applies to all AECOM Americas based employees and operations where the potential for 1.1
hand injuries is present.
This procedure is intended to protect employees from activities that may expose them to hand injury. This 1.2
procedure provides information on recognizing those conditions that require personal protective equipment
(PPE) or specific work practices to reduce the risk of hand injury.
All personnel shall have gloves in their immediate possession 100% of the time when in a shop or on a work 1.3
site. Appropriate gloves shall be worn when employees work with or near any materials or equipment that
present the potential for hand injury due to sharp edges, corrosives, flammable and irritating materials,
extreme temperatures, splinters, etc.
2.0 Terms and Definitions
None 2.1
3.0 References
S3AM-003-PR1 SH&E Training 3.1
S3AM-208-PR1 – Personal Protective Equipment 3.2
S3AM-209-PR1 – Risk Assessment & Management 3.3
S3AM-325-PR1 – Lockout Tagout 3.4
4.0 Procedure
Roles and Responsibilities 4.1
4.1.1 Manager / Supervisor
• Implementation of this standard for the applicable facility, site, or project location.
• Confirm employees are familiar with this procedure and have appropriate training.
• Confirm the appropriate hand protection is available on site as necessary.
4.1.2 Employees
• Recognize hazards to hands.
• Comply with this procedure as well as client or work location requirements.
4.1.3 SH&E Manager
• Advise supervisors and site personnel on matters relating to hand safety.
• Work with the manager / supervisor to confirm that sufficient PPE and equipment are available.
• Maintain contact with manager / supervisor to regularly evaluate site conditions and new
information that might require modifications to this procedure.
• Conduct training or briefings, when necessary, and to explain the content of this procedure and
site hazards to employees.
• Assist in investigation of incidents that resulted or could have resulted in an injury.

Hand Safety (S3AM-317-PR1)
Revision 0 March 1, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 2 of 5
Hazard Assessment 4.2
4.2.1 Perform hazard assessments for those work activities likely to require Personal Protective
Equipment (PPE).
• Use the Task Hazard Assessment (THA) to perform the hazard assessment (in accordance
with S3AM-209-PR1 Risk Assessment & Management). The THA will accompany AECOM
personnel at jobsites for use in the event of a job or task change, or
• Use the Gloves Needs Assessment – S3AM-317-FM1 or equivalent to perform the
assessment.
• Re-evaluate completed hazard assessments when the job or task changes.
4.2.2 The hierarchy of controls should be considered during the THA process to minimize or eliminate
the need for hand protection PPE or material handling tools. Examples of controls are chemical
substitution, machine guarding, and use of different tools.
4.2.3 Select PPE that will protect employees if hazards cannot be eliminated.
• Review Safety Data Sheets for project or task-specific chemicals to determine appropriate
PPE. If needed, consult with a SH&E Manager for assistance.
• Review glove manufacturer recommendations for both physical and chemical protection.
• Obtain gloves of the correct size for the employees.
• When both chemical and physical protection is of concern, wear the chemical protection gloves
(e.g., nitrile) inside the physical protection gloves (e.g., leather, Kevlar®).
• Nitrile gloves or equivalent chemical resistant shall always be used for protection from
hazardous fluids or non-corrosive chemicals.
• Do not wear metal or metal-reinforced gloves when working with electrical equipment or on
electrical services. Proper leather and/or rubber gloves designed and tested for this purpose
shall be used.
• Refer to S3AM-208-PR1 – Personal Protective Equipment for additional information.
4.2.4 Follow glove requirements in the applicable SH&E plan.
Guidelines for Working With and Around Equipment (Hand Tools, Portable Powered Equipment) 4.3
4.3.1 General
• As applicable, employees shall be trained in the use of all tools. Refer to S3AM-003-PR1
SH&E Training.
• Keep hand and power tools in good repair and use them only for the task for which they were
designed.
• Inspect tools before use and remove damaged or defective tools from service.
• Operate tools in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
• Do not remove or bypass a guarding device for any reason.
• Keep surfaces and handles clean and free of excess oil to prevent slipping.
• Do not carry sharp tools in pockets.
• Clean tools and return to the toolbox or storage area upon completion of a job.
• Confirm that the wrench is in full contact (fully seated, "flat", not tilted) with the nut or bolt
before applying pressure.

Hand Safety (S3AM-317-PR1)
Revision 0 March 1, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 3 of 5
o Place the body in the proper position for optimal balance and bracing to prevent falls if the
tool slips.
o Make sure hands and fingers have sufficient clearance in the event the tool slips.
o Whenever possible, pull on a wrench and avoid pushing.
• When working with tools overhead, place tools in a holding receptacle when not in use.
• Do not throw tools from place to place or from person to person, or drop tools from heights.
• Inspect all tools prior to start-up or use to identify any defects.
• Powered hand tools shall not be capable of being locked in the ON position.
• Require that all power-fastening devices be equipped with a safety interlock capable of
activation only when in contact with the work surface.
• Do not allow loose clothing, long hair, loose jewelry, rings, and chains to be worn while working
with power tools or rotating equipment.
• Do not increase the leverage by adding sleeved additions (e.g. a pipe or snipe) to increase tool
handle length.
• Make provisions to prevent machines from restarting through proper lockout/tagout (refer to
S3AM-325-PR1 – Lockout Tagout).
4.3.2 Cutting Tools
• Always use the specific tool designed for the task. Tubing cutters, snips, self-retracting knives,
concealed blade cutters, and related tools are task specific and minimize the risk of hand
injury. For more information about cutting tools, see S3AM-317-ATT1 Safe Alternative Tools.
• Fixed open-blade knives (FOBK) are prohibited from use during the course of AECOM work.
o Examples of fixed open-blade knives include pocket knives, multi-tools, hunting knives,
and standard utility knives.
o Any exception to this requirement shall require approval of the Manager / Supervisor and
SH&E Manager.
• When utilizing cutting tools, personnel will observe the following precautions to the fullest
extent possible:
o Use the correct tool and correct size tool for the job.
o Cut in a direction away from yourself and not toward other workers in the area.
o Maintain the noncutting hand and arm toward the body and out of the direction of the
cutting tool if it were to slip out of the material being cut.
o Ensure that the tool is sharp and clean; dirty and dull tools typically cause poor cuts and
more hazard than a sharp, clean cutting tool.
o Store these tools correctly with covers in place or blades retracted, as provided by the
manufacturer.
o On tasks where cutting may be very frequent or last all day (e.g., liner samples), consider
Kevlar® gloves in the PPE evaluation for the project.
o Do not remove guards on paper cutters.
o In office locations, paper cutters must always be kept in a locked position when not in use.
4.3.3 Moving/Rotating Equipment
• General Requirements for Rotating Equipment (feed augers, chippers, conveyors, etc.)
o Never place hands, fingers, or extremities near hoppers and operational areas of
machinery.

Hand Safety (S3AM-317-PR1)
Revision 0 March 1, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 4 of 5
o When the equipment is rotating, stay clear of the rotating components and only operate
equipment with proper machine guarding in place.
o Never clean a jammed piece of equipment unless the transmission is in neutral and the
power source or the engine is off, locked out, and the moving parts of the equipment have
stopped rotating. Refer to S3AM-325-PR1 – Lockout Tagout.
4.3.4 Other Physical Hazards
• Activities such as drum handling, fencing, work near razor wire, manhole cover removal, and
demolition also pose hazards to hands. Use tools instead of hands for high hazard tasks
whenever possible.
• Plan work to avoid pinch points for hands when moving drums, moving manhole covers into
position, and handling other heavy objects.
• Work handling scrap metal, glass or other sharp edges requires proper hand PPE (Kevlar® or
leather gloves).
• Activities involving hoisting, lifting and landing of a load shall be done “hands-free” when
possible. Refer to S3AM-317-ATT2 – Safe Hands-Free Lifting Guidelines.
Ergonomics – Hand and Wrist Care 4.4
4.4.1 Keep your wrist in neutral. Avoid using your wrist in a bent (flexed), extended, or twisted position
for long periods of time. Instead try to maintain a neutral (straight) wrist position. Ergonomic tools
may be needed for long-term work.
4.4.2 Watch your grip. Gripping, grasping, or lifting with the thumb and index finger can put stress on
your wrist. When practical, use the whole hand and all the fingers to grasp an object.
4.4.3 Minimize repetition. Even simple, light tasks may eventually cause injury. If possible, avoid
repetitive movements or holding an object in the same way for extended periods of time.
4.4.4 Reduce speed and force. Reducing the speed with which you do a forceful, repetitive movement
gives your wrist time to recover from the effort. Using power tools helps reduce the force.
4.4.5 Rest your hands. Periodically give your hands a break by letting them rest briefly. Or you may be
able to alternate easy and hard tasks, switch hands, or rotate work activities.
4.4.6 Consider low vibration or anti- vibration hand power tools when possible.
Cleaning Hands 4.5
4.5.1 Avoid contamination of hands by proper use of gloves when contact with physical, chemical, or
biological hazards is possible.
4.5.2 Use soap and water for normal hand cleaning. Do not use solvents for cleaning as they remove
essential oils in the skin and may cause dermatitis. Do not use pressure washers for hand
cleaning.
4.5.3 If the hands contact a corrosive (e.g., nitric acid), wash the area with water for fifteen minutes and
then seek medical attention.
4.5.4 Use antibiotic ointment and skin protection on minor breaks/scratches of the skin.
4.5.5 In some cases barrier creams may be used to provide limited protection for hands exposed to
greases and oils.
Safe Hands Observation Tool 4.6
4.6.1 The Safe Hand Task Review Card S3AM-317-FM2 may be used to supplement and reinforce safe
work practices and the requirements of this procedure.
4.6.2 The observer’s responsibilities include:

Hand Safety (S3AM-317-PR1)
Revision 0 March 1, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 5 of 5
• Two-way conversation with the employees being observed.
• Completing the card and mark the applicable fields on the back of the card.
• Submitting the completed cards to the supervisor.
4.6.3 The supervisor’s responsibilities include:
• Reviewing the completed cards.
• Identifying best work practices and any improvements.
• Communicating any changes back the employee(s).
5.0 Records
The following documentation will be maintained:
Hand tool training records, as applicable. 5.1
6.0 Attachments
S3AM-317-FM1 Glove Needs Assessment 6.1
S3AM-317-FM2 Safe Hands Task Review Card 6.2
S3AM-317-ATT1 Safe Alternative Tools 6.3
S3AM-317-ATT2 Safe Hands-Free Lifting Guidelines 6.4

Drilling, Boring, & Direct Push Probing (S3AM-321-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 1 of 12
Americas
Drilling, Boring & Direct Push Probing S3AM-321-PR1
1.0 Purpose and Scope
1.1 This document provides procedures designed to help prevent injuries to personnel working on the project
and pedestrians, property damage, and adverse environmental impact as a result of potential hazards
associated with drilling, boring and direct-push probing. These hazards include, but are not limited to,
encountering underground utilities, subsurface installations, rotating equipment and potential overhead
hazards.
1.2 This procedure provides the minimum requirements to be followed when drilling, boring, and probing work
are performed.
1.3 This procedure applies to all Americas-based employees and operations.
1.4 The Manager is responsible for meeting all the requirements in this procedure.
1.5 AECOM’s clients may have specific procedures which shall be followed to identify and map utility and
subsurface structures on their properties or facilities. Provided the client’s procedures meet or exceed those
of AECOM, approval shall be obtained from the Manager and the SH&E Manager to follow the client’s
procedures.
2.0 Terms and Definitions
2.1 Underground Utilities – All utility systems located beneath grade level, including, but not limited to, gas,
electrical, water, compressed air, sewage, signaling, and communications, etc.
2.2 Ground Disturbance (GD) – Any indentation, interruption, intrusion, excavation, construction, or other
activity in the earth’s surface as a result of work that results in the penetration of the ground.
2.3 Intrusive Activities – Examples: Excavation of soil borings, installations of monitoring wells, installation of
soil gas sampling probes, excavation of test pits / trenches or other man-made cuts, cavity, trench, or
depression in an earth surface formed by earth removal.
2.4 Subsurface Installations – Examples: Subterranean tunnels, underground parking garages, and other
structures beneath the surface.
3.0 References
3.1 S3AM-003-PR1 SH&E Training
3.2 S3AM-118-PR1 Hearing Conservation
3.3 S3AM-208-PR1 Personal Protection Equipment
3.4 S3AM-209-PR1 Risk Assessment & Management
3.5 S3AM-213-PR1 Subcontractor Management
3.6 S3AM-305-PR1 Hand & Power Tools
3.7 S3AM-306-PR1 Highway and Road Work
3.8 S3AM-322-PR1 Overhead Lines
3.9 S3AM-322-FM1 Overhead Electrical Lines Acknowledgement
3.10 S3AM-325-PR1 Lockout Tagout
3.11 S3AM-326-PR1 Machine Guarding
3.12 S3AM-331-PR1 Underground Utilities

Drilling, Boring, & Direct Push Probing (S3AM-321-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 2 of 12
3.13 S3AM-331-FM1 Underground Utilities & Subsurface Installation Clearance Checklist
4.0 Procedure
4.1 Roles and Responsibilities
4.1.1 Manager
• Confirm the development of the project SH&E Plan and compliance with this procedure.
• Confirm the appropriate equipment and materials are available to conduct the drilling, boring or
direct-push operations.
• Confirm compliance with S3AM-331-PR1 Underground Utilities.
• Review the S3AM-331-FM1 Underground Utilities & Subsurface Installation Clearance
Checklist prior to authorizing work to proceed.
• Confirm that employees conducting drilling, boring or direct-push probing possess any required
training, registrations or certifications.
• Confirm all employees involved and affected by the task review the SH&E Plan, S3AM-331-
FM1 Underground Utilities & Subsurface Installation Clearance Checklist and Task Hazard
Assessment (THA) prior to work commencing.
• Confirm an equipment maintenance inventory is maintained, schedules adhered to and
appropriate inspections of equipment are conducted.
• Provide authorization (with the concurrence of the Site Supervisor and SH&E Manager) for
work to resume if interrupted due to unexpected conditions or events.
4.1.2 Safety, Health & Environment (SH&E) Manager
• Assist AECOM management as needed by providing guidance and clarification as to issues
that may arise.
• Review the project SH&E Plan to confirm compliance with jurisdictional regulations. Provide
technical guidance as needed when a variance is pursued related to this procedure. Confirm
variance process meets requirements identified in S2-001-SM1 Global SH&E Management
System Manual.
4.1.3 Employees
• Maintain training as appropriate to the work to be completed (e.g., ground disturbance, lockout
tagout, equipment operation, etc.). Refer to S3AM-003-PR1 SH&E Training.
• Review the SH&E Plan, S3AM-331-FM1 Underground Utilities & Subsurface Installation
Clearance Checklist and Task Hazard Assessment (THA) prior to work commencing.
• As appropriate to the anticipated or encountered hazards and as addressed in the applicable
planning documentation, utilize appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and
applicable training, practices and operating procedures.
• Immediately notify the Manager of any unanticipated conditions or events. If assigned
equipment, perform appropriate inspections and confirmations of maintenance and / or repairs.
4.2 Training
4.2.1 All on-site employees involved with drilling, boring, and direct-push probing shall be trained, at a
minimum, in these procedures and in the procedures of S3AM-331-PR1 Underground Utilities.
4.2.2 All operators and assistants shall have the appropriate safety training based on the SH&E Training
Matrix and any additional training assessments developed at the business group, and be versed in
the equipment to be utilized.
• Refer to S3AM-003-PR1 SH&E Training.

Drilling, Boring, & Direct Push Probing (S3AM-321-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 3 of 12
• This training may include, but is not limited to, Excavation / Trenching (Ground Disturbance),
HAZWOPER, Petroleum Safety Training (or Construction Safety Training), and H2S Alive as
appropriate.
• Only qualified personnel shall operate and inspect equipment.
4.2.3 All on-site Employees involved with drilling, boring, and direct-push probing activities shall be
provided with on-site orientation of the drill rig and its operation.
4.2.4 All Employees involved with drilling, boring and direct-push probing activities at a client site shall
receive the applicable client-required training.
4.3 Planning
4.3.1 SH&E Plan – At a minimum, a SH&E plan that includes a pre-job hazard assessment shall be
prepared and communicated to all involved personnel prior to any drilling, boring, and direct-push
probing activities. Refer to S3AM-209-PR1 Risk Assessment & Management.
• Assessment shall include both overhead and subsurface utilities and installations. Refer to
S3AM-322-PR1 Overhead Lines and S3AM-331-PR1 Underground Utilities.
• The SH&E Plan will address any required environmental monitoring including gas monitoring,
dust, noise, metals, radiation or other monitoring as may be appropriate for site conditions.
• All SH&E Plan requirements will be followed by the project team.
• The location specific emergency response plan shall be in place, contain procedures
applicable to the potential emergencies presented by the operations, and be reviewed with all
personnel potentially affected.
4.3.2 A Task Hazard Assessment (THA) shall be completed before every assigned task at the work
location. The focus of the analysis shall be on the specific assigned task and the evaluation of
risks and assignment of control measures based on actual work conditions.
4.3.3 S3AM-321- ATT2 Pre-Drilling, Boring & Direct-Push Probing Flow Chart summarizes the key Pre-
Drilling, Boring, and Direct-push probing requirements addressed in this procedure.
4.3.4 Procedures and documentation as detailed in S3AM-322-PR1 Overhead Lines and S3AM-331-PR1
Underground Utilities shall be completed prior to any intrusive subsurface work.
• The locations of subsurface and overhead utilities and subsurface installations will be
investigated, documented, mapped on a site plan and evidenced with appropriate surface
markings.
• A site walk shall be conducted by the project team / site Manager and any other appropriate
personnel, with the objectives of reviewing all planned intrusive activity locations, the locations
of subsurface and overhead utilities and the potential for subsurface installations, to determine
the appropriate utility clearance activities, and to observe other physical hazards.
• All proposed subsurface activities will be reviewed in comparison to subsurface and overhead
utilities and subsurface installations and adjustments made as necessary.
• Appropriate clearance activities shall confirm location(s) of identified underground utilities and
subsurface structures. Review the applicable completed S3AM-331-FM1 Underground Utilities
& Subsurface Installation Clearance Checklist.
• Site Walks should be repeated as necessary following the clearance of subsurface utilities and
installations to confirm hazards are clearly identified.
4.3.5 Confirm drilling location(s) and / or bore entry and bore exit points are adequately identified on the
worksite to enable appropriate equipment positioning.
4.4 Permits, Notifications and Access Agreements

Drilling, Boring, & Direct Push Probing (S3AM-321-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 4 of 12
4.4.1 Any required notifications shall be provided within the appropriate timeframe to the applicable
organization (e.g. owner, agency, governing body, etc.).
4.4.2 All applicable permits (e.g. client, government, working near rail road, etc.) will be identified,
obtained, and adhered to.
4.4.3 Access agreements will be obtained and adhered to as necessary.
4.5 Pre-Qualifying and Re-Qualifying Drilling Subcontractors
4.5.1 All drilling subcontractors will be properly pre-qualified in accordance with S3AM-213-PR1
Subcontractor Management.
4.5.2 The qualifications of the drilling crew performing the work will be evaluated prior to each
mobilization and each day by AECOM’s on-site representative to assure that their safety
performance, training, qualifications, equipment, processes, and approaches reflect AECOM
standards for excellence.
4.5.3 All drilling subcontractor equipment will be properly maintained and properly equipped, and the
drilling subcontractor will verify their equipment is fully functional as a normal part of their daily and
pre-work routine. Refer to S3AM-321-FM1 Daily Drilling, Boring & Direct Push Equipment
Inspection.
4.6 General Health and Safety
4.6.1 Personal Protective Equipment – Refer to the S3AM-208-PR1 Personal Protection Equipment for
best practices. These requirements may be modified or expanded in the SH&E Plan. Clothing shall
be close fitting and comfortable without loose ends, straps, draw strings, belts, or otherwise
unfastened parts that might catch on some rotating or translating component of the rig.
• Depending upon the hazards present, additional PPE may be required such as fire retardant
clothing, specific hearing protection, respiratory protective equipment and chemical protective
clothing.
• If the location has potential for underground electrical utilities to be present, workers shall
ensure footwear has additional protection of shock resistant soles required (white rectangle
with omega symbol).
4.6.2 Hearing Conservation – Hearing conservation program requirements may apply when working
around operating equipment. Refer to S3AM-118-PR1 Hearing Conservation.
• Each worker shall wear noise-reducing ear protectors around operating equipment or during
elevated noise levels. Distance from the elevated noise level is the primary measure of control
for non-essential drilling personnel.
4.7 Drilling, Boring and Direct Push Equipment Maintenance and Inspections
4.7.1 All equipment will be inspected prior to the initiation of operations and daily during operations using
the S3AM-321-FM1 Daily Drilling, Boring & Direct-Push Equipment Inspection. This inspection is
the responsibility of the operator who will provide written documentation of the inspection prior to
the start of drilling each day.
• Equipment that is deemed defective will immediately be repaired by a qualified person, or, if
repair is not practicable, tagged “Out of Service” and sent for repairs or discarded.
4.7.2 Managers shall confirm an accurate inventory of the equipment within their operation requiring
scheduled maintenance is developed. Using applicable regulations, industry standards, best
practices, and manufacturer’s recommendations, a maintenance schedule shall be developed with
defined responsibility, required actions, and frequency. Refer to S3AM-321-FM2 Drilling, Boring, &
Direct-Push Equipment Maintenance Inventory.
4.7.3 The maintenance program for equipment shall:

Drilling, Boring, & Direct Push Probing (S3AM-321-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 5 of 12
• Adhere to applicable regulations, standards, and manufacturers’ specifications;
• Provide for service by appropriately qualified maintenance personnel; and,
• Require maintenance schedules and records of maintenance.
4.7.4 Employees or operators who are assigned equipment are required to review maintenance
schedules for that equipment and will confirm that required maintenance has occurred or see that it
is undertaken.
4.8 General Requirements
4.8.1 Excluding geoprobe activities, set up any sample tables and general work areas for employees at a
safe distance from the rig.
• The recommended safe distance is the height of the fully extended mast plus 5 feet (1.5
meters), and no less than 30 feet (9.1 meters) from the rig.
• An increase to this distance may be required due to noise exposure hazards. Refer to S3AM-
118-PR1Hearing Conservation.
4.8.2 Operation of the drilling, boring or direct-push equipment shall be restricted to the designated
operator except to activate the emergency shut-off as required.
• All rotary drilling equipment shall have an emergency shut off / kill switch. The location of the
switch and operation should be reviewed with all involved Employees.
4.8.3 Sit-on direct push rigs are not permitted on AECOM worksites unless the rig has been modified (in
accordance with manufacturer’s requirements) to be operated by remote control or the rig has been
manufactured with a rollover protection system and seat belt.
4.8.4 Consult jurisdictional regulations as use of J-hooks and cat-heads may be prohibited. Examples:
• 29 CFR 1926 requires derricks and cranes to use hooks with self-closing latches and permits
the use of J-hooks only for a task unrelated to this procedure (setting trusses).
• British Columbia and Saskatchewan prohibit the use of friction cat-heads.
4.9 Identifying the Work Area
4.9.1 Ensure the work area is adequately identified:
• Including zone around the drilling, boring, or direct push equipment, as well as fluid equipment,
entry point, exit point and any excavated areas.
• Utilize barricades, signage, pylons, snow fence, etc. as appropriate.
• Implement traffic control as necessary.
• Coordinate with concurrent operations to identify their associated hazards and controls, and
communicate those associated with AECOM tasks.
4.9.2 When operating near public vehicular and pedestrian traffic, the on-site personnel shall take every
precaution necessary to see that the work zone is properly established, identified, and isolated from
both moving traffic and passer-by pedestrians (refer to S3AM-306-PR1 Highway and Road Work).
4.9.3 All traffic control devices shall be installed, placed, and maintained in accordance with a Traffic
Control Plan, client specifications, and / or the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices and
Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Canada in Canada. Traffic control devices shall
consist of and not be limited to
• Directional and informational signage;
• High visibility barricades, cones, or barrels;
• Lighting; and
• Other equipment and devices as required.
4.10 Clearing Work Areas

Drilling, Boring, & Direct Push Probing (S3AM-321-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 6 of 12
4.10.1 In addition to any minimum requirements the drilling subcontractor may have, prior to set up,
adequate site clearing and leveling shall be performed to accommodate the rig and supplies and
provide a safe working area.
4.10.2 Clearing the site includes clearing the intended drilling area obstacles and of underground utilities
in accordance with S3AM-331-PR1 Underground Utilities.
4.10.3 Drilling or probing shall not commence when tree limbs, unstable ground, or site obstructions cause
unsafe tool handling conditions.
• The cleared / levelled area should be large enough to accommodate the rig and supplies.
• If the rig is positioned on a steep grade and levelling of the ground is impossible or impractical,
the wheel of the transport vehicle shall be blocked and other means employed of preventing
the rig from moving or toppling over.
4.11 Drilling Activities
4.11.1 Federal / State / Provincial / Territorial regulations that govern drill rig operations and exposed
moving parts shall be adhered to.
4.11.2 All applicable client on-site safety procedures shall be understood and adhered to.
4.11.3 Minimum approach distances (MAD) from subsurface and overhead utilities and subsurface
installations will be established including 5 feet (1.5 meters) from any subsurface utility, 7 feet (2.1
meters) from the pad surrounding any underground storage tanks, and 10 feet (3 meters) from any
overhead energized electrical line (or further depending on line voltage). These approach distances
are a minimum; government regulations and utility requirements may dictate a greater set back
distance and should be confirmed.
4.11.4 Verify that equipment / energy is isolated when lockout is required:
• Refer to operator’s manual and S3AM-325-PR1 Lockout Tagout.
• Ensure stop switch is activated.
• Driller is out of the seat.
• Test controls to ensure they do not engage.
4.11.5 In addition to any identified minimum requirements (as applicable, client, drilling subcontractor), the
following safety measures shall be taken during drilling, boring or probing operations on site:
• The operator and helper shall be present during all active rig operations.
• Site personnel shall remain within visual contact of the rig operator.
• Hard hats, approved safety boots, safety glasses, and hearing protection shall be worn in the
work zone (minimum, the radius around the rig equal to the height of the drill rig mast) of a rig.
• Gas monitoring shall be conducted as appropriate.
• Hands, feet and other body parts shall be kept away from moving parts, (e.g. hoisted, rotating,
pushing, etc.) including augers, drill rods and reamers.
• When observing drilling, stand upwind of the drill rig to prevent potential exposure to vapors
that may be emitted from the borehole.
• The emergency shut-off switch on the rig shall be identified to site personnel and tested on a
daily basis by the operator.
• Unauthorized personnel shall be kept outside of the established work zone.
• Rig crew and other worksite personnel shall not use a cell phone while operating the drill rig or
other equipment or within the rig work zone.
• Do not drive the rig from hole to hole with the mast (derrick) in the raised position.
• Before raising the mast (derrick) look up to check for overhead obstructions. Refer to S3AM-
322-PR1 Overhead Lines.

Drilling, Boring, & Direct Push Probing (S3AM-321-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 7 of 12
• Before raising the mast (derrick), all rig personnel (with the exception of the operator) and
visitors should be cleared from the areas immediately to the rear and the sides of the mast. All
rig personnel and visitors should be informed that the mast is being raised prior to raising it.
• Before the mast (derrick) of a drill rig is raised and drilling is commenced, the drill rig shall be
first levelled and stabilized with levelling jacks and / or solid cribbing.
o The drill rig shall be releveled if it settles after initial set up.
o Lower the mast (derrick) only when the levelling jacks are down, and do not raise the
levelling jack pads until the mast (derrick) is lowered completely.
• After the rig has been positioned to begin drilling, all brakes and / or locks shall be set before
drilling begins.
• The operator of a rig shall only operate a drill rig from the position of the controls. The rig shall
not be in operation if the operator of the rig leaves the area of the controls.
• Throwing or dropping tools shall not be permitted. All tools shall be carefully passed by hand
between personnel or a hoist line should be used.
• If it is necessary to operate the rig within an enclosed area, make certain that exhaust fumes
are conducted out of the area.
o Exhaust fumes can be toxic and some cannot be detected by smell.
o Air monitoring and, as necessary, noise monitoring shall be conducted.
• Clean mud and grease from boots before mounting a rig platform and use hand holds and
railings. Watch for slippery ground when dismounting from the platform.
• During freezing weather, do not touch any metal parts of the rig with exposed flesh. Freezing
of moist skin to metal can occur almost instantaneously.
• All unattended bore holes shall be adequately covered or otherwise protected to prevent rig
personnel, site visitors, or animals from stepping or falling into the hole. All open bore holes
shall be covered, protected, or backfilled adequately and according to Federal / State /
Provincial / Territorial or local regulations on completion of the drilling project.
• When using a ladder on a rig, face the ladder and grasp either the side rails or the rungs with
both hands while ascending and descending. Always use adequate fall protection and a full
body harness when climbing above 6 feet (1.8 meters) of the ground. Do not attempt to use
one or both hands to carry a tool while on a ladder. Use a hoist line and a tool “bucket” or a
safety hook to raise or lower hand tools.
4.12 Drilling Fluid
4.12.1 Ensure drilling fluid is appropriate to the soil type and conditions to be encountered to enable
smooth drilling.
4.12.2 Drilling fluid used in the boring process shall be contained at the entry and, as applicable, exit
locations until recycled or removed from the site.
4.12.3 Confirm drilling fluid does not enter roadways, streams, municipal storm or sanitary sewer lines,
and / or any other drainage system or body of water.
4.12.4 Monitor drilling equipment and fluid equipment for any leakage or spills. Confirm appropriate
containment is in place and adequate spill response supplies are available.
4.12.5 It is important to monitor fluid flow and pressure gauges when drilling with any tooling, but it is
essential when drilling with a mud motor (pump placed in the drill string to provide additional power
to the bit while drilling).
4.13 Unanticipated Concrete / Debris or Void
4.13.1 The presence of subsurface installations and utilities requires special care when obstructions /
refusal and voids are encountered and when unexpected absence of soil recovery occurs during

Drilling, Boring, & Direct Push Probing (S3AM-321-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 8 of 12
drilling operations. Other indicators of subsurface installations and utilities are the presence of
warning tape, pea gravel, sand, non-indigenous material, bentonite, red concrete (indicative of
electrical duct banks) and any departure from native soil or backfill.
4.13.2 If unanticipated concrete / debris is encountered and / or if a void is encountered, drilling will be
immediately discontinued and the Manager notified. Drilling may only proceed with Manager or
SH&E Manager approval.
4.14 Use of Manual Slide Hammer
4.14.1 The following health and safety procedures should be followed when using a manual slide hammer
to install shallow injection points, drive point piezometers, and drill tools:
• Only use a manual slide hammer that either attaches directly to the point / piezometer being
driven or that incorporates a cap on the point / piezometer / drill tool that prevents the slide
hammer from slipping off the point / piezometer / drill tool.
• Always grasp the manual slide hammer (handles if equipped with handles) with both hands
while driving the point / piezometer / drill tool.
• Never allow hands or feet to get between the manual slide hammer and the drive plate or anvil.
4.15 Use of Augers
4.15.1 The following general health and safety procedures should be followed when supervising borings
with continuous flight hollow-stem augers:
• Never place hands or fingers under the bottom of an auger section when it is being hoisted
over the top of the auger section in the ground or other hard surfaces such as the drill rig
platform.
• Never allow feet to get under the auger section that is being hoisted.
• When augers are rotating, stay clear of the rotating auger and other rotating components of the
drill rig. Never reach behind or around a rotating auger for any reason.
• Use a long-handled shovel to move auger cuttings away from a rotating auger. Never use
hands or feet to move cuttings away from a rotating auger.
• Do not attempt to remove earth from rotating augers. Augers should be cleaned only when the
drill rig is in neutral and the augers are stopped from rotating.
• Loud noises may occur while driving split spoons. At minimum hearing protection shall be worn
when driving split spoons.
• When pulling / lifting augers, a clevis pin or other closed device shall be used. Use of J-hooks
is prohibited.
4.16 Attaching and Breaking Rods
4.16.1 Do not use manual tools (e.g., pipe wrenches) in combination with rotation of the drill stem. Manual
tools are not designed for the load, and may break.
• The use of such tools creates a significant impact hazard for those in the work area, because
they rotate with the drill stem. Manual tool use in combination with a rotating drill stem to
attach or break rods is therefore prohibited.
• Manual tools may be used if the drill stem is isolated / positively disengaged.
• Mechanical means of rod separation that are permitted include:
o Opposing hydraulic controls.
o Rod locking devices or machine’s power vice.
o Hydraulic breakout tools.
o Hydraulic foot clamps.

Drilling, Boring, & Direct Push Probing (S3AM-321-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 9 of 12
4.16.2 Rod box changes present severe crushing hazards. Operators shall ensure all crew members are
clear of the machine and hoisting equipment while they are changing rod boxes.
4.17 Rotary, Sonic and Core Drilling
4.17.1 In addition to the health and safety procedures identified above, the following general health and
safety procedures should be followed when supervising borings with rotary, sonic and core drilling:
• Drill rods should not be braked during lowering into the hole with drill rod chuck jaws. Drill rods
should not be held or lowered into the hole with pipe wrenches.
• If a string of drill rods are accidentally or inadvertently released into the hole, do not attempt to
grab the falling rods with your hands or a wrench.
• When drill rods are hoisted from the hole, they should be cleaned for safe handling with a
rubber or other suitable rod wiper. Do not use hands to clean drilling fluids from drill rods.
• When drill rods are rotating, stay clear of the rotating components of the drill rig. Never reach
behind or around a rotating drill rod for any reason.
• Use a long-handled shovel to move cuttings away from the top of the borehole. Never use
hands or feet to move cuttings away from the borehole.
• If work shall progress over a portable drilling fluid (mud) pit, do not attempt to stand on narrow
sides or cross members. The mud pit should be equipped with rough-surfaced, fitted cover
panels of adequate strength to hold drill rig personnel.
• Keep away from area where drill rods are being moved or raised to the rig. Do not stand in the
area where a drill rod will fall or slide if it should be dropped.
• Loud noises may occur during drilling. Hearing protection shall be worn.
4.18 Direct-push
4.18.1 The following general health and safety procedures should be followed when supervising drilling
borings with direct-push drilling:
• Loud noise may occur during direct-push drilling. Appropriate hearing protection shall be worn.
• When drill rods are hoisted from the hole, they should be cleaned for safe handling with a
suitable rod wiper. Do not use hands to clean drilling fluids from drill rods.
• If work shall progress over a portable drilling fluid (mud) pit, do not attempt to stand on narrow
sides or cross members. The mud pit should be equipped with rough-surfaced, fitted cover
panels of adequate strength to hold drill rig personnel.
• Drill rods should not be lifted and leaned unsecured against the mast. Either provide some
method of securing the upper ends of the drill rod sections for safe vertical storage or lay the
rods down.
4.19 Horizontal Directional Drilling
4.19.1 During surface to surface operations a 16.4’ (5 meters) safe zone shall be established and
identified at both the entry and exit locations; no personnel are permitted to be within this zone
unless the drill is locked out and the operator is out of the seat.
4.19.2 Machine shall be locked out before entering an excavation, changing tools, adding or removing drill
stem or doing any other work on tools or the drill stem at the exit end of the bore.
4.19.3 A tracking head shall be installed on the drill stem:
4.19.4 Assemble drill head using components appropriate to the soil conditions to be encountered (e.g.
nozzle, bit, beacon housing, etc.).
4.19.5 Ensure all personnel are clear of the bore entry point (outside of identified work zone).

Drilling, Boring, & Direct Push Probing (S3AM-321-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 10 of 12
4.19.6 At all times two way communication will be maintained at entrance and exit points using two way
radios or equally effective communication means. If at any time communication is lost, all work will
be stopped until communication is re-established
4.19.7 Locate drill head with tracking device at least every half-length of pipe. Adjust direction as
necessary to follow the intended bore path.
4.19.8 Any drilling fluid returning to the surface shall be cleaned up promptly.
4.19.9 Drill pipe should exit the bore at an angle of 5 to 10° from the ground surface.
4.19.10 Turn off fluid flow as soon as drill head emerges.
4.19.11 Lockout machine and remove drill head using appropriate breakout tools.
4.19.12 Select and attach a reamer that allows the return of drilling fluids and cuttings, to reduce frictional
pullback forces, and to allow for bend radius of the pipe. Reamer shall be:
• The smaller of 1.5 times the outside diameter (O.D.) or 12 inches (300mm) larger than the
diameter of the product pipe.
• A diameter less than 1.5 times the diameter of the product may be necessary in collapsing soil
formations.
• Reamed diameter may need to be increased by up to 25% if substantial swelling of the soil is
expected to occur.
4.19.13 All personnel shall clear the trench or the designated surface zone (16.4 feet [5 meters]) once the
reamer is attached. Operator shall only reverse lockout and commence pullback when
communication is received from personnel on exit hole side and operator has confirmed the
message.
4.19.14 Personnel on exit hole side shall ensure reamer is pulled the entire way back to the exit hole.
• If rotation is started when drill rod and reamer are away from the exit hole, very fast sideways
movement of the rod and reamer can occur.
• Larger reamers and longer lengths of exposed drill rod increase the speed and distance of this
movement.
4.19.15 If working with trailing drill stem, swivels shall be verified as lubricated and rotating freely by hand
prior to use:
• A freely moving swivel prevents trailing drill stem or product from rotating / whipping.
• If the swivel does not move freely by hand it shall be removed from service and repaired or
replaced.
• Only use swivels with limited articulation to prevent whipping or cranking action between the
reamer and trailing drill pipe or product.
4.19.16 It is important to clean and lubricate the tool and drill stem joint threads before each use.
4.19.17 Any individual drill pipes that are bent or damaged shall be immediately taken out of service.
4.19.18 Occasionally change the order of the lead drill pipe (i.e. move the lead pipe to the end of the stem,
or other pipe rotation procedures) to extend drill stem life.
4.19.19 Operator should avoid stalling the pipe rotation to avoid stress damage from shock loading.
4.20 Drilling at Potential MEC / UXO Sites
4.20.1 If the project site is suspected of containing munitions and explosives of concern (MEC) or
unexploded ordnance (UXO), the UXO team will conduct a reconnaissance and MEC / UXO
avoidance to provide clear access routes to each site before drilling crews enter the area. The
following procedures will be implemented:

Drilling, Boring, & Direct Push Probing (S3AM-321-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 11 of 12
• Drilling operations on an MEC / UXO site will not be conducted until a complete plan for the
site is prepared and approved by the AECOM UXO Safety Officer. MEC / UXO avoidance
shall be conducted during drilling operations on known or suspect MEC / UXO sites.
• The UXO team will identify and distinctly mark the boundaries of a clear approach path for the
drilling crews, vehicles, and equipment to enter the site. This path will be, at a minimum, twice
the width of the widest vehicle. No personnel will be allowed outside any marked boundary.
• If MEC / UXO is encountered on the ground surface, the UXO team will clearly mark the area
where it is found, report it to the proper authorities, and divert the approach path around it.
• The UXO team will conduct an access survey using the appropriate geophysical instrument
over the approach path for avoidance of MEC / UXO that may be in the subsurface. If a
magnetic anomaly is encountered, it will be assumed to be MEC / UXO, and the approach path
will be diverted around the anomaly. UXO personnel only will operate the appropriate
geophysical instrument and identify MEC / UXO.
• An incremental geophysical survey of the drill-hole location(s) will be initially accomplished by
the UXO team using a hand auger to install a pilot hole. If MEC / UXO is encountered or an
anomaly cannot be positively identified as inert material, Hazardous, Toxic, and Radioactive
Waste (HTRW) sampling personnel will select a new drill-hole location.
• Once the surface of a drilling site has been cleared and a pilot hole established as described
above, the drilling contractor will be notified that the site is available for subsurface drilling.
4.21 Movement and Transport of Drilling, Boring or Direct-Push Equipment
4.21.1 Personnel transporting equipment shall be properly licensed and shall operate the vehicle
according to Federal / State / Provincial / Territorial, and local regulations. Refer to S3AM-005-PR1
Driving and S3AM-320-PR1 Commercial Motor Vehicles.
4.21.2 Confirm the traveling height (overhead clearance), width, length and weight of the equipment with
the carrier. Identify highway and bridge load, width and overhead limits, to confirm these limits are
not exceeded and with adequate margin.
4.21.3 Allow for overhang of any drilling, boring or direct-push equipment when cornering or approaching
other vehicles or structures.
4.21.4 Be aware that the canopies of service stations and motels are often too low for equipment loaded
on a trailer to clear
4.21.5 Watch for low hanging electrical lines, particularly at the entrances to drilling sites or restaurants,
motels, other commercial sites.
4.21.6 Never travel on a street, road, or highway with any part of the drilling, boring or direct-push
equipment in a raised or partially raised position.
4.21.7 Remove all ignition keys if rig is left unattended unless client requirements specify that the keys
remain in the ignition switch at all times.
4.21.8 Before moving a rig on location, the operator shall do the following:
• To the extent practical, walk the planned route of travel and inspect it for depressions, gullies,
ruts, and other obstacles.
• Check the brakes of the truck / carrier, especially if the terrain along the route of travel is rough
or sloped.
• Discharge all passengers before moving on rough or steep terrain.
4.21.9 Engage the front axle (on 4x4, 6x6, etc., vehicles) before traversing rough or steep terrain
4.21.10 Driving drill rigs along the sides of hills or embankments should be avoided; however, if side-hill
travel becomes necessary, the operator shall conservatively evaluate the ability of the rig to remain
upright while on the hill or embankment. The possibility shall be considered that the presence of

Drilling, Boring, & Direct Push Probing (S3AM-321-PR1) Revision 1 December 15, 2016 PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. Page 12 of 12
drilling tools on the rig may reduce the ability of the rig to remain upright (raises the center of mass
of the rig).
4.21.11 Logs, ditches, road curbs, and other long and horizontal obstacles should be approached and
driven over squarely, not at an angle.
4.21.12 When close lateral or overhead clearance is encountered, or when backing up, the driver of the rig
shall be guided by another person on the ground.
4.21.13 Loads on the drill rig and truck shall be properly stored while the truck is moving, and the mast shall
be in the fully lowered position.
4.22 Loading and Unloading
4.22.1 Consult applicable manufacturer’s recommendations for loading and unloading of the equipment.
4.22.2 Use ramps of adequate design that are solid and substantial enough to bear the weight of the rig
with carrier, including tools.
4.22.3 Load and unload on level ground.
4.22.4 Use the assistance of someone on the ground as a guide.
4.22.5 Check the brakes on the rig carrier before approaching loading ramps.
4.22.6 Distribute the weight of the rig, carrier, and tools on the trailer so that the center of weight is
approximately on the centerline of the trailer and so that some of the trailer load is transferred to
the height of the pulling vehicle. Refer to the trailer manufacturer’s weight distribution
recommendations.
4.22.7 The rig and tools should be secured to the hauling vehicle with ties, chains, and / or load binders of
adequate capacity.
5.0 Records
5.1 All employee training files shall be maintained in accordance with S3AM-003PR1 SH&E Training.
5.2 Completed inspections and maintenance inventories shall be maintained the site or project files.
6.0 Attachments
6.1 S3AM-321-ATT1 Core Drilling Machine
6.2 S3AM-321-ATT2 Pre-Drilling, Boring, & Direct-Push Probing Flow Chart
6.3 S3AM-321-FM1 Daily Drilling, Boring & Direct-Push Equipment Inspection
6.4 S3AM-321-FM2 Drilling, Boring & Direct-Push Equipment Maintenance Inventory
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx
Attachment C
Stretch/Flex Poster
ProgramProgram
1 Lift (shrug) shoulders as high as
possible while slowly raising your
arms to fully extended position
above head.
2 At the same time, lift the body
up onto your toes (for as long as
comfortable). While reaching high,
extend and spread fi ngers.
3 Hold this position for 10 seconds
and then slowly lower arms to the
side into a neutral body position.
Relax while breathing slowly and
rhythmically. Concentrate on your
breathing rate for at least fi ve
breath cycles.
1 Keep your neck as straight as
possible while relaxing your
shoulders. Tilt your head to the
right. Slowly lower head toward
right shoulder.
2 Repeat in four positions: right; left;
front, and back each time returning
to the upright position.
3 Be sure to do this slowly and do
not hold your breath. There should
be a complete breath cycle with
each position of the head!
1 Bring right hand to upper back
between shoulder blades from
above shoulder.
2 Place left hand on the tricep
(muscle on the underside of the
arm) near the elbow.
3 Gently pull right elbow up and
back with left hand, moving the
right hand down center of upper
back as far as comfortable. This
should not cause pinching in the
neck. Repeat on opposite side.
1 Place hands on back of hips.
2 Slowly arch upper body backward to a comfortable
position. Hold while continuing to breath.
3 Return to neutral position and repeat two more times.
1 Keeping knees slightly bent, clasp
hands behind back.
2 Slowly bend forward from the waist
to a comfortable angle while lifting
arms upward and behind your
back.
3 Hold position for one breath
cycle and slowly return to upright
position. Repeat two more times.
1 Extend left arm out to side and
grasp left hip with right hand.
2 Rotate upper body to the left while
pulling on hip with right hand.
3 Release tension and change to
other side. Repeat on opposite side.
1 Stand upright, feet slightly apart for
balance. Extend left arm out to side
and grasp left hip with right hand.
2 Rotate upper body to left while
pulling on hip with right hand,
then bend slowly from waist to left
side to a comfortable angle.
3 Return to upright position and
change hand locations to other
side. Repeat on opposite side.
1 Place right hand on waist, extend
left arm over head and bend upper
body sideways to the right.
2 Hold position for one breath cycle
and return to upright position.
3 Repeat two more times and change
hand position to other side. Repeat
on opposite side.
1 Cross legs, keeping both knees slightly fl exed.
2 Bend forward slowly from the waist and place both
hands on the forward knee. Continue bending forward
as far as possible.
3 Hold position for one breath cycle. WARNING:
discontinue this exercise if you become dizzy or lose
your balance. Change leg position and repeat.
1 With your left hand hold onto a
stationary object for support, grasp
your right ankle behind hips with
right hand.
2 Pull ankle upward to stretch the
quadriceps muscle. WARNING: do
not attempt this exercise if you
have problems with balance or
severe knee injuries. If you have
knee injuries, you may elect to
lift the lower leg behind you and
hold the position for 10 seconds.
Repeat on opposite side.
1 Stand in upright stride position, left
leg forward.
2 Flex the upper trunk forward and
place both hands on left knee.
3 Keeping both feet fl at on fl oor,
slowly push hips and body forward
as far as possible as though you
are leaning into something. The
stress should be on the calf muscles
in the back of the right leg if you
keep your feet fl at. Repeat on
opposite side.
1 Palms together with fi ngers apart,
press momentarily together and
release.
2 Stretch arms out forward and make
a fi st in each hand. Hold 5 seconds
and open hand wide.
3 Force your thumbs down while
keeping fi ngers pointing up
towards the sky, wrists are bent
back and elbows should be locked.
You should feel a slight burn in
the upper arm muscles (extensor
muscles) of the forearm. These
muscles are frequently less used
and developed than the fl exor
muscles in the forearm which leads
to unbalance and potential wrist
injuries.
4 Hold 10 seconds and release.
Return your arms to the neutral arm
position at your side and shake out
your hands.
SHOULDER SHRUG WITH HIGH REACH
TARGET: Biceps, lats, forearms, and muscles that support the spine.
Particularly good for using hand tools and light lifting tasks.
UPPER TRUNK STRETCH
TARGET: Lower back, abdominals. Particularly good for truck drivers,
equipment operators, laborers.
LATERAL ROTATION STRETCH
TARGET: Lats, lower back muscles, abdominals, upper leg muscles.
Particularly good for laborers, iron workers.
SINGLE QUADRICEPS STRETCH
TARGET: Quadriceps and also helps body balance and ankle strength.
Particularly good for laborers, flaggers, and ironworkers.
CALF STRETCH
TARGET: Calves, lower back muscles. Particularly good for operators,
teamsters, maintenance workers.
WRIST EXTENSION
TARGET: Extensor muscles. Particularly good for carpenters, administrative
professionals, CAD operators, machinists, and maintenance workers.
LATERAL STRETCH
TARGET: Lats, and triceps plus shoulder mobility. Particularly good
for masons, riggers, machinists.
SINGLE LEG STRETCH
TARGET: Hamstrings, lower back muscles and stability. Particularly
good for laborers, masons, mechanics.
SHOULDER ROTATION STRETCH
TARGET: Shoulders and upper back. Particularly good for
carpenters, office workers.
TRUNK ROTATION
TARGET: Lower back and trunk support muscles. Particularly good
for laborers, mechanics, iron workers.
NECK STRETCH
TARGET: Neck muscles and stress reducer. Particularly good for equipment
operators, office personnel, drafters, CAD operators, and engineers.
TRICEP STRETCH
TARGET: Triceps and shoulders. Particularly good for light lifting,
carrying or pushing such as laborers, and mail clerks.
WARM-UP BEFORE STRETCHINGWARM-UP BEFORE STRETCHINGWARM-UP BEFORE STRETCHING
Run in place for 30 seconds, 10 jumping jacks, chicken dance, hokie pokie, Macarena, etc. to warm your muscles up.
Reach High Bobblehead Backscratch
Back Bend Can Opener Sprinkler
Take a Bow Teapot Touch Your Toes
Ankle Grab Starting Line Magic Hands
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx
Attachment D
Safety Data Sheets (SDSs)
p. 1
3
2 0
He alth
Fire
Re activity
Pe rs onal
Prote ction
2
3
0
H
Material Safety Data Sheet
Benzene MSDS
Section 1: Chemical Product and Company Identification
Product Name: Benzene
Catalog Codes: SLB1564, SLB3055, SLB2881
CAS#: 71-43-2
RTECS: CY1400000
TSCA: TSCA 8(b) inventory: Benzene
CI#: Not available.
Synonym: Benzol; Benzine
Chemical Name: Benzene
Chemical Formula: C6-H6
Contact Information:
Sciencelab.com, Inc.
14025 Smith Rd.
Houston, Texas 77396
US Sales: 1-800-901-7247
International Sales: 1-281-441-4400
Order Online: ScienceLab.com
CHEMTREC (24HR Emergency Telephone), call:
1-800-424-9300
International CHEMTREC, call: 1-703-527-3887
For non-emergency assistance, call: 1-281-441-4400
Section 2: Composition and Information on Ingredients
Composition:
Name CAS #% by Weight
Benzene 71-43-2 100
Toxicological Data on Ingredients: Benzene: ORAL (LD50): Acute: 930 mg/kg [Rat]. 4700 mg/kg [Mouse]. DERMAL (LD50):
Acute: &gt;9400 mg/kg [Rabbit]. VAPOR (LC50): Acute: 10000 ppm 7 hours [Rat].
Section 3: Hazards Identification
Potential Acute Health Effects:
Very hazardous in case of eye contact (irritant), of inhalation. Hazardous in case of skin contact (irritant, permeator), of
ingestion. Inflammation of the eye is characterized by redness, watering, and itching.
Potential Chronic Health Effects:
CARCINOGENIC EFFECTS: Classified A1 (Confirmed for human.) by ACGIH, 1 (Proven for human.) by IARC. MUTAGENIC
EFFECTS: Classified POSSIBLE for human. Mutagenic for mammalian somatic cells. Mutagenic for bacteria and/or yeast.
TERATOGENIC EFFECTS: Not available. DEVELOPMENTAL TOXICITY: Classified Reproductive system/toxin/female
[POSSIBLE]. The substance is toxic to blood, bone marrow, central nervous system (CNS). The substance may be toxic to
liver, Urinary System. Repeated or prolonged exposure to the substance can produce target organs damage.
Section 4: First Aid Measures
p. 2
Eye Contact:
Check for and remove any contact lenses. In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with plenty of water for at least 15
minutes. Cold water may be used. WARM water MUST be used. Get medical attention immediately.
Skin Contact:
In case of contact, immediately flush skin with plenty of water. Cover the irritated skin with an emollient. Remove contaminated
clothing and shoes. Wash clothing before reuse. Thoroughly clean shoes before reuse. Get medical attention.
Serious Skin Contact:
Wash with a disinfectant soap and cover the contaminated skin with an anti-bacterial cream. Seek immediate medical
attention.
Inhalation:
If inhaled, remove to fresh air. If not breathing, give artificial respiration. If breathing is difficult, give oxygen. Get medical
attention if symptoms appear.
Serious Inhalation:
Evacuate the victim to a safe area as soon as possible. Loosen tight clothing such as a collar, tie, belt or waistband. If
breathing is difficult, administer oxygen. If the victim is not breathing, perform mouth-to-mouth resuscitation. Seek medical
attention.
Ingestion:
Do NOT induce vomiting unless directed to do so by medical personnel. Never give anything by mouth to an unconscious
person. If large quantities of this material are swallowed, call a physician immediately. Loosen tight clothing such as a collar,
tie, belt or waistband.
Serious Ingestion: Not available.
Section 5: Fire and Explosion Data
Flammability of the Product: Flammable.
Auto-Ignition Temperature: 497.78°C (928°F)
Flash Points: CLOSED CUP: -11.1°C (12°F). (Setaflash)
Flammable Limits: LOWER: 1.2% UPPER: 7.8%
Products of Combustion: These products are carbon oxides (CO, CO2).
Fire Hazards in Presence of Various Substances:
Highly flammable in presence of open flames and sparks, of heat. Slightly flammable to flammable in presence of oxidizing
materials. Non-flammable in presence of shocks.
Explosion Hazards in Presence of Various Substances:
Risks of explosion of the product in presence of mechanical impact: Not available. Risks of explosion of the product in
presence of static discharge: Not available. Explosive in presence of oxidizing materials, of acids.
Fire Fighting Media and Instructions:
Flammable liquid, soluble or dispersed in water. SMALL FIRE: Use DRY chemical powder. LARGE FIRE: Use alcohol foam,
water spray or fog.
Special Remarks on Fire Hazards:
Extremely flammable liquid and vapor. Vapor may cause flash fire. Reacts on contact with iodine heptafluoride gas.
Dioxygenyl tetrafluoroborate is as very powferful oxidant. The addition of a small particle to small samples of benzene, at
ambient temperature, causes ignition. Contact with sodium peroxide with benzene causes ignition. Benzene ignites in contact
with powdered chromic anhydride. Virgorous or incandescent reaction with hydrogen + Raney nickel (above 210 C) and
bromine trifluoride.
Special Remarks on Explosion Hazards:
Benzene vapors + chlorine and light causes explosion. Reacts explosively with bromine pentafluoride, chlorine, chlorine
trifluoride, diborane, nitric acid, nitryl perchlorate, liquid oxygen, ozone, silver perchlorate. Benzene + pentafluoride and
methoxide (from arsenic pentafluoride and potassium methoxide) in trichlorotrifluoroethane causes explosion. Interaction
p. 3
of nitryl perchlorate with benzene gave a slight explosion and flash. The solution of permanganic acid ( or its explosive
anhydride, dimaganese heptoxide) produced by interaction of permanganates and sulfuric acid will explode on contact with
benzene. Peroxodisulfuric acid is a very powferful oxidant. Uncontrolled contact with benzene may cause explosion. Mixtures
of peroxomonsulfuric acid with benzene explodes.
Section 6: Accidental Release Measures
Small Spill: Absorb with an inert material and put the spilled material in an appropriate waste disposal.
Large Spill:
Flammable liquid. Keep away from heat. Keep away from sources of ignition. Stop leak if without risk. Absorb with DRY earth,
sand or other non-combustible material. Do not touch spilled material. Prevent entry into sewers, basements or confined
areas; dike if needed. Be careful that the product is not present at a concentration level above TLV. Check TLV on the MSDS
and with local authorities.
Section 7: Handling and Storage
Precautions:
Keep locked up.. Keep away from heat. Keep away from sources of ignition. Ground all equipment containing material. Do
not ingest. Do not breathe gas/fumes/ vapor/spray. In case of insufficient ventilation, wear suitable respiratory equipment. If
ingested, seek medical advice immediately and show the container or the label. Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Keep away
from incompatibles such as oxidizing agents, acids.
Storage:
Store in a segregated and approved area. Keep container in a cool, well-ventilated area. Keep container tightly closed and
sealed until ready for use. Avoid all possible sources of ignition (spark or flame).
Section 8: Exposure Controls/Personal Protection
Engineering Controls:
Provide exhaust ventilation or other engineering controls to keep the airborne concentrations of vapors below their respective
threshold limit value. Ensure that eyewash stations and safety showers are proximal to the work-station location.
Personal Protection:
Splash goggles. Lab coat. Vapor respirator. Be sure to use an approved/certified respirator or equivalent. Gloves.
Personal Protection in Case of a Large Spill:
Splash goggles. Full suit. Vapor respirator. Boots. Gloves. A self contained breathing apparatus should be used to avoid
inhalation of the product. Suggested protective clothing might not be sufficient; consult a specialist BEFORE handling this
product.
Exposure Limits:
TWA: 0.5 STEL: 2.5 (ppm) from ACGIH (TLV) [United States] TWA: 1.6 STEL: 8 (mg/m3) from ACGIH (TLV) [United States]
TWA: 0.1 STEL: 1 from NIOSH TWA: 1 STEL: 5 (ppm) from OSHA (PEL) [United States] TWA: 10 (ppm) from OSHA (PEL)
[United States] TWA: 3 (ppm) [United Kingdom (UK)] TWA: 1.6 (mg/m3) [United Kingdom (UK)] TWA: 1 (ppm) [Canada] TWA:
3.2 (mg/m3) [Canada] TWA: 0.5 (ppm) [Canada]Consult local authorities for acceptable exposure limits.
Section 9: Physical and Chemical Properties
Physical state and appearance: Liquid.
Odor:
Aromatic. Gasoline-like, rather pleasant. (Strong.)
Taste: Not available.
Molecular Weight: 78.11 g/mole
p. 4
Color: Clear Colorless. Colorless to light yellow.
pH (1% soln/water): Not available.
Boiling Point: 80.1 (176.2°F)
Melting Point: 5.5°C (41.9°F)
Critical Temperature: 288.9°C (552°F)
Specific Gravity: 0.8787 @ 15 C (Water = 1)
Vapor Pressure: 10 kPa (@ 20°C)
Vapor Density: 2.8 (Air = 1)
Volatility: Not available.
Odor Threshold: 4.68 ppm
Water/Oil Dist. Coeff.: The product is more soluble in oil; log(oil/water) = 2.1
Ionicity (in Water): Not available.
Dispersion Properties: See solubility in water, diethyl ether, acetone.
Solubility:
Miscible in alcohol, chloroform, carbon disulfide oils, carbon tetrachloride, glacial acetic acid, diethyl ether, acetone. Very
slightly soluble in cold water.
Section 10: Stability and Reactivity Data
Stability: The product is stable.
Instability Temperature: Not available.
Conditions of Instability: Heat, ignition sources, incompatibles.
Incompatibility with various substances: Highly reactive with oxidizing agents, acids.
Corrosivity: Non-corrosive in presence of glass.
Special Remarks on Reactivity:
Benzene vapors + chlorine and light causes explosion. Reacts explosively with bromine pentafluoride, chlorine, chlorine
trifluoride, diborane, nitric acid, nitryl perchlorate, liquid oxygen, ozone, silver perchlorate. Benzene + pentafluoride and
methoxide (from arsenic pentafluoride and potassium methoxide) in trichlorotrifluoroethane causes explosion. Interaction
of nitryl perchlorate with benzene gave a slight explosion and flash. The solution of permanganic acid ( or its explosive
anhydride, dimaganese heptoxide) produced by interaction of permanganates and sulfuric acid will explode on contact with
benzene. Peroxodisulfuric acid is a very powferful oxidant. Uncontrolled contact with benzene may cause explosion. Mixtures
of peroxomonsulfuric acid with benzene explodes.
Special Remarks on Corrosivity: Not available.
Polymerization: Will not occur.
Section 11: Toxicological Information
Routes of Entry: Absorbed through skin. Dermal contact. Eye contact. Inhalation.
Toxicity to Animals:
WARNING: THE LC50 VALUES HEREUNDER ARE ESTIMATED ON THE BASIS OF A 4-HOUR EXPOSURE. Acute oral
toxicity (LD50): 930 mg/kg [Rat]. Acute dermal toxicity (LD50): >9400 mg/kg [Rabbit]. Acute toxicity of the vapor (LC50): 10000
7 hours [Rat].
Chronic Effects on Humans:
p. 5
CARCINOGENIC EFFECTS: Classified A1 (Confirmed for human.) by ACGIH, 1 (Proven for human.) by IARC. MUTAGENIC
EFFECTS: Classified POSSIBLE for human. Mutagenic for mammalian somatic cells. Mutagenic for bacteria and/or yeast.
DEVELOPMENTAL TOXICITY: Classified Reproductive system/toxin/female [POSSIBLE]. Causes damage to the following
organs: blood, bone marrow, central nervous system (CNS). May cause damage to the following organs: liver, Urinary System.
Other Toxic Effects on Humans:
Very hazardous in case of inhalation. Hazardous in case of skin contact (irritant, permeator), of ingestion.
Special Remarks on Toxicity to Animals: Not available.
Special Remarks on Chronic Effects on Humans:
May cause adverse reproductive effects (female fertility, Embryotoxic and/or foetotoxic in animal) and birth defects. May affect
genetic material (mutagenic). May cause cancer (tumorigenic, leukemia)) Human: passes the placental barrier, detected in
maternal milk.
Special Remarks on other Toxic Effects on Humans:
Acute Potential Health Effects: Skin: Causes skin irritation. It can be absorbed through intact skin and affect the liver, blood,
metabolism,and urinary system. Eyes: Causes eye irritation. Inhalation: Causes respiratory tract and mucous membrane
irritation. Can be absorbed through the lungs. May affect behavior/Central and Peripheral nervous systems (somnolence,
muscle weakness, general anesthetic, and other symptoms similar to ingestion), gastrointestinal tract (nausea), blood
metabolism, urinary system. Ingestion: May be harmful if swallowed. May cause gastrointestinal tract irritation including
vomiting. May affect behavior/Central and Peripheral nervous systems (convulsions, seizures, tremor, irritability, initial
CNS stimulation followed by depression, loss of coordination, dizziness, headache, weakness, pallor, flushing), respiration
(breathlessness and chest constriction), cardiovascular system, (shallow/rapid pulse), and blood.
Section 12: Ecological Information
Ecotoxicity: Not available.
BOD5 and COD: Not available.
Products of Biodegradation:
Possibly hazardous short term degradation products are not likely. However, long term degradation products may arise.
Toxicity of the Products of Biodegradation: The products of degradation are less toxic than the product itself.
Special Remarks on the Products of Biodegradation: Not available.
Section 13: Disposal Considerations
Waste Disposal:
Waste must be disposed of in accordance with federal, state and local environmental control regulations.
Section 14: Transport Information
DOT Classification: CLASS 3: Flammable liquid.
Identification: : Benzene UNNA: 1114 PG: II
Special Provisions for Transport: Not available.
Section 15: Other Regulatory Information
Federal and State Regulations:
California prop. 65: This product contains the following ingredients for which the State of California has found to cause cancer,
birth defects or other reproductive harm, which would require a warning under the statute: Benzene California prop. 65 (no
significant risk level): Benzene: 0.007 mg/day (value) California prop. 65: This product contains the following ingredients
p. 6
for which the State of California has found to cause cancer which would require a warning under the statute: Benzene
Connecticut carcinogen reporting list.: Benzene Connecticut hazardous material survey.: Benzene Illinois toxic substances
disclosure to employee act: Benzene Illinois chemical safety act: Benzene New York release reporting list: Benzene Rhode
Island RTK hazardous substances: Benzene Pennsylvania RTK: Benzene Minnesota: Benzene Michigan critical material:
Benzene Massachusetts RTK: Benzene Massachusetts spill list: Benzene New Jersey: Benzene New Jersey spill list:
Benzene Louisiana spill reporting: Benzene California Director's list of Hazardous Substances: Benzene TSCA 8(b) inventory:
Benzene SARA 313 toxic chemical notification and release reporting: Benzene CERCLA: Hazardous substances.: Benzene:
10 lbs. (4.536 kg)
Other Regulations:
OSHA: Hazardous by definition of Hazard Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200). EINECS: This product is on the
European Inventory of Existing Commercial Chemical Substances.
Other Classifications:
WHMIS (Canada):
CLASS B-2: Flammable liquid with a flash point lower than 37.8°C (100°F). CLASS D-2A: Material causing other toxic effects
(VERY TOXIC).
DSCL (EEC):
R11- Highly flammable. R22- Harmful if swallowed. R38- Irritating to skin. R41- Risk of serious damage to eyes. R45- May
cause cancer. R62- Possible risk of impaired fertility. S2- Keep out of the reach of children. S26- In case of contact with eyes,
rinse immediately with plenty of water and seek medical advice. S39- Wear eye/face protection. S46- If swallowed, seek
medical advice immediately and show this container or label. S53- Avoid exposure - obtain special instructions before use.
HMIS (U.S.A.):
Health Hazard: 2
Fire Hazard: 3
Reactivity: 0
Personal Protection: h
National Fire Protection Association (U.S.A.):
Health: 2
Flammability: 3
Reactivity: 0
Specific hazard:
Protective Equipment:
Gloves. Lab coat. Vapor respirator. Be sure to use an approved/certified respirator or equivalent. Wear appropriate respirator
when ventilation is inadequate. Splash goggles.
Section 16: Other Information
References: Not available.
Other Special Considerations: Not available.
Created: 10/10/2005 08:35 PM
Last Updated: 05/21/2013 12:00 PM
The information above is believed to be accurate and represents the best information currently available to us. However, we
make no warranty of merchantability or any other warranty, express or implied, with respect to such information, and we assume
no liability resulting from its use. Users should make their own investigations to determine the suitability of the information for
their particular purposes. In no event shall ScienceLab.com be liable for any claims, losses, or damages of any third party or for
lost profits or any special, indirect, incidental, consequential or exemplary damages, howsoever arising, even if ScienceLab.com
has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
No. 2-D Grade Diesel Fuel Oil (defined by ASTM D-975); Treated or Refined Diesel Fuel No. 2; Grade 2 Distillate Fuel; Hydrodesulfurized Middle Distillate; C9-C16 Petroleum Hydrocarbons
Technical Contact: [phone]Medical Emergency: [phone]CHEMTREC Emergency: [phone]
(United States Only)
SAFETY DATA SHEET
GHS product identifier
Synonyms
Emergency telephone
number
Section 1. Identification
:
:
:
Chemical name :Fuels, diesel, No 2
Supplier's details :CITGO Petroleum CorporationP.O. Box 4689
Houston, TX 77210
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
[e-mail]
:Code
MSDS #:AG2DF
Various
Section 2. Hazards identification
FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS - Category 3
ACUTE TOXICITY: INHALATION - Category 4SKIN CORROSION/IRRITATION - Category 2SERIOUS EYE DAMAGE/ EYE IRRITATION - Category 2B
CARCINOGENICITY - Category 2SPECIFIC TARGET ORGAN TOXICITY (REPEATED EXPOSURE) [central nervous
system (CNS)] - Category 2ASPIRATION HAZARD - Category 1
Classification of the
substance or mixture
:
Signal word :Danger
Hazard statements :Flammable liquid and vapor.
Harmful if inhaled.Causes skin and eye irritation.
Suspected of causing cancer.May be fatal if swallowed and enters airways.May cause damage to organs through prolonged or repeated exposure. (central
nervous system (CNS))
Hazard pictograms :
Precautionary statements
Prevention :Obtain special instructions before use. Do not handle until all safety precautions have been read and understood. Use personal protective equipment as required. Wear protective gloves. Wear eye or face protection. Keep away from heat, sparks, open
flames and hot surfaces. - No smoking. Use explosion-proof electrical, ventilating,lighting and all material-handling equipment. Use only non-sparking tools. Take
precautionary measures against static discharge. Keep container tightly closed. Use only outdoors or in a well-ventilated area. Do not breathe vapor. Wash hands thoroughly after handling.
GHS label elements
OSHA/HCS status :This material is considered hazardous by the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard
(29 CFR 1910.1200).
Date of issue/Date of revision :7/29/2015.1/15
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
Section 2. Hazards identification
Response :Get medical attention if you feel unwell. IF exposed or concerned: Get medical
attention. IF INHALED: Remove victim to fresh air and keep at rest in a position comfortable for breathing. Call a POISON CENTER or physician if you feel unwell. IF SWALLOWED: Immediately call a POISON CENTER or physician. Do NOT induce
vomiting. IF ON SKIN (or hair): Take off immediately all contaminated clothing. Rinse skin with water or shower. IF ON SKIN: Wash with plenty of soap and water. Take off contaminated clothing. If skin irritation occurs: Get medical attention. IF IN EYES:
Rinse cautiously with water for several minutes. Remove contact lenses, if present and easy to do. Continue rinsing. If eye irritation persists: Get medical attention.
Storage :Store locked up. Store in a well-ventilated place. Keep cool.
Disposal :Dispose of contents and container in accordance with all local, regional, national and international regulations.
Hazards not otherwise
classified
:None known.
Section 3. Composition/information on ingredients
Ingredient name CAS number%
Chemical name :Fuels, diesel, No 2
Other means of
identification
:No. 2-D Grade Diesel Fuel Oil (defined by ASTM D-975); Treated or Refined Diesel
Fuel No. 2; Grade 2 Distillate Fuel; Hydrodesulfurized Middle Distillate; C9-C16 Petroleum Hydrocarbons
CAS number :68476-34-6
Substance/mixture
CAS number/other identifiers
:
Occupational exposure limits, if available, are listed in Section 8.
Substance
Any concentration shown as a range is to protect confidentiality or is due to process variation.
* = Various ** = Mixture *** = Proprietary
Ethyltoluene <3 25550-14-5Trimethylbenzene, all isomers <2 25551-13-7
Naphthalene <2 91-20-3Biphenyl<2 92-52-4Cumene<1 98-82-8
Xylenes, mixed isomers <1 1330-20-7Ethylbenzene<1 100-41-4
Immediately flush eyes with plenty of water, occasionally lifting the upper and lower
eyelids. Check for and remove any contact lenses. Continue to rinse for at least 10 minutes. Get medical attention.
Wash contaminated skin with soap and water. Remove contaminated clothing and shoes. Continue to rinse for at least 10 minutes. Get medical attention. Wash clothing
before reuse. Clean shoes thoroughly before reuse.
Remove victim to fresh air and keep at rest in a position comfortable for breathing. If it
is suspected that gas or vapor is still present, the rescuer should wear an appropriate mask or self-contained breathing apparatus. If not breathing, if breathing is irregular or
if respiratory arrest occurs, provide artificial respiration or oxygen by trained personnel.It may be dangerous to the person providing aid to give mouth-to-mouth resuscitation.Get medical attention. If necessary, call a poison center or physician. If unconscious,
place in recovery position and get medical attention immediately. Maintain an open airway. Loosen tight clothing such as a collar, tie, belt or waistband.
Section 4. First aid measures
Eye contact
Skin contact
Inhalation
:
:
:
Description of necessary first aid measures
Date of issue/Date of revision :7/29/2015.2/15
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
Section 4. First aid measures
Get medical attention immediately. Call a poison center or physician. Wash out mouth with water. Remove dentures if any. Remove victim to fresh air and keep at rest in a position comfortable for breathing. Aspiration hazard if swallowed. Can enter lungs and
cause damage. Do not induce vomiting. If vomiting occurs, the head should be kept low so that vomit does not enter the lungs. Never give anything by mouth to an
unconscious person. If unconscious, place in recovery position and get medical attention immediately. Maintain an open airway. Loosen tight clothing such as a collar,tie, belt or waistband.
Ingestion :
Protection of first-aiders :No action shall be taken involving any personal risk or without suitable training. If it is
suspected that gas or vapor is still present, the rescuer should wear an appropriate mask or self-contained breathing apparatus. It may be dangerous to the person providing aid to give mouth-to-mouth resuscitation.
Notes to physician :If ingested, this material presents a significant aspiration and chemical pneumonitis hazard. Induction of emesis is not recommended. Consider activated charcoal and/or
gastric lavage. If patient is obtunded, protect the airway by cuffed endotracheal intubation or by placement of the body in a Trendelenburg and left lateral decubitus
position.
Specific treatments :Treat symptomatically and supportively.
Most important symptoms/effects, acute
Inhalation :Harmful if inhaled. Long-term exposure to diesel engine exhaust may cause cancer.
May be fatal if swallowed and enters airways. Irritating to mouth, throat and stomach.:Ingestion
Skin contact :Causes skin irritation.
Causes eye irritation.:Eye contact
Over-exposure signs/symptoms
Skin contact
Ingestion
Inhalation No specific data.
Adverse symptoms may include the following:
nausea or vomiting
Adverse symptoms may include the following:irritation
redness
:
:
:
Eye contact :Adverse symptoms may include the following:
pain or irritationwateringredness
Potential acute health effects
See toxicological information (Section 11)
Indication of immediate medical attention and special treatment needed, if necessary
Section 5. Fire-fighting measures
Specific hazards arising
from the chemical
Flammable liquid and vapor. In a fire or if heated, a pressure increase will occur and
the container may burst, with the risk of a subsequent explosion. The vapor/gas is heavier than air and will spread along the ground. Vapors may accumulate in low or confined areas or travel a considerable distance to a source of ignition and flash back.
Runoff to sewer may create fire or explosion hazard.
Use dry chemical, carbon dioxide (CO₂,) water spray (fog) or foam.
Extinguishing media
:
Do not use water jet.
Suitable extinguishing
media
:
Unsuitable extinguishing
media
:
Date of issue/Date of revision :7/29/2015.3/15
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
Section 5. Fire-fighting measures
Promptly isolate the scene by removing all persons from the vicinity of the incident if there is a fire. No action shall be taken involving any personal risk or without suitable training. Move containers from fire area if this can be done without risk. Use water
spray to keep fire-exposed containers cool.
Hazardous thermal
decomposition products
Decomposition products may include the following materials:carbon dioxidecarbon monoxide
Diesel engine exhaust
Fire-fighters should wear appropriate protective equipment and self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) with a full face-piece operated in positive pressure mode.Special protective
equipment for fire-fighters
:
:
Special protective actions
for fire-fighters
:
Section 6. Accidental release measures
Environmental precautions
Personal precautions, protective equipment and emergency procedures
Stop leak if without risk. Move containers from spill area. Use spark-proof tools and explosion-proof equipment. Approach release from upwind. Prevent entry into sewers,
water courses, basements or confined areas. Wash spillages into an effluent treatment plant or proceed as follows. Contain and collect spillage with non-combustible,absorbent material e.g. sand, earth, vermiculite or diatomaceous earth and place in
container for disposal according to local regulations (see Section 13). Dispose of via a licensed waste disposal contractor. Contaminated absorbent material may pose the
same hazard as the spilled product. Note: see Section 1 for emergency contact information and Section 13 for waste disposal.
:
:No action shall be taken involving any personal risk or without suitable training.
Evacuate surrounding areas. Keep unnecessary and unprotected personnel from entering. Do not touch or walk through spilled material. Shut off all ignition sources.
No flares, smoking or flames in hazard area. Avoid breathing vapor or mist. Provide adequate ventilation. Wear appropriate respirator when ventilation is inadequate. Put on appropriate personal protective equipment.
Avoid dispersal of spilled material and runoff and contact with soil, waterways, drains and sewers. Inform the relevant authorities if the product has caused environmental
pollution (sewers, waterways, soil or air).
Large spill :
Stop leak if without risk. Move containers from spill area. Use spark-proof tools and
explosion-proof equipment. Dilute with water and mop up if water-soluble. Alternatively,or if water-insoluble, absorb with an inert dry material and place in an appropriate waste disposal container. Dispose of via a licensed waste disposal contractor.
Small spill :
Methods and materials for containment and cleaning up
For non-emergency
personnel
For emergency responders :If specialized clothing is required to deal with the spillage, take note of any information in Section 8 on suitable and unsuitable materials. See also the information in "For non-
emergency personnel".
Section 7. Handling and storage
Protective measures Put on appropriate personal protective equipment (see Section 8). Avoid exposure -obtain special instructions before use. Do not handle until all safety precautions have
been read and understood. Do not get in eyes or on skin or clothing. Do not breathe vapor or mist. Do not swallow. Use only with adequate ventilation. Wear appropriate respirator when ventilation is inadequate. Do not enter storage areas and confined
spaces unless adequately ventilated. Keep in the original container or an approved alternative made from a compatible material, kept tightly closed when not in use. Store
and use away from heat, sparks, open flame or any other ignition source. Use explosion-proof electrical (ventilating, lighting and material handling) equipment. Use only non-sparking tools. Take precautionary measures against electrostatic discharges.
Empty containers retain product residue and can be hazardous. Do not reuse container.Non equilibrium conditions may increase the fire hazard associated with this product.
Always bond receiving containers to the fill pipe before and during loading. Always confirm that receiving container is properly grounded. Bonding and grounding alone
:
Precautions for safe handling
Date of issue/Date of revision :7/29/2015.4/15
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
Section 7. Handling and storage
Advice on general
occupational hygiene
Conditions for safe storage,
including any
incompatibilities
Eating, drinking and smoking should be prohibited in areas where this material is
handled, stored and processed. Workers should wash hands and face before eating,drinking and smoking. Remove contaminated clothing and protective equipment before
entering eating areas. See also Section 8 for additional information on hygiene measures.
Store in accordance with local regulations. Store in a segregated and approved area.Store in original container protected from direct sunlight in a dry, cool and well-ventilated
area, away from incompatible materials (see Section 10) and food and drink. Store locked up. Eliminate all ignition sources. Separate from oxidizing materials. Keep container tightly closed and sealed until ready for use. Containers that have been
opened must be carefully resealed and kept upright to prevent leakage. Do not store in unlabeled containers. Use appropriate containment to avoid environmental contamination.
:
:
may be inadequate to eliminate fire and explosion hazards. Carefully review operations that may increase the risks such as tank and container filling, tank cleaning, sampling,
gauging, loading, filtering, mixing, agitation, etc. In addition to bonding and grounding,efforts to mitigate the hazards may include, but are not limited to, ventilation, inerting and/or reduction of transfer velocities.
Always keep nozzle in contact with the container throughout the loading process. Do NOT fill any portable container in or on a vehicle.
Special precautions, such as reduced loading rates and increased monitoring, must be
observed during "switch loading" operations (i.e., loading this material in tanks or shipping compartments that previously contained a dissimilar product).
Bulk Storage Conditions: Maintain all storage tanks in accordance with applicable
regulations. Use necessary controls to monitor tank inventories. Inspect all storage tanks on a periodic basis. Test tanks and associated piping for tightness. Maintain the automatic leak detection devices to assure proper working condition.
Trimethylbenzene, all isomers ACGIH TLV (United States, 4/2014).
TWA: 25 ppm 8 hours. TWA: 123 mg/m³ 8 hours.
Naphthalene ACGIH (United States). Absorbed through skin.
TWA: 10 ppm 8 hours. STEL: 15 ppm 15 minutes.
OSHA (United States).
TWA: 10 ppm 8 hours.
ACGIH TLV (United States, 4/2014). Absorbed through
skin.
TWA: 10 ppm 8 hours.
TWA: 52 mg/m³ 8 hours.
OSHA PEL (United States, 2/2013).
TWA: 10 ppm 8 hours. TWA: 50 mg/m³ 8 hours.
Biphenyl OSHA PEL Z2 (United States).
TWA: 0.2 ppm 8 hours.
ACGIH TLV (United States, 4/2014).
TWA: 0.2 ppm 8 hours.
TWA: 1.3 mg/m³ 8 hours.
OSHA PEL (United States, 2/2013).
TWA: 0.2 ppm 8 hours. TWA: 1 mg/m³ 8 hours.
Cumene ACGIH TLV (United States, 4/2014).
TWA: 50 ppm 8 hours.
OSHA PEL (United States, 2/2013). Absorbed through
Section 8. Exposure controls/personal protection
Ingredient name Exposure limits
Control parameters
Occupational exposure limits
Date of issue/Date of revision :7/29/2015.5/15
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
Section 8. Exposure controls/personal protection
skin.
TWA: 50 ppm 8 hours. TWA: 245 mg/m³ 8 hours.
Xylenes, mixed isomers ACGIH TLV (United States, 4/2014).
TWA: 100 ppm 8 hours. TWA: 434 mg/m³ 8 hours. STEL: 150 ppm 15 minutes.
STEL: 651 mg/m³ 15 minutes.
OSHA PEL (United States, 2/2013).
TWA: 100 ppm 8 hours. TWA: 435 mg/m³ 8 hours.
Ethylbenzene ACGIH TLV (United States, 4/2014).
TWA: 20 ppm 8 hours.
OSHA PEL (United States, 2/2013).
TWA: 100 ppm 8 hours. TWA: 435 mg/m³ 8 hours.
Hand protection
Use a properly fitted, air-purifying or supplied-air respirator complying with an approved
standard if a risk assessment indicates this is necessary. Respirator selection must be based on known or anticipated exposure levels, the hazards of the product and the safe working limits of the selected respirator.
Chemical-resistant gloves complying with an approved standard should be worn at all times when handling chemical products if a risk assessment indicates this is necessary.
Considering the parameters specified by the glove manufacturer, check during use that the gloves are still retaining their protective properties. It should be noted that the time
to breakthrough for any glove material may be different for different glove manufacturers.
Safety glasses equipped with side shields are recommended as minimum protection in
industrial settings. If contact is possible, the following protection should be worn, unless the assessment indicates a higher degree of protection: Splash goggles. Safety
eyewear complying with an approved standard should be used when a risk assessment indicates this is necessary to avoid exposure to liquid splashes, mists, gases or dusts.chemical splash goggles. If inhalation hazards exist, a full-face respirator may be
required instead.
Eye/face protection
Respiratory protection :
:
:
Body protection Personal protective equipment for the body should be selected based on the task being performed and the risks involved and should be approved by a specialist before handling this product.
:
Environmental exposure
controls
:Emissions from ventilation or work process equipment should be checked to ensure
they comply with the requirements of environmental protection legislation. In some cases, vapor controls, filters or engineering modifications to the process equipment will be necessary to reduce emissions to acceptable levels.
Appropriate engineering
controls
:Use only with adequate ventilation. Use process enclosures, local exhaust ventilation or
other engineering controls to keep worker exposure to airborne contaminants below any recommended or statutory limits. The engineering controls also need to keep gas,
vapor or dust concentrations below any lower explosive limits. Use explosion-proof ventilation equipment.
Wash hands, forearms and face thoroughly after handling chemical products, before
eating, smoking and using the lavatory and at the end of the working period.Appropriate techniques should be used to remove potentially contaminated clothing.Wash contaminated clothing before reusing. Ensure that eyewash stations and safety
showers are close to the workstation location.
Hygiene measures :
Individual protection measures
Skin protection
Other skin protection :Appropriate footwear and any additional skin protection measures should be selected based on the task being performed and the risks involved and should be approved by a
specialist before handling this product.
Date of issue/Date of revision :7/29/2015.6/15
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
Section 9. Physical and chemical properties
Physical state
Melting point
Vapor pressure
Relative density
Vapor density
Solubility
Liquid.
-30 to -18°C (-22 to -0.4°F)
0.84
5 [Air = 1]
0.27 kPa (2 mm Hg) [room temperature]
Very slightly soluble in the following materials: cold water.
Characteristic.Odor
pH
Colorless to light yellow or red.Color
Evaporation rate <1 (butyl acetate = 1)
Auto-ignition temperature
Flash point
254 to 285°C (489.2 to 545°F)
Closed cup: 52°C (125.6°F) [Pensky-Martens.]
>3.3
Not available.
Viscosity Kinematic (room temperature): 0.03 cm2/s (3 cSt)
Partition coefficient: n-
octanol/water
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Boiling point/boiling range :282 to 338°C (539.6 to 640.4°F)
Lower and upper explosive
(flammable) limits
:Lower: 0.6%Upper: 6.5%
Solubility in water :0.005 g/l
Density lbs/gal
Gravity, °API
:
:Estimated 37 @ 60 F
Estimated 7 lbs/gal
Section 10. Stability and reactivity
Hazardous decomposition
products
Conditions to avoid Avoid all possible sources of ignition (spark or flame). Do not pressurize, cut, weld,braze, solder, drill, grind or expose containers to heat or sources of ignition. Do not
allow vapor to accumulate in low or confined areas.
Under normal conditions of storage and use, hazardous decomposition products should
not be produced.
The product is stable.Chemical stability
Reactive or incompatible with the following materials:oxidizing materials
:
:
:
Incompatible materials :
Possibility of hazardous
reactions
:Under normal conditions of storage and use, hazardous reactions will not occur.
Reactivity :Not expected to be Explosive, Self-Reactive, Self-Heating, or an Organic Peroxide under US GHS Definition(s).
Section 11. Toxicological information
Acute toxicity
Information on toxicological effects
Date of issue/Date of revision :7/29/2015.7/15
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
Section 11. Toxicological information
Trimethylbenzene, all isomers LD50 Oral Rat 8970 mg/kg -Naphthalene LD50 Oral Rat 490 mg/kg -
Biphenyl LD50 Dermal Rabbit >5010 mg/kg -LD50 Oral Rat 2140 mg/kg -
Cumene LC50 Inhalation Vapor Mouse 10 g/m³7 hoursLD50 Dermal Rabbit 12300 uL/kg -
LD50 Oral Rat 2.9 g/kg -LD50 Oral Rat 4000 mg/kg -
Xylenes, mixed isomers LC50 Inhalation Gas.Cat 9500 ppm 2 hoursLC50 Inhalation Gas.Rat 5000 ppm 4 hours
LC50 Inhalation Gas.Rat 6700 ppm 4 hoursLC50 Inhalation Gas.Rat 6670 ppm 4 hours
LD50 Oral Mouse 2119 mg/kg -
LD50 Oral Rat 4300 mg/kg -LD50 Oral Rat 4300 mg/kg -
Ethylbenzene LD50 Dermal Rabbit >5000 mg/kg -LD50 Oral Rat 3500 mg/kg -
Product/ingredient name Result Species Dose Exposure
Carcinogenicity
Mutagenicity
Irritation/Corrosion
Trimethylbenzene, all isomers Eyes - Mild irritant Rabbit -24 hours 500 milligrams -
Skin - Moderate irritant Rabbit -24 hours 500 milligrams -
Naphthalene Skin - Mild irritant Rabbit -495 milligrams -
Biphenyl Eyes - Mild irritant Rabbit -100
milligrams
-
Skin - Severe irritant Rabbit -24 hours 500
microliters
-
Cumene Eyes - Mild irritant Rabbit -86 milligrams -
Skin - Mild irritant Rabbit -24 hours 10 milligrams -
Xylenes, mixed isomers Skin - Mild irritant Rat -8 hours 60 microliters -
Skin - Moderate irritant Rabbit -24 hours 500 milligrams -
Skin - Moderate irritant Rabbit -100 Percent -Ethylbenzene Skin - Mild irritant Rabbit -24 hours 15 milligrams -
Product/ingredient name Result Score Exposure Observation
Sensitization
Species
Conclusion/Summary :No additional information.
Skin
Eyes
Respiratory
:
:
:
No additional information.
No additional information.
No additional information.
Skin
Respiratory
:
:
No additional information.
No additional information.
Conclusion/Summary :No additional information.
Conclusion/Summary :
Date of issue/Date of revision :7/29/2015.8/15
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
Section 11. Toxicological information
Teratogenicity
Reproductive toxicity
Information on the likely
routes of exposure
Inhalation :Harmful if inhaled. Long-term exposure to diesel engine exhaust may cause cancer.
Skin contact :Causes skin irritation.
Causes eye irritation.:Eye contact
Specific target organ toxicity (single exposure)
Specific target organ toxicity (repeated exposure)
Trimethylbenzene, all isomers Category 3 Not applicable.Respiratory tract
irritation and Narcotic effectsBiphenylCategory 3 Not applicable.Respiratory tract
irritationCumeneCategory 3 Not applicable.Respiratory tract
irritationEthylbenzeneCategory 3 Not applicable.Respiratory tract
irritation
Name Category
Name Category
Fuels, diesel, No 2 Category 2 Not determined central nervous system (CNS)
Trimethylbenzene, all isomers Category 2 Not determined central nervous system (CNS)
Xylenes, mixed isomers Category 2 Not determined ears
Aspiration hazard
Name Result
Trimethylbenzene, all isomers ASPIRATION HAZARD - Category 1
Cumene ASPIRATION HAZARD - Category 1EthylbenzeneASPIRATION HAZARD - Category 1
propylbenzene ASPIRATION HAZARD - Category 1
Route of
exposure
Target organs
Route of
exposure
Target organs
:Routes of entry anticipated: Dermal, Inhalation.
Potential acute health effects
Classification
Fuels, diesel, No 2 -3 -
Diesel exhaust particulate -1 Reasonably anticipated to be a human carcinogen.Naphthalene -2B Reasonably anticipated to be a human carcinogen.
Cumene -2B Reasonably anticipated to be a human carcinogen.Xylenes, mixed isomers -3 -Ethylbenzene -2B -
Product/ingredient name NTPIARCOSHA
Diesel exhaust particulate: Lung tumor and lymphomas were identified in rats and mice exposed to unflitered diesel fuel exhaust in chronic inhalation studies. Further,
epidemiological studies have identified increase incidences of lung cancer in US railroad workers and bladder cancer in bus and truck drivers possibly associated with exposure
to diesel engine exhaust. NTP has determined that exposure to diesel exhaust particulates, a complex mixture of combustion products of diesel fuel, is reasonably anticipated to be a human carcinogen. In addition, NIOSH has identified complete
diesel exhaust as a potential carcinogen.
Conclusion/Summary :No additional information.
Conclusion/Summary :No additional information.
Date of issue/Date of revision :7/29/2015.9/15
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
Section 11. Toxicological information
May be fatal if swallowed and enters airways. Irritating to mouth, throat and stomach.:Ingestion
May cause damage to organs through prolonged or repeated exposure.General :
Suspected of causing cancer. Risk of cancer depends on duration and level of
exposure.
Carcinogenicity :
No known significant effects or critical hazards.Mutagenicity :
No known significant effects or critical hazards.Teratogenicity :
Developmental effects :No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Fertility effects :No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Symptoms related to the physical, chemical and toxicological characteristics
Skin contact
Ingestion
Inhalation No specific data.
Adverse symptoms may include the following:
nausea or vomiting
Adverse symptoms may include the following:irritationredness
:
:
:
Eye contact :Adverse symptoms may include the following:pain or irritation
wateringredness
Potential chronic health effects
Section 12. Ecological information
Toxicity
Trimethylbenzene, all isomers Acute LC50 5600 µg/l Marine water Crustaceans - Palaemonetes
pugio
48 hours
Naphthalene Acute EC50 1600 µg/l Fresh water Daphnia - Daphnia magna -
Neonate
48 hours
Acute LC50 2350 µg/l Marine water Crustaceans - Palaemonetes pugio 48 hours
Acute LC50 213 µg/l Fresh water Fish - Melanotaenia fluviatilis -Larvae 96 hours
Chronic NOEC 0.67 ppm Fresh water Fish - Oncorhynchus kisutch 40 days
Biphenyl Acute LC50 360 µg/l Fresh water Daphnia - Daphnia magna -Neonate 48 hours
Acute LC50 1450 µg/l Fresh water Fish - Pimephales promelas 96 hoursChronic NOEC 0.17 mg/l Fresh water Daphnia - Daphnia magna -
Neonate
21 days
Chronic NOEC 0.229 mg/l Fresh water Fish - Oncorhynchus mykiss 87 daysCumeneAcute EC50 2600 µg/l Fresh water Algae - Pseudokirchneriella subcapitata 72 hours
Acute EC50 7400 µg/l Fresh water Crustaceans - Artemia sp. -
Nauplii
48 hours
Acute EC50 10600 µg/l Fresh water Daphnia - Daphnia magna -
Neonate
48 hours
Acute LC50 2700 µg/l Fresh water Fish - Oncorhynchus mykiss 96 hours
Xylenes, mixed isomers Acute EC50 90 mg/l Fresh water Crustaceans - Cypris subglobosa 48 hoursAcute LC50 8.5 ppm Marine water Crustaceans - Palaemonetes
pugio - Adult
48 hours
Acute LC50 8500 µg/l Marine water Crustaceans - Palaemonetes
pugio
48 hours
Acute LC50 15700 µg/l Fresh water Fish - Lepomis macrochirus -96 hours
Product/ingredient name SpeciesResult Exposure
Date of issue/Date of revision :7/29/2015.10/15
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
Section 12. Ecological information
LogPow BCF Potential
Bioaccumulative potential
Other adverse effects :No known significant effects or critical hazards.
Product/ingredient name
Fuels, diesel, No 2 >3.3 -lowTrimethylbenzene, all isomers 3.4 to 3.8 -low
Naphthalene 3.4 36.5 to 168 lowBiphenyl4.008 1900 high
Cumene 3.55 94.69 low
Xylenes, mixed isomers 3.12 8.1 to 25.9 lowEthylbenzene3.6 -low
Juvenile (Fledgling, Hatchling,Weanling)
Acute LC50 19000 µg/l Fresh water Fish - Lepomis macrochirus 96 hoursAcute LC50 13400 µg/l Fresh water Fish - Pimephales promelas 96 hours
Acute LC50 16940 µg/l Fresh water Fish - Carassius auratus 96 hoursEthylbenzeneAcute EC50 4600 µg/l Fresh water Algae - Pseudokirchneriella
subcapitata
72 hours
Acute EC50 3600 µg/l Fresh water Algae - Pseudokirchneriella subcapitata 96 hours
Acute EC50 2930 µg/l Fresh water Daphnia - Daphnia magna -Neonate 48 hours
Acute LC50 5200 µg/l Marine water Crustaceans - Americamysis bahia 48 hours
Acute LC50 4200 µg/l Fresh water Fish - Oncorhynchus mykiss 96 hoursChronic NOEC 1000 µg/l Fresh water Algae - Pseudokirchneriella
subcapitata
96 hours
Persistence and degradability
Soil/water partition
coefficient (KOC)
:Not available.
Mobility in soil
Not available.
Conclusion/Summary :Not available.
Conclusion/Summary :Not available.
Section 13. Disposal considerations
The generation of waste should be avoided or minimized wherever possible. Disposal of this product, solutions and any by-products should at all times comply with the requirements of environmental protection and waste disposal legislation and any
regional local authority requirements. Dispose of surplus and non-recyclable products via a licensed waste disposal contractor. Waste should not be disposed of untreated to the sewer unless fully compliant with the requirements of all authorities with jurisdiction.
Waste packaging should be recycled. This material and its container must be disposed of in a safe way. Care should be taken when handling emptied containers that have not
been cleaned or rinsed out. Empty containers or liners may retain some product residues. Vapor from product residues may create a highly flammable or explosive atmosphere inside the container. Do not cut, weld or grind used containers unless they
have been cleaned thoroughly internally. Avoid dispersal of spilled material and runoff and contact with soil, waterways, drains and sewers.
:Disposal methods
RCRA classification :D001, D018
Date of issue/Date of revision :7/29/2015.11/15
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
Section 14. Transport information
NA 1993, Diesel Fuel, 3, PG III
3
III
UN 1202, Diesel Fuel, 3, PG III
UN 1202
3
III
NA1993
Packaging instruction
Passenger aircraft
Quantity limitation: 60 LPackaging instructions: Y309
Cargo aircraft
Quantity limitation: 220 LPackaging instructions: 310
Remarks
49 CFR 173.150 (f)(1) states that a flammable liquid with a
flash point at or above 38ºC (100ºF) that does not meet the definition of any other hazard
class may be reclassed as a combustible liquid. This
provision does not apply to transportation by vessel or aircraft except where other
means of transportaion is impracticable.
Cargo Aircraft OnlyQuantity
limitation: 220 LPackaging instructions: 310
Limited Quantities -
Passenger AircraftQuantity limitation: 60 L
Packaging instructions: 309Y
DOT Classification IATA
UN number
UN proper
shipping name
Transport
hazard class(es)
Packing group
Additional
information
Environmental
hazards
Special precautions for user
No.No.
Transport within user’s premises: always transport in closed containers that are
upright and secure. Ensure that persons transporting the product know what to do in the event of an accident or spillage.
:
IMDG
UN 1202
UN 1202, Diesel Fuel, 3, PG III
3
III
Yes.
-
Section 15. Regulatory information
U.S. Federal regulations
Clean Water Act (CWA) 307: Ethylbenzene; Naphthalene; Toluene; Benzene
Clean Water Act (CWA) 311: Ethylbenzene; Xylenes, mixed isomers; Naphthalene;Toluene; Benzene
:United States inventory (TSCA 8b): All components are listed or exempted.
This material is classified as an oil under Section 311 of the Clean Water Act (CWA)and the Oil Pollution Act of 1990 (OPA). Discharges or spills which produce a visible
sheen on waters of the United States, their adjoining shorelines, or into conduits leading to surface waters must be reported to the EPA's National Response Center at (800)
424-8802.
Date of issue/Date of revision :7/29/2015.12/15
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
Section 15. Regulatory information
The following components are listed: Trimethylbenzene, all isomers; Ethyltoluene
WARNING: This product contains a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer.
WARNING: This product contains less than 1% of a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
Massachusetts :
SARA 313
Product name CAS number %
SARA 313 notifications must not be detached from the SDS and any copying and redistribution of the SDS shall include copying and redistribution of the notice attached to copies of the SDS subsequently redistributed.
Naphthalene 91-20-3 <1
Ethylbenzene 100-41-4 <1
Naphthalene 91-20-3 <1Ethylbenzene100-41-4 <1
Form R - Reporting
requirements
Supplier notification
California Prop. 65
New York :The following components are listed: Ethylbenzene; Cumene; Benzene, 1-methylethyl-;Naphthalene
New Jersey :The following components are listed: Ethylbenzene; Cumene; NAPHTHALENE;TRIMETHYL BENZENE (mixed isomers); BENZENE, TRIMETHYL-;
ETHYLTOLUENES; BENZENE, ETHYLMETHYL-
Pennsylvania :The following components are listed: Ethylbenzene; Cumene; NAPHTHALENE;
Trimethylbenzene, all isomers; Ethyltoluene
State regulations
SARA 302/304
SARA 304 RQ :Not applicable.
Composition/information on ingredients
SARA 311/312
Classification :Fire hazard
Immediate (acute) health hazardDelayed (chronic) health hazard
Fuels, diesel, No 2 Yes.No.No.Yes.Yes.Trimethylbenzene, all isomers Yes.No.No.Yes.Yes.
Naphthalene Yes.No.No.Yes.Yes.Biphenyl No.No.No.Yes.No.
Cumene Yes.No.No.Yes.Yes.Xylenes, mixed isomers Yes.No.No.Yes.Yes.
Ethylbenzene Yes.No.No.Yes.Yes.
Name Fire
hazard
Sudden
release of
pressure
Reactive Immediate
(acute)
health
hazard
Delayed
(chronic)
health
hazard
Composition/information on ingredients
Naphthalene <1 Yes.No.Yes.No.
Cumene <1 Yes.No.No.No.Ethylbenzene <1 Yes.No.41 µg/day (ingestion)
54 µg/day (inhalation)
No.
Diesel exhaust particulate <1 Yes.No.No.No.Toluene <0.1 No.Yes.No.7000 µg/day (ingestion)
Benzene <0.1 Yes.Yes.6.4 µg/day (ingestion)24 µg/day (ingestion)49 µg/day
Ingredient name Cancer Reproductive No significant risk
level
Maximum
acceptable dosage
level
%
Date of issue/Date of revision :7/29/2015.13/15
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
Section 15. Regulatory information
Canada inventory :All components are listed or exempted.
Australia inventory (AICS): All components are listed or exempted.
China inventory (IECSC): All components are listed or exempted.
Japan inventory: All components are listed or exempted.
Korea inventory: All components are listed or exempted.
Malaysia Inventory (EHS Register): Not determined.
New Zealand Inventory of Chemicals (NZIoC): All components are listed or exempted.
Philippines inventory (PICCS): All components are listed or exempted.
Taiwan inventory (CSNN): Not determined.
International regulations
International lists :
13 µg/day (inhalation)(inhalation)
EU Inventory :All components are listed or exempted.
WHMIS (Canada):Class B-3: Combustible liquid with a flash point between 37.8°C (100°F) and 93.3°C (200°F).Class D-2A: Material causing other toxic effects (Very toxic).
Section 16. Other information
History
Date of issue/Date of
revision
Notice to reader
:
Key to abbreviations :ATE = Acute Toxicity EstimateBCF = Bioconcentration FactorGHS = Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals
IATA = International Air Transport AssociationIBC = Intermediate Bulk ContainerIMDG = International Maritime Dangerous GoodsLogPow = logarithm of the octanol/water partition coefficientMARPOL 73/78 = International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution From Ships,
1973 as modified by the Protocol of 1978. ("Marpol" = marine pollution)UN = United Nations
7/29/2015.
0
2
1
National Fire Protection Association (U.S.A.)
Health
Special
Instability/Reactivity
Flammability
Reprinted with permission from NFPA 704-2001, Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency
Response Copyright ©1997, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269. This reprinted material is
not the complete and official position of the National Fire Protection Association, on the referenced subject
which is represented only by the standard in its entirety.
Copyright ©2001, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269. This warning system is intended to
be interpreted and applied only by properly trained individuals to identify fire, health and reactivity hazards of
chemicals. The user is referred to certain limited number of chemicals with recommended classifications in
NFPA 49 and NFPA 325, which would be used as a guideline only. Whether the chemicals are classified by NFPA
or not, anyone using the 704 systems to classify chemicals does so at their own risk.
THE INFORMATION IN THIS SAFETY DATA SHEET (SDS) WAS OBTAINED FROM SOURCES WHICH WE BELIEVE
ARE RELIABLE. HOWEVER, THE INFORMATION IS PROVIDED WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED REGARDING ITS CORRECTNESS OR ACCURACY. SOME INFORMATION PRESENTED AND
CONCLUSIONS DRAWN HEREIN ARE FROM SOURCES OTHER THAN DIRECT TEST DATA ON THE SUBSTANCE
ITSELF. THIS SDS WAS PREPARED AND IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR THIS PRODUCT. IF THE PRODUCT IS USED
AS A COMPONENT IN ANOTHER PRODUCT, THIS SDS INFORMATION MAY NOT BE APPLICABLE. USERS
SHOULD MAKE THEIR OWN INVESTIGATIONS TO DETERMINE THE SUITABILITY OF THE INFORMATION OR
PRODUCTS FOR THEIR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR APPLICATION.
Date of issue/Date of revision :7/29/2015.14/15
CITGO No. 2 Diesel Fuel, Low Sulfur, All Grades
Section 16. Other information
CITGO is a registered trademark of CITGO Petroleum Corporation
THE CONDITIONS OR METHODS OF HANDLING, STORAGE, USE, AND/OR DISPOSAL OF THE PRODUCT ARE
BEYOND OUR CONTROL AND MAY BE BEYOND OUR KNOWLEDGE. FOR THIS AND OTHER REASONS, WE DO
NOT ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM LIABILITY FOR ANY LOSS, DAMAGE OR EXPENSE
ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH HANDLING, STORAGE, USE OR DISPOSAL OF THE
PRODUCT.
Date of issue/Date of revision :7/29/2015.15/15
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Gasoline, All Grades MSDS No. 9950

Revision Date: 09/25/2007 Page 1 of 9
NFPA 704 (Section 16)
EMERGENCY OVERVIEW DANGER!
EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE - EYE AND MUCOUS MEMBRANE IRRITANT - EFFECTS CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM - HARMFUL OR FATAL IF SWALLOWED - ASPIRATION HAZARD
High fire hazard. Keep away from heat, spark, open flame, and other ignition sources.
If ingested, do NOT induce vomiting, as this may cause chemical pneumonia (fluid in the lungs). Contact may cause eye, skin and mucous membrane irritation. Harmful if absorbed through the skin. Avoid
prolonged breathing of vapors or mists. Inhalation may cause irritation, anesthetic effects (dizziness, nausea, headache, intoxication), and respiratory system effects.
Long-term exposure may cause effects to specific organs, such as to the liver, kidneys, blood, nervous system, and skin. Contains benzene, which can cause blood disease, including anemia and leukemia.

1. CHEMICAL PRODUCT and COMPANY INFORMATION
Hess Corporation 1 Hess Plaza Woodbridge, NJ 07095-0961
EMERGENCY TELEPHONE NUMBER (24 hrs): CHEMTREC [phone] COMPANY CONTACT (business hours): Corporate Safety [phone] MSDS (Environment, Health, Safety) Internet Website www.hess.com
SYNONYMS: Hess Conventional (Oxygenated and Non-oxygenated) Gasoline; Reformulated Gasoline
(RFG); Reformulated Gasoline Blendstock for Oxygenate Blending (RBOB); Unleaded Motor or Automotive Gasoline
See Section 16 for abbreviations and acronyms.
2. COMPOSITION and INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS *
INGREDIENT NAME (CAS No.) CONCENTRATION PERCENT BY WEIGHT
Gasoline (86290-81-5) 100
Benzene (71-43-2) 0.1 - 4.9 (0.1 - 1.3 reformulated gasoline) n-Butane (106-97-8) < 10
Ethyl Alcohol (Ethanol) (64-17-5) 0 - 10 Ethyl benzene (100-41-4) < 3
n-Hexane (110-54-3) 0.5 to 4 Methyl-tertiary butyl ether (MTBE) (1634-04-4) 0 to 15.0
Tertiary-amyl methyl ether (TAME) (994-05-8) 0 to 17.2 Toluene (108-88-3) 1 - 25
1,2,4- Trimethylbenzene (95-63-6) < 6 Xylene, mixed isomers (1330-20-7) 1 - 15
A complex blend of petroleum-derived normal and branched-chain alkane, cycloalkane, alkene, and
aromatic hydrocarbons. May contain antioxidant and multifunctional additives. Non-oxygenated Conventional Gasoline and RBOB do not have oxygenates (Ethanol or MTBE and/or TAME).
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Gasoline, All Grades MSDS No. 9950

Revision Date: 09/25/2007 Page 2 of 9
Oxygenated Conventional and Reformulated Gasoline will have oxygenates for octane enhancement or as legally required.

3. HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION
EYES
Moderate irritant. Contact with liquid or vapor may cause irritation.
SKIN Practically non-toxic if absorbed following acute (single) exposure. May cause skin irritation with prolonged or repeated contact. Liquid may be absorbed through the skin in toxic amounts if large areas of skin are exposed repeatedly.
INGESTION The major health threat of ingestion occurs from the danger of aspiration (breathing) of liquid drops into
the lungs, particularly from vomiting. Aspiration may result in chemical pneumonia (fluid in the lungs), severe lung damage, respiratory failure and even death.
Ingestion may cause gastrointestinal disturbances, including irritation, nausea, vomiting and diarrhea, and central nervous system (brain) effects similar to alcohol intoxication. In severe cases, tremors,
convulsions, loss of consciousness, coma, respiratory arrest, and death may occur.
INHALATION Excessive exposure may cause irritations to the nose, throat, lungs and respiratory tract. Central nervous
system (brain) effects may include headache, dizziness, loss of balance and coordination, unconsciousness, coma, respiratory failure, and death.
WARNING: the burning of any hydrocarbon as a fuel in an area without adequate ventilation may result in hazardous levels of combustion products, including carbon monoxide, and inadequate oxygen levels,
which may cause unconsciousness, suffocation, and death.
CHRONIC EFFECTS and CARCINOGENICITY Contains benzene, a regulated human carcinogen. Benzene has the potential to cause anemia and other
blood diseases, including leukemia, after repeated and prolonged exposure. Exposure to light hydrocarbons in the same boiling range as this product has been associated in animal studies with
systemic toxicity. See also Section 11 - Toxicological Information.
MEDICAL CONDITIONS AGGRAVATED BY EXPOSURE
Irritation from skin exposure may aggravate existing open wounds, skin disorders, and dermatitis (rash). Chronic respiratory disease, liver or kidney dysfunction, or pre-existing central nervous system disorders
may be aggravated by exposure.
4. FIRST AID MEASURES
EYES In case of contact with eyes, immediately flush with clean, low-pressure water for at least 15 min. Hold
eyelids open to ensure adequate flushing. Seek medical attention.
SKIN Remove contaminated clothing. Wash contaminated areas thoroughly with soap and water or waterless
hand cleanser. Obtain medical attention if irritation or redness develops.
INGESTION
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Gasoline, All Grades MSDS No. 9950

Revision Date: 09/25/2007 Page 3 of 9
DO NOT INDUCE VOMITING. Do not give liquids. Obtain immediate medical attention. If spontaneous vomiting occurs, lean victim forward to reduce the risk of aspiration. Small amounts of material which
enter the mouth should be rinsed out until the taste is dissipated.
INHALATION
Remove person to fresh air. If person is not breathing, ensure an open airway and provide artificial respiration. If necessary, provide additional oxygen once breathing is restored if trained to do so. Seek
medical attention immediately.

5. FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES
FLAMMABLE PROPERTIES:
FLASH POINT: -45 oF (-43oC) AUTOIGNITION TEMPERATURE: highly variable; > 530 oF (>280 oC)
OSHA/NFPA FLAMMABILITY CLASS: 1A (flammable liquid) LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT (%): 1.4%
UPPER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT (%): 7.6%
FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARDS Vapors may be ignited rapidly when exposed to heat, spark, open flame or other source of ignition.
Flowing product may be ignited by self-generated static electricity. When mixed with air and exposed to an ignition source, flammable vapors can burn in the open or explode in confined spaces. Being heavier
than air, vapors may travel long distances to an ignition source and flash back. Runoff to sewer may cause fire or explosion hazard.
EXTINGUISHING MEDIA SMALL FIRES: Any extinguisher suitable for Class B fires, dry chemical, CO2, water spray, fire fighting
foam, or Halon.
LARGE FIRES: Water spray, fog or fire fighting foam. Water may be ineffective for fighting the fire, but may be used to cool fire-exposed containers.
During certain times of the year and/or in certain geographical locations, gasoline may contain MTBE and/or TAME. Firefighting foam suitable for polar solvents is recommended for fuel with greater than
10% oxygenate concentration - refer to NFPA 11 “Low Expansion Foam - 1994 Edition.”
FIRE FIGHTING INSTRUCTIONS
Small fires in the incipient (beginning) stage may typically be extinguished using handheld portable fire extinguishers and other fire fighting equipment.
Firefighting activities that may result in potential exposure to high heat, smoke or toxic by-products of combustion should require NIOSH/MSHA- approved pressure-demand self-contained breathing
apparatus with full facepiece and full protective clothing.
Isolate area around container involved in fire. Cool tanks, shells, and containers exposed to fire and
excessive heat with water. For massive fires the use of unmanned hose holders or monitor nozzles may be advantageous to further minimize personnel exposure. Major fires may require withdrawal, allowing
the tank to burn. Large storage tank fires typically require specially trained personnel and equipment to extinguish the fire, often including the need for properly applied fire fighting foam.
See Section 16 for the NFPA 704 Hazard Rating.
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Gasoline, All Grades MSDS No. 9950

Revision Date: 09/25/2007 Page 4 of 9

6. ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
ACTIVATE FACILITY SPILL CONTINGENCY or EMERGENCY PLAN.
Evacuate nonessential personnel and remove or secure all ignition sources. Consider wind direction; stay upwind and uphill, if possible. Evaluate the direction of product travel, diking, sewers, etc. to confirm spill
areas. Spills may infiltrate subsurface soil and groundwater; professional assistance may be necessary to determine the extent of subsurface impact.
Carefully contain and stop the source of the spill, if safe to do so. Protect bodies of water by diking, absorbents, or absorbent boom, if possible. Do not flush down sewer or drainage systems, unless
system is designed and permitted to handle such material. The use of fire fighting foam may be useful in certain situations to reduce vapors. The proper use of water spray may effectively disperse product vapors or the liquid itself, preventing contact with ignition sources or areas/equipment that require protection.
Take up with sand or other oil absorbing materials. Carefully shovel, scoop or sweep up into a waste
container for reclamation or disposal - caution, flammable vapors may accumulate in closed containers. Response and clean-up crews must be properly trained and must utilize proper protective equipment
(see Section 8).
7. HANDLING and STORAGE
HANDLING PRECAUTIONS ******USE ONLY AS A MOTOR FUEL******
******DO NOT SIPHON BY MOUTH****** Handle as a flammable liquid. Keep away from heat, sparks, and open flame! Electrical equipment
should be approved for classified area. Bond and ground containers during product transfer to reduce the possibility of static-initiated fire or explosion.
Special slow load procedures for "switch loading" must be followed to avoid the static ignition hazard that can exist when higher flash point material (such as fuel oil) is loaded into tanks previously containing low
flash point products (such as this product) - see API Publication 2003, "Protection Against Ignitions Arising Out Of Static, Lightning and Stray Currents.
STORAGE PRECAUTIONS Keep away from flame, sparks, excessive temperatures and open flame. Use approved vented
containers. Keep containers closed and clearly labeled. Empty product containers or vessels may contain explosive vapors. Do not pressurize, cut, heat, weld or expose such containers to sources of ignition.
Store in a well-ventilated area. This storage area should comply with NFPA 30 "Flammable and Combustible Liquid Code". Avoid storage near incompatible materials. The cleaning of tanks previously containing this product should follow API Recommended Practice (RP) 2013 "Cleaning Mobile Tanks In
Flammable and Combustible Liquid Service" and API RP 2015 "Cleaning Petroleum Storage Tanks".
WORK/HYGIENIC PRACTICES
Emergency eye wash capability should be available in the near proximity to operations presenting a potential splash exposure. Use good personal hygiene practices. Avoid repeated and/or prolonged skin
exposure. Wash hands before eating, drinking, smoking, or using toilet facilities. Do not use as a cleaning solvent on the skin. Do not use solvents or harsh abrasive skin cleaners for washing this product
from exposed skin areas. Waterless hand cleaners are effective. Promptly remove contaminated clothing and launder before reuse. Use care when laundering to prevent the formation of flammable
vapors which could ignite via washer or dryer. Consider the need to discard contaminated leather shoes and gloves.
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Gasoline, All Grades MSDS No. 9950

Revision Date: 09/25/2007 Page 5 of 9

8. EXPOSURE CONTROLS and PERSONAL PROTECTION
EXPOSURE LIMITS Component (CAS No.) Exposure Limits
Source TWA (ppm) STEL (ppm) Note
Gasoline (86290-81-5) ACGIH 300 500 A3 Benzene (71-43-2) OSHA ACGIH USCG
1 0.5 1
5 2.5 5
Carcinogen
A1, skin
n-Butane (106-97-8) ACGIH 1000 -- Aliphatic Hydrocarbon Gases Alkane (C1-C4) Ethyl Alcohol (ethanol) (64-17-5) OSHA ACGIH 1000 1000 -- -- A4
Ethyl benzene (100-41-4) OSHA ACGIH 100 100 -- 125 A3
n-Hexane (110-54-3) OSHA ACGIH 500 50 -- -- Skin
Methyl-tertiary butyl ether [MTBE] (1634-04-4) ACGIH 50 A3 Tertiary-amyl methyl ether [TAME] (994-05-8) None established
Toluene (108-88-3) OSHA ACGIH 200 20 -- Ceiling: 300 ppm; Peak: 500 ppm (10 min.) A4
1,2,4- Trimethylbenzene (95-63-6) ACGIH 25 --
Xylene, mixed isomers (1330-20-7) OSHA ACGIH 100 100 -- 150 A4
ENGINEERING CONTROLS Use adequate ventilation to keep vapor concentrations of this product below occupational exposure and
flammability limits, particularly in confined spaces.
EYE/FACE PROTECTION
Safety glasses or goggles are recommended where there is a possibility of splashing or spraying.
SKIN PROTECTION Gloves constructed of nitrile or neoprene are recommended. Chemical protective clothing such as that
made of of E.I. DuPont Tychem ®, products or equivalent is recommended based on degree of exposure.
Note: The resistance of specific material may vary from product to product as well as with degree of
exposure. Consult manufacturer specifications for further information.
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
A NIOSH-approved air-purifying respirator with organic vapor cartridges or canister may be permissible under certain circumstances where airborne concentrations are or may be expected to exceed exposure
limits or for odor or irritation. Protection provided by air-purifying respirators is limited. Refer to OSHA 29 CFR 1910.134, NIOSH Respirator Decision Logic, and the manufacturer for additional guidance on respiratory protection selection and limitations.
Use a positive pressure, air-supplied respirator if there is a potential for uncontrolled release, exposure levels are not known, in oxygen-deficient atmospheres, or any other circumstance where an air-purifying
respirator may not provide adequate protection.
9. PHYSICAL and CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
APPEARANCE A translucent, straw-colored or light yellow liquid
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Gasoline, All Grades MSDS No. 9950

Revision Date: 09/25/2007 Page 6 of 9
ODOR A strong, characteristic aromatic hydrocarbon odor. Oxygenated gasoline with MTBE and/or TAME may
have a sweet, ether-like odor and is detectable at a lower concentration than non-oxygenated gasoline.
ODOR THRESHOLD Odor Detection Odor Recognition Non-oxygenated gasoline: 0.5 - 0.6 ppm 0.8 - 1.1 ppm
Gasoline with 15% MTBE: 0.2 - 0.3 ppm 0.4 - 0.7 ppm Gasoline with 15% TAME: 0.1 ppm 0.2 ppm
BASIC PHYSICAL PROPERTIES BOILING RANGE: 85 to 437 oF (39 to 200 oC)
VAPOR PRESSURE: 6.4 - 15 RVP @ 100 oF (38 oC) (275-475 mm Hg @ 68 oF (20 oC) VAPOR DENSITY (air = 1): AP 3 to 4 SPECIFIC GRAVITY (H2O = 1): 0.70 – 0.78
EVAPORATION RATE: 10-11 (n-butyl acetate = 1) PERCENT VOLATILES: 100 %
SOLUBILITY (H2O): Non-oxygenated gasoline - negligible (< 0.1% @ 77 oF). Gasoline with 15% MTBE - slight (0.1 - 3% @ 77 oF); ethanol is readily soluble in water
10. STABILITY and REACTIVITY )
STABILITY: Stable. Hazardous polymerization will not occur.
CONDITIONS TO AVOID
Avoid high temperatures, open flames, sparks, welding, smoking and other ignition sources
INCOMPATIBLE MATERIALS
Keep away from strong oxidizers.
HAZARDOUS DECOMPOSITION PRODUCTS Carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide and non-combusted hydrocarbons (smoke). Contact with nitric and
sulfuric acids will form nitrocresols that can decompose violently.
11. TOXICOLOGICAL PROPERTIES
ACUTE TOXICITY Acute Dermal LD50 (rabbits): > 5 ml/kg Acute Oral LD50 (rat): 18.75 ml/kg
Primary dermal irritation (rabbits): slightly irritating Draize eye irritation (rabbits): non-irritating Guinea pig sensitization: negative
CHRONIC EFFECTS AND CARCINOGENICITY Carcinogenicity: OSHA: NO IARC: YES - 2B NTP: NO ACGIH: YES (A3)
IARC has determined that gasoline and gasoline exhaust are possibly carcinogenic in humans. Inhalation exposure to completely vaporized unleaded gasoline caused kidney cancers in male rats and liver tumors
in female mice. The U.S. EPA has determined that the male kidney tumors are species-specific and are irrelevant for human health risk assessment. The significance of the tumors seen in female mice is not known. Exposure to light hydrocarbons in the same boiling range as this product has been associated in animal studies with effects to the central and peripheral nervous systems, liver, and kidneys. The significance of these animal models to predict similar human response to gasoline is uncertain.
This product contains benzene. Human health studies indicate that prolonged and/or repeated overexposure to benzene may cause damage to the blood-forming system (particularly bone marrow),
and serious blood disorders such as aplastic anemia and leukemia. Benzene is listed as a human carcinogen by the NTP, IARC, OSHA and ACGIH.
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Gasoline, All Grades MSDS No. 9950

Revision Date: 09/25/2007 Page 7 of 9
This product may contain methyl tertiary butyl ether (MTBE ): animal and human health effects studies indicate that MTBE may cause eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation, central nervous system
depression and neurotoxicity. MTBE is classified as an animal carcinogen (A3) by the ACGIH.
12. ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Keep out of sewers, drainage areas and waterways. Report spills and releases, as applicable, under
Federal and State regulations. If released, oxygenates such as ethers and alcohols will be expected to exhibit fairly high mobility in soil, and therefore may leach into groundwater. The API (www.api.org)
provides a number of useful references addressing petroleum and oxygenate contamination of groundwater.
13. DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
Consult federal, state and local waste regulations to determine appropriate disposal options.

14. TRANSPORTATION INFORMATION

DOT PROPER SHIPPING NAME: Gasoline
DOT HAZARD CLASS and PACKING GROUP: 3, PG II
DOT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER: UN 1203
DOT SHIPPING LABEL:
FLAMMABLE LIQUID
PLACARD:

15. REGULATORY INFORMATION
U.S. FEDERAL, STATE, and LOCAL REGULATORY INFORMATION This product and its constituents listed herein are on the EPA TSCA Inventory. Any spill or uncontrolled
release of this product, including any substantial threat of release, may be subject to federal, state and/or local reporting requirements. This product and/or its constituents may also be subject to other federal, state, or local regulations; consult those regulations applicable to your facility/operation.
CLEAN WATER ACT (OIL SPILLS) Any spill or release of this product to "navigable waters" (essentially any surface water, including certain
wetlands) or adjoining shorelines sufficient to cause a visible sheen or deposit of a sludge or emulsion must be reported immediately to the National Response Center (1-800-424-8802) as required by U.S.
Federal Law. Also contact appropriate state and local regulatory agencies as required.
CERCLA SECTION 103 and SARA SECTION 304 (RELEASE TO THE ENVIRONMENT) The CERCLA definition of hazardous substances contains a “petroleum exclusion” clause which exempts crude oil, refined, and unrefined petroleum products and any indigenous components of such. However, other federal reporting requirements (e.g., SARA Section 304 as well as the Clean Water Act if the spill
occurs on navigable waters) may still apply.
SARA SECTION 311/312 - HAZARD CLASSES
ACUTE HEALTH CHRONIC HEALTH FIRE SUDDEN RELEASE OF PRESSURE REACTIVE
X X X -- --
SARA SECTION 313 - SUPPLIER NOTIFICATION
This product contains the following toxic chemicals subject to the reporting requirements of section 313 of the Emergency Planning and Community Right-To-Know Act (EPCRA) of 1986 and of 40 CFR 372:
INGREDIENT NAME (CAS NUMBER) CONCENTRATION WT. PERCENT
Benzene (71-43-2) 0.1 to 4.9 (0.1 to 1.3 for reformulated gasoline)
Ethyl benzene (100-41-4) < 3
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Gasoline, All Grades MSDS No. 9950

Revision Date: 09/25/2007 Page 8 of 9
n-Hexane (110-54-3) 0.5 to 4
Methyl-tertiary butyl ether (MTBE) (1634-04-4) 0 to 15.0
Toluene (108-88-3) 1 to 15
1,2,4- Trimethylbenzene (95-63-6) < 6
Xylene, mixed isomers (1330-20-7) 1 to 15
US EPA guidance documents (www.epa.gov/tri) for reporting Persistent Bioaccumulating Toxics (PBTs)
indicate this product may contain the following deminimis levels of toxic chemicals subject to Section 313 reporting:
INGREDIENT NAME (CAS NUMBER) CONCENTRATION - Parts per million (ppm) by weight Polycyclic aromatic compounds (PACs)
Benzo (g,h,i) perylene (191-24-2) Lead (7439-92-1)
17
2.55 0.079

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 LIST OF CHEMICALS
This product contains the following chemicals that are included on the Proposition 65 “List of Chemicals” required by the California Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986:
INGREDIENT NAME (CAS NUMBER) Date Listed
Benzene 2/27/1987 Ethyl benzene 6/11/2004 Toluene 1/1/1991
CANADIAN REGULATORY INFORMATION (WHMIS) Class B, Division 2 (Flammable Liquid)
Class D, Division 2A (Very toxic by other means) and Class D, Division 2B (Toxic by other means)
16. OTHER INFORMATION
NFPA® HAZARD RATING HEALTH: 1 Slight
FIRE: 3 Serious
REACTIVITY: 0 Minimal
HMIS® HAZARD RATING HEALTH: 1 * Slight
FIRE: 3 Serious
PHYSICAL: 0 Minimal * CHRONIC
SUPERSEDES MSDS DATED: 07/01/06
ABBREVIATIONS: AP = Approximately < = Less than > = Greater than
N/A = Not Applicable N/D = Not Determined ppm = parts per million
ACRONYMS:
ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association ANSI American National Standards Institute
[phone] API American Petroleum Institute
[phone]
CERCLA Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and Liability Act
DOT U.S. Department of Transportation [General Info: [phone]]
EPA U.S. Environmental Protection Agency HMIS Hazardous Materials Information System
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Gasoline, All Grades MSDS No. 9950

Revision Date: 09/25/2007 Page 9 of 9
IARC International Agency For Research On Cancer
MSHA Mine Safety and Health Administration NFPA National Fire Protection Association [phone] NIOSH National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health
NOIC Notice of Intended Change (proposed change to ACGIH TLV)
NTP National Toxicology Program OPA Oil Pollution Act of 1990
OSHA U.S. Occupational Safety & Health Administration
PEL Permissible Exposure Limit (OSHA) RCRA Resource Conservation and Recovery Act
REL Recommended Exposure Limit (NIOSH) SARA Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986 Title III SCBA Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus SPCC Spill Prevention, Control, and
Countermeasures STEL Short-Term Exposure Limit (generally 15
minutes) TLV Threshold Limit Value (ACGIH)
TSCA Toxic Substances Control Act TWA Time Weighted Average (8 hr.)
WEEL Workplace Environmental Exposure Level (AIHA)
WHMIS Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (Canada)

DISCLAIMER OF EXPRESSED AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES
Information presented herein has been compiled from sources considered to be dependable, and is accurate and reliable to the best of our knowledge and belief, but is not guaranteed to be so. Since conditions of use are beyond our control, we make no warranties,
expressed or implied, except those that may be contained in our written contract of sale or acknowledgment.
Vendor assumes no responsibility for injury to vendee or third persons proximately caused by the material if reasonable safety procedures are not adhered to as stipulated in the data sheet. Additionally, vendor assumes no responsibility for injury to vendee or third persons proximately caused by abnormal use of the material, even if reasonable safety procedures are followed. Furthermore, vendee assumes the risk in their use of the material.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx
Attachment E
Site Orientation
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx
Attachment E. Site Orientation
AECOM will conduct a site safety briefing for a person’s initial visit to the site. The briefing will be conducted:
§Prior to the start of work;
§For any new AECOM or subconsultant personnel; and
§At each mobilization, or whenever there is a change in task or significant change in task location.
All personnel working on the project who have received the site briefing (including the HASP review) will sign the Personal
Acknowledgement located at the end of the HASP. Visitors may receive a shortened version to address the hazards specific to
their visit.
The following items, at minimum, will be discussed during the site safety briefing:
§Contents of this HASP;
§The Emergency Response Plan;
§Contractor SH&E Management expectations;
§Injury management, including notification and hospital and occupational clinic locations;
§The AECOM 4-Sight program;
§Stop Work authority;
§The JSAs/ Pre-JHAs (Attachment F) for the tasks that will be performed on a given job;
§Completion of a THA each day (Attachment F);
§Types of hazards at the site and means for minimizing exposure to them;
§Instructions for new operations to be conducted, and safe work practices;
§PPE that must be used;
§Lone worker check-in procedures;
§Emergency evacuation routes, muster points, and tornado/storm shelters; and
§Location and use of emergency equipment.
These meetings must be documented and maintained in the project files.
NGB/A7OR
Eastern Region Installation Restoration Program Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
DCS_Americas_HAZWOPER HASP Template_V1.2.Docx
Attachment F
Project/Task-Specific Job Safety Analysis
or Pre-Job Hazard Assessments

Pre-Job Hazard Assessment (S3NA-209-FM4)
Revision 4 March 1, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 1 of 5
Americas
Pre-Job Hazard Assessment S3NA-209-FM4

Location: Charlotte, NC Date: 2/26/2018
Prepared By: Emily Love Approved By: Lee Davis

Principal Activities Potential Safety/Health Hazards
Initial
Risk
Rating
Control Measures
Final
Risk
Rating
List principle activities involved in the
scope of work Identify each safety or health hazard Identify engineering and administrative controls
and any specific PPE that is required
ACTIVITY 1 – Mob/Demob from Site Insufficient maintenance of vehicle 12 Conduct vehicle pre-inspection, check fluid levels, check
lights, etc. 4
Dangerous driving by other vehicles 12 Be alert, and do not drive while distracted (i.e. no cell
phone use or other devices); plan route ahead of time; if
using a GPS, start the device before putting vehicle in
gear (i.e. do not mess with device while driving); use
defensive driving techniques
4
Inclement weather 12 Adjust driving as weather conditions shift, avoid driving in
extreme conditions such as heavy in 4
Click here to enter text. 12 Click here to enter text. 4
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
ACTIVITY 2 – General Site Activities (Walking, utility markout, etc.)
Vehicle Traffic 12 Cross at crosswalks, wear appropriate PPE, do not walk
while distracted 2
Uneven terrain 9 Be alert to ground conditions, wear appropriate footwear,
do not walk while distracted 1
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
ACTIVITY 3 – Drilling Rotating equipment 16 Do not wear loose-fitting clothing, do not touch rotating
equipment, ensure machine guards are in place 4
Noise 9 Wear hearing protection as appropriate 1
Heavy lifting 8 Use proper lifting techniques, team lift objects >50lbs 3

Pinch points / struck by 15 Wear appropriate gloves, be aware of body positioning,
ensure that machine guards and emergency stops are
functioning correctly
4

Pre-Job Hazard Assessment (S3NA-209-FM4)
Revision 4 March 1, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 2 of 5
Principal Activities Potential Safety/Health Hazards
Initial
Risk
Rating
Control Measures
Final
Risk
Rating
Subsurface utilities 20 Complete utility locate prior to intrusive work. Contact
811. Hand clear first five feet of each point. 4
ACTIVITY 4 – Well Installation Pinch points 15 Wear appropriate gloves, be aware of body positioning,
ensure that machine guards and emergency stops are functioning correctly
4
Heavy lifting 8 Use proper lifting techniques, team lift objects >50lbs 3
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
ACTIVITY 5 – Soil sampling Twisting motions 8 Use proper hand augering technique 2
Contact with contaminants 4 Use appropriate gloves, wash hands prior to eating 1
Slip/Trips/Falls 4 Be aware of surroundings while working #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
ACTIVITY 6 – Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
ACTIVITY 7 – Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
ACTIVITY 8 – Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
ACTIVITY 9 – Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #

Pre-Job Hazard Assessment (S3NA-209-FM4)
Revision 4 March 1, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 3 of 5
Principal Activities Potential Safety/Health Hazards
Initial
Risk
Rating
Control Measures
Final
Risk
Rating
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #
Click here to enter text. # Click here to enter text. #

Pre-Job Hazard Assessment (S3NA-209-FM4)
Revision 4 March 1, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 4 of 5
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Step # Equipment to be Used Inspection requirements Training Requirements
List equipment to be used in work activity List inspection/permit requirements for work
activity
List training requirements including hazard
communication
1. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text.
2. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text.
3. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text.
4. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text.
5. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text.
6. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text.
7. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text.
8. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text.
9. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text.

Pre-Job Hazard Assessment (S3NA-209-FM4)
Revision 4 March 1, 2016
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 5 of 5
INSTRUCTIONS AND RISK MATRIX
Hazard Evaluation – Identify principle steps of the task. Identify potential safety/health hazards for each step and determine initial risk rating using the matrix
provided below. Identify control measures including PPE for each hazard. Re-evaluate hazard potential and assign a final risk rating. If the final risk rating is a 5-
9 (medium risk) or 10-25 (high risk), additional hazard controls shall be identified and applied until the final risk rating is reduced to 4 or below. The final risk rating
cannot be reduced to 4 or lower, additional approvals are needed before the activity can begin. Add additional rows as required to cover all major steps/aspects of
the activity.
Special Requirements – Identify equipment to be used including specific PPE required. Identify inspection requirements such as competent person, permit issue,
documented task hazard analysis, etc. Identify training requirements such as hazard communication, scaffold user, fall protection, etc.

Severity – Potential Consequences
People Property Damage Environmental Impact Public Image/Reputation
Catastrophic Fatality, Multiple Major Incidents >$1M USD, Structural collapse Offsite impact requiring remediation Government intervention
Critical Permanent impairment, Long term injury/illness >$250K to $1M USD Onsite impact requiring remediation Media intervention
Major Lost/Restricted Work > $10K to $250K USD Release at/above reportable limit Owner intervention
Moderate Medical Treatment > $1K to $10K USD Release below reportable limit Community or local attention
Minor First Aid </=$1K USD Small chemical release contained onsite Individual complaint

Probability
Frequent Expected to occur during task/activity 9/10
Probable Likely to occur during task/activity 1/10
Occasional May occur during the task/activity 1/100
Remote Unlikely to occur during task/activity 1/1,000
Improbable Highly unlikely to occur, but possible during task/activity 1/10,000

Risk Rating (Probability x Severity) Risk Acceptance Authority
1 to 4 (Low) Risk is tolerable, manage at local level
5 to 9 (Medium) Risk requires approval by Operations Lead/Supervisor & SH&E Manager
10 to 25 (High) Risk requires the approval of the Operations Manager & SH&E Director

High Low
Probability Severity
5 - Catastrophic 4 - Critical 3 - Major 2 - Moderate 1 - Minor
High

Low
5 - Frequent 25 20 15 10 5
4 - Probable 20 16 12 8 4
3 - Occasional 15 12 9 6 3
2 - Remote 10 8 6 4 2
1 - Improbable 5 4 3 2 1
10-25 (red) are high risk, 5-9 (yellow) are medium risk, and 1-4 (green) are low risk

Task Hazard Assessment (S3AM-209-FM6)
Revision 6 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 1 of 2
Americas
Task Hazard Assessment S3AM-209-FM6
Date: Project Name / Location:
Permit / Job Number: Project Number:
Description of Task:
Do you have a pre-job hazard assessment (JHA) specific to this task in your hands?
Yes – review the steps, hazards, and precautions. Attach and reference JHA in the form below. Add any additional steps, hazards, and precautions to this form otherwise unidentified on JHA.
No – list all steps, hazards, and precautions associated with the task in the form below.
Hazards
(identify all hazards & potential hazards of each step)
Risk
(before)
Control Measures / Precautions
(describe how that hazard will be controlled)
Risk
(after)
Revised?
(yes – record time)
Highest Risk Index
The Task Hazard Assessment is to be completed at the worksite by the
individual(s) who is intended to conduct the task immediately prior to initiating the
associated task. Number and attach additional pages if necessary.Originator
Print Name Signature
Worker/Visitor acknowledgement and review of this content on back of this
document. Originator to also sign Worker acknowledgement section.Supervisor
Print Name Signature
Risk Matrix on Reverse
THIS FORM IS TO BE KEPT ON JOB SITE.
Basic Task Steps
(explain in order how the task will be carried out)
Task Hazard Assessment (S3AM-209-FM6)
Revision 6 June 26, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 2 of 2
WORKER SIGN ON Task Hazard Assessment
Follow-Up/Review Instructions:
Identify basic steps of the task and
associated hazards. Calculate the initial risk
rating. Identify control measure to eliminate
or reduce the hazard’s risk and calculate the
residual risk rating. If the risk rating (after
controls are implemented) cannot be reduced
to 4 or lower, additional approvals are needed
before the activity can begin.
Employees shall monitor the activities for
compliance with this document. Workers
should STOP WORK on a task if conditions
change from the planned and agreed
approach to the work.
This document should be updated to reflect
new conditions or changes in task methods.
NAME (Please Print) TIME SIGNATURE
I participated in the development and understand the content of this
Task Hazard Assessment. Initials/Time Initials/Time Initials/Time
VISITOR SIGN ON
I have read and understand the content of this Task Hazard Assessment. Emergency Meeting / Assembly Area
Emergency Contact #
Method of Communication
Risk Rating Matrix
Daily Tailgate Meeting (S3AM-209-FM5)
Revision 7 December 27, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 1 of 2
Americas
Daily Tailgate Meeting S3AM-209-FM5
Instructions: Conduct meeting prior to sending crews to individual tasks. Require
attendance of all AECOM employees and subcontractors. Invite personnel from
simultaneous operations for coordination purposes. Review scope of work and
briefly discuss required and applicable topics. This meeting is a daily refresher,
not a full orientation. Task-specific discussions associated with Task Hazard
Assessment (THA) follow this meeting at the task location immediately before
individual task is started.
Date: Project Name/Location: Project Number:
Today’s Scope of Work:
Muster Point Location: First Aid Kit Location: Fire Extinguisher Location: Spill Kit Location:
1.Required Topics 2.Discuss if Applicable to Today’s Work
Fitness for Duty requirements, all sign in / sign out
Required training (incl. task specific) completed and current
SH&E Plan onsite - understood, reviewed, signed by all (incl.
scope, hazards, controls, procedures, requirements, etc.)
Pre-Job Hazard Assessments (JHA/JSAs) available and
understood
Task Hazard Assessments (THAs) are to be completed
for each task immediately prior to conducting
STOP WORK Right & Responsibility- all task
changes/changed conditions re-assess with THA
Requirement to report to supervisor any injury, illness,
damage, near miss, unsafe act / condition
Emergency Response Plan – including muster point,
first aid kit, fire extinguisher, clinic/hospital location
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) - Required items per
hazard assessments in good condition / in use by all
Equipment/machinery inspected (documented as required)
and in good condition - operators properly trained/certified
Work area set up and demarcation/ barricades in place to
protect workers, site staff, and the public
Required checklists/records available, understood (describe):
Check as reviewed or mark as not applicable
Biological/ Chemical / Electrical Hazards
Ergonomics - Lifting, Body Position
Lock Out/ Tag Out
Short Service Employees - visual identifier and mentor/
oversight assignment
Simultaneous/ Neighbouring Operations
Slip/ Trip/ Fall Hazards
Specialized PPE Needs
Traffic Control
Waste Management/ Decontamination
Weather Hazards / Heat Stress / Cold Stress
Subcontractor Requirements (e.g., JHAs, THAs,
procedures, reporting, etc.)
Work Permits / Plans required (e.g., Fall Protection,
Confined Space, Hot Work, Critical Lifts, etc.); in place,
understood (identify/attach):
Other Topics (describe/attach):
Client specific requirements (describe):
3.Daily Check Out by Site Supervisor
Describe incidents, near misses, observations or Stop Work
interventions from today: Describe Lessons Learned/ Improvement Areas from today:
The site is being left in a safe condition and work crew checked out as fit unless otherwise specified as above.
Site Supervisor Name Signature Date
Time (at end of day / shift)
Worker Acknowledgement / Sign In Sign Out sheets applicable to this meeting are on reverse and, if applicable, attached.
AECOM Supervisor Name:
Phone Number:
AECOM SH&E Rep. Name: Phone Number:
Meeting Leader:
Lessons Learned / SH&E improvements (describe):
4 n
Daily Tailgate Meeting (S3AM-209-FM5)
Revision 7 December 27, 2017
PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. CONTROLLED COPY IS AVAILABLE ON COMPANY INTRANET. 2 of 2
(Attach additional Site Worker sign-in/out sheets if needed) Identify number of attached sheets:
SITE VISITOR / SITE REPRESENTATIVE
Name Company Name Arrival Time Departure Time Signature
All employees:
STOP WORK if concerned / uncertain about safety / hazard or additional precaution is not recorded on the THA.
Be alert and communicate any changes in personnel or conditions at the worksite to the supervisor.
Reassess task, hazards, & mitigations on an ongoing basis; amend the THA if needed.
SITE WORKERS (including AECOM Contractors and Subcontractors): Your signature below means that you understand:
*The requirement to participate in creating, reviewing, & updating hazard assessments (THA) applicable to your task(s).
*The hazards & control measures associated with each task you are about to perform.
*The permit to work requirements applicable to the work you are about to perform (if it includes permitted activities).
*That no tasks or work is to be performed without a hazard assessment.
*Your authority & obligation to “Stop Work” intervene, speak up/ listen up.
Your initials (right columns) certify that you arrived & departed fit for duty, & have reported all incidents/near misses; meaning:
*You are physically and mentally fit for duty and have inspected your required PPE to ensure satisfactory condition.
* You are not under the influence of any type of medication, drugs, or alcohol that could affect your ability to work safely.
*You are aware of your responsibility to immediately report any illness, injury (regardless of where or when it occurred), or
impairment/fatigue issue to the AECOM Supervisor.
* You signed out as fit / uninjured unless you have otherwise informed the AECOM Supervisor.
Print Name & Company Signature
Initials & Sign In
Time
Initials & Sign
Out Time
In & Fit Out & Fit
In & Fit Out & Fit
In & Fit Out & Fit
In & Fit Out & Fit
In & Fit Out & Fit
In & Fit Out & Fit
In & Fit Out & Fit
In & Fit Out & Fit
In & Fit Out & Fit
In & Fit Out & Fit
_________
June 2018
This page intentionally left blank.
June 2018
This page intentionally left blank.
January 2018
Appendix E
Field Standard Operating
Procedures
AECOM SOPsNo. 1 Calibration and Maintenance of Field Instruments
No. 2 Field Reporting and DocumentationNo. 3 Sample Classification, Packaging and Shipping No. 4 IDW Management
No. 5 DecontaminationNo. 6 EnCore Sampling
No. 7 Utility Clearance ProceduresNo. 8 Hand Auger SamplingNo. 10 Soil Probe Operation
No. 11 LoggingNo. 12 Headspace Soil ScreeningNo. 13 Soil Sampling
No. 14 Groundwater Sampling
January 2018
This page intentionally left blank.
SOP No. 1 Calibration and Maintenance of Field Instruments
1 of 4 January 2018
1.Objective
This document defines the standard operating procedure for calibration and maintenance of field
instruments frequently used during environmental field activities. This Standard Operating
Procedure (SOP) gives descriptions of the most common used of these instruments and field
procedures necessary to calibrate and maintain these field instruments. Other related SOPs are
listed below:
·SOP No. 4 –Decontamination
·SOP No. 8 –Field Reporting and Documentation.
2.Equipment
The following equipment is required during field instrument calibration and maintenance
activities.
·Latex/Nitrile gloves
·Site logbook
·Field data sheets
·Equipment Calibration Record forms
·Distilled/deionized water
·Decontamination equipment
·Health and Safety Equipment
·Field Instrument Operations Manual
·Calibration gases for Air Monitoring Equipment
·Calibration solutions for Water Monitoring Equipment.
3.Type of Field Instruments Commonly used during Environmental Investigations
The following are some of the more commonly used instruments during environmental
investigations.
·Photoionization Detector (PID)
·Multi-gas Meter (usually includes Explosimeter, Hydrogen Sulfide detector, Oxygen
sensor, and Carbon Monoxide meter)
·RAM
SOP No. 1 Calibration and Maintenance of Field Instruments
2 of 4 January 2018
·Groundwater Level Indicator
·Petroleum/Groundwater Interface Probe
·Groundwater pH, Temperature, Conductivity Meter.
4.Maintenance
Maintenance of field instruments should be performed on all field instruments on a regular basis
to ensure instruments are in proper working order at all times and to prolong the instruments life.
General maintenance such as regular cleaning of the instrument, battery checks and replacement,
and ensuring the instrument is handled and stored properly can easily be performed by URS
employees. Other maintenance items such as sensor repair,annual calibrations and repair of a
malfunctioning piece of equipment should be performed by the instrument manufacturer or
licensed dealer and should not be performed by URS employees. Contact the manufacturer to
determine where the instrument should be submitted for these maintenance tasks. The vast range
of instruments available for use by the environmental professional have an equally vast
maintenance regime and therefore maintenance guidelines specified in manual for each piece of
equipment should be referred to and followed at all times.
5.Calibration
Due to the vast number of field instruments available, various parameters potentially monitored,
and the wide range of functions potentially performed by each instrument, a description of the
calibration of every type of instrument available is not feasible. However, a generalized SOP for
general types of field equipment calibration is presented and should be followed while
performing calibrations of field instruments.
Air Monitoring Instruments (PID, Multigas Meters, Hydrogen Sulfide Detectors, etc.)
·Turn the instrument on. The on/off switch may be a toggle switch, knob, or button to be
depressed depending on the type and brand of instrument being used.
·Allow the instrument to “warm up” and progress through the startup diagnostic routine.
·Apply the calibration gas (isobutylene, methane, multi-gas mixtures, etc.) to the
instrument to get an initial instrument reading.
·Record the initial reading on the proper equipment calibration field form and in the site
logbook. Also record the calibration standard and concentration of that standard on the
field form and in the logbook.
SOP No. 1 Calibration and Maintenance of Field Instruments
3 of 4 January 2018
·If the initial reading is greater than +/-5% of the calibration standard proceed with
instrument calibration as specified in the equipment operator’s manual. If the initial
reading is within this +/-5% window of the calibration gas standard, the instrument
should be considered calibrated and additional calibration is not required at this time. At
periodic intervals throughout the day the calibration of the instrument should be check
and re-evaluated.
·Apply the calibration gas and proceed as directed in the operator’s manual.
·After calibration is complete, record the final calibrated reading on the field equipment
calibration forms and in the field logbook. At periodic intervals throughout the day the
calibration of the instrument should be check and re-evaluated.
Groundwater Parameter Instruments (pH, Temperature, Electrical Conductivity, Turbidity, etc.)
Frequently one instrument will have multiple sensors for measuring various parameters in water.
Sensors for temperature, electrical conductivity and turbidity require scheduled calibrations by
the equipment manufacturer or authorized service center and should not be performed in the
field. The sensor for pH analysis should be calibrated daily in the field prior to use.
·Turn the instrument on. The on/off switch may be a toggle switch, knob, or button to be
depressed depending on the type and brand of instrument being used.
·Allow the instrument to “warm up” and progress through the startup diagnostic routine.
·Apply pH 7 and pH 4 buffers solutions as instructed by the instrument prompts or the
operator’s manual.
·Adjust the reading of the instrument to correlate to the corresponding buffer solution
being applied.
·Record reading in the field logbook and on proper field calibration forms.
·Dispose of used buffer solution and reseal buffer solution containers for future use.
Water Level Indicator and Petroleum/Water Interface Probe
Field calibration of this instrument is not required. Rather a series of field checks to ensure the
instrument is in proper working order will be described.
·Turn the instrument on. The on/off switch is usually a knob located on the side of the
reel in which the measuring tape is rolled onto.
SOP No. 1 Calibration and Maintenance of Field Instruments
4 of 4 January 2018
·Push the “test” button to ensure that the batteries are in working order. If the batteries are
working, an audible tone will be heard and a visible light located on the side of the real
will illuminate.
·Immerse the sensor probe in potable water to ensure the audible tone is heard and visible
light illuminates when the electrical circuit is completed when the probe enters the water.
Make an observation of where the water level is at on the probe when the circuit is
completed. Repeat this step several times to familiarize yourself with this contact point.
By performing this step, the chance of submersing the probe to a greater depth than
necessary is reduced. Over submersion of the probe will result in a greater amount of the
probe and measuring tape to be cleaned and decontaminated prior to collection of another
groundwater measurement.
·After collection of every water level measurement, decontaminate all portions of the
water level meter or petroleum/water interface probe that came in contact with the
groundwater as outlined in SOP No. 4 –Decontamination.
6.Decontamination
Small instruments and equipment will be cleaned according to SOP No. 4 –Decontamination and
the generalized procedures stated below:
a.Rinse with potable water to remove the gross contamination
b.Scrub with brush using Alconox soap (or equivalent) and distilled water solution
c.Rinse with distilled water.
Decontaminated equipment should be wrapped in aluminum foil or placed in plastic bags between
uses and during storage.
SOP No.2 Field Reporting and Documentation
1 of 3 January 2018
This document defines the standard procedure for field reporting and documentation. This
procedure provides descriptions of equipment and field procedures necessary to properly
document field activities.
1.Equipment
Equipment used during field reporting and documentation:
·Calculator
·Bound field logbook
·Waterproof pen and permanent marker
·Well completion information form (if necessary)
·Groundwater sampling form (if necessary)
·Boring log (if necessary)
·Other related field paperwork, as needed.
2.Field Reporting and Documentation
Documentation of observations and data acquired in the field will provide information on the
acquisition of samples and also provide a permanent record of field activities. The observations
and data will be recorded using pens with permanent waterproof ink in a permanently bound
weatherproof field logbook.
Field investigation situations vary widely. No set of general rules can anticipate all information
that must be entered in a logbook for a particular site. A site-specific logging procedure will be
developed to include sufficient information so that the sampling activity can be reconstructed
without relying on the memory of field personnel. The logbooks will be kept in the field team
member’s possession or in a secure place during the investigation.
Each project should have a dedicated logbook. The project leader’s name, the sample team
leader’s name (if appropriate), the project name and location, and the project number should be
entered on the inside of the front cover of the logbook. It is recommended that each page in the
logbook shall be numbered and dated. The entries should be legible and contain accurate and
inclusive documentation of an individual’s project activities. At the end of the all entries for
each day, or at the end of a particular event, if appropriate, the investigator shall draw a diagonal
line and initial and date indicating the conclusion of the entry. Since field records are the basis
for later written reports, language should be objective, factual, and free of personal feelings or
other terminology which might prove inappropriate. Once completed, these field logbooks
SOP No.2 Field Reporting and Documentation
2 of 3 January 2018
become accountable documents and must be maintained as part of the official project files. All
aspects of sample collection and handling, as well as visual observations, shall be documented in
the logbooks.
The information in the field book will include the following as a minimum.
·Personnel present
·Level of PPE used during sampling
·Weather conditions
·Names and responsibilities of field crew members
·Names and title of any site visitors
·Field analytical equipment, and equipment utilized to make physical measurements shall
be identified
·Sample collection equipment (where appropriate)
·Calibration results of field equipment
·Location of Sample
·Description of samples (matrix sampled)
·Results of any field measurements, such as depth to water, pH, temperature, and
conductivity
·Sample depth (if applicable)
·Date and time of sample collection
·Sample identification code including QC and QA identification
·Number and volume of samples
·Sampling methods or reference to the appropriate SOP
·Sample handling, including filtration and preservation, as appropriate for separate sample
aliquots
·Analytes of interest
·Information concerning sampling changes, scheduling modifications, and change orders
·Field observations
SOP No.2 Field Reporting and Documentation
3 of 3 January 2018
·Summary of daily tasks
·Signature and date by personnel responsible for observations
·Problems identified with equipment or aspects of the project.
Changes or deletions in the field book should be lined out with a single strike mark, initialed, and
remain legible. Sufficient information should be recorded to allow the sampling event to be
reconstructed without relying on the sampler’s memory.
Each page in the field books will be signed by the person making the entry at the end of the day,
as well as on the bottom of each page. Anyone making entries in another person’s field book
will sign and date those entries.
3.Document Control
Document control refers to the maintenance of inspection and investigation project files. All
information below shall be kept in project files. Investigators may keep copies of reports in their
personal files, however, all official and original documents relating to inspections and
investigations shall be placed in the official project files. The following documents shall be
placed in the project file, if applicable:
·Chain-of-Custody Records and bound field logbooks
·Records obtained during the investigation
·Complete copy of the analytical data and memorandums transmitting analytical data
·Official correspondence received or transmitted, including records of telephone calls
·Photographs and negatives associated with the project
·One copy of the final report and transmittal memorandum
·Relevant documents related to the original investigation/inspection or follow-up activities
related to the investigation/inspection.
Inappropriate personal observations and irrelevant information should not be placed in the
official project files. At the conclusion of the project, the project leader shall review the file to
ensure that it is complete.
SOP No. 3 Sample Classification, Packaging and Shipping
Page 1 of 5 January 2018
1.Purpose and Scope
This document defines the standard protocols for sample handling, documentation, and tracking.
This SOP serves as a supplement to the Work Plan Addendum and Sampling and Analysis Plan
Addendum and is intended to be used together with several other SOPs. Applicable SOPs are
listed below:
·SOP No. 11 -Groundwater Sampling
·SOP No. 25 -Sample Containers, Preservation and Holding Times
·SOP No. 26 -Sample Control and Custody Procedures
·SOP No. 28 –Soil Sampling
·SOP No. 31 -Surface Water Sampling
·SOP No. 32 -Sediment Sampling.
2.Procedures For Sample Identification, Handling, And Documentation
2.1 Sample Identification
Samples collected during site activities shall have discrete sample identification numbers. These
numbers are necessary to identify and track each of the many samples collected for analysis
during the life of project. In addition, the sample identification numbers can be used in a
database to identify and retrieve the analytical results received from the laboratory.
Each sample is identified by a unique code which indicates the site identification number, sample
location number, sample matrix identifier, and sample depth. The sample locations will be
numbered sequentially.
If used, sample matrix identifiers may include the following:
SF -Direct-Push Soil Sample (Field Analysis)
SL -Direct-Push Soil Sample (Laboratory Analysis)
WF -Direct-Push Groundwater Sample (Field Analysis)
SS -Soil Sample
GW -Groundwater (from a Monitoring Well)
SW -Surface Water Sample
SD -Sediment Sample
SL -Sludge or Sewer Sediment Sample
SOP No. 3 Sample Classification, Packaging and Shipping
Page 2 of 5 January 2018
TB -Trip Blank
RN -Rinsate (Deionized Water)
An example of the sample identification number codes for a sewer sediment sample collected for
field analysis will be: AUS-0A2B-004-SL-05.
Where AUS indicates Additional Uncharacterized Sites, 0A2B indicates the site location, 004
indicates the sample location, SL indicates the sample media, and 05 indicates the sampling
interval.
The sampling locations, sample type, and sample sequence identifiers will be established prior to
field activities for each sample to be collected. On-site personnel will obtain assistance from the
Project Manager in defining any special sampling requirements.
2.2 Sample Labeling
Sample labels will be filled out as completely as possible by a designated member of the
sampling team prior to beginning field sampling activities each day. The date, time, sampler's
signature, and the last field of the sample identification number should not be completed until the
time of sample collection. All sample labels shall be filled out using waterproof ink. At a
minimum, each label shall contain the following information:
·Sampler's company affiliation
·Site location
·Sample identification code
·Date and time of sample collection
·Analyses required
·Method of preservation (if any) used
·Sample matrix (i.e., soil, groundwater, surface water)
·Sampler's signature or initials.
2.3 Sample Handling
This section discusses proper sample containers, preservatives, and handling and shipping
procedures.
SOP No. 3 Sample Classification, Packaging and Shipping
Page 3 of 5 January 2018
2.3.1 Sample Handling and Shipping
After sample collection, each container will be labeled as described above, and then stored on ice
at 4°C (+/-2°C)in an insulated cooler until packed for shipment to the laboratory. The ice will
be double bagged in Ziploc-type storage bags.
The sample containers will be placed in reclosable Ziploc plastic storage bags and wrapped in
protective packing material (bubble wrap). Samples will then be placed right side up in a cooler
with ice (double bagged using plastic bags), and taped with a custody seal for delivery to the
laboratory. Samples will be hand delivered or shipped by overnight express carrier for delivery
to the analytical laboratory. All samples must be shipped for laboratory receipt and analyses
within specific holding times. This may require daily shipment of samples with short holding
times. A chain-of-custody (COC) form will accompany each cooler. The temperature of all
coolers will be measured upon receipt at the laboratory. A temperature blank will be included in
each cooler for temperature measurement purposes.
2.4 Sample Documentation and Tracking
This section describes documentation required in the field notes and on the sample Chain-of-
Custody forms.
2.4.1 Field Notes
Documentation of observations and data acquired in the field will provide information on the
acquisition of samples and also provide a permanent record of field activities. The observations
and data will be recorded using pens with permanent waterproof ink in a permanently bound
weatherproof field log book containing consecutively numbered pages.
The information in the field book will include the following as a minimum. Additional
information is included in the specific SOPs regarding the field books.
·Project name
·Location of sample
·Sampler's printed name and signature
·Date and time of sample collection
·Sample identification code including QC and QA identification
·Description of samples (matrix sampled)
·Sample depth (if applicable)
SOP No. 3 Sample Classification, Packaging and Shipping
Page 4 of 5 January 2018
·Number and volume of samples
·Sampling methods or reference to the appropriate SOP
·Sample handling, including filtration and preservation, as appropriate for separate sample
aliquots
·Analytes of interest
·Field observations
·Results of any field measurements, such as depth to water, pH, temperature, and
conductivity
·Personnel present
·Level of PPE used during sampling.
Changes or deletions in the field book should be lined out with a single strike mark, initialed, and
remain legible. Sufficient information should be recorded to allow the sampling event to be
reconstructed without relying on the sampler's memory.
Each page in the field books will be signed by the person making the entry at the end of the day,
as well as on the bottom of each page. Anyone making entries in another person's field book will
sign and date those entries.
2.4.2 Sample Chain-of-Custody
During field sampling activities, traceability of the sample must be maintained from the time the
samples are collected until laboratory data are issued. Initial information concerning collection
of the samples will be recorded in the field log book as described above. Information on the
custody, transfer, handling, and shipping of samples will be recorded on a COC form. The COC
is a three-part carbonless form.
The sampler will be responsible for initiating and filling out the COC form. The COC will be
signed by the sampler when the sampler relinquishes the samples to anyone else. One COC form
will be completed for each cooler of samples collected daily. The COC will contain the
following information:
·Sampler's signature and company affiliation
·Project number
·Date and time of collection
·Sample identification number
SOP No. 3 Sample Classification, Packaging and Shipping
Page 5 of 5 January 2018
·Sample type
·Analyses requested
·Number of containers
·Signature of persons relinquishing custody, dates, and times
·Signature of persons accepting custody, dates, and times
·Method of shipment
·Shipping air bill number (if appropriate).
The person responsible for delivery of the samples to the laboratory will sign the COC form,
retain the last copy of the three-part COC form, document the method of shipment, and send the
original and the second copy of the COC form with the samples. Upon receipt at the laboratory,
the person receiving the samples will sign the COC form and return the second copy to the
Project Manager. Copies of the COC forms documenting custody changes and all custody
documentation will be received and kept in the central files. The original COC forms will
remain with the samples until final disposition of the samples by the laboratory. The analytical
laboratory will dispose of the samples in an appropriate manner 60 to 90 days after data
reporting. After sample disposal, a copy of the original COC will be sent to the Project Manager
by the analytical laboratory to be incorporated into the central files.
SOP No.4 IDW Handling
1 of 2 January 2018
1.Objective
This document defines the standard operating procedure for IDW handling. Other SOPs
providing additional related guidance are listed below:
·SOP No. 4 –Decontamination
·SOP No. 8 –Field Reporting and Documentation.
A variety of IDW related activities may require unearthing, moving, lifting,over packing, or
sampling drums. Such activities are inherently hazardous and will always require special health
and safety precautions. Drum handling presents numerous serious physical hazards including back
injury, crushing, bruising, laceration, and severe trauma from mishandling. Drum contents may
represent a fire or explosion hazard or may consist of shock-sensitive or pyrophoric materials.
Drum contents may be pressurized or be acutely toxic. Contents may be corrosive or irritating or
have other toxic effects. Drum handling may, therefore, represent both physical and chemical
hazards.
2.Equipment
Equipment used during field reporting and documentation:
·Bound field logbook;
·Waterproof pen and permanent marker;
·Paint pen (appropriate color to be seen on 55-gallon drum);
·Labels for IDW Container;
·Other related field paperwork, as needed;
·Disposable latex or nitrile gloves;
·Assorted tools (knife, screwdriver, crescent wrench, (15/16") socket and drive, non-
sparking bung wrench, etc.)
3.IDW Handling
A.Prior to work commencing, identify staging area for IDW containers.
B.If using 55-gallon drums at individual locations, be sure to stage drums neatly, out of
normal traffic patterns, and in such a manor as they can be easily moved for transport to a
central staging area or for removal from site.
C.Containers of IDW must be clearly marked with the following information:
·Date(s)of Accumulation;
·Project / Client identification;
SOP No.4 IDW Handling
2 of 2 January 2018
·Location (area of site,boring, well, SWMU,etc.)
·Type of materiel contained within (soil, water, PPE, etc.)
·Specific potential contamination streams (PCBs, Dioxins, etc.)–if applicable
D.Avoid filling IDW drums more than three-fourths full in order to facilitate transport to the
designated staging area or removal from the site.
E.IDW containers must be properly closed and labeled as stated above prior to leaving a
location. Record in a field logbook the number of IDW containers left at a location.
F.For characterization of soil from IDW containers refer to SOP 28 and 38. For
characterization of water from IDW containers refer to SOP 11. Following collection,
place all samples on ice inside a cooler immediately. Each sample should be identified
with the Sample ID, location, analysis number, preservatives, date and time of sampling
event, and sampler. The sample time and constituents to be analyzed for should be
recorded in the logbook and on the groundwater sampling form. Chain-of-custody
procedures should be started. Sample equipment should be decontaminated.
G.Spills or leaks may occur during drum movement and handling. Absorbent materials
(clay, oil-dry, etc.) should be readily available in sufficient quantity to absorb spilled or
leaked material. Where large spills could occur, a containment berm should be
constructed around the area. A special pad for drum handling (concrete, HDPE, etc.)
with containment berms may be required for certain types of work. Spill control should
be performed by appropriately trained personnel wearing adequate personal protective
equipment (PPE). A Spill Plan should be part of the Site Health and Safety Plan (HSP).
SOP No.5 Decontamination
Page 1 of 5 January 2018
1.Introduction and Types of Contamination
This document defines the standard procedure for decontamination. This SOP serves as a
supplement to the project Work Plan Addendum and is intended to be used together with several
other SOPs. Other related SOPs are listed below:
·SOP No. 8 -Field Reporting and Documentation
·SOP No. 10 -Groundwater Level Measurements
·SOP No. 11 -Groundwater Sampling
·SOP No. 20 –Monitoring Well Development and Purging
·SOP No. 21 -Monitoring Well Installation
·SOP No. 26 -Sample Control and Custody Procedures
·SOP No. 28 -Soil Sampling
·SOP No. 31 -Surface Water Sampling
·SOP No. 32 -Sediment Sampling.
Site and/or Sample Cross-Contamination
The overall objective of multimedia sampling programs is to obtain samples that accurately
depict the chemical, physical, and/or biological conditions at the sampling site. Extraneous
contaminants can be brought onto the sampling location and/or introduced into the medium of
interest during the sampling program (e.g. using sampling equipment that is not properly or fully
decontaminated). Trace quantities of contaminants can consequently be captured in a sample and
lead to false positive analytical results and, ultimately, to an incorrect assessment of the
contaminant conditions associated with the site. Decontamination of sampling equipment (e.g.,
all non-disposable equipment that will come in direct contact with samples) and field support
equipment (e.g., drill rigs, vehicles) is, therefore, required prior to, between, and after uses to
ensure that sampling cross-contamination is prevented, and that on-site contaminants are not
carried off-site.
2.Procedure
2.1 Equipment List
The following is a list of equipment that may be needed to perform decontamination:
·Brushes
SOP No.5 Decontamination
Page 2 of 5 January 2018
·Wash tubs
·Buckets
·Scrapers, flat bladed
·Hot water -high-pressure sprayer
·Sponges or paper towels
·Alconox detergent (or equivalent)
·Potable tap water
·Laboratory-grade deionized or distilled water
·Garden-type water sprayers.
2.2 Decontamination
2.2.1 Personnel
A temporary personnel decontamination line will be set up around each exclusion zone. If
contamination is not encountered, a dry decontamination station may be established which
consists of discarding of disposable personal protective equipment (PPE).
If real-time monitoring instruments indicate that contamination has been encountered (i.e. action
levels are exceeded requiring an upgrade from initial PPE levels), a complete personnel
decontamination station will be established.
The temporary decontamination line should provide space to wash and rinse boots, gloves, and
all sampling or measuring equipment prior to placing the equipment into a vehicle. A container
should be available to dispose of used disposable items such as gloves, tape, or tyvek (if used).
The decontamination procedure for field personnel will include:
1.Glove and boot wash in an Alconox solution
2.Glove and boot rinse
3.Duct tape removal
4.Outer glove removal
5.Coverall removal
SOP No.5 Decontamination
Page 3 of 5 January 2018
6.Respirator removal (if used)
7.Inner glove removal
2.2.2 Sampling Equipment
The following steps will be used to decontaminate sampling equipment:
·Personnel will dress in suitable safety equipment to reduce personal exposure as required
by the HASP.
·Gross contamination on equipment will be scraped off at the sampling or construction
site.
·Equipment that cannot be damaged by water will be placed in a wash tub containing
Alconox or low-sudsing nonphosphatic detergent along with potable water and scrubbed
with a bristle brush or similar utensil. Equipment will be rinsed with tap water in a
second wash tub followed by a deionized or distilled water rinse.
·Equipment that may be damaged by water will be carefully wiped clean using a sponge
and detergent water and rinsed with deionized or distilled water. Care will be taken to
prevent equipment damage.
·Rinse and detergent water will be replaced with new solutions between borings or sample
locations.
Following decontamination, equipment will be placed in a clean area or on clean plastic sheeting
to prevent contact with contaminated soil. If the equipment is not used immediately after
decontamination, the equipment will be covered or wrapped in plastic sheeting or heavy-duty
trash bags to minimize potential contact with contaminants.
2.2.3 Drilling and Heavy Equipment
Drilling rigs will be decontaminated at a decontamination station located near a central staging
area. The decontamination station may consist of a temporary or permanent structure capable of
collecting all decontamination fluids. Mobile decontamination trailers may be used to
decontaminate heavy equipment at each site. The following steps will be used to decontaminate
drilling and heavy equipment:
·Personnel will dress in suitable PPE to reduce personal exposure as required by the HSP.
·Equipment showing gross contamination or having caked-on drill cuttings will be scraped
with a flat-bladed scraper at the sampling or construction site.
SOP No.5 Decontamination
Page 4 of 5 January 2018
·Equipment that cannot be damaged by water, such as drill rigs, augers, drill bits, and
shovels, will be washed with a hot water, high-pressure sprayer then rinsed with potable
water. Care will be taken to adequately clean the insides of the hollow-stem augers and
backhoe buckets.
Following decontamination, drilling equipment will be placed on the clean drill rig and moved to
a clean area. If the equipment is not used immediately, it should be stored in a designated clean
area.
2.2.4 Equipment Leaving the Site
Vehicles used for activities in non-contaminated areas shall be cleaned on an as-needed basis, as
determined by the Site Safety Officer, using soap and water on the outside and vacuuming the
inside. On-site cleaning will be required for very dirty vehicles leaving the area. Construction
equipment such as trucks, drilling rigs, backhoes, trailers, etc., will be pressure washed before the
equipment is removed from the site to limit exposure of off-site personnel to potential
contaminants.
2.2.5 Wastewater
Liquid waste water from decontamination, well development and purging will be containerized
and left at the site where it originated, unless otherwise specified.
3.Documentation
Sampling personnel will be responsible for documenting the decontamination of sampling and
drilling equipment. The documentation will be recorded with waterproof ink in the sampler's
field notebook with consecutively numbered pages. The information entered in the field book
concerning decontamination should include the following:
·Decontamination personnel
·Date and start and end times
·Decontamination observations
·Weather conditions.
4.Quality Assurance Requirements
Equipment rinsate samples of the decontaminated sampling equipment may be taken to verify the
effectiveness of the decontamination procedures. The rinsate sampling procedure will include
rinsing deionized water through or over a decontaminated sampling tool (such as a split spoon)
SOP No.5 Decontamination
Page 5 of 5 January 2018
and collecting the rinsate water into the appropriate sample bottles. The rinsate sampling
procedure, including the sample number, will be recorded in the field notebook.
SOP No. 6 EnCoreÔ Sampling
Page 1 of 2 January 2018
1.Objective
Collection of soil samples for low level VOC analysis that will minimize the loss of
contaminants due to volatilization and biodegradation
2.Equipment
The following equipment is required for each sample point.
·Stainless steel T-Handle
·Two or three 5 g EnCoreÔ samplers (laboratory specific)
·One 125 mL jar or one 25 g EnCoreÔ sampler for screening and or/high level analysis,
and dry weight conversions (laboratory specific)
·Paper towels
·Indelible pen
·Clear Tape and Labels.
3.Sample Collection Procedure
The following general procedures are followed for collection of soil samples with the EnCoreÔ
sampler:
1.Remove sampler and cap from package and attach T-handle to sampler body
2.Inspect sampler piston to ensure it can be pushed up to accommodate soil core
3.Push the T-handle and sampler straight down into a freshly exposed surface of soil until
the sampler is full.
4.Slowly remove sampler and T-handle and inspect bottom of sampler. If sampler is not
full, repeat step 3;
5.Remove excess soil from the sampler rim lip
6.Place cap on sampler and push down evenly until the end cap clicks on the sampler
body;
7.Turn the sampler piston until it locks to prevent the sample core from being extruded.
8.Repeat procedures 1 through 7 for the other EnCoreÔ samplers.
SOP No. 6 EnCoreÔ Sampling
Page 2 of 2 January 2018
9.Place EnCoreÔ samplers in EnCoreÔ packages and attach sample label.
10.Secure label with clear tape and place in cooler, keep sample at 4°Celsius.
11.Collect additional soil and place in glass jar or 25 mg sampler to be used for dry weight
conversion.
SOP No.7 Utility Clearance Procedures
1 of 4 January 2018
This document defines the standard procedure for subsurface utility clearance. This procedure
provides descriptions of equipment and procedures necessary to properly clear utilities prior to
beginning subsurface field activities.
This document also defines the procedure for contacting the applicable “one-call” service for
locating underground utilities. One-call is a public service provided by individual states as a
single point of contact for requesting a utility locate from a majority of underground utilities.
This service is primarily for locating utilities on public properties and right-of ways.
1.Equipment
Equipment used during utility clearance procedures:
·Project map
·Known utility map
·Marking paint
·Stakes or flags
·Permanent marker
·Measuring tape and/or wheel
·Other related field paperwork, as needed.
2.Location marking
Prior to utility clearance,locations to be drilled or excavated should be marked by field
personnel scheduled to complete the work. Per one-call guidelines excavation areas should be
marked either a) with stakes or flags with the necessary radius to be cleared marked on the stake
or flag or b) with white marking paint (black paint may be substituted when necessary). When
using paint, the extent of the area to be cleared should be marked.
When marking locations, initial adjustments to locations should be made based on visible
utilities such as overhead power lines, sewers and other utility corridors. As a general rule drill
rig masts and excavating equipment must stay at least 10 feet away from overhead utilities.
Depending on the voltage of the overhead lines a greater distance may be necessary.
3.One-call
The purpose of the one-call system is to alert member utility companies to a planned drilling or
excavating project. The one-call system will inform the person making the utility call which
SOP No.7 Utility Clearance Procedures
2 of 4 January 2018
member companies will be notified. Additional contacts may be necessary if suspected utility
providers in the area of the proposed work are not members of the public one-call system.
Individual states have their own one-call number or the national one-call number, 811, may be
used.(e.g., Missouri: 1-800-DIG-RITE (344-7483), Illinois: 1-800-892-0123)Some states
require the subcontractor actually performing the drilling or excavating to make the initial call
(e.g., Illinois).
Once a one-call notification has been placed the utility companies have 48-hours to respond.
The time does not include weekends or observed holidays.Once a one-call has been placed work
should be ready to start within 10 working days.Once work has begun,renewal of utility locates
is determined by an individual state’s regulations.
A joint meet may also be requested if the area of the proposed work is large and/or complicated.
Member utilities must be given 48-hours prior to the joint meet to schedule a representative to
attend. Following the joint meet,an additional 48-hours must be allowed for the utility
companies to mark their utilities.
The following information should be provided when making a one-call:
·Identification of who is conducting the work as well as any subcontractor such as a
drilling or excavating firm.The contact information for the person responsible along with
a phone number where they can be easily reached is a minimum.
·Type of work being conducted (e.g. drilling or excavating).
·Location of work being conducted described as best as possible. Addresses in
conjunction with relation to buildings when possible should be used. Other forms of
locating include distances and directions from intersections.
·Whether or not a joint meet is required.
·The time frame expected for work to begin.
The following information should be recorded and kept available after the one-call has been
made:
·Ticket serial number
·Utilities one-call will notify
·Time and location of joint meet (if applicable)
·Time and date by which utilities are to be cleared
SOP No.7 Utility Clearance Procedures
3 of 4 January 2018
·Log of utilities which have been cleared, either from markings on ground at the location
or locator calling to confirm.
Industrial facilities often are responsible for utility locates on their own property and will not be
covered by a one-call. Field personnel should coordinate with their contact at such a facility in
order to check for known utilities under control or the facility and for any additional clearance
efforts which may be required.
When possible, identify the size of underground utilities being marked. The general rule is that
the accuracy of marking, from the center of the utility, is the width of the utility plus 1.5-feet.
Certain utility companies may require a greater distance from their lines.
The following are the colors from the uniform color code and marking guidelines:
·White (or Black)–Proposed excavations
·Pink –Temporary survey markings
·Red –Electric power lines, cables, conduit and lighting cables
·Yellow –Gas, oil,steam, petroleum or gaseous materials
·Orange –Communication, alarm or signal lines, cables or conduit
·Blue –Potable water
·Purple –Reclaimed water, irrigation and slurry lines
·Green –Sewers and drain lines
These colors shall be used by both the company requesting the utility locate and the member
companies marking underground utilities.
4.Secondary utility clearance
Secondary utility clearance involves using an air knife, a hand auger, a post-hole digger and/or a
shovel to check for utilities prior to beginning the excavation or boring.Some clients/sites
require secondary utility clearance as an additional precaution to minimize risk of encountering
either active or abandoned buried utilities.
Air Knife
Air Knife operations involve air/water jetting combined with a high suction vacuum to create a
boring or trench of specified dimensions.Single point borings need to have the hole cleared to
SOP No.7 Utility Clearance Procedures
4 of 4 January 2018
below the depth of known utilities in the area and to a diameter 3-inches greater than the
diameter of the tools penetrating the ground surface.As an alterative, a “V-trench”or a triangle
configuration of air-knife holes can also be used to clear a location.If the air-knife is to be
completed in a triangle formation, the air knife holes should be completed in sets of three in as
tight a triangle as the boring size will allow, with the center of the boring to be completed at the
center of the triangle.Whichever method is selected, the air knife boring(s) must be located so
that the absence of underground utilities can be confirmed.Once the location is confirmed as
being clear, the air knife hole(s)or trench should be backfilled with an inert material, such as
silica sand or flowable fill.
Hand Auger
Due to access, availability or cost, air knifing may not be an option.If this is the case, hand
augers may be used to clear a location.Due to the size of the hand auger bucket, multiple hand
auger holes may be necessary to clear a location for a single boring. If multiple hand augers are
necessary, the best option is to complete hand auger holes in sets of three in as tight a triangle as
the boring size will allow, with the center of the boring to be completed at the center of the
triangle. The same depth requirement for clearance applies to hand auger holes as it does for air
knifing.Once the location is confirmed as being clear, the hand auger hole(s) should be
backfilled with an inert material, such as silica sand or flowable fill.
Post-hole digger /Hand Shovel
As a last choice, conventional means such as a post-hole digger or hand shovel may be used to
clear a location. This option is generally best only when any known utilities are very shallow or
the surface material is extremely coarse (large gravels and rocks).Hand shovels and post-hole
diggers have a higher chance of damaging weaker utilities, so caution should be taken when
used. If deeper clearance than a foot or two is necessary, either an air knife or hand auger should
be used for utility clearance.Other procedures/protocols mentioned above still apply.
SOP No.8 HAND AUGER SAMPLING
Page 1 of 2 January 2018
1.Objective
This document defines the standard procedure for collection of soil and/or sediment samples with
a hand auger. This procedure gives descriptions of equipment and field procedures necessary to
collect soil and/or sediment samples. Other related SOPs are listed below:
·SOP No. 3 –Calibration and maintenance of Field Instruments
·SOP No. 4 –Decontamination -Equipment
·SOP No. 8 –Field Reporting and Documentation
·SOP No. 14 –Headspace Soil Screening
·SOP No. 25 –Sample Containers, Preservation,and Holding Times
·SOP No. 26 –Sample Control and Custody Procedures
·SOP No. 28 –Soil Sampling.
2.Equipment
The following equipment is typically used during hand auger sampling:
·Stainless steel hand auger
·Sampling assembly and extension poles
·Decontamination buckets and brushes
·Alconox
·Disposable latex / nitrile gloves
·Stainless steel bowls
·Stainless steel spoons
·Sampling containers
·Cooler and ice packs
·Chain of custody
·Custody Seal
·Field data sheets/bound field logbook
·Photo ionization detector (PID) if applicable
·First aid kit
SOP No.8 HAND AUGER SAMPLING
Page 2 of 2 January 2018
·Aluminum foil.
3.Soil Sample Collection Procedures
This section gives the step-by-step procedures for collecting soil samples in the field.
Observations made during soil sample collection should be recorded in a bound field logbook in
accordance with the procedures defined in SOP 8 on field reporting and documentation:
A.Prior to entering the field, decontaminate the auger in accordance with the procedures
defined in SOP 4. Clean augers will then be wrapped in aluminum foil or plastic sheeting
until use.
B.If applicable, prior to entering the field, calibrate air quality monitoring device, such as a
PID, in accordance with SOP 3.
C.Prepare sample containers in accordance with procedures defined in SOP 28.
D.Put on a pair of new latex or nitrile gloves.
E.Advance auger into soil using a rotating motion while applying pressure. After advancing
the auger into the soil to the desired depth, the auger is removed and a sample can be
obtained from the barrel. Note: the VOC samples will be collected with the Encore™
sampler directly from the boring, in accordance with SOP 6, at the target depth to reduce
loss of volatile compounds. Latex or nitrile gloves should be used to handle soil and
should be changed prior to collecting the sample. Other samples (Explosives, Metals,
etc.) may be composited in stainless steel bowls using stainless steel spoons prior to
placement in sample jars. Bowls and spoons will require decontamination prior to
sampling also. Samples will be collected in accordance with procedures outlined in SOP
28
F.After the sample is taken the auger should be decontaminated using Alconox soap and
deionized water, as defined in SOP 4, before collecting the next sample.
G.Place the sample containers on ice in a cooler to maintain the samples at approximately
4oC as described in SOP 25. Ship the cooler to the laboratory for analysis within 24
hours of sample collection in accordance with the procedures described in SOP 24.
H.Begin chain-of-custody procedures. A sample chain-of-custody form is included in SOP
26.
I.Field notes shall be kept in a bound field logbook in accordance with SOP 8.
SOP No.10 Soil Probe Operation
Page 1 of 2 January 2018
1.Objective
This document defines the standard operating procedure (SOP) and necessary equipment for
the sampling with the use a hydraulically advanced GeoProbeÒ (or similar) to obtain
representative subsurface soil samples for geologic logging and physical and chemical
laboratory testing.
SOPs providing additional related guidance are listed below:
·SOP No. 3 –Sample Classification, Packaging and Shipping
·SOP No. 4 –Field Reporting and Documentation
·SOP No.5 –Decontamination
·SOP No. 17 –Logging
·SOP No. 28 –Soil Sampling.
2.Equipment
The following equipment is typically required:
·Hydraulic percussion hammer Geoprobe®
·1 inch diameter by 3 foot length steel probe rods
·Barrel sampler -2 1/4 in diameter by 4 ft length
·Acetate liners
·Disposable sample retainers
·Photoionization detector (OVM, Hnu)
·Surveyor’s stakes
·Stainless steel pans, knives and resealable plastic bags
·Sample containers
·Decontamination equipment.
3.Procedure
The general procedure for using the Geoprobe®equipment for sampling is as follows.The
specific soil probe operation procedures may vary slightly based on individual drilling
contractors’ SOPs for soil probe operation:
A.Locate boring using facility drawings to check utilities
SOP No.10 Soil Probe Operation
Page 2 of 2 January 2018
B.Log boring location on site base map
C.Hydraulically push or drive 1 in. diameter probe rods with acetate sample liner
attached, or dual tube system with acetate liner to the first sample depth
D.Remove probe/inner rods and retrieve acetate liner. Visually log and classify the soil,
select specimen for physical and/or chemical testing. Record information on field data
sheets
E.Replace sampler acetate liner
F.Measure VOC concentrations with PID at top of probe hole prior to sampling the next
depth interval (if VOCs are a concern)
G.Insert acetate sample liner and attached rods in exiting probe hole and push or drive
sampler to the next sample depth, repeat sampling procedure
H.Repeat Geoprobe®sampling until the target depth is reached
I.Record total depth
J.Retrieve probe rods
K.Backfill probe hole with bentonite or similar as required by the work plan
L.Place survey stake at boring location
M.Record data collected on boring log and log book
N.Decontaminate equipment.
4.Decontamination
Refer to the HSP for personnel decontamination procedures; refer to SOP 5 for equipment
decontamination procedures.
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 1 of 21 January 2018
1.Objective
This document defines the standard procedure for logging of soil and rock samples both for
environmental and geotechnical characterization purposes. This procedure provides descriptions
of equipment and field procedures necessary to log soil and rock samples. Other related SOPs
are listed below:
·SOP No.2 –Field Reporting and Documentation.
·SOP No.12 –Soil Sampling.
2.Equipment
The following equipment is typically used during soil and rock sample logging:
·USCS Chart
·Boring logs
·Tape measure
·Tore Vain
·Pocket Penetrometer
·Field data sheets/bound field logbook
·Waterproof ink.
3.Sample Descriptions
This section provides an approach for describing (logging) soil samples in the field. General
observations made before, during, and after field activities should be recorded in a bound field
logbook in accordance with the procedures defined in SOP No. 8 on field reporting and
documentation:
Soil
The soil’s description should include as a minimum:
·Apparent consistency (for fine-grained soils) or density (for coarse-grained soil) adjective
·Water content condition adjective
·Color description
·Minor soil type name with “y” added (if ³30 percent)
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 2 of 21 January 2018
·Descriptive adjective for main soil type
-Particle-size distribution adjective for gravel and sand
-Plasticity adjective and soil texture (silty or clayey) for inorganic and organic silts or
clays
·Main soil type’s name (all capital letters)
·Descriptive adjective, some or trace, for minor soil type if £30 percent
·Minor soil type(s)
·Inclusions
·The Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) Group Name and Symbol appropriate for
the soil type in accordance with ASTM D 2487, with few exceptions, and (symbol in
parenthesis)
·Geologic name, if known (in parenthesis or in notes column).
The various elements of the soil’s description should be stated in the order listed above.
Examples:
Fine-grained soils Soft, wet, gray, high plasticity CLAY, trace f. sand –Fat CLAY
(CH); (Alluvium)
Coarse-grained soils Dense, moist, brown, silty m-f SAND, trace f. gravel to c. sand –
Silty SAND (SM);(Alluvium)
When changes occur within the same soil layer, such as change in apparent density, then this is
indicated by means of a bent arrow, point downward ( ) and a description of the change. Note
that only those aspects of the soil description that are different from the description of the
overlying soil are mentioned. Note also that the depth at which some characteristic is no longer
present must be noted.
Apparent Consistency and Density
Consistency and density descriptive terms are related to blow count resistance using a 2-inch
OD, 24-inch long split barrel sampler and standard penetration tests (a 140-pound hammer
dropped 30-inches) (ASTM D 1586-84). Use the values and descriptions in the table presented
below to determine the consistency and density.
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 3 of 21 January 2018
Consistency & Density
Cohesive Clays (clays & silts)
Non-cohesive Granular Soils
(sands & gravels)
0-2 Very soft 0-4 Very loose
3-4 Soft 4-10 Loose
5-8 Medium stiff 11-30 Medium dense
9-15 Stiff 31-50 Dense
16-30 Very stiff >50 Very dense
>30 Hard
A blow count of >50 for a 12-inch interval constitutes spoon refusal and the sample should be
terminated at that time.
The strength of the soil can be determined without blow counts using the following guide:
H Hard Soil –Brittle or tough,may be broken in the hand with difficulty. Can be
peeled with a pocketknife.
VST Very Stiff –Soil can barely be imprinted by pressure from the fingers or indented
by thumbnail.
ST Stiff –Soil can be imprinted with considerable pressure from fingers or indented by
thumbnail.
M Medium Stiff –Soil can be imprinted easily with fingers; remolded by strong finger
pressure.
So Soft –Soil can be pinched in two between the thumb and forefinger; remolded by
light finger pressure.
Vso Very Soft –Soil exudes between fingers when squeezed; specimen (height = 2 x
diameter) sags under its own weight.
Water Content
The amount of water present in the soil sample or its water content adjective should be described
as dry, moist, or wet as follows:
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 4 of 21 January 2018
Descriptors for Water Content (moisture)
Description Condition
Dry No sign of water and soil is dry to the touch
Moist Signs of water and soil is relatively dry to the touch
Wet Signs of water and the soil definitely wet to the touch;
granular soil exhibits some free water when densified
The descriptor “damp” should not be used (use “moist”). The descriptor “saturated” should not
be used (use “wet”).
Color
The colors should be assigned consistent with a Munsell Color Chart and should be described
when the sample is first retrieved at the soil’s as-sampled water content (the color will change
with water content). A Munsell Color Chart is provided as Appendix A. When the soil is
marked with spots of color, the term mottled can be applied with the following descriptors:
Descriptors for Mottling
Abundance Size Contract
f: few (<2%)fine (<5 mm)faint
c: common (2%-20%)medium (5-15 mm)distinct
m: many (>20%)coarse (>15 mm)prominent
Soils with a homogeneous texture but having color patterns, which change and are not
considered mottled, can be described as streaked.
Soil Types
The constituent parts of a given soil type are defined on the basis of texture in accordance with
particle-size designators separating the soil into coarse-grained, fine-grained, and highly organic
designations.
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 5 of 21 January 2018
Coarse-grained (gravel and sand)
Soils with more than 50% of the particles larger than No. 200 sieve (0.074 mm). The soil
components are described on the basis of particle size as follows:
Grade Limits and Grade Standards
Grade Names
Name Grain Size
Sand
fine #200 to #40 sieve
medium #40 to #10 sieve
coarse #10 to #4 sieve
Gravel
fine #4 sieve to ¾-inch
coarse ¾-inch to 3-inches
Cobbles 3-inches to 12-inches
Boulders >12-inches
The particle-size distribution is identified as well graded or poorly graded. Well-graded coarse-
grained soil contains a good representation of all particle sizes from largest to smallest, with £12
percent fines. Poorly graded coarse-grained soil is uniformly graded with most particles about
the same size or lacking one or more intermediate sizes, with £12 percent fines. A table of USC
symbols and names for coarse-grained soils is presented below.
USCS Symbols and Names for Coarse-grained Soils
USCS Symbol Typical Names
GW Well graded gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, little or no fines
GP Poorly graded gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, little or no fines
GM Silty gravels, gravel-sand-silt mixtures
GC Clayey gravels, gravel-sand-clay mixtures
SW Well graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 6 of 21 January 2018
USCS Symbols and Names for Coarse-grained Soils
USCS Symbol Typical Names
SP Poorly graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines
SM Silty sand, sand-silt mixtures
SC Clayey sands, sand-clay mixtures
The following field identification tests can be used to estimate the grain size distribution of
coarse-grained soils:
Feel and Smear Tests –A pinch of soil is handled lightly between the thumb and fingers to
obtain an impression of the grittiness or of the softness of the constituent particles. Thereafter, a
pinch of soil is smeared with considerable pressure between the thumb and forefinger to
determine the degrees of roughness and grittiness, or the softness and smoothness of the soil.
Coarse-to medium-grained sand:Typically exhibits a very harsh and gritty feel and
smear.
Coarse-to fine-grained sand:Has a less harsh feel, but exhibits a very gritty
smear.
Medium-to fine-grained sand:Exhibits a less gritty feel and smear which
becomes softer and less gritty with an increase in
the fine sand fraction.
Fine-grained sand:Exhibits a relatively soft feel and a much less
gritty smear than the coarser sand components.
Silt:Components less than about 10 percent of the total
weight can be identified by a slight discoloration
of the fingers after smear of a moist sample.
Increasing silt increases discoloration and softens
the smear.
Sedimentation Test –A small sample of soil is shaken in a test tube filled with water and allowed
to settle. The time required for the particles to fall to a distance of 4 inches is about ½ minute for
particle sizes coarser than silt. About 50 minutes would be required for particles of 0.005 mm or
smaller (often defined as “clay size”) to settle out.
Visual Characteristics –Sand and gravel particles can be readily identified visually, however, silt
particles are generally indistinguishable to the eye. With an increasing silt component,
individual sand grains become obscured, and when silt exceeds about 12 percent, it masks almost
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 7 of 21 January 2018
entirely the sand component from visual separation. Note that gray fine-grained sand visually
appears siltier than the actual silt content.
Fine-grained (clay and silt)
Soils with more than 50% of the particles finer than the No. 200 sieve (0.074 mm) and the fines
are silts and clays.
A table of USC symbols and names for fine-grained soils is presented here.
USCS Symbols and Names for Fine-grained Soils
USCS Symbol Typical Names
ML Inorganic silts and very fine sands, rock flour, silty, or clayey fine
sands, or clayey silts with slight plasticity
CL Inorganic clays of low to medium plasticity, gravelly clays,sandy
clays, silty clays, lean clays
OL Organic silts and organic silty clays of low plasticity
MH Inorganic silts, micaceous or diatomaceous fine sandy or silty soils,
elastic silts
CH Inorganic clays or high plasticity (residual clays), fat clays
OH Organic clays of medium to high plasticity, organic silts
Pt Peat and other highly organic soils
The following field identification tests can be used to estimate the degree of plasticity and size
distribution of fine-grained soils:
Shaking (Dilatency) Test:Water is dropped or sprayed on a part of basically fine-grained soil
mixed and held in the palm of the hand until it shows a wet surface appearance when shaken or
bounced lightly in the hand or a sticky nature when touched. The test involves lightly squeezing
the soil pat between the thumb and forefinger and releasing it alternatively to observe its reaction
and the speed of the response. Soils which are predominantly silty (nonplastic to low plasticity)
will show a dull dry surface upon squeezing and a glassy wet surface immediately upon releasing
of the pressure. With increasing fineness (plasticity) and the related decreasing dilatency, this
phenomenon becomes less and less pronounced.
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 8 of 21 January 2018
Dry Strength Test:A portion of the sample is allowed to dry out and a fragment of the dried soil
is pressed between the fingers. Fragments which cannot be crumbled or broken are characteristic
of clays with high plasticity. Fragments which can be disintegrated with gentle finger pressure
are characteristic of silty materials of low plasticity. Thus, materials with great dry strength are
clays of high plasticity and those with little dry strength are predominantly silts.
Thread Test:Moisture is added or worked out of a small ball (approximately 1 ½-inch diameter)
and the ball kneaded until its consistency approaches medium stiff to stiff, it breaks, or crumbles.
A thread is then rolled out to the smallest diameter possible before disintegration. The smaller
the thread achieved, the higher the plasticity of the soil. Fine-grained soils of high plasticity will
have threads smaller than 1/32 inch in diameter. Soils with low plasticity will have threads
larger than 1/8 inch in diameter.
Smear Test:A fragment of soil smeared between the thumb and forefinger or drawn across the
thumbnail will, by the smoothness and sheen of the smear surface, indicate the plasticity of the
soil. A soil of low plasticity will exhibit a rough textured, dull smear while a soil of high
plasticity will exhibit a slick, waxy smear surface.
The following table presents the terms used to denote the various degrees of plasticity of soil that
passes the No. 200 sieve.
Degrees of Plasticity
Descriptive Term Degree of Plasticity Plasticity Index Range
SILT none non-plastic
Clayey SILT slight 1-5
SILT & CLAY low 5-10
CLAY & SILT medium 10-20
Silty CLAY high 20-40
CLAY very high over 40
Highly-organic
Soils primarily consisting of organic matter. Identification markers are:
1.Dark and black and sometimes dark brown colors, although not all dark colored soils are
organic.
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 9 of 21 January 2018
2.Moist organic soils will oxidize when exposed to air and change from a gray/black color
to a lighter brown, i.e. The exposed surface is brownish, but when the sample is pulled
apart the freshly exposed surface is dark gray/black.
3.Fresh organic soils usually have a characteristic odor which can be recognized,
particularly when the soil is heated.
4.Compared to non-organic soils, less effort is typically required to pull the material apart
and a friable break is usually formed with a fine granular or silty texture and appearance.
5.Their workability at the plastic limit is weaker and spongier than an equivalent non-
organic soil.
6.The smear, although generally smooth, is usually duller and appears siltier.
A table of soil descriptors is presented below.
Soil Descriptors
Calcareous:Containing appreciable quantities of calcium carbonate
Fissured:Containing shrinkage cracks, often filled with fine sand or silt, usually
more less vertical
Interbedded:Containing alternating layers of different soil types
Intermixed:Containing appreciable, random, and disoriented quantities of varying
color, texture, or constituency
Laminated:Containing thin layers of varying color, texture, or constituency
Layer:Thickness greater than 3 inches
Mottled:Containing appreciable random speckles or pockets of varying color,
texture, or constituency
Parting:Paper thin
Poorly graded
(well sorted):
Primarily one grain size, or having a range of sizes with some
intermediate size missing
Slickensided:Having inclined planes of weakness that are slick and glossy in
appearance and often result in lower unconfined compression
cohesion
Split graded:Containing two predominant grain sizes with intermediate sizes
missing
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 10 of 21 January 2018
Soil Descriptors
Varved:Sanded or layered with silt or very fine sand (cyclic sedimentary
couplet)
Well graded
(poorly sorted):
Containing wide range of grain sizes and substantial amounts of all
intermediate particle sizes
Modifiers:Predominant type -50% to 100%
Modifying type -12% to 50%
With -5% to 12%
Trace -1% to 5%
Minor Soil Types
In many soils two or more soil types are present in the soil. When the percentage of the minor
soil type is ³30% and < 50% of the total sample, the minor soil type is given prior to the major
soil type and is indicated by adding a “y” to its name; i.e. silty CLAY.
When the minor soil type percentage is between 1 and 29% of the total sample, the minor soil
type is given after the major soil type is given along with an adjective term:
1.Trace –When the soil type’s percentage is between 1 and 12% of the total sample.
2.Some –When the soil type’s percentage is between 13 and 29% of the total sample.
Inclusions
Additional inclusions or characteristics of the sample can be described by using “with” and the
descriptions described above. Examples are given below:
1.With petroleum odor
2.With organic matter
3.With shell fragments
4.With mica.
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 11 of 21 January 2018
Layered Soils
Soils of different types can be found in repeating layers of various thicknesses. It is important
that all such formations and their thicknesses are noted. Each layer is described as if it is a
nonlayered soil using the sequence for soil descriptions discussed above. The thickness and
shape of layers and the geological type of layering are noted using the following descriptive
terms:
Type of Layer Thickness Occurrence
Parting < 1/16 inch
Seam 1/16 inch to 0.5 inches
Layer 0.5 inches to 12 inches
Stratum > 12 inches
Pocket Small erratic deposit
Lens Lenticular deposit
Varved (also layered)Alternating seams or layers
of silt and/or clay and
sometimes fine sand
Occasional One or less per foot of
thickness of laboratory
sample inspected
Frequent More than one per foot of
thickness of laboratory
sample inspected
Place the thickness designation before the type of layer, or at the end of each description and in
parentheses, whichever is appropriate.
An example of a description of layered soils is:
Medium stiff, moist to wet ¼”–¾” interbedded seams and layers of: gray, medium plastic,
silty CLAY (CL); and lt.gray, low plasticity SILT (ML); (Alluvium).
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 12 of 21 January 2018
Geologic Name
The soil description should include the Field Representative’s assessment of the origin of the soil
unit and the geologic name, if known, placed in parentheses at the end of the soil description or
in the field notes column of the boring log.
A copy of the boring log to be used is included as Appendix B.
Rock
The rock’s description should include as a minimum:
·Rock type
·Color
·Grain size and shape
·Texture (stratification/foliation)
·Mineral composition
·Weathering and alteration
·Strength
·Other relevant notes.
The various elements of the rock’s description should be stated in the order listed above.
Example:
Limestone, light gray, very fine-grained, thin-bedded, unweathered, strong
The rock description should include identification of discontinuities and fractures. The
description should include a drawing of the naturally occurring fractures and mechanical breaks.
Rock Type
Rocks are classified according to origin into three major divisions: igneous, sedimentary, and
metamorphic. These three groups are subdivided into types according to mineral and chemical
composition, texture, and internal structure. Engineering classifications of rocks can be based on
ASTM Method C 294.
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 13 of 21 January 2018
Division Class Type
Igneous Coarse-grained
(Intrusive)
Granite
Syenite
Diorite
Gabbro
Peridotite
Pegmatite
Fine-grained
(Extrusive)
Volcanic Glass
Delsite
Basalt
Sedimentary
Sedimentary (con’t.)
Calcareous Limestone
Dolomite
Siliceous Conglomerate
Sandstone
Quartizite
Claystone
Siltstone
Argillite
Shale
Chert
Metamorphic Foliated Slate
Phyllite
Schist
Amphibolite
Hornfers
Unfixes
Nonfoliated Marble
Metaquartzite
Serpentinite
Color
Colors should be assigned consistent with a Munsell Color Chart and recorded for both wet and
dry conditions as appropriate. A Munsell Color Chart is provided as Appendix A.
Grain Size and Shape
The grain size description should be classified using the following terms:
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 14 of 21 January 2018
Very Coarse-Grained:Diameter greater than 0.187 inches (4.76 mm).
Coarse-Grained:Diameter 0.187 inches to 0.0787 inches (4.76 mm to
2.00 mm). Individual grains can be easily distinguished
by the naked eye.
Medium-Grained:Diameter 0.0787 inches to 0.0165 inches (2.00 mm to
0.420 mm). Individual grains can be distinguished with
the naked eye.
Fine-Grained:Diameter 0.0165 inches to 0.0029 inches (0.420 mm to
0.074 mm). Individual grains can be distinguished by
the naked eye with difficulty.
Very Fine-grained:Diameter less than 0.0029 inches (0.074 mm).
Individual grains cannot be distinguished by the naked
eye.
The grain shape description should be classified using the following terms:
Angular:Showing very little evidence of wear. Grain edges and
corners are sharp. Secondary corners are numerous and
sharp.
Subangular:Showing definite effects of wear. Grain edges and
corners are slightly rounded off. Secondary corners are
slightly less numerous and slightly less sharp than in
angular grains.
Subrounded:Showing considerable wear. Grain edges and corners
are rounded to smooth curves. Secondary corners are
reduced greatly in number and highly rounded.
Rounded:Showing extreme wear. Grain edges and corners are
smoother off to broad curves. Secondary corners are
few in number and rounded.
Well-Rounded:Completely worn. Grain edges or corners are not
present. No secondary edges or corners are present.
Texture (stratification/foliation)
Significant nonfracture structural features should be described. The thickness should be
described using the following terms:
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 15 of 21 January 2018
Type of Layer Thickness
English Metric
Thinly laminated 0.1 inches 2.5 millimeters
Laminated 0.1 to 0.5 inches 2.5 to 10 millimeters
Very thinly bedded 0.5 to 2.0 inches 1 to 5 centimeters
Thinly bedded 2.0 inches to 2 feet 5 to 50 centimeters
Thickly bedded 2 to 3 feet 0.5 to 1 meters
Very thickly bedded 3 feet 1 meter
The orientation of the bedding/foliation should be measured from the horizontal with a
protractor.
Mineral Composition
A geologist based on experience and the use of appropriate references should identify the
mineral composition. The most abundant mineral should be listed first, followed by minerals in
decreasing order of abundance. For some common rock types, mineral composition need not be
specified (i.e. dolomite, limestone).
Weathering and Alteration
Weathering as defined here is due to physical disintegration of the minerals in the rock by
atmospheric processes while alteration is defined here as due to geothermal processes. Terms
and abbreviations used to describe weathering or alteration are:
RS Residual Soil –The original minerals of the rock have been entirely weathered to
secondary minerals, and the original rock fabric is not apparent. The material can be
easily broken.
C Completely Altered or Weathered –The original minerals of the rock have been almost
entirely changed to secondary minerals, even though the original fabric may be intact.
The material can be easily broken.
H Highly Altered or Weathered –The rock is weakened to such an extent that a sample
with a 2-inch minimum diameter can be broken readily by hand across the rock fabric.
More than half the rock material is decomposed or altered. Fresh rock is present in a
discontinuous framework or as corestones.
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 16 of 21 January 2018
M Moderately Altered or Weathered –rock is discolored and noticeably weakened, but
sample with a 2-inch minimum diameter cannot usually be broken by hand, across the
rock fabric. Less than half of the rock material is decomposed or altered. Fresh or
discolored rock is present either as a continuous framework or as corestones.
S Slightly Altered or Weathered –Rock is slightly discolored, but not noticeably lower in
strength than fresh rock.
F Fresh –Rock shows no discoloration, no loss of strength, or any other effect of
weathering.
Strength
A common qualitative assessment of strength can be used while logging of rock core during
drilling. Terms and abbreviations used to describe weathering or alteration are:
ES Extremely Strong –Specimen can only be chipped with geological hammer.
VS Very Strong –Specimen requires many blows of geologic hammer to fracture it.
S Strong –Specimen requires more than one blow of geological hammer to fracture it.
MS Medium Strong –Cannot be scraped or peeled with a pocketknife. Specimen can be
fractured with a single firm blow of geological hammer.
W Weak –material crumbles under firm blows with the sharp end of a geological hammer.
Can be peeled by a pocketknife with difficulty.
VW Very Weak Rock –Brittle or tough, may be broken in the hand with difficulty. Can be
peeled with a pocketknife.
Descriptors and abbreviations used to describe rock hardness are:
S Soft -Reserved for plastic material alone.
F Friable -Easily crumbled by hand, pulverized or reduced to powder and is too
soft to be cut with a pocketknife.
LH Low Hardness -Can be gouged deeply or carved with a pocketknife.
MH Moderately Hard -Can be readily scratched by a knife blade; scratch leaves
heavy trace of dust and scratch is readily visible after the powder has been
blown away.
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 17 of 21 January 2018
H Hard -Can be scratched with difficulty; scratch produces little powder and is
often faintly visible; traces of the knife steel may be visible.
VH Very Hard -Cannot be scratched with pocketknife. Leaves knife steel marks
on surface.
Rock Discontinuity
Discontinuity is the general term for any mechanical discontinuity in a rock mass having zero or
low tensile strength. It is the collective term for most types of joints, weak bedding planes, weak
schistocity planes, weakness zones, and faults. The following symbols are recommended for the
type of rock mass discontinuities.
F Fault
J Joint
Sh Shear
Fo Foliation
V Vein
B Bedding
The spacing of discontinuities is the perpendicular distance between adjacent discontinuities.
The spacing should be measured in feet to the nearest tenth, perpendicular to the planes in the
set.
EC Extremely close spacing <0.07 ft
VC Very close spacing 0.07 –0.2 ft
C Close spacing 0.2 –0.66 ft
M Moderate spacing 0.7 –2 ft
W Wide spacing >2 –6.6 ft
EW Extremely wide spacing >6.6 ft
The discontinuities should be described as closed, open, or filled. Aperture is used to describe
the perpendicular distance separating the adjacent rock walls of an open discontinuity in which
the intervening space is air or water filled. Width is used to described the distance separating the
adjacent rock walls of filled discontinuities. The following terms should be used to describe
apertures:
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 18 of 21 January 2018
Aperture Description
<0.1 mm
0.1 –0.25 mm
0.2 0.25 –0.5 mm
Very tight
Tight
Partly open
“Closed Features”
0.5 –2.5 mm
2.5 –10 mm
>10 mm
Open
Moderately open
Wide
“Gapped Features”
1 10 cm
1 10 –100 cm
>1 m
Very wide
Extremely wide
Cavernous
“Open Features”
The following terms are recommended to describe the width of discontinuities such as thickness
of veins,fault gouge filling, or joints openings.
W Wide 0.5 –2.0 inches
MW Moderately wide 0.1 –0.5 inches
N Narrow 0.05 –0.1 inches
VN Very narrow <0.05
T Tight 0
For the thickness of faults or shears that are not thick enough to be represented on the boring log
and are greater than 2-inches thick, record the measured thickness numerically in feet to the
nearest tenth of a foot.
The following terms should be used to describe the planarity of discontinuities:
Wa Wavy
Pl Planar
St Stepped
Amplitude =A
Wavelength =γ
Measured in feet.
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 19 of 21 January 2018
The following terms should be used to describe the surface roughness of discontinuities:
VR Very Rough –Near right-angle steps and ridges occur on the discontinuity
surface.
R Rough –Some ridges and side-angle steps are evident;asperities are clearly
visible; and discontinuity surface feels very abrasive.
Sr Slightly Rough –Asperities on the discontinuity surfaces are distinguishable
and can be felt.
S Smooth –Surface appears smooth and feels so to the touch.
Slk Slickensides –Visual evidence of striations or a smooth glassy appearing
finish.
Filling is the term for material separating the adjacent rock walls of discontinuities. The
perpendicular distance between the adjacent rock walls is termed the width of the filled
discontinuity. The type of discontinuity infilling should be described using the following terms:
C Clay Fe Iron Oxide
Sd Sand g Gypsum/Talc
H Healed q Quartz
Ch Chlorite N None
Ca Calcite O Other (describe)
The amount of infilling in discontinuities should be described using the following terms:
St Surface stain
Sp Spotty
P Partially filled half surface or opening is filled
F Filled
N None.
Fracture Description
The location of each naturally occurring fracture and mechanical break is shown in the fracture
column of the rock core log. The naturally occurring fractures are numbered and described using
the terminology described above for discontinuities.
The naturally occurring fracture and mechanical breaks are sketched in the drawing column.
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 20 of 21 January 2018
Dip angles of fractures should be measured using a protractor and marked on the log. For
nonvertical borings, the angle should be measured and marked as if the boring was vertical. If
the rock is broken into many pieces less than ½ inch to 1-inch long, the log may be crosshatched
in that interval or the fracture may be shown schematically.
The number of naturally occurring fractures observed in each foot of core should be recorded in
the fracture frequency column. Mechanical breaks, thought to have occurred due to drilling, are
not counted. The following criteria can be used to identify natural breaks:
1.A rough brittle surface with fresh cleavage planes in individual rock minerals indicates an
artificial fracture.
2.A generally smooth or somewhat weathered surface with soft coating or infilling
materials, such as talc, gypsum, chlorite, mica, or calcite obviously indicates a natural
discontinuity.
3.In rocks showing foliation, cleavage or bedding it may be difficult to distinguish between
natural discontinuities and artificial fractures when these are parallel with the incipient
weakness planes. If drilling has been carried out carefully then the questionable breaks
should be counted as natural features, to be on the conservative side.
4.Depending upon the drilling equipment, part of the length of core being drilled may
occasionally rotate with the inner barrels in such a way that grinding of the surfaces of
discontinuities and fractures occurs. In weak rock types it may be very difficult to decide
if the resulting rounded surfaces represent natural or artificial features. When in doubt,
the conservative assumption should be made; i.e., assume that they are natural.
5.It may be useful to keep a separate record of the frequency of artificial fractures (and
associated lower RQD) for assessing the possible influence of blasting on the weaker
sedimentary and foliated or schistose metamorphic rocks.
The results of core logging (frequency and RQD) can be strongly time dependent and moisture
content dependent in the case of certain varieties of shales and mudstones having relatively
weakly developed digenetic bonds. A not infrequent problem is “discing,” in which an initially
intact core separates into discs on incipient planes, the process becoming noticeable perhaps
within minutes of core recovery. The phenomena are experienced in several different forms:
1.Stress relief cracking (and swelling) by the initially rapid release of strain energy in cores
recovered from areas of high stress, especially in the case of shaley rock.
SOP No.11 Logging
Page 21 of 21 January 2018
2.Dehydration cracking experienced in the weaker mudstones and shales which may reduce
RQD from 100 to 0 percent in a matter of minutes, the initial integrity possibly being due
to negative pore pressure.
3.Slaking cracking experienced by some of the weaker mudstones and shales when
subjected to wetting.
All these phenomena make core logging of frequency and RQD unreliable. Whenever such
conditions are anticipated, an engineering geologist should log core as it is recovered and at
subsequent intervals until the phenomenon is predictable. An added advantage is that the
engineering geologist can perform mechanical index tests, such as the point load or Schmidt
hammer test, while the core is still in a saturated state.
5.Drilling information:
·Drill rig manufacturer, model, and driller (if applicable)
·Geologist or geotechnical engineer
·Project name, sample point identification, and location
·Date samples obtained (and times if required)
·Type of sampler (e.g., split spoon, Shelby, California), measurements or method of
advancing boring or equipment, method of driving sampler, and weight of hammer
·Drill fluids (if applicable)
·Ground surface or grade elevation (if known)
·Depth penetrated and blow counts/6-inch interval of penetration for ASTM 1586-84 and
sample number (if applicable)
·Closed hole intervals and advancement (if applicable)
·Recovery
·Strata changes and changes within samples
·Sampling tool behavior
·Drill string behavior
·Use(s) of borehole
·Disposition(s) of residual soil or cuttings
·Signature or sampling of log (as required).
SOP No.12 Headspace Soil Screening
Page 1 of 1 January 2018
1.Objective
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) field headspace screenings will be performed on selected
soil samples to obtain preliminary estimates of VOC concentrations. This qualitative data will be
used as criteria in selecting soil samples from locations where collection depths have not been
predetermined.
2.Equipment
The following equipment is required.
·Quart-sized Zip-Loc bag or equivalent
·Photoionization detector (PID)
·Permanent Marker
·Watch.
3.Procedure
The following general procedure is followed:
1.Obtain approximately 1/2 qt of soil and place in clean 1 qt Zip-Loc bag. Immediately seal
the Zip-Loc bag. Record the boring location and sample depth on the bag.
2.Break soil into about 1 in. sized particles by squeezing the bag, taking care not to
compromise the seal.
3.Place sample in a shaded location where it can be left undisturbed for a minimum of 5
minutes. If the temperature is less than 35o F place the sample bag in a heated vehicle or
building.
4.Measure ambient air background VOC concentrations.
5.After at least 5 minutes has elapsed, obtain PID reading from bag headspace by opening a
space in the bag seal just large enough to allow the PID probe to enter unobstructed.
Continue monitoring until PID readings drop to background concentrations.
6.Record highest PID reading measured.
7.Archive or dispose of soil per site field sampling plan.
SOP No.13 Soil Sampling
1 of 3 January 2018
1.Objective
This document defines the standard procedure for collection of soil samples for environmental
characterization purposes. This procedure provides descriptions of equipment and field
procedures necessary to collect soil samples. Other related SOPs are listed below:
·SOP No.2 –Field Reporting and Documentation
·SOP No.3 –Sample Classification, Packaging and Shipping
·SOP No.5 -Decontamination
·SOP No.12 –Head Space Soil Screening
2.Equipment
The following equipment is typically used to collect soil samples:
·Hand Auger (if required to collect sample)
·Latex/Nitrile gloves
·Organic Vapor meter (e.g. PID, OVA)
·Surveyor's stakes
·Portable field table
·Stainless steel pans and knives
·Stainless steel spoon or scoop
·Stainless steel bowl
·Sample containers
·Decontamination equipment
·Plastic Sheeting
SOP No.13 Soil Sampling
2 of 3 January 2018
·Field data sheets/bound field logbook
·Health & Safety equipment
·Cooler with ice.
3.Soil Sample Collection Procedures
This section provides step-by-step procedures for collecting soil samples in the field.
Observations made during soil sample collection should be recorded in a bound field logbook in
accordance with the procedures defined in SOP No. 8 on field reporting and documentation:
A.Remove appropriate sample containers from the transport container, and prepare the
sample containers for receiving samples.
B.Fill out a self-adhesive label with the appropriate information and affix it to the
appropriate sample container. Place clear polyethylene tape over the completed label to
protect it from dirt and water (unless a tare weight has been recorded by the lab on the
container). Sample labels can be prepared prior to sample collection except for time and
date. Labels can be filled in on the date and time of sample collection just prior to
collecting the sample. Sample containers will be kept cool with their caps on until they
are ready to receive samples.
C.Place labeled sample containers near the sampling location.
D.Place clean plastic sheeting on the ground surface at the sampling area as needed.
E.Put on a pair of new nitrile or latex gloves.
F.Decontaminate the sampling equipment as described in detail in SOP No.4 prior to
beginning sampling activities.
G.Advance the sampler (direct push sampler, hand auger, split-spoon, etc.) to the desired
sample depth and retrieve the sample.
H.VOC samples cannot be composited without losing volatiles. Therefore, collect a
discrete VOC sample prior to compositing the remaining soil (if doing so). Collect the
VOC sample with an EnCoreÔ or Terra Core sampler, or by placing it directly into an
appropriate sample container. If the sample is transferred to a jar, the entire jar must be
filled without any voids and the top surface of the soil should be smeared to prevent
VOCs from escaping when opening the jar. After collecting the sample at the desired
location within the sample interval, place the remainder of the sample into a stainless
steel bowl/Ziploc bag, break up large chunks and mix the soil. Fill the remaining sample
containers from the steel bowl.
SOP No.13 Soil Sampling
3 of 3 January 2018
I.Place the sample containers on ice in a cooler to maintain the samples at approximately
4oC as described in SOP No.25. Ship the cooler to the laboratory for analysis within 24
hours of sample collection in accordance with the procedures described in SOP No.24.
J.Begin chain-of-custody procedures. A sample chain-of-custody form is included in SOP
No.26.
K.Decontaminate the sample equipment as described in detail in SOP No.4.
L.Field notes shall be kept in a bound field logbook.
4.Possible Soil Sample Collection Methods
A.Geoprobe (micro or macro samplers)
B.Split Spoon sampler using a conventional drill rig
C.Hand Auger
D.Surface Sampling with a stainless steel spoon or scoop.
SOP No. 14 Groundwater Sampling
Page 1 of 7 January 2018
1.Objective
This document defines the standard procedure for collection of groundwater samples. This
procedure gives descriptions of equipment and field procedures necessary to collect groundwater
samples. Other related SOPs are listed below:
·SOP No. 3 -Sample Classification, Packaging and Shipping
·SOP No.4 –Field Reporting and Documentation
·SOP No. 5 –Decontamination
2.Equipment
Equipment used during well purging and sampling may include:
·Well keys
·Water level probe with 0.01-foot increments
·Oil-water interface probe
·Assorted tools (knife, screwdriver, etc.)
·Disposable Teflon™ bailers with VOC sampling tip
·Submersible pump
·Nylon rope
·Temperature meter
·pH meter (with automatic temperature compensation)
·Conductivity meter
·Calibration fluids
·Plastic squeeze or spray bottle filled with distilled water
·Polyethylene or glass container (for field parameter measurements)
·Paper towels or Kimwipes
·Calculator
·Field notebook
·Waterproof and permanent marker
SOP No. 14 Groundwater Sampling
Page 2 of 7 January 2018
·Plastic buckets
·55-gallon drums or truck-mounted tank for holding purged water
·Plastic sheeting (for placing around well)
·Appropriate health and safety equipment
·Well completion information sheet
·Appropriate decontamination equipment
·Cooler with ice
·Field Sampling Data Sheet
·Sample jars and labels. Sample bottles with preservatives added will be obtained from
the analytical laboratory. Several extra sample bottles will be obtained in case of
breakage or other problems.
3.Sampling Procedures
This section provides the step-by-step procedures for collecting groundwater samples in the field.
Observations made during groundwater sample collection should be recorded in the field
notebook in accordance with procedures described in SOP 8 on field reporting and
documentation and on the groundwater sampling data sheet provided as Attachment 1 of this
SOP.
A.Before any purging or sampling begins, all well probes, bailers, and other sampling devices
shall be decontaminated. If dedicated equipment is used, it should be rinsed with distilled
water. Mobile decontamination supplies will be provided so that equipment can be
decontaminated in the field.
B.Electronic equipment used during sampling includes a pH meter with automatic
temperature compensation, a temperature meter, a conductivity meter, and a water level
measurement probe. Before going into the field, the sampler shall verify that these
instruments are operating properly. The pH, temperature, and conductivity meters require
calibration prior to use everyday. Calibration times and readings will be recorded in a
notebook to be kept by the field sampler. Specific instructions for calibrating the
instruments are given in the instrument manuals.
C.Before well purging begins, the following procedures will be performed at each well:
SOP No. 14 Groundwater Sampling
Page 3 of 7 January 2018
·The condition of the outer well casing, concrete well pad, protective posts (if present),
and any unusual conditions of the area around the well will be noted in the field
logbook.
·Clean plastic sheeting will be placed around the well.
·The well will be opened.
·Appropriate readings will be taken in the breathing zone with a flame ionization
detector (FID) or photoionization detector (PID) according to the Health and Safety
Plan. The reading will be recorded in the field logbook
·The condition of the inner well cap and casing will be noted.
D.Groundwater elevations will be measured to the nearest 1/100 foot at each monitoring
well using an electronic water level indicator. The groundwater elevations, screened
intervals, and total monitoring well depth will be recorded on the water level gauging
form provided as Attachment 2 of this SOP. A detailed description of monitoring well
gauging activities is provided in SOP 10.
E.The presence of nonaqueous-phase liquids (NAPL), dense or light, will be determined
using an oil-water interface probe or a clear bailer.If a NAPL is identified, its thickness
will be measured. The presence of light or dense NAPLs will preclude sampling of the
groundwater itself.
F.Following measurement of the static water levels, the monitoring wells will be purged of
at least three well volumes using dedicated disposable bailers or submersible pump. The
well purge volume is calculated with the following equation:
(--------------------------)x -------------------2 x -------------------x 0.0408 =-----------------------gallons
TD (feet)WL (feet)D (inches)# Vols Calculated Purge Volume
G.Purging will continue until pH, temperature, and conductivity have stabilized. These
measurements will be taken after evacuation of each well volume to determine whether
the water chemistry has stabilized. Generally, pH values within +0.1 pH unit,
temperature within +0.5°C, and conductivity within +10 ms/cm between consecutive
readings indicate adequate stability of the water chemistry. If the chemistry is not stable,
purging will continue, measuring pH, temperature, and conductivity after each one-half
SOP No. 14 Groundwater Sampling
Page 4 of 7 January 2018
well volume. A detailed description of monitoring well purging activities is provided in
SOP 37.
H.If the well is bailed or pumped dry during evacuation, it can and will be assumed that the
purpose of removing 3 well volumes of water has been accomplished, that is, removing
all stagnant water which had prolonged contact with the well casing or air. If recovery is
very slow, samples may be obtained as soon as sufficient water is available.
I.When evacuating a well using a hand pump, the pump intake should be placed according
to the recovery rate of the well:
·For low recovery wells (wells that can be pumped dry), the pump intake will be
placed at the bottom of the screened interval.
·For high recovery wells (little drawdown with pumping) the pump will be placed at
the top of the screened interval.
J.Samples for chemical analysis will be collected using a disposable polyethylene bailer
within 24 hours after purging is completed. For quickly recovering wells, a sample may
be collected immediately after purging is completed.
The following sampling procedure is to be used when using disposable bailers:
1.Decontaminated sampling equipment will be assembled. New nylon rope will be used for
each well for each sampling event.
2.Identification labels for sample bottles will be filled out for each well.
3.The polyethylene bailer will be lowered slowly and gently into contact with the water in
the well.
4.The polyethylene bailer will be retrieved smoothly and the water will be slowly drained
into the sample containers through the bailer's bottom discharge control device. If
collecting a sample for VOC analysis, a VOC discharger should be used and VOC sample
vials should be completely filled so the water forms a convex meniscus at the top, then
capped so that no air space exists in the vial. Turn the vial over and tap it to check for
bubbles in the vial which indicate air space. If air bubbles are observed in the sample
vial, discard the sample vial and repeat the procedure until no air bubbles appear.
5.The individual sample bottles should be filled in the order given below:
6.Volatile organic compounds (VOCs)
SOP No. 14 Groundwater Sampling
Page 5 of 7 January 2018
7.Semivolatiles organic compounds, pesticides and PCBs, and herbicides
8.Petroleum hydrocarbons
9.Total metals
10.Explosives
11.Fill bottles for metals and general minerals almost full.
12.Time of sampling will be recorded in the field book and on the groundwater sampling
data sheet.
13.The well cap will be replaced and locked.
14.Field documentation will be completed, including the chain-of-custody.
K.Place the sample containers on ice in a cooler to maintain the samples at approximately 4oC
as described in SOP 25. Ship the cooler to the laboratory for analysis within 48 hours of
sample collection in accordance with the procedures described in SOP 24.
L.Begin chain-of-custody procedures.A sample chain-of-custody form is included in SOP 26.
M.Decontaminate the sample equipment as summarized below and described in detail in
SOP 4.
N.A field sampling data sheet for groundwater samples (Attachment 1) will be completed at
each sampling location.The data sheet will be completely filled in. If items on the sheet
do not apply to a specific location, the item will be labeled as not applicable (NA). The
information on the data sheet includes the following:
·Well number
·Date and time of sampling
·Person performing sampling
·Volume of water purged before sampling
·Depth of sample
·pH, temperature, conductivity and other groundwater quality parameters (such as
turbidity and dissolved oxygen) during evacuation
·Number of samples collected
SOP No. 14 Groundwater Sampling
Page 6 of 7 January 2018
·Sample identification number
·Preservation of samples
·Record of any QC samples from site
·Headspace analysis (if taken)
·Any irregularities or problems which may have a bearing on sampling quality
·General observations obtained during purging/sampling activities.
O.Field notes shall be kept in a bound field book. The following information will be
recorded using waterproof ink:
·Names of personnel
·Weather conditions
·Location and well number
·Date and time of sampling
·Condition of the well
·Decontamination information
·Initial static water level and total well depth
·Depth of sample
·Calculations (e.g., calculation of purged volume)
·Analyses that will be performed by the laboratory
·Equipment calibration information
·Headspace analysis (if taken).
P.The well sampling order will be dependent on expected levels of contamination in each
well, if known, and will be determined prior to sampling. Sampling will progress from
the least contaminated to the most contaminated well. Quality assurance/quality control
(QA/QC) samples will be collected during groundwater sampling.
4.Decontamination
Small equipment will be cleaned using the following equipment procedures:
SOP No. 14 Groundwater Sampling
Page 7 of 7 January 2018
A.Rinse with nonpotable water to remove the gross contamination
B.Scrub with brush using Alconox soap (or equivalent) and distilled water solution; and
C.Rinse with distilled water.
For removal of heavily-oiled residues, a methanol wash may optionally be included prior to the
final distilled water rinse. This rinsate will be collected. Decontaminated equipment will be stored
on clean polyethylene sheeting or placed in plastic bags between uses.
URS Corporation GROUNDWATER SAMPLING FORM
Well No. _______________________________________________
Well Type:oMonitor oExtraction oOther________________
Job Name ____________________________Well Material:oPVC oSt. Steel oOther __________________
Job Number ____________________________Date _____________________ Time______________________
Recorded by ____________________________Sampled by _____________________________________________
WELL PURGING
PURGE VOLUME PURGE METHOD
Casing Diameter (D in inches):oBailer -Type:________________________________________
o2-inch o4-inch o6-inch oOther__________________oSubmersible oCentrifugal oBladder; Pump No:____________
Total Depth of Well (TD in feet BTOC):______________oOther Type: ________________________________________
Water Level Depth (WL in feet BTOC): _______________PUMP INTAKE SETTING
Number of Well Volumes to be Purged (# Vols)oNear Bottom oNear Top oOther _______________
o 3 o 4 o 5 o 10 o Other _______________________Depth in feet (BTOC): __________ Screen Interval in Feet (BTOC)
from _________ to _________
PURGE VOLUME CALCULATION:
(--------------------------) x -------------------2 x -------------------x 0.0408 =-----------------------------gallonsTD (feet)WL (feet)D (inches)# Vols Calculated Purge Volume
PURGE TIME PURGE RATE
________ Start _______ Stop ________ Elapsed Initial _______ gpm Final ________ gpm
FIELD PARAMETER MEASUREMENT
Gallons Purged pH Cond.
(umhos/em)
Temp
ooC
oo F
Other:_____Gallons Purged pH Cond.
(umhos/em)
Temp
ooC
oo F
Other:_____
Meter Nos.
Observations During Purging (Well Condition, Turbidity, Color, Odor):_______________________________________________
Discharge Water Disposal:oSanitary Sewer oStorm Sewer oDrummed & retained on-site oOther __________________
SAMPLING METHOD WELL SAMPLING
o Bailer -Type: ________________________________oComposite
oSubmersible oCentrifugal oBladder; Pump No:____oGrab -Type: ___________________________________
oOther oOther -Type: __________________________________
SAMPLING DISTRIBUTION Sample Series: ____________
Sample No.Volume/Cont.Analysis Requested Preservatives Lab Comments
QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLES
Duplicate Samples Blank Samples Other Samples
Type Sample No.Type Sample No.Type Sample No.
GROUNDWATER SAMPLING DATA SHEET
PROJECT NAME:PROJECT NUMBER:
DATE:
WEATHER:
FIELD PERSONNEL:
MONITORING WELL ID:
INITIAL DATA
Well Diameter:in.Gallons/Lin.Ft1:Ambient PID/FID Reading:ppm
Total Depth of Well:ft Vol. Of Water Column:gallons Wellbore PID/FID Reading:ppm
Depth to Water:ft Volume Of Water Introduced From Drilling:gallons LNAPL / DNAPL ft
Height of Water Column:ft Min. Purge Volume:gallons (volumes)Depth to Top of Screen:ft
1 0.163 gallons/ft for 2 inch well, 0.653 gallons/ft for 4-inch well
PURGE DATA
Purge Method:
Purge Volume
(gals)Time
Depth to
Water (ft)Color Odor pH
Temp
(°C)
Cond.
(ms/cm)
Turbidity
(NTUs)
DO
(mg/l)
ORP
(mv)
Start Time:Purge Stop Time:Elapsed Time:Total Volume Purged:gallonsAverage Purge Rate (gallons/min):Well Volumes Purged:Water Quality Meter ID:Calibrated on:
SAMPLING DATA
Sampling Method:
Sample Date:Sample Time:Analysis:
COMMENTS:
Water Level Record
Project Number:Date:
Client:Measured By:
Location:
Well No.Time Elevation of
top of casing
Depth to
Water
Water
Elevation
Depth to
Bottom Comments

June 2018

This page intentionally left blank.

June 2018

This page intentionally left blank.

June 2018

Appendix F

Laboratory Accreditation
Certificate

June 2018

This page intentionally left blank.

June 2018

This page intentionally left blank

June 2018

This page intentionally left blank
June 2018
Appendix G
Email Correspondence with
NCDEQ

June 2018

This page intentionally left blank
ROY COOPER
Governor

MICHAEL S. REGAN
Secretary

MICHAEL SCOTT
Director
State of North Carolina | Environmental Quality | Waste Management
217 West Jones Street | 1646 Mail Service Center | Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1646
919 707 8200

May 17, 2018
Mr. Greg Wills Project Manager, NGB/A4OR
Shepperd Hall
3501 Fetchet Avenue
Joint Base Andrews, MD 20762-5157 RE: Draft Final Work Plan for the Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection
145th Airlift Wing, North Carolina Air National Guard Base, DODNC0002
Charlotte Douglas International Airport
Charlotte, North Carolina Dear Mr. Wills:

The North Carolina Division of Waste Management Superfund Section has reviewed the Draft Final Work
Plan for the Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection for Charlotte Air National Guard dated April 2, 2018. The Sections comments on the report are attached.
If you have any questions please contact me at 919-707-8328 or at [e-mail].

Sincerely,
Kirsten Hiortdahl, PE
Environmental Engineer
Division of Waste Management
North Carolina Department of Environmental Quality

Cc: Ms. Megan Donahue, AECOM
Mr. Brett Schaefer, AECOM
Mr. Aaron Etnyre, BB&E
Major Samuel Ingram, Charlotte Air National Guard
RE: Draft Final Work Plan for the Preliminary Assessment and Site Inspection 145th Airlift Wing, North Carolina Air National Guard Base, DODNC0002
May 17, 2018

Report Comments:
Page iii
The report states “NCDENR”, please change to NC DEQ – North Carolina Department of Environmental
Quality
1.8 Data Management
Paragraph 2 states that samples will be sent to Eurofins Laboratory, the rest of the document states that
samples will be sent to “GCAL”. Please also define the acronym “GCAL” in the report.
6.2.2 Recommendation
Per UST Guidance Closure Guidelines, risk based closure for the over excavation can be performed (post
excavation soil contamination assessment per section 7.1D). Two (2) soil samples at 10ftbgs need to be
taken in the former OWS pit for EPA 8260B, EPA 8270D, MADEP VPH and MADEP EPH (Assessment
and Corrective action for UST Releases). If these samples do not exceed the “soil to ground water ratio
values” (protection of groundwater) an NFA can be issued without a deed restriction.
At this stage a groundwater sample is not required. A groundwater sample in the former tank pit can be
taken in anticipation of a soil exceedance; analyze for EPA 602, EPA 625, MADEP EPH and MADEP
VPH.
Worksheet #2 QAPP, 7
North Carolina Department of Environmental Quality is abbreviated as “VDEQ”